1985_Mitsubishi_Microprocessors_And_Peripheral_Circuits 1985 Mitsubishi Microprocessors And Peripheral Circuits
User Manual: 1985_Mitsubishi_Microprocessors_And_Peripheral_Circuits
Open the PDF directly: View PDF
.
Page Count: 344
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
MITSUBISHI
~
0
0
MICROPROCESSORS AND
PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI
SEMICONDUCTORS
MICROPROCESSORS AND
PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
o
~
J7
CD
o
o
A
. • MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
All values shown in this catalogue are subject to change for product improvement.
The information, diagrams and all other data included herein
are believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation for their use, nor
for any infringements of patents or other rights belonging to third
parties which may result from their use.
GUIDANCE
NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
D
D
D
CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
II
MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
APPLICATION
0
MITSUBISHI LSls
CONTENTS
DGUIDANCE
Page
Index by Function ................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Ordering Information ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
Package Outlines .................................................................................................................................... 1-7
Letter Symbols for the Dynamic Parameters ............................................................................................... 1-13
Symbology ............................................................................................................ ·································1-16
Quality Assurance and Reliability Testing ................................................................................................... 1-19
Precautions In Handling MOS ICs ............................................................................................................. 1-21
EJ
EJ
D
EJ
MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8085AP
8-Bit Parallel Microprocessor .............................................................. ···············2-3
M5L8212P
8-Bit Input/Output Port with 3-State Output ......................................................... 2-17
M5L8216P/M5L8226P
4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus Drivers ...................................................... ··········2-21
MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8282P/M5L8283P
Octal Latch ............................................................ ·········································3-3
M5L8284AP
Clock Generator and Driver for 8086/8088/8089 Processors .................................. 3-7
M5L8286P/M5L8287P
Octal Bus Transceiver ...................................................... ································3-16
M5L8288S
M5L8289P
Bus Controller for 8086/8088/8089 Processors ..................................................... 3-20
Bus Arbiter for 8086/8088/8089 Processors ......................................................... 3-28
NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M5L8155P
2048-Bit Static RAM with I/O Ports and Timer ...................................................... 4-3
M5L8156P
2048-Bit Static RAM with I/O Ports and Timer ...................................................... 4-11
M5L8251AP-5
Programmable Communication Interface ...................................................... ·······4-19
M5L8253P-5
Programmable Interval Timer ...................................................... ·······················4-36
M5L8255AP-5
Programmable Peripheral Interface .................................................................... 4-44
M5L8257P-5
M5L8259AP
Programmable DMA Controller .......................................................................... 4-62
M5L8279P-5
Programmable Keyboard/Display Interface ......................................................... 4-86
Programmable Interrupt Controller ...................................................... ················4-72
CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M58990P, -1
8-Bit 8-Channel A-D Converter ...................................................... ····················5-3
M5M82C37AP, -4, -5
CMOS Programmable DMA Controller ................................................................ 5-14
M5M82C37AFP, -4, -5
CMOS Programmable DMA Controller ...................................................... ··········5-35
M5M82C51AP
CMOS Programmable Communication Interface ................................................... 5-44
M5M82C51AFP
CMOS Programmable Communication Interface ................................................... 5-60
M5M82C54P, -6
CMOS Programmable Interval Timer ...................................................... ············5-61
M5M82C54FP, -6
CMOS Programmable Interval Timer .................................................................. 5-72
M5M82C55AP-5
CMOS Programmable Peripheral Interface .......................................................... 5-73
M5M82C55AFP-5
CMOS Programmable Peripheral Interface .......................................... ················5-86
M5M82C59AP
CMOS Programmable Interrupt Controller ........................................................... 5-87
M5M82C59AFP
CMOS Programmable Interrupt Controller .................................... ·······················5-101
CMOS CRT Controller ...................................................................................... 5-102
M58992P
m
APPLICATION
Notice for CMOS Peripherals ............................................................................................................ ·······6-3
M5W1791-02P
Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller ...................................................... ·················6-10
M5W1793-02P
Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller ....................................................................... 6-40
Contact Addresses for Further Information
•
MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
GUIDANCE
D
MITSUBISHI LSls
INDEX BY FUNCTION
Electrical characteristics
Supply
Type
Structure
Circuit function and organization
voltage
(V)
Typ
Max.
Min.
pwr access cycle
dissipation time
(mW) (ns)
Max.
fre-
Package
quency
(ns) (MHz)
time
Interchangeable
products
Page
.MELPS 85 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8085AP
M5L8212P
M5L8216P
M5L8226P
8-Bit Parallel Microprocessor
8-Bit Input/Output Port with
3-State Output
4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus
Driver (Non Inverting)
4-Bit Parallel Bidirectional Bus
Driver (Inverting)
N,Si,ED
5±5%
600
-
-
3
40P4
i8085A
2-3
B,LS
5±5%
450
30*
-
-
24P4
i8212
2-17
B,LS
5±5%
475
30*
-
-
16P4
i8216
2-21
B,LS
5±5%
425
25*
-
-
16P4
i8226
2-21
.MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
M5L8282P
Octal Latch (Non Inverting)
B,LS
5±10%
250
5±10%
250
-
3-3
B,LS
-
i8282
Octal Latch (Inverting)
-
20P4
M5L8283P
20P4
i8283
3-3
-
18P4
i8284
3-7
-
20P4
i8286
3-16
M5L8284AP
Clock Generator and Driver for
8086/8088/8089 Processors
B,LS
5±10%
490
-
-
5±10%
400
-
-
M5L8286P
Octal Bus Transceiver
(Non Inverting)
B,LS
M5L8287P
Octal Bus Transceiver (Inverting)
B,LS
5±10%
400
-
-
-
20P4
i8287
3-16
B,LS
5±10%
500
-
-
-
20S1
i8288
3-20
B,LS
5±10%
350
-
-
-
20P4
i8289
3-28
N,Si,ED
5±5%
500
-
-
-
40P4
i8155
4-3
N,Si,ED
5±5%
500
-
-
-
40P4
i8156
4-11
N,Si,ED
5±5%
M5L8288S
M5L8289P
Bus Controller for
8086/8088/8089 Processors
Bus Arbiter for
8086/8088/8089 Processors
.NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
M5L8155P
M5L8156P
2048-Bit Static RAM with 1/0
Ports and Timer (CE="L" active)
2048-Bit Static RAM with 1/0
Ports and Timer (CE="H" active)
Programmable Communication
300
-
-
3
28P4
i8251A
4-19
M5L8253P-5
Programmable Interval Timer
N,Si,ED 5±10%
300
-
-
2
24P4
i8253-5
4-36
M5L8255AP-5
Programmable Peripheral Interface
N,Si,ED
250
-
-
-
40P4
i8255A-5
4-44
M5L8257P-5
Programmable DMA Controller
N,Si,ED
300
275
-
-
40P4
i8257-5
4-62
-
-
3
-
28P4
i8259A
4-72
650
-
-
3
40P4
i8279-5
4-86
M5L8251AP-5
M5L8259AP
M5L8279P-5
Interface
5±5%
5±5%
Programmable Interrupt Controller N,Si,ED 5±10%
Programmable Keyboard/Display
Interface
B = Bipolar.
C= CMOS.
N = N-channel.
Si
=
N,Si,ED 5±10%
ED = Enhancement depletion mode.
Silicon gate.
*Indicates propagation time.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
1-3
a
MITSUBISHI LSls
INDEX BY FUNCTION
I
Electrical characteristics
Type
Circuit function and organization
Structure
Supply
voltage
(V)
I
Typ
Max.
Min.
Max.
Package \ Interchangeable
frepwr access cycle
products
dissipatioll time
time quency
(mW) (ns)
(ns) (MHz)
Page
i
.CMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
MS8990P
MS8990P-1
M5M82C37AP
M5M82C37AP-4
M5M82C37AP-5
M5M82C37AFP
M5M82C37AFP-4
M5M82C37AFP-5
MSM82C51AP
M5M82C51AFP
MSM82C54P-6
M5M82C54P
M5M82C54FP-6
MSM82C54FP
..
..
..
..
..
·
..
..·
..·
CMOS Programmable
M5M82C5SAFP-5 •
M5M82C59AFP
M58992P
·
..
..
C,Si
Controller
..
·
C,Si
CMOS Programmable DMA
CMOS Programmable DMA
M5M82C55AP-5
M5M82C59AP
8-Bit 8-Channel A-D Converter
C,Si
Controller
Communication Interface
CMOS Programmable
Communication Interface
CMOS Programmable Interval
Timer
CMOS Programmable Interval
Timer
CMOS Programmable Peripheral
Interface
CMOS Programmable Peripheral
Interface
CMOS Programmable Interrupt
Controller
CMOS Programmable Interrupt
Controller
CMOS CRT Controller
5±5%
5±10%
5±10%
I -
-
-
-
-
-
-
3
4
-
-
5
-
-
-
3
-
-
-
4
-
-
-
5
-
, -
•
Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller
Floppy Disk Formatter/Controller
: New product.
• • : Under development.
= CMOS.
B = Bipolar.
C
N = N-channel.
LS = LSTTL
1-4
40P4
-
5-14
40P2R
-
5-35
-
-
-
3
28P4
-
5-44
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
3
28P2W
-
5-60
-
5±10%
-
-
C,Si
6
-
-
24P4
-
8
5-61
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
24P2W
-
8
5-72
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
-
40P4
-
5-73
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
-
40P2R
-
5-86
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
-
28P4
-
5-87
C,Si
5±10%
-
-
-
-
28P2W
-
5-101
5±10%
-
-
-
-
64P4B
-
5-102
ED = Enhancement depletion mode.
Si
5-3
5±10%
.APPLICATION
M5W1793-02P
ADC0808
C,Si
C,Si
M5W1791-02P
28P4
= Silicon gate.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6
MITSUBISHI LSls
ORDERING INFORMATION
FUNCTION CODE
Mitsubishi integrated circuits may be ordered using the following simplified alphanumeric type-codes which define the function of the ICs and the package style.
For Mitsubishi Original Products
Example: M
T
5
-89r -
-
90
-
P - 1
M
: Mitsubishi integrated circuit prefix
Temperature range
5 : Standard industrial/commercial (0 to 70175"C or -20 to 85"C)
9 : High reliability
Series designation using 1 or 2 alphanumeric characters.
: CMOS
1
: Linear circuit
3
: TTL
10~19 : Linear circuit
32~33 : TTL (equivalent to Texas Instruments' SN74 series)
41~47 : TTL
01~09
81
: P-channel aluminum-gate MOS
84
85
86
: CMOS
: P-channel silicon-gate MOS
: P-channel aluminum-gate MOS
87
: N-channel silicon-gate MOS
88
89
: P-channel aluminum-gate ED-MOS
: CMOS
9
: DTL
SO~S2 : Schottky TTL (equivalent to Texas Instruments' SN74S series)
Circuit function identification code using 2 digits.
~
t-- Package style
K : Glass-sealed ceramic
P : Molded plastic
5 : Metal-sealed ceramic
SP : Molded plastic (Dill
FP : Molded plastic (FLAT)
'--
Electrical characteristic identification code using 1 or 2 digits.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
1-5
a
MITSUBISHI LSls
ORDERING INFORMATION
For Second Source Products
Example: M
T
5
T
L
-
8251
-r-
A
P - 5
r
M
I
: Mitsubishi integrated circuit prefix
Temperature range
5 : Standard industrial/commercial (0 to 70/75'C or -20 to 85'C)
9 : High reliability
Series designation of original source using 1 or 2 alphabetical characters.
C : Motorola's MC series
G : General Instrument's series
K : Mostek's MK series
L : Intel's series
T : Texas Instruments' TMS series
W : Western Digital's series
M : Mitsubishi electric
Circuit function identification code of the original source type name
Consists of a single letter which indicates the difference of outer appearance
or some part of the device specifications as listed below.
(1) For linear circuits, this is one letter of the alphabet, chosen in alphabetical
order but not including I or 0, which is used to flag devices for which parts
of the specifications differ.
(2) For devices with identical specifications having only pin bending direction
differences, an R is assigned to this group.
(3) When this group designation is not required, the next group is shifted to
the lef! to follow the group (4) immediately.
L--
I-- Package style
K
P
S
SP
Glass-sealed ceramic
Molded plastic
Metal-sealed ceramic
Molded plastiC (OIL)
FP : Molded plastic (FLAT)
~
:
:
:
:
Electrical characteristic identification code using 1 or 2 digits.
PACKAGE CODE
Package style may be specified by using the following simplified alphanumeric code.
Example: 40
P 2
R .
L---+-+----11----" Number of pins
L--+_+-_ Package structure
K
P
S
: Glass-sealed ceramic
: Molded plastiC
: Metal-sealed ceramic
Package outline
1 : OIL without fin
2 : Flat without fin
4 : OIL without fin (improved)
48 : Shrink OIL without fin
Outline supplement symbol
1-6
, •. 'MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
PACKAGE OUTLINES
TYPE 16P4 16-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL
a
Dimension in mm
0.27":~:~~
2.S4±0.2S
O.S±O.l
7.6-10
1.5~g:~
Dimension in mm
TYPE 18P4 18-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL
7 62± 0 3
f ,____
4.SMAX
J
\
i ~,--_-../J
3MIN
O.S±O.l
7.6-10
2.S4±0.2S
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
1-7
MITSUBISHI LSls
PACKAGE OUTLINES
TYPE 20S1
20-PIN METAL-SEALED CERAMIC OIL
Dimension in mm
24.9MAX
.11.O.46±O.05
2. 54±O. 15
Dimension in mm
TYPE 20P4 20-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC 01 L
I
24:t:n
I
~::::::: :0]]
7 62±0 3
{
4.5MAX
3 MIN
,
,
i\
O.27:t:g· ~~
O.5±O.1
2 .54± 0 .25
1-8
7.6 -10
• . MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
\
Ji
MITSUBISHI LSls
PACKAGE OUTLINES
..
Dimension in mm
TYPE 24P4 24-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC OIL
15.24tO.3
I~
027:':~~S
2.54 to. 25
15.2-17
-t-----+--
TYPE 24P2W
Dimension in mm
24-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT
o
o
1.27±O.2
o
+1.,.
J
I"O.4±O.1
lS±O.2
o
+1
O.S±O.2
"''"o
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
.
~16~
~t1 t1 nH H t1 n n n t1 n d
00
t'
11. 93±O. 3
"'
1-9
MITSUBISHI LSls
PACKAGE OUTLINES
Dimension in mm
TYPE 28P4 28·PIN MOLDED PLASTIC OIL
I'
36.7~g:~
I
~ ~: :::::::::~~]
15,24+0,3
~
~~
"
0.5MIN
ll,54±~5
~l
\
TYPE 28P2W
o
5,5MAX
i
0,27
~gg~
2.8MIN
O.5±0.1
1.2+ 0 ,3
·-0.1
_~
15,2-17
Dimension in mm
28-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT
o
8. 4±O. 2
~IIEO,4±0.1
c;;
+1
N
!'-co
00
00
+1
co
11. 93±O. 3
1-10
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
PACKAGE OUTLINES
TYPE 40P4
Dimension in mm
40-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC DIL
15.24±0.3
~ .. '"" ,.. ""
~5j
\
S.SMAX
2.54±O.2S
~g~
Dimension in mm
40-PIN MOLDED PLASTIC FLAT
o
o
"I 1<: O. 8 ± O. 1 5
En.n.n.DJ.UIlWWUL~1 J
__.
~gris
15.2-17
0.S±0.1
12
TYPE 40P2R
0.25
17.5i-O.2
_~
+1
+1
'"
r COII:ITlrl ddclrpss stroiJp
th (CAS·RAS)
th (CAS·W)
th(CAS·WR)
Write hold tlille alli:r colurlln address str()bE'
th (D)
th (DA)
Data-In hold time
th(D·PR)
th(DA·PRO)
Program hold time afler data-In
th (E)
th(CE)
Chip enable hold tinw
th (E·D)
th(CE·OA)
Dato-In hold time after chir enablf'
th (E·G)
th(CE·OE)
Output enable hold tllne alter chip e"able'
th (R)
th (RD)
Rr.ad hold time
th(RAS·CA)
Column address hold t,me af ter row dddrr~ss strohe
t h (RAS·CAS)
Column address strob" holritllTlp alter
th (RAS·D)
th(RAS·W)
th (RAS.DA)
Itl
·WR)
<--Iddress \trolJf'
Data-Ill hold ,irne after row ilrJdress s1rrllw
Write hold trrne after row address strobe
Chip select hold time
th (S)
th(es)
th (W)
th (WR)
Wrl1e hold time
th(W·CAS)
th (WR·CAS)
Colurnn address strobe hold time alter wrl\('
th (W·O)
th (WR·OA)
Data-In hold time after write
th (W·RAS)
th(WR·RAS)
Row Cjrlrirpss hold tllTle ;'lftf'r wrltp.
tpHL
High-level to low-level propagation time
tpLH
Low-level to high-level propagation time
}
the time interval between
output IS gOing to the low
of stated type
reference
level and
on the
the device is
and on the output pulses when the
and loaded by tYPICal devices
Rise time
tr
trec(w)
twr
Write recovery time-the time interval between the termination of a write pulse and the initiation of a new cycle
tree (PD)
tR(PD)
Power-down recovery lime
Setup time-the time Interval between the application of a signal which is maintained at a specrifed input terminal and a consecutive active
tsu
tarnsition at another specified input terminal
tSU(A)
tSU(AD)
Address setup tirne
tsu (A-E)
tsu (AD-CE)
Chip enable setup lime before address
tSU(A-W)
tSU(AD-WR)
Wrltesetuptirnebeloreaddress
Row address strobe setup time before column address
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
1-17
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
SYMBOLOGY
New symbol
Para meter -def init i on
Former symbol
tsu (DA)
Data-in setup time
tsu (D-E)
tsu (DA-GE)
Chip enable setup time before data-in
tsu (D-W)
tsu (DA-WR)
Write setup time before data-in
tsu (E)
tsu (CE)
Chip enable setup time
tSU(E-P)
tsu (CE-P)
Precharge setup I ime before chip enable
tsu (G-E)
tsu (OE-CE)
Chip enable setup time before output enable
tsu (P-E)
tsu (P-CE)
Chip enable setup IIrne before precharge
tSU(RD)
Read setup time
tsu (D)
Power-down setup
tsU(PO)
tsu (R)
!lrYle
tsu (R-CAS) tsu IRA-CAS)
Column address strobe setup time before read
tsu (RA-CAS)
Colu!nn address strobe setup time before row address
tsu (S)
tSU(CS)
Chip select setup time
tSU(S-W)
tsu
Write setup lime hf"fore chip selecl
tSU(W)
tSU(WR)
(CS-WR)
Write se\llp
trHL
High-level to low-level transition time
tTLH
Low-Ievel- to high-level transition time
l
j
the time interval between
reference
on the
going to the low (high)
and when a
Input
the output is loaded by another specified network
Oatil valid lime after ilddress
tV(A)
tdv (AD)
tv IE)
tdv (CE)
Daw valid time after chip enable
tV(E)PR
tV(CE)PR
Data valid tlrrlP. aftf,r chip enable In proqram mode
tv (G)
tv (OE)
Data valid tlrne after OIJtput enable
tv (CS)
DAta valin wne after chip seleel
tv (PR)
tv (S)
O(l\a v(lild tnne after program
Pilise VI/ldth (pulse duration) the time interval between specified reference points on the leading and training edges of the wa\leforms
tw
tW(E)
tW(CE)
Chip enable pulse width
tW(EH)
tW(CEH)
Chip enable high pulse width
tW(EL)
tW(EL)
Chip enable low pulse width
Proqrarn [Julse Width
tW(PR)
tW(R)
tW(RD)
Read pulse width
tW(S)
tWICS)
Chip select pulse width
t wlW )
t wIWR )
tWI ¢)
Wrtie pulse width
Clock pulse width
Ta
Ambient temperature
Topr
Operating temperature
Tstg
Storage temperature
VBB
VBB supply voltage
VCC
Vee supply voltage
VDD
VDO supply voltage
VGG
VGG supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
V,H
High-level input voltage-the value of the permitted high-state voltage at the input
V,L
Low·level input voltage-the value of the permiHed low-state voltage at the input
Va
Output voltage
VOH
High-level output voltage-the value of the guaranteed high·state voltage range at the output
VOL
Low-level output voltage-the value of the guaranteed low"state voltage range at the output
VSS
Vss supply voltage
1-18
of the output pulse when the
applied through a specified
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
IS
and
MITSUBISHI LSls
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RELIABILITY TESTING
1. PLANNING
In recent years, advances in integrated circuits have been
rapid, with increasing density and speed accompanied by
decreasing cost. Because of these advances, it is now
practical and economically justifiable to use these devices
in systems of greater complexity and in which they were
previously considered too expensive. All of these advances
add up to increased demand.
We at Mitsubishi foresaw this increased demand and
organized our production facilities to meet it. We also
realized that simply increasing production to meet the
demand was not enough and that positive steps would have
to be taken to assure the reliability of our products.
This realization resulted in development of our Quality
Assurance System. The system has resulted in improved
products, and Mitsubishi is able to supply its customers'
needs with ICs of high reliability and stable quality. This
system is the key to future planning for improved design,
production and quality assurance.
procedures developed in §2.2 are continued. The closest
monitoring assures that they are complied with.
3. RELIABILITY CONTROL
3.1 Reliability Tests
The newly established Reliability Center for Electronic
Components of Japan has established a qualification system
for electronic components. Reliability test methods and
procedures are developed to mainly meet MI L-STD-883
and J IS C 7022 specifications. Details of typical tests used
on Mitsubishi ICs are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Typical reliability test items and conditions
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM
The Quality Assurance System imposes quality controls
on Mitsubishi products from the initial conception of a
new product to the final delivery of the product to the
customer. A diagram of the total system is shown in Fig. 1.
For ease of understanding, the system is divided into three
stages.
2.1 Quality Assurance in the Design Stage
The characteristics of the breadboard devices are carefu"Y
checked to assure that all specifications are met. Standard
integrated circuits and high-quality discrete components are
used. During the design stage, extensive use is made of a
soph isticated CAD program, which is updated to always
include the latest state-of-the-art techniques.
2.2 Quality Assurance in the LimitedManufacturing Stage
Rigid controls are maintained on the environment, incoming material and manufacturing equipment such as tools
and test equipment. The products and materials used are
subjected to stringent tests and inspections as they are
manufactured. Wafer production is closely monitored.
Finally, a tough quality assurance test and inspection is
made before the product is released for delivery to a
customer. Th is final test includes a complete visual inspection and electrical characteristics tests.
A sampling
technique is used to conduct tests under severe operating
conditions to assure that the products meet reliability
specifications.
3.2 Failure Analysis
Devices that have failed during reliability or acceleration
tests are analyzed to determine the cause of failure. This
information is fed back to the process engineering section
and manufacturing section so that improvements can be
made to increase reliability. A summary of failure analysis
procedures is shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Summary of failure analysis procedures
t--
[)(~S(JII}tl(J(l
+------o
1. External
examination
------ -
o !n~;pf?c!ICJrl uf Icaus piJtlJlY soldcrlnq cHid welding
Insp(~r:tlon
of
rlld1E~rlals,
sealing, package and marking
0 Visual 111SP()ctlllr'· of uther Iterns uf tnf; sp()cifICB11l'nS
0 Use uf stcr(;o rncru:;copcs metallurgical mlUuscopes X-ray
photographiC (;qUlprnen1. fine leakage and gross leakage
deuradatlorl bv electrical parameter filcasurement
o OLY;crvJllun uf
2. Electrical tests
~;hilrac!(?rlstlcs
oy a synchroscope or (] curve
HaCi:r and ch(:cklrl\j 01 'rnpurtant phYSical characteristiCS
t.lV f.'it:c:lrlcal dl(]racterlstlCS
() Strt'SS tests such ,lS cnvrronm(;nlal Of lif(: tests. If reqUired
o Rem()val
(II
the
oi tht: deVice the optical Inspection
of th(' Illtr:rnal structure of the deVice
Internal
C 0.1'(:,(,11\1 (Ii lilt: Slilc:Orl ("~l:P surface
examination
0
MI'd',1111'111I'111
ul l'II'ctr,(",,1 cil(]rdcterIS\ICS bv probes
II appliCdlJll'
2.3 Quality Assurance in the Full Production Stage
Full production of a product is not started until it has been
confirmed that it can be manufactured to meet quality and
reliability specifications. The controls, tests and inspection
o U,;p (If ScM XMA and Infrared microscanner If reqUired
o U,p (II IlictailuISJ1cai analvsl" techniques to supplement
4. Chip analysis
o
a
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
SllClrlSJ for cruss S8C\lonal IrlSpeC\IOn
o ArlolYSIS uf OXide frim defects
AnalySIS uf diffUSion defect,
1-19
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RELIABILITY TESTING
, Fig. 1 Quality assurance system
MARKETING
WAFER AND
ASSEMBLY
DIV
ENGINEERING
PRODUCTION PLANNING
M ARKET
DIV
& PURCHASING DIVS
OUALITY
CONTROL
DIV
OUALITY
ASSURANCE
DIV
MANUFUCTURING
CONTROL
DIV
PURCHASING SPEC
®-~
DEVELOPMENT
PLANNING
)-
MARKET RESEARCH
JIS. MIL SPECS
DEVELOPMENT ORDER
!NEW PRODUCT~
DEVELOPMENT
l
-
(PRE.PRODUCTION ORDER
l
·C
0-
r---.-t
1ST
TYPE T[ST
J
COUNCIL'foR PREPRODUCTION
-1
)--
PREPRODUCTION
2ND
PRODUCT DRAWIN G
TYPE TEST
jJ
(
~
L
)
PURCHASE ORDER
j
vi
fi'!>~
"'"
ffi
U)
QUAlITY
""
I
PLANNING
~NTROL
(
(
i2
"-'
RECEIVING J
IIINSPECTION
INCOMING MATERIALS
V
l
U)
,.
WAFER
PROCE SS
t
f-
0
0a:
F\.iAl UA TlON
:r ASSEMBL Y
\
EVALUATION
PROCESS
J
z
l
u
STOREROOM
SHIPPING ORDER
~
0
WRAPPING AND
SHIPPING
TEST
' - ' AC [ION [0 ABNORMAL
u
l
RETURNED MATERIALS
Q
Q
Q
RE~RT
'-'
MAIN DIVISION
1-20
'"
0
0
gc
2
TEST
o
CONCERNED DIVISION
-
•
MITSUBISHI
I'ElECTRIC
a:
'>
~
z
z
'3
~
1--r--')
PLANNING Of
SHIPPING
COMPLAINT
RESOr TION
_
c
til
(H) """"<83>
Where. M=(H) (Ll
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
x
X
X
X
(r)
0
M.
(M)
(82)
I
1
M4
M.
(82)
,
Ms
I
I
M3
(82)
I
Ml
LXI
w
SP,m
SPHL
STAX B
STAX 0
ro
ro
o
LDAX
LDAX
B
0
STA
m
o
(D) --<83)
Where.
m =
m =
0
0
0
0
0
0
<."
<.s>
1 1 0
<."
<.s>
1 1 1
000
o 1 0
a a
1
a a
1
010
0 1 0
3 1
10
3
1
1
0
0
1 0
1 0
1 1 0
0
1 0
F 9
6
1
1
02
7
1
2
1 2
7
1
2
o A 7 1 2
1 A
7
1
2
321334
0
1 0
3 A
13
3
4
0
1
a
2 2
16
3
5
o
o
0
1
(82)
X X X X X
(82)
(B3)
<83> <82>
<83)
x x
X
x x
(82)
(83)
Where. m = <83> (82)
x
(SPl--m
3
X X
(83) (82)
<.s>
11
o
o
o
o
o
Where.
(8) --(83)
1 0
(82)
c
ro
x x x
(C)--
5HlD
m
o a
1 0 0
(m +-1)
<82>
lHlD
m
o
0
1 0
1
a
1 0
2 A
16
(U~lm)
3
(H)
(82)
<---emf
m
m+1
XXXXX
1)
m
m 1-1
0
M.
MS
<83>
~:~~~LC'G---+~:~:-~~:~~ -ci---H+ ~~-,:;-t-,"'~+-':'+~:+·--1'~~"l~iOo~i-l:-'-'.7:07;(~"'~E,)')e-.,Oil'('(SNP")')--------r-~"-~"-~"-~"-~o-t'(-;OSP;cI,--j-'M;:'-t'('(s;:CpO;-;)")T,cT-CM
CO,::-1
(SP
I:~g
~
1 0
1 0
ADI
n
11
ADC
ADC
ACI
r
M
n
1 0
1 0
11
4
1
,
000
555
00011086712
000110C6722
~O~.''.''.~--+'~~l+,~r----~(A~)~'--(~A')~A7Ie,)--------------------rO~'0~0~~0 ,t~~--cT--~------r-r---~
ANA
ANI
M
n
1 0
1 1
1 0 0
1 0 0
61' ~
1 lOA
1 1
E 6
a
7
1
2
2
2
(A)"
(A)"
(A) A(M)
(A) 1\ n
Where.
M - (H) (L)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
M
000 0 0
000 0 0
000 0 0
M
00000
00000
00000
M
a
M
M.
1M)
M.
M.
(82)
(82)
XRA
XRA
XR'
ORA
ORA
ORI
M
r
M
n
r
, 0
1 0
101
5 S S
4
1
1
101
1 lOA E
7
1
2
11
1 0 1
1 1 0
E E
7
2
2
(82)
10110555
411
1011011088712
11110110F6722
(82)
1 a
"
1
1 0
1 1 0
• E
11'
1 1
1 , 0
F E
•••
CMP
CMP
CPI
M
n
t NR
rOO
"
<. >
1
DOD
100
hD~'~~=~~M~r--_t~g~g--~~-~~<-i~-~ ~ ~ ~
DCR
I NX
I NX
I NX
INX
M
8
0
H
a a
a a
0 a
a a
5P
00
g~~
~
~ ~ o
DCX
DCX
H
SP
0 0
0 0
RL C O O
1
,
o
o
0 0
1 0
0 0
,
0
1
1 0
o
0 1
1 1
1 0
1
1 0
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1
o 1
o ,
-'
'0
6
6
1
1
',1
1,
3
2 3
6
1
1
,
1
1
2 •
6
6
6
6
111
o ,
1
"
1
~ I~
CAl '"'~ (Al \, (r)
(A)"--(A) v eM)
(A)" CAl \ 11
Where.
(e)
(~)
IA)
I
I Compare: Where.
(H)(L)
M=(H)
CLl
M--- (H) (l)
(A)
(r)<-(r)+1
000
0 0 0
(M)--CM1-l
M
(H)(L)
000 x 0
Where. M
(H)(L)
000 x 0
Where.
(8) (0)'
(D) (El"
(H){L)'
eSP)'
(6) (e) I 1
(D) (E) • 1
(H)(L)ll
X
X
x
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
x
(SP) I 1
X
X
X
X
(M)
M.
M.
(82)
M.
(M)
(82)
,
,
(M)
M.
M.
M.
M.
(82)
!
-~t:::"
M4 /-._CMLr-L __M~ __
M4
M
x
(M)
I
M4
J
x
x
X
x x x x x
00
o 0
1 0 1
1 0 0
1 1 1
1 1 1
2 F
2 7
4
4
1
1
~~
00
1
1 0
1
1
1
37
4
1
1
00
1
1 1
1
1 1
3 F
4
1
1
00000
CY2 •
(CY2)
<-.
1
x x
OY2
X
X
1
X
x i" 0 x
•
2-6
M.
1
Accumu CMA
campen DAA
Carry set
Where. M
(A)
000
f- J.--"---'(T~'fi-=:cii",~",:-=+-c:-------"==--""---'-'=hL-t g g--g--~--g
3 3
O.
1 B
o
0 0
41'
lQ
1
1
1
,
1
,
,
3 5
o 3
, 3
(A)-(A)V(r)
(A)--(A)V(M)
CA) <- (A) V n
'1YIlfSU~ISHI
.... ELECTRIC
State IS Tl
* * . State IS Tz
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
I~em
~·i·~
Instruction code
Mnemonic
s"
0106
Instr
class
JMP
I
m
I
050403
0201 Do
o
0
0 0
I
I
C3
10
0
Z
3
Functions
0
s z
Z
x
(PC)- m
3
Mach
Contents cycle- ;Contents t/O
P CY2CYl
x x
X
x x x x
X
Data bus
Address bus
Flags
'5 '5 '5
16mal 0
notatn z
(82)
<83>
<82}
I
If condition (s true
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
,
!
JNZ
m
1 I
M,
MJ
I
I
M,
MJ
I
I
M,
MJ
M.
M;
M.
If condition is true
(PC)~--m
<83>
(82)
I
C~~'~~.
I
I
CP
m
I
CM
m
,,
CPE
m
I
I
CPO
m
I
I
I
I
m
RET
RC
RNC
c
RZ
RNZ
a:
RP
RM
RPE
RPO
Input/ ! IN
"
,,
n
I
n
I
I
I
u
ro
0
<82>
<83>
00 I
<82>
<83>
o 0 0
<82>
<83>
I I 0
<82>
<83>
I
1
<82>
I
(SP)
1
M.
(PC)
3
0
M'
MJ
M.
(SP)
2
M;
(PC) 1-3
0
M;
( (SP))
M.
t 1
M;
«SP) +1)
If condition is true
I
I
M.
M;
M.
M;
x x x x x
Z )= 0
(
(SP)- eSP)
I
o
0
F •
18/9 3 5/2
2
x x x x
S ) "'- 0
(
M;
x x x
I
(93)
~
X
I
,o0
F C 18/9
3
5/2 ( S ) =
1
o
0
E C 18/9
3
5/2
( P )= 1
X
I
o
0
E •
18/9
3
5/2
( P )= 0
x x x x x
o
0
,
C9
'0
,
3
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
08
DO
C8
CO
F 0
F 8
E8
EO
DB
o
I
I
03
1
x x x x x
If cond1t10n IS false
(PC)---(PC) I 3
12/6
12/6
1
1
10
2
3/1
3/1
3
10
2
3
If condition is false
( P ) = 1 (pc)- (pC) 1 1
P )- 0
(A) --- (Input buffer) --- (Input deVICe of number n)
(Input data)
(Output deVice of number n) • (A)
F B
F 3
F 0
,o
12
I
CO
12
, ,
I i~~~) .-_l()S;/~~·
,
12
,
1
o
I
DO
4
4
3
3
3
«SP) - 1), (8).
-(sp) -2
(SP)
«SP) -I} ,-- (D).
(SP) --(SP)-2
«SP)-1) <- (H).
(SP) --(SP)-2
(F)
-- (sp)).
(SP) --(SPJ 1-2
(C)
<-- ( (SP) ).
(SP) .- eSp) +2
IE)
--( (SP».
(SP) <-- eSP) I 2
e (SP) 1.
SP +2
(PC) -- (pC) + 1
(PC) <- (PC) I 1
3
10
,
,
10
1
3
01
10
1
3
I
E ,
10
4
,, , I :~~
1
o
I
I
I 0
o
0
I
F I
o
0 0
o
0
I
C I
o
I
0
o
0
I
I
o
0
o
0
I
I
EO
12
3
1
3
o
I 0
0 0
o
I 0
0 0
78
00
c
RIM
00
I
o
0
000
20
•
1
1
~t;
:;,c
SIM
00
I
I
0
00 0
3
4
1
1
~'~
5
1
«SP)
2)' (F,
«SP) - 2)
«sp)
<-
2) •
X
X
X
X
X
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x X x x
x x x X
x x x X
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
x x x x x
(C)
x x x x x
(E)
«SP) - 2)-- IL)
x x x x
(Al -- «sp) + 1)
00000
«SP) 11)
x x x x x
(0)'--( (SP)+I)
x x x x x
(eSP) I I)
x x x x x
(B)'
(H)'
I
(SP)
(SP)
(SP)
(SP) + 1
M.
M;
(82) 82)
M;
x x x x x
x x X x x
x x x x X
x X X X x
(INTE)--- 1
(INTE}--- 0
1
1
1
x
(PC)- ( (SP) I 1) ( (SP) )
(SP)---(SP) 1-2
1
I
I
I
I
X
+--xx-
" - - _ . _ - - - ---
If condition IS true
o
0
0
I
x
(PC) ---{ (SP) I 1) {(Sp»), (SP)--(SP) t 2
12/6 1 3'1 (CY2) _1
12/6 1 3/1 (CYz) = 0
12/. 1 311 ( Z ) = 1
12/6 I 3 / 1 I Z ) = 0
12/6 I 3/1 ( S ) = 0
12/6 1 3;'1 ( S ) = 1
1
0
X
X
X
X
x x
X x x
X X
x
X X
Meaning
I
<8z)
{Input da1a)
(82)
0
M;
A
M.
M;
(A)
x
X
X
I
(SP) 1
(SP) - 2
(SP) - 1
(SP) - 2
(SP) 1
(SP) - 2
(SP)-1
(SP)- 2
(SP)
eSp) +-1
(SP)
eSP) + 1
esP)
eSp) + 1
(SP)
SP
x
x
((SP) )
((SP) +1)
I
,, ,,
,, ,,
.
~
I
"""
<82>
LK~1)
)i
T
T3
'-
\
K
ADDRESS
~tdIALE
td(CONT-AOl
DA):,"
K
]j
ADDRESS
tdIALE-AD)
tWCALEl
ALE
TWAIT
T2
T
CLK
I
-
-'t~
td(WR-OA}
td(OA-WR)
~ tdlwRHL-DA)
J
tW(CONTl
td(ALE-GONT~
td{CONT-JE)
I
td(AO-CONTl
th(RDY-CLK)
tSU(RDY-AD)
~SU{ADY
READY
eLK)
I
f
Read Cycle
T
CLK
,
\
T2
tdIALE-eLl}
)
td(CONT-Aol
X
ADDRESS
SU(OA-AOl
)
-'
td(OA-ROJ
\\\\)
ADDRESS
tW(ALEJ
ALE
T,
T3
TWAIT
deALE-AD)
ItOXZ(RD
1+
AD)
tSU(OA
td(CONT-ALEl
ALE}
CONT)
I
tW(CONTl
~
..
CONT)
tSU(RDY-AO)
th(ROY
eLK)
(
READY
2-12
"'"
DATA IN
tSU(OA-ROl
td(ALE
AD)
Y-
d(AD-ALE)
td(AD
DZX(RD
\tSU(ADY
elK)l
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
Hold Cycle
T,
CLK
\
HOLD
T HOLD
T3
""\
\
,
t
l
td~
t
th( HLD-CLK)
HLDA
\.l
tDXZ(HLDA-BlJS)
I
tOZX(HlDA-BUS)
I
~
(ADDRESS, CONTROLS)
BUS
\
'j~
L
tSU( HLD-elK;
T,
T HOLD
II
Interrupt and Hold Cycle
ADo_ 7
CALL INST
BUS FLOATING
ALE
INTR
tsu (INT-_C_L_K,+--++_t_hl_'NT-CLK)
tOZX(HLOA-BUS)
HOLD
.
\
,,"_J
I
I
ttthIHLO_CLKI
HLDA
---------------'
toxzlHLOA-Busl
td(CLK-HLDAl
Clock Output Timing Waveform
X, INPUT
CLOCK OUTPUT
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
2-13
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8085AP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
TRAP INTERRUPT AND RIM INSTRUCTIONS
TRAP generates interrupts regardless of the interrupt enable
filp-flop (INTE FF). The current state of the INTE FF is
stored in flip flop A (AFF) of the CPU and then the INTE FF
is reset. The first RIM instruction after the generation of a
TRAP interrupt differs in function from the ordinary RIM instruction. That is, the bit 3 (INTE FF information) in the accumulator ((A) 3) after the execution of the RIM instruction
contains the contents of the A FF, regardless of the state of
the INTE FF at the time the RIM instruction is executed.
These details are shown in Fig.2, Tables 1 and 2 .
Table
TRAP interrupt and RIM instructions
~mber
Condition
1
2
3
4
5
6
instruction in address a-1
EI
EI
EI
DI
DI
DI
Instruction in address a+2
EI
NOP
DI
EI
NOP
DI
Contents of (A) 3 after the exacutian of the RIM instruction in
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
address a+3
State of INTE FF after the execution of the RIM instruction in
address a+3
Contents of (A) 3 after the execution of the RIM instruction in
address a+4
State of INTE FF after the execution of the RIM instruction in
address a+4
a-2
a-1
TRAP
a
INTERRUPT - -
(0
a+1
Note 3:
The contents of (A), after the excution of the RIM instruction IS
an information of the INTE FF. The INT.E FF assumes state "1"
when it is in the EI state. and "0" when it is in the DI state.
Table
2 TRAP interrupt and INTE FF processing
MEMORY
ADDRESS
~24'6
NOP
NOP
~
RET
a+2
Fig. 2
a+3
RIM
a+4
RIM
TRAP interrupt processing
Below are the explanations of Fig. 2 .
1. The TRAP interrupt request is issued while the instruction in address a is being executed.
2. The TRAP interrupt causes the same action as an RST
instruction and then jumps to address 24 ,6.
3. It returns to address a + 1 after executing the RET instruction.
Table 1 shows the information in the INTE FF at address
a +3 and a +4 when the instructions EI and/or DI are executed at addresses a -1 and a +2.
Fig. 3 is a flow chart of the TRAP interrupt processing
routine.
PUSH'" } SAVING REGISTER
P~~~
TRAP
INTERRUPT- a
REQUEST
} SAVING INTE FF
~SW
CALL
i
i
(x)
(y)
RET
lTRAP INTERRUPT
JPROCESSING
PROGRAM
POP
PSW
ANI
08'6
,
,
\----
INTE FF RETURN PROCESSING
JZ
(xa)
(xb)
POP .. -- } RETURNING REGISTER
EI
RET
\xbxa POP --. - } RETURNING REGISTER
c__
RET
Fig. 3
2-14
TRAP interrupt processing routine
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL808SAP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
PULL-UP OF THE RESET IN INPUT
In order to increase the noise margin, the RESET IN input
terminal is pulled up by about 3k!1 (typ) when the condition
VI;;;;V,H(RESiN) is satisfied. Fig. 4 is a connection diagram of
the RESET IN input, and Fig. 5 shows the relation between
input voltage and input current.
INSIDE CPU
Vee
Figs. 6 and 7 are typical connection diagrams for a crystal
and CR circuit respectively.
Conditions for Using a Quartz Crystal Element
1. Quartz Crystal Specifications
•
•
Parallel resonance
The frequency is 2 times the operation frequency ( 2 6.25MHz)
•
•
•
Internal load capacitance: Approx. 16pF
Parallel capacitance: Below 7pF
Equivalent resistance: Below 75!1 (for operation above
4MHz)
•
For operation in the range 2 - 4MHz, the resistance
showld be made as small as possible.
Drive capability: Above 5mW (the power at which the
crystal will be destoryed)
•
2. External Circuitry
Fig. 4
Connections of RESET IN input
M5L8085AP
(rnA)
C's: Writing capacitance of pin X,
C's: Writing capacitance of pin'X,
C's: External capacitance at pin X,
0.6
C'l: External capacitance at pin X,
C'lr C,sI C,=C'l+C,S
C,=C'l+C,S
IZ
W
II:
II:
::J
U
I-
::J
0..
~
•
V'H
INPUT VOLTAGE
Fig. 5
(V)
•
RESET IN input current vs input voltage
For operation above 4MHz:
CI=C2=10pF
For operation below 4MHz:
CI=C2=15pF
DRIVING CIRCUIT OF X1 AND X2 INPUTS
Input terminals, Xl and X2 of the M5L8085AP can be driven
by either a crystal, RC network, or external clock. Since the
driver clock frequency is divided to 112 internally, the input
frequency required is twice the actual execution frequency
(6MHz for the M5L8085AP which is operated at 3MHz). Figs.
10pF
±
i
1
12
,-----~__=_j
lOpF
----I
x,
1
~o---+---<-----jX,
x,
M5L8085AP
x,
OSCILLATION FREQUENCY
1-6MHz PARALLEL
RESONANT CRYSTAL
OSCILLATOR IS USED
Fig. 6
External Clock Driver Circuit
Connections when
crystal is used for
X 1 and X 2 inputs
roo,!
470n
~lOkn
~
'----+---1 x,
x,
OSCILLATION FREQUENCY
ABOUT 3M Hz
Fig. 7
Pullup resistors are required to assure that
the high level voltage of the input is at least
4V.
Connections when
RC network is used
for X 1 and X 2 inputs
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
2-15
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8085AP
8- BIT PARALLEL MICROPROCESSOR
WAIT STATE GENERATOR
Fig. 8 shows a typical1-wait state generator for low speed
RAM and ROM applications.
The contents of the accumulator after the execution of a
81M instruction is shown in Table 4.
Table
4
Relation of the 81M instruction
with the accumulator
, - - - - - - - - - - - S E R I A L OUTPUT DATA
'---~READY
, - - - - - - - - - - - - SOD SET ENABLE
VALUE IN BIT 7 IS TRANSFERRED TO SOD LATCH
WHEN SSE IS T
M5L8085AP
, - - - - - - - - - ' NOT USED
, - - - - - - · R S T 7.5 PENDING RESET
PENDING FLIP-FLOP OF
RST 7.5 IS RESET WHEN
R7.5 is "1"
Fig. 8
ll-'
f[ Ij
. - - - - - · M A S K SET ENABLE
ENABLES SET fRESET OF MASKS
FDR BITS O~2, WHEN MSE IS T
l-wait state generator
MASK SET !RESET OF RST7.5
MASK SET fRESET OF RST 6.5
'MASK SETIRESET DF RST 5. 5
SET~l:INTERRUPT DISABLE
RESET~O:INTERRUPT ENABLE
RELATION OF RIM AND SIM INSTRUCTIONS
WITH THE ACCUMULATOR
(SUPPLEMENTARY DESCRIPTION).
The contents of the accumulator after the execution of a RIM
instruction is shown in Table 3.
~~~~~-.~~~
IsoolSSEI X IR7. 5IMSEIM7.~M6.5IM5~ ~g~~~~TL~T06R
76543210
Table
3
Relation of the instruction RIM
with the accumulator
SERIAL INPUT DATA (SID)
STATE OF UNFULFILLED
INTERRUPT REQUEST
17.5:STATE OF PENDING
FLIP-FLOP
16.5):STATE OF TERMINALS
15.5 RST 6.5 AND RST 5.5
STATE OF INTERRUPT ENABLE
C~ ,='~G ,-,- W<" "',,"
STATE OF INTERRUPT MASK
r - - ( T WHEN THE MASK IS SET)
~
,----"-------,
I SID 117.5116.5115.51 IE
7
2-16
6
5
4
3
IM7.~M6.5IM5.51
2
1
CONTENTS OF
ACCUMULATOR
0
• ':' MITSUBISHI
Iht.. ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8212P
8-BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3-STATE OUTPUT
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8212P is an input/output port consisting of an B-bit
latch with 3-state output buffers along with control and device selection logic. Also a service request flip-flop for the
generation and control of interrupts to a microprocessor is
included.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
DEVICE SELECT DS,- 1
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Vcc (5V)
MODE INPUT MO- 2
Parallel B-bit data register and buffer
Service request flip-flop for interrupt generation
Three-state outputs
Low input load current: IlL =absolute=250,uA(max.)
High output sink current: IOL=16mA(max.)
High-level output voltage for direct interface to a
M5LBOBOAP, S CPU: VOH=3. 65V(min.)
-
DATA OUTPUT DO, ~
DATA INPUT
4
- 01, DATA INPUT
-DO, DATA OUTPUT
~Ol,
DATA INPUT
7-00, DATA OUTPUT
6 ~ 015 DATA INPUT
005 DATA OUTPUT
-
~CLR
APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
~J~~~grTSIGNAL
INT
22~01,
'------'-
Input/output port for a M5LBOBOAP, S
Latches, gate buffers or multiplexers
Peripheral and input/output functions for microcomputer
systems
FUNCTION
~
CLEAR
OS, DEVICE SELECT
Outline 24P4
Device select 1 (OSl) and device select 2 (OS2) are used
for chip selection when the mode input MO is low. When
OSl is low and OS2 is high, the data in the latches is transferred to the data outputs 001 - 008, and the service request flip-flop SR is set. Also, the strobed input STB is active, the data inputs 011- 018 are latched in the data latches,
and the service request flip-flop SR is reset.
When MO is high, the data in the data latches is transferred to the data outputs. When OSl is low and OS2 is high,
the data inputs are latched in the data latches. The lOW-level"
clear input CLR resets the data latches and sets the service
request flip-flop SR, but the state of the output buffers is not
changed.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
r---------------STROBE INPUT STS 11
MODE INPUT MO 2
INTERRUPT
CONTROL
SIGNAL
DEVICE SELECT
DEVICE SELECT
01,
012
013
01,
DATA INPUTS
015
01,
01,
01,
CLEAR
CLR
}------------------------------i--~:qr--r_t--~------------~4
DO,
5}-----------------------------~--~~F=~_+--t>------------~6
DO,
,}-----------------------------~==~~F=~_+==t>------------~8
g}-----------------------------~--~~f=~_+--C>------------~10
16}-----------------------------~--~~F=~_+--t>------------~15
18 ~----------------------------_+--1D~f=4-~~~------------~17
20~----------------------------~==~~F=~_+==t>------------~19
22~----------------------------~--~~F=~----C>------------~21
14' -________________________ - . J
003
DO,
005
DATA
OUTPUTS
DO,
DO,
DO,
I
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
2-17
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8212P
8- BIT INPUT jOUTPUT PORT WITH 3- ST ATE OUTPUT
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Unit
Vcc
Supply voltage
7.0
V
V,
Input voltage DSI. MD inputs
Vcc
V
V,
Input voltage all other inputs except OSI, MD
5.5
V
Vo
Output voltEtge
Vcc
V
Pd
Power dissipation
800
mW
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
0-75
"C
T stg~
Storage temperature range
-55-125
"C
Symbol
Conditions
Parameter
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Nom
Max
4.75
5.0
Unit
Vcc
Supply voltage
5.25
V
10H
High-level output current
-1
mA
10L
Low-level output current
16
mA
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=0-75"C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
V'H
High-level input voltage
V'L
Low-level input voltage
V,c
Input clamp voltage
High-level output voltage
VOL
Low-level output voltage
102
Three-state output current
102
Three-state output current
Max
Vcc =4.75V, V'H=2V
VIL=0.85V.loH=-lmA
'OL =
0.85
V
-1
V
3.65
V
Vcc=4. 75V. V'H=2V,
VIL =0. 85V.
0.45
15mA
Vcc=5. 25V. V'H=2V,
V
20
I"A
-20
I"A
Vcc=5.25V, V,=5.25V
10
I"A
VIL =0. 85V, Vc=5. 25V
Vcc=5. 25V. V'H=2V,
VIL =0. 85V. Vo=O. 45V
High-level input current, STB 052, CLR,
Unit
V
2
Vcc=4.75V, l,c=-5mA
V OH
"H
Typ
011-ole inputs
"H
High-level input current. MD input
Vcc=5.25V, V,=5.25V
30
I"A
"H
High-level input current, DS1 input
Vcc=5. 25V. V,=5. 25V
40
I"A
Low-level input current. STB, DS2, CLR,
III
DI,-DI, inputs
Vcc=5. 25V. V,=O. 5V
-0.25
mA
III
Low-level input current. M D input
Vcc=5.25V, V,=O. 5V
-0.75
mA
III
Low-level input current. OSl input
Vcc=5. 25V. V,=O. 5V
-1
mA
los
Short-circuit output current (Note 3)
Vcc=5.0V
-75
mA
Icc
Supply current from Vee
Vcc=5.25V
130
mA
Note 1
-15
All voltage are with respect to GND terminal. Reference voltage (pin 12) is considered as OV and all maximum and minimum values are defined in absolute values.
Current flowing into an Ie is positive, o~t is negative. The maximum and minimum values are defined in absolute values.
All measurements should be done quickly, and two outputs should not be measured at the same time.
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(Ta=0-75"C • Vcc=5V±5%. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
t W (DS2)
Input pulse width, DS1. DS2 and STB
30
ns
tSU(OA)
Data setup time with respect to DS1, DS2 and STB
15
ns
th(oA)
Data hold time with respect to DS1. DS2 and STB
20
ns
-
2-18
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8212P
8-BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3-STATE OUTPUT
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(T a=O-75'C , Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Test conditions (Note 4)
Parameter
Min
tPHL(OI-DO)
High~to-Iow-\eve'
tpLH(OI_DO)
time, from input 01 to output DO
Typ
Max
and low-to-high-Ieve\ output propagation
30
ns
40
ns
40
ns
45
ns
45
ns
55
ns
CL=30pF, RLI=3000, RL2=6000
tPHL(oS2-DO}
High-to-Iow-Ievel and low-to-high-Ievel output propagation
t plH ( DS2-DO}
time, from input DS1, DS2 and STB to output DO
tPHL(STB-INT)
High-Io-Iow-Ievel output propagation time, from input STB to output tNT
tpZL(MD-DOl
Z-to-Iow-Ievel and Z-to-high-Ievel output propagation
CL =30pF, RLI =3000, RL2=26000
t PZH ( MD-DO)
time, from inputs MD, DSl and DS2 to output DO
CL=30pF, RLI=10kO, RL2=lkO
tPHZ(MD-DO)
High-to-Z-Ievel and low-to-Z-Ievel output propagation
CL=5pF, RLI=10kO, RL2=lkO
tPLZ(MD-ool
time, from inputs MD, OSl and DS2 to output DO
CL=5pF, RLI =300 0, RL2=600 0
High-to-Iow-Ievel output propagation time, from input
tPHL(CLR-OO)
CL=30pF, RLI=3000, RL2=6000
CLR to output DO
Note 4
Test circuit
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
2-19
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8212P
8·BIT INPUT/OUTPUT PORT WITH 3·STATE OUTPUT
TIMING DIAGRAMS
REFERENCE LEVEL=1.5V
,,-------------------',
01,-01,
,-------------------------
----------------~~~~~
OS"
OS" STS
00,-00,
-----.,..-~~ ~-----------------.-------------_____________________________ J
~
________________ i
,
,,-------------------,
SU(OA)
OS"
OS" STS
~
,~
_________________________ _
h(OA)
tPHl(OI_DOl
tPLH(OI-DOl
, , ,--------------------------------------
00,-00,
------------------------~
OS"
OS" MO
___
00,-00,
~r-...
/"
-------------------'
tpzUMD_DO)
~------------------------------tPHZ(MD-DoJ
tPLZ{MD-DOJ _:;j..l.
O.5VV
_________________________
OH
tPZH(MD_DOl
~Xj,~
• ___________________ J
li-----------------t
,~
V~
O.5V
STS
{
tw
1
:q;HLlSTB-iNT)
INT
CLR
1;
tw
;v
~HL(CLR-DO)
00,-00,
2-20
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8216P / MSL8226P
4-BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8216P and M5L8226P are 4-bit bidirectional bus
drivers and suitable for the 8-bit parallel CPU M5L8080AP, S
(8080A).
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
Vee
FEATURES
DATA OUTPUT 000-
•
•
Parallel 8-bit data bus buffer driver
Low input current OlEN, CS:
01, DB:
•
High output current M5L8216P
DB:
DO:
M5L8226P
DB:
II
I'L =-500,uA( max.)
I'L =-250,uA(max.)
IOL=55mA(max.)
IOH=-10mA(max.)
IOH=-lmA(max.)
IOL=50mA(max.)
IOH=-10mA(max.)
IOH=-l mAt max.)
•
DO:
Outputs can be connected with
VoH =3.65V(min.)
the CPU M5L8080AP, S:
•
Three-state output
APPLICATION
Bidirectional bus driver/receiver for various types of microcomputer systems.
FUNCTION
The M5L8216P is a non-inverting and the M5L8226P is an inverting 4-bit bidirectional bus driver.
DATA INPUT 01, ~
GND
9 -
012 DATA INPUT
Outline 16P4
When the terminal CS is high-level, all outputs are in
high-impedance state, and when low-level, the direction of
the bidirectional bus can be controlled by the terminal OlEN.
The terminal OlEN controls the data flow. The data flow
control is performed by placing one of a pair of buffers in
high-impedance state and allowing the other to transfer the
data.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
DATA INPUT
DATA INPUT 010
DATA OUTPUT 000 2 r---+--a--f~
DATA OUTPUT
DATA INPUT Db
DATA INPUT 01,
DATA OUTPUT DO, 5>---+-"""'(l--+.-J
DATA INPUT Db
9>---+--0"-+--,
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
DATA OUTPUT 00 2 11>---+-"""'(l--+.-J
DATA INPUT 013
4 )------£)0----+--,
DATA INPUT 013
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
9)--+---Coo---+-.
l1)--t--O<:I---+~
12J---t--COO--+-.
DATA OUTPUT
DATA OUTPUT 003 14>---+--.......(l--+.-J
"----If-+----{ 1 CS
DATA INPUT 012
DATA OUTPUT DO,
12>---+--0"-+--,
J)---t--1)OO--j----,
DATA OUTPUT DO, 5 )--+---001:1----+---"
~~i~CT INPUT
~---If-+-------\ I
ENABLE
I~~~~ D"iEN 15J----<>-----~
CS
~~i~CT INPUT
M5L8226P
M5L8216P
• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
2-21
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8216P jMSL8226P
4-BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Conditions
Parameter
limits
Unit
7
V
5.5
V
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage, CS. OlEN. 01 inputs
V,
Input voltage. DB input
Vee
V
Va
High-level output voltage
Vee
V
700
mW
0-75
'c
'c
With respect to GND
Ta=25'C
Pd
Power dissipation
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
-65-+150
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITONS
(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Unit
Parameter
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
5
-
Vee
Supply voltage
5,25
V
10H
High-level output current. DO output
-1
10H
High-level output current. DB output
-10
10L
Low-level output current. DO output
15
10L
Low-level output current. DB output
25
mA
mA
mA
mA
4.75
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Conditions
Parameter
Min
V ,H
High-level input voltage
V ,L
Low-level input voltage
V,e
Input clamp voltage
V OH
High-level output voltage. DO output
V OH
High-level output voltage. DB output
VaLl
Low-level output voltage. DO output
VaLl
Low-level output voltage. DB output
V OL2
Low-level output voltage. DB output
r---='--
IOZH
Off-state output current. DO output
IOZH
Off-state output current. DB output
t---
Vcc =4. 75V, l,c=-5mA
-1
Vcc =4.75V
V,H =2V
VIL=O.95V
10H=-IOmA
~_ZL
Off-state output current. DB output
V
0.45
V
0.6
V
IOL=55mA
VIL =OV, V,=5. 25V
I'L
Low-level input current. OlEN CS inputs
Vcc=5. 25V, V'H=4. 5V
I'L
Low-level input current. DI, DB input
VIL =OV, V,=O. 45V
los
Short-circuit output DO output (Note 2)
los
Short-circuit output. DB output (Note 2)
lee
Supply current
2-22
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
pA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
-100
20
10
-500
-250
-15
-65
-30
-120
Vcc=5.25V, Vo=OV
M5L8216P
2
V
20
100
100
M5L8226P
M5L8216P
0.6
-20
Vo=O.45V
High-level input current. DI, DB inputs
Note 1
.-
Vcc=5.25V
I'H
V
IOL=25mA
IOL=50mA
Vcc=5. 25V, V'H=4. 5V
Iccz
2.4
0.45
M5L8226P
High-level input current. DIEN. CS inputs
Vcc=5.25V
100
120
Supply current z
M5L8226P
100
Current flowing into an IC is postive, out is negative.
All measurements should be done quickly, and not more than one output should be shorted at a time.
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
V
IOL=1SmA
M5L8216P
I'H
V
V
3.65
Vo=5.25V
Off-state output current. DO output
V
0,95
IOH=-lmA
Unit
Max
2
-~
IOZL
--
Typ
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8216P /MSL8226P
4.BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
(Vee=5V±5%, Ta=25'C , unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Parameter
Conditions
tPHL(DB-DO)
High-ta-Iow and low-ta-high output propagation time.
tPLH(OB-DO)
from input DB to output DO
tPLH(DI_DB}
tPHZCCS-DO)
High-to-Z and low-to-Z output propagation time.
C L =5pF, RLI=10kll, R,,=lkll
t P12 CCS-DO)
from inputs OlEN. CS. to output DO
C L =5pF, RL1=30011, R,,=60011
M5L8216P
Typ
C L =300pF, RL1=9011, R,,=18011
M5L8226P
35
ns
-----
35
ns
65
ns
M5L8226P
54
ns
M5L8216P
65
ns
54
ns
C L =5pF, RL1=10kll, R,,=lkll
tPLZCCS-DB)
output DB
C L =5pF, RL1=9011, R,,=18011
M5L8216P
C L =300pF, RLI=9011, R,,=18011
(Reference level=L5V)
Note
ns
---
--
C L =300pF, RL1=10kll, R,,=lkll
-
M5L8226P
TIMING DIAGRAM
ns
ns
Output disable time. from inputs OlEN. CS. to
OlEN_ CS. to output DB
ns
25
65
54
C L =30pF, RL1=30011, RL2=60011
tPHZ(Cs-DBl
I - - - - - i Output enable time. from inputs
30
ns
M5L8226P
tPZHCCS-DB)
ns
ns
M5L8216P
tPZLCCS-DO)
25
65
C L =30pF, RLI= lOkll, R,,=lkll
M5L8226P
Output enable time.
from inputs OlEN. CS to output DO
Max
54
M5L8216P
1------1
Min
C L =30pF, RL1=30011, R,,=60011
High-to-Iow and low-to-high output
propagation time. from input 01 to
output DB
tPHL(OI_DB)
Unit
(Note 3)
3: Test circuit
DBo-DB3
0 10- 01 3 _ _ _ _oJ "'_-:-_ _ _..,._~---_
Vee
tplH(OB-OO), tpLH{DI-OB)
000-003 ------'1.1
'tPHL{DB-DOl, tPHL(DI-DB)
DBa-DB, _ _ _ _ _- ' ' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
tPHZ(Cs_DO), tPHZ(Cs-DB)
tPLZ{CS-DO), tPLZ(CS-DB)
m.------.fu
DBIN
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
DBo
Fig. 1 shows a pair of M5L8216Ps or M5L8226Ps which are
directly connected with the M5L8080A CPU data bus, and
their control signaL Fig_ 2 shows an example circuit in which
the M5L8216P or M5L8226P is used as an interface for memory and I/O to a bidirectional bus_
DB,
DB,
DB3
SYSTEM DATA BUS
DB,
DB5
DB,;
DB,
Fig. 1
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Data bus buffer
2-23
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8216P /MSL8226P
4- BIT PARALLEL BIDIRECTIONAL BUS DRIVERS
1/0
INTERFACE
MEMORY
i
a
a
15
MEMR-~
I
I
14 f4
14 14
14 f4
14 f4
01
01
01
01
DO
CS
OlEN
1 15
r<
DO
M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P
CS
DIEN
M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P
DB
DB
BUSEN
4
1 _
IIOR
f>--
4
DO
15
>--C
CS
Memory and 110 interface to bidirectional data bus
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
When the M5L8216P data input or two-way data bus is set to
high to disable-output from the two-way bus or data output,
car,e is required as a low glitch of approximate width lOns
will be generated.
•
MITSUBISHI
1
CS t>---
OlEN
M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P
M5L8216P
OR
M5L8226P
DB
DB
a
6.. ELECTRIC
DO
1 15
OlEN
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
Fig. 2
a
fa
4
4
MELPS 86 MICROPROCESSORS
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH
DESCRIPTION
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
The M5L8282P and M5L8283P are semiconductor integrated
circuits consisting of sets of eight 3-state latches for use with
various types of microprocessors.
Dlo~
Dh
-+
FEATURES
•
3-state, high-fanout output
........................................... (I OL =32mA,l oH =-5mA)
•
Low power dissipation
DATA INPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS
APPLICATION
II
Data latches for various microcomputer systems
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT
FUNCTION
The M5L8282P and M5L8283P are latches with non-inverted
and inverted outputs, respectively.
When the strobe input STB is high, the data inputs DlaDI 7 are passed through the data outputs DOa - D07
(M5L8282P) or to the data outputs -DO o- 007 (M5L8283P),
changes in the Dl a- DI7 signals being reflected in the data
outputs.
If the STB is changed from high to low, the data Dlo-D17
just before the change is latched. If the DI data is changed
while STB is low, this change is not reflected in the data
11 -
GND
Outline
STB STROBE INPUT
20P4
DATA INPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS
outputs.
When OE is made high, all the data outputs go into the
high-impedance state, the data latched prior to OE going
high being held.
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT
STROBE INPUT
GND
Outline
20P4
BLOCK DIAGRAM
DATA INPUTS
DATA INPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS
DATA OUTPUTS
STROBE INPUT
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT
STROBE INPUT
OUTPUT ENABLE
INPUT
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
3-3
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
limits
Conditions
Parameter
Unit
-0.5-+7
Vee
Supply voltage
VI
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
-0,5- V ec
V
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
'c
Tstg
Storage temperature range
0-+75
-65-+150
V
--
-0,5-+5.5
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
V
·C
(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Min
4.5
Nom
Max
5
Vee
Supply voltage
10H
High-level output current
I VOH62.4V
0
5.5
-5
10L
Low-level output current
I VoL;;;;O.4SV
0
32
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
-~
mA
mA
(Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Test conditions
Parameter
Min
,-
V IH
High-level input voltage
V IL
Low-level input voltage
,----~
Unit
Typ
Max
~----
----- - , -
2
r-:
Ilc=~SmA
VIC
Input clamp voltage
Vcc=4. SV.
V OH
High-level output voltage
Vcc=4. SV, 10H= ~SmA
V
'c------ - - -
0.8
-1
--
VOL
Low-level output voltage
Vcc=4. SV, 10L=32mA
0.45
IOZH
Off-state output current, high-level applied to the output
Vcc=S. SV, V I=2V, Vo=5, 25V
IOZL
Off-state output current, low-level applied to the output
Vcc=S. SV, V,=2V, Vo=O. 4V
50
-50
IIH
High-level input current
Vcc=S, SV, VI=5. 2SV
III
Low-level input current
Vcc=5. 5V, VI=O. 4SV
Icc
Supply current
Vcc=S.5V
-~
GIN
--
F=I MHz, VBIAS=2. SV
Vcc=5V, Ta=25'C
Input capacitance
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Parameter
t pLH
t pHL
V
V
--
---~
-~'
pF
(V cc=5V±10%, Ta=O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Alternate
Test
M5L8283P
symbol
conditions
- - - - - - - - - -- -
Limits
Limits
Min
t pLH
t pHL
-----~~
-~~~-.
"A
- - -"A
-,-50
"A- -0.2
mA
------80
mA
12
M5L8282P
Symbol
--
--
V
~-~-
2.4
--
V
Typ
Max
Min
Typ
Unit
Max
,----
Propagation time from 01 input to DO
or DO for low-ta-high or high-ta-Iow
5
T 1vov
30
5
22
change
ns
- -
Propagation time from STS input to
DO or DO for low-to-high and high-
T SHOV
to-low change
10
45
10
40
ns
10
30
10
30
ns
(Note 2)
~
t PZH
t PZL
Propagation time from OE input to DO
or DO output when output is enabled
T ELOV
--t pHZ
t pLZ
Propagation time from OE input to DO
or DO output wh'en the output is dis-
TEHOV
5
18
5
18
abled
ns
- f-------
tr
Output rise time
T OLOH
From O. SV
t02V
20
20
ns
tf
Output fall time
TOHOL
From 2V
toO.SV
12
12
ns
3-4
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(Vcc =5V±10%, Ta=O-75'C , unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Alternate
Symbol
Parameter
r----------' --
Unit
Test conditions
symbol
Typ
Min
Max
--,----------,----,-~~--~-
tW(STBH)
Strobe STB high pulse width
tsu
Strobe STS setup time for
TSHSL
-~------+--~~~~--
Dlo~Dh
r----------'---~'--------
th
STB hold time for DID-Db
tr
Input rise time
tf
Input fall time
T 1VSL
------~--_+__--'-----
T SLiX
15
ns
o
ns
25
ns
r--~-~--~----+----_+_--_+_-"----~
Note 1
__ ,________+__T_,_Ll_H ______
Vee
OUTPUT
TEST ITEM
,
,r----'
P.G,
1----;----;
ns
12
II
Note 2 :
Test Circuit
INPUT
F_r_o_m_O._B__
V_to_2_V___---1_ _ _ _-r--____ ~ 20. ___ ~n_s __
From 2V to 0. BV
T'LiH
2.14V
DEVICE
'LOAD
I
UNDER TEST 1----<>----.1, CIRCUIT:
I (Note 3),
,
50fl
,
J-
,
I
L ____ .J
tpLH • tpHL
LOAD CIRCUIT
~",m
r300PF
TIMING DIAGRAM
tpLZ , tpZL
tpHZ , tpZH
-------I
1.5V
!33fl
1~"
1.5V
~oo,
J,300 PF
(Reference voltage=t,5V)
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
Care should be taken to accommodate the glitch that is
generated when STB goes from low to high with the output
low for the M5L8283P.
• .MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
3-5
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8282P/MSL8283P
OCTAL LATCH
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
(1) Use in the maximum mode
Vee
......
r
~D~ ~
MSL8284AP
CLOCK
GENERATOR
RES
f-o.
f-o.
t
MN/MX
~
CLK
READY
RESET
CLK
I7lr-
S,
-S,
52
52 MS~~~8S
ROY
~
I
MRDC f--Miiii'fC ~
Sd
..----8086
CPU
LOCK f--NC
A16--A'9
BHE
~
A
R
DT
f---
COMMAND BUS
r---
AIOWC f--INTA ,----
STB
OE
MSL8282P
LATCH
(20R3)
~DDR DATA
I--
4>=
10RC
DEN CTRLR 10WC
,-- ALE
'---00
ADo~AD15
AMWC ~
l-MEGABYTE
-V ADDRESS BUS
T
OE
MSL8286P
TRANSCEIVER
(2)
16-BIT DATA BUS
(2) Use in the minimum mode
Vee
1-1
r
rD~
MSL8284AP
MN MX --Vee
CLOCK
~
-1--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GENERATOR .~ ClK
M 10
RES
-.READY I N T A I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
RESET
ROY
RDJ----------------WRJ-----------------
i
DT
R- - - -
DEN
8086
CPU
--1
-----, I
I I
r-----'
I I
I
I :
I
ALE I-----l-...;--,.j STB
II
I I
A
_
r - OE
7tr ,
ADo~AD151,,.--AQDR DATA
A16~A191 ' I
BHE~
I
I
MSL8282P
LATCH
20R3
:-
- - - - - \ l-MEGABYTE
,I ADDRESS BUS
J
I I
I I
r-----'
r ----, I
:I IL_--,~
I I
I I
~----IOE
*
I I
M5L8286P I
L-,-------tITRANfSEIVERI
j;1
\
j\l..-____ ,I16-BIT
DATA BUS
I I
IL _____ .JU
* : Option
Required when the number of devices
driving the bus increases
3-6
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8284AP is a clock generator and driver for use with
the 8086, 8088 and 8089 processors.
It has a synchronous delay circuit and synchronous control circuit capable of controlling two Multibus (Intel
trademark) circuits.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
CLOCK
SYNCHRONIZATION CSYNC INPUT
vee (5V)
Cl(jl~lb~f~Ci PCLK ~
Xl
FEATURES
AODRESS f~tSii AEN
x2
•
•
READY INPUT 1 RDY 1 -
Crystal controlled stable output frequency
Capable of synchronous operation with other
M5L8284APs
1-
s::
READY OUTPUT READY ~ 5
• External frequency input
• A power-on reset by means of an external capacitor and
resistor
READY INPUT 2 RDY 2 ADDRESS f~t~g AEN
1
2
15
~ ASYNC ~~rMJ~\~~~fIZATION
""ex>
14
~ EFI ~6"t~~PUT
"
12 -OSC
'"
r
ex>
»"""
2-
CLOCK OUTPUT ClK
¥~~~i~~L
¥~~~i~~l
~
Ie
13 ~ F
11
~
10 -
(OV)GND
f~~u~K SELECTION
g~W~~TOR
RES RESET INPUT
RESET RESET OUTPUT
APPLICATION
Clock driver and generators and driver for 8086, 8088, and
8089.
Outline
18P4
FUNCTION
The M5L8284AP is a clock generator/driver for the 8086, 8088
and 8089 microprocessors.
The clip contains a crystal controlled oscillator, a dividedby-3 counter, a peripheral clock output provided divided-by2 counter, a reset circuit and ready circuit to ensure synchronization to the ClK signal.
The reset input RES is used to generate the reset output
RESET as the CPU reset synched to the ClK signal. A
Schmitt trigger is used at the input side.
Thus, a reset signal can be output at power on by connecting a capacitor and resistor to the RES input.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
The frequency/crystal selection input F/C can be used to
select the crystal oscillator circuit output or an external clock
input as the input for the divide-by-three counter.
By using these pins, the M5l8284AP output can be used
to drive multiple M5l8284AP devices.
The clock synchronization input CSYNC is used to operate multiple M5l8284APs in sync.
r---------------I
RESET INPUT
RES 1 1 } - - - - - - - - - - < l m o _ - _ - - - - - - - - j
TE~~I~SATt~
RESET OUTPUT
Xl
OSCILLATOR OUTPUT
CRYSTAL
TERMINAL 2
CLOCK OUTPUT
CLOCK SELECTION INPUT
EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT
PERIPHERAL
CLOCK OUTPUT
CLOCK SYNCHRONIZ~~~~~ CSYNC 1 } - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - j r - - - - - t - READY INPUT 1
ADDRESS ENABLE INPUT 1 AEN
1
3 }-----<>.......
ADDRESS ENABLE INPUT 2 AEN
2
7 l-----<>r--..
5 READY READY OUTPUT
READY I N PUT 2
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
3-7
..
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin
Name
AEN1,
Address enable
AEN2
input
RDY1,
RDY2
--ASYNC
Input
oroutput
Function
When AENl and AEN2 are set low, ROYl and RDY2 are enabled, respectively. By using these two inputs
~
Input
separately, the CPU can be used to access two Multibusses. When not used as a multimaster, AEN should
be set to low. These inputs are active low.
These inputs are connected to the output signal indicating the completion of data reception from a system
Bus ready input
Input
bus device or, indicating that data is valid. ROYl and RDY2 are enabled when AENl and AEN2 are low, respectively. These inputs are active high.
This signal is used to select the synchronization mode 01 the READY signal generation circuit. When the
Active low input
Input
ASYNC signal is set low, the READY signal is generated in two synchronization steps. When the ASYNC
signal is set high, the READY signal is generated in one step.
---
The state of RDY appears at this output in synchronization with the CLK output. This is done to synchronize
READY
Ready output
Output
the READY output to the M5L8284AP internal clock because the RDY input generation is unrelated to the
ClK signal. This pin is normally connected to the CPU ready input and cleared after the required hold CPU
time has elapsed.
-~,---.----------------.~,-
---~----
X" X2
Crystal element
terminals
These pins are used to connect the crystal. The crystal frequency is 3 times of CPU clock frequency. The
Input
crystal should be in the 12-25MHz range with the series resistance as possible as small. Care should be
taken that these pins ara not shorted to ground.
--
~
F/C
Clock selection input
Input
-----~-----~.--.,-------.--~.
When F/C is set low, ClK and PClK outputs are driven from the crystal oscillator circuit. When it is set
high, they are driven from the EFI input.
---~----------
EFI
External clock input
Input
When F/C is set high, CLK and PCLK output signals are driven from this pin. A TTL level rectangular signal
and three times of the CPU frequency should be used.
--
This output is connected to the clock inputs of the CPU and the peripheral devices on the local bus. The
ClK
Clock output
Oulput
output waveform is 1/3 the frequency of the crystal oscillator connected at Xl and X2 or the signal applied
to the FEI input, and has a duty cycle of 1/3. Since for Vcc=5V, VOH=4. 5V, this output can be directly drive
the CPU clock input
PClK
OSC
Peripheral clock
output
Oscillator output
Output
Output
-
This output provides a clock signal for use with peripheral devices. The output waveform is 50% duty cycle
TTL level rectangular waveform with a frequency 1/2 that of the clock output.
---
This output is a TTL level crystal oscillator output. The frequency is the same as that of the crystal connected at Xl and X2, but care should be taken as the frequency will be unstable if these pins are lett open.
-~~----~-----~~-~~-~-~--
-~
RES
Reset input
Input
RESET
Reset output
Output
This active low input' is used to generate the reset output signal for the CPU. The input is a schmitt trigger
input so that by connecting a capacitor and a reSistor, the CPU reset Signal can be generated at power on.
~
CSYNC
3-8
Clock
input
synchronization
This pin is connected to the CPU reset input. The signal at this pin is synchronized the RES input with the
elK Signal. This output is active,high.
When using multiple M5L8284AP devices, this input is used as a clock synchronization input. When CSYNC
Input
is high, the internal counter of the M5L8284AP is reset and when CSYNL is Jaw, it begins operation. CSYNC
must be synchronized with EFt. See application notes.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
1----Vcc
f-----
Parameter
Conditions
Limits
-0.5-7
-------~------~-
r-~
Vo
---------
---~--------
-----~-
----
I
-~
--
-
~~-~~-
V
~--------~-----~--
t---~----
Parameter
-~~
V cc
-----------------
J
- -M-;;;--N~-Max-l
-~~
~--~----~--~~~---
Supply vOltage
High-level output current
Other outputs VOH=2. 4V
ELECTRIC CHARACTERISTICS
5
5,5
..
Unit
o
-1
V
rnA
rnA
----f--------+---+-------J
o
Vo l ,,;O,45V
Low-level output current
10L
'c
--~----l----~
4.5
elK VoH =4V
---1-------
~~------ --~---+-----
(T a =O-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
--
.~-,,---------
-65-150
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
v
--+-----~~
___ =_0_.5_- Vc:cc=--__+--__V__-I
0-75
'c
Output voltage
~?pr __ I-~~ti~~._!~_~~~i~ ~~_~~:~.~t~_~e_~~nge
T stg
Storage temperature range
--
-0.5-5.5
Input voltage
V,
-
Unit
f - - - - - - ------J-----j
Supply voltage
5
(T a =O-75, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Test conditions
Parameter
---~-
Min
----- - - - - Typ
Unit
Max
V,: --- ~~g~~;e:~nput vOltage--r.F1Es-. __- -__~--=----- ---------~+f--_-_2=.=6=~====-~---- =-_··___~_+---=-V----~~_/
~
__ ---l--
r-_V1L
.,_1
_
Otherir'Jllits_RIOS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2_t--__ ~ ____ ~
~~=VT=-" HYsteres~-""d_t_h_ _ _ ~
0.25
Vcc=5V
VIC
Input clamp voltage
VOH
Hi:h-I~~e::ut vo~age T:~h:r;p;s ClK==--- ~:~~~~~,:~:~~m~--
VOL
~----~
IIH
V
-_2_~-·~~·---------t----t--- ~
- - - - - - - - - - ------------+---+-----r-----+----Low-Ievet output voltage
Vcc=4.5V,
tOl =5mA
---------- ---------------t-----------------
High-level input current
- ---~-----'----r
Low-level input current
-~-~ ~-~------~~
I _ASYN~
_____ _
lather IT'I)uts ASYNC_ _
----------'---
Icc
-1
Vcc =4.5V,llc=-5mA
--.---
V
---
--------~--------------------
,
~ _ _V__ _
I-___~.:~ __ r _ - - V - -
Low-level input voltage
Supply current
Vcc=5.5V, VI=5. 25V
-----------------
Vcc=5.5V, V1=O. 45V
------------ Vcc=5.5V
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
~--
1---'-
O. 45
50
V
,uA
----1------+---1--------
-1.3
rnA
rnA
i---+----t----162
rnA
1----1----1-1--------0.5
- - -~-
3-9
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Vcc =5V±10%, T a=0-75"C , unless otherwise noted)
Alternate
Symbol
Limits
Min
symbol
elK repetition period
Te
TW(CLKH)
T W(CLKL)
Unit
Test conditions
Parameter
tCHCL
(Note 5 a, b) CLKFreg"SMHz
CLKF reg =10MHz
(Note 5 a, b) CLKFreg"SMHz
CLK low pulse width
Max
100
t CLCL
CLK high pulse width
Typ
telcH
CLKF reg =10MHz
ns
(y, t CLCL ) +2
ns
39
ns
(%t cLcL )-15
ns
53
ns
hLH
elK low-high transition time
t CH 1 CH 2
1-3.5V
10
ns
hHL
elK high-low transition time
t CL2CLl
3.5-1V
10
ns
T W(PCLKH)
PCLK high pulse width
t pHPL
f-hCL-20
.-
ns
T W(PCLKL)
PCLK low pulse width
t pLPH
hCL-20
ns
READY inhibit time with
tdlv
respect to CLK
(Note 1)
tRVLCL
(Note 2)
tRYHCH
-8
(Note 5 c. d)
--
ns
~-
READY enable time with
tdv
respect to elK
(Note 5 c, d) CLKFreg"SMHz
53
CLKF reg =10MHz
ns
--f--._-_.
TDHL(CLK-RESET)
High-low delay time from elK to RESET
tCLIL
40
ns
T DLH(ClK-PCLK)
Low-high delay time from elK to PCLK
t CLPH
22
ns
T DHL(CLK-PCLK)
High-low delay time from elK to PCLK
t CLPL
22
ns
Low·high ·delay time from OSC to CLK
tOlCH
-5
22
ns
T DHL(OSC-CLK)
High-low delay time from OSC to CLK
10LCL
2
35
ns
Tr
Output rise time
10LOH
O. S-2V (except eLK)
20
ns
tf
Output fall time
10HOL
2-0. SV (except ClK)
12
ns
Note 1
Applies to T2 state time
Applies to T3 and TW state times
-TDLH(OSC-CLK)
2
3-10
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
--
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8284AP
CLOCK GENERATOR AND DRIVER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(Vcc=5V
+1-10%, Ta=0-75"C, unless otherwise noted)
limits
Alternate
Symbol
r-----,-----,---~
Test conditions
Parameter
Unit
_____________ l----___
Sy_m_b_o_I_ _f - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _f-_M_i_n_+--__ Ty~~J._t:A-ax--_l__----~
f--j.c.lx""t"'al'-'Im=ax"--I_C-'ry-s-t-~~-jr-eq-u-e-n-cy-_-.---- ____ ~ __ ._____.___ _~ __..._____+___
tWCEFIH)
EFI high pulse width
90%-90%V 1N
___________-+_t:cE"cLEH
lO%-10%V IN
EFI repetition period (Note 3)
tRIVCL
time with respect to elK
ns
-+__'_3_f-_ _--I--____-l-__n:,::s_-l
___
ROY1 and ROY2 active hold
time with respect to elK
tRIVCH
35
ASYNC=HIGH
f---------f------------------- ---------- - - - 1 - - - - tSU(RDY)
13
ns
t ELEH + ()
------- - - - - ---------1-----------1------1--- --+------+---------1
RDY1 and RDY2 active setup
tSU(RDY)
__~_., __.___ ~~?-f--M-H-Z---j
--I-----------r-- ------------t---- --- -----r-------+--------I
l---'tw~IE=F_'_'L=)_I_E-FI-I-OW-'P~I::'-W-i-dt-hTC(FEI)
tEHEL
ns
~---------------+_----+_----+_-----+--------j
ASYNC=LOW
35
ns
----------------1-----------1--------------+----+------+------ ----------
---RDY1 and RDY2 inactive
tSUCRDY)
f--_ _ _ _t--setup time with respect to elK
ns
35
1 - - - - - - - - --------------+-----+_-----f- - - - c - - - - -
-+_ _ _ _ _
ROY1 and ROY2 hold
ns
tcLRIX
thCRDY)
time with respect to elK
f--------T==~------------_+-----~------+_-_+--+_-_+---~
'AS-YNC setup time
!
tSU(ASYNC}
with respect to elK _ ___________
_ ___
5_0---l_ _ _-l- ___
n_s_ _
~AYVCL
ASYNC hold time
with respect to ClK
°
+-__
--+__
tCLAYX
a
AENl and AEN2 setup time
tSU(AEN)
with respect to RDYl and RDY2
AENl andAEN2hoid
15
tAIVRIV
ns
- - - - + - - - - - - - - - - -- ns
------------------------+--------------r-----------------r-------+------+-------+---------j
ns
°
tCLAIX
time with respect to ClK
1-------- J-----------------------------._-------- -1-------------+--------------1-------+----CSYNC setup time
tSU(CSYNC)
1------th=
V ADDRESS BUS
T
OE
M5l6286P
TRANSCEIVER
(2)
16-BIT DATA BUS
(2) Use in the minimum mode
24MHz
Vee
rO~
M5l6264AP
MN/MX r---Vee
GE~~~X~OR -
f---
r
RES
ClK
~ READY
MlT6I-------------INTAI--------------
RESET
RDI-------------
~
ROY
COMMAND BUS
WR
i
DT/R
DEN
6086
CPU
-----1
I
I I
I I
I
I I
----.,
r-----'
1
I
ALE I---~~--~STB
I
I
1----''\
I
l-MEGA BYTE
.; ADDRESS BUS
.J
I I
I I
I I
I I
r
.c-----,
----, I
: L_---,~
1I
1
i;1
'\
j\I_____116-BIT
-----tOE
I
M5l8286P 1
L------tI,TRANfSEIVER,
*
I
DATA BUS
, I
W
L. _____ ..J
* : Option
Required when the number of devices driving the bus increases
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
3-1.5
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8286P/MSL8287P
OCTAL BUS TRANSCEIVER
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8286P and M5L8287P are semiconductor integrated
circuits consisting of a set of eight 3-state output bus transceivers for use with a variety of microprocessor systems.
PIN CONFIGURATIONS (TOP VIEW)
Vee
FEATURES
•
•
3-state, high-fanout outputs (l oL = 16mA, IOH = -1 mA for
the A outputs and IOL = 32mA, IOH = - 5mA for the B
outputs)
Low power dissipation
LOCAL BUS
DATA
SYSTEM BUS
DATA
APPLICATION
Two-way bus transceivers for microcomputer systems
~~mJ INPUT GND
FUNCTION
The M5L8286P and M5L8287P are two-way bus transceivers
with non-inverted and inverted outputs respectively.
When the output enable input OE is high, the local bus
data pins Ao ~ A7 and system data pins Bo ~ B7 are both
placed in the high-impedance state.
When the output enable input OE is low, the input and
output states are controlled by the transmit input T.
When T is high, Ao~A7 are input pins and Bo~B7 are output pins. When T is low, Bo ~ B7 are input pins and Ao ~ A7
are output pins.
11 ..... T TRANSMIT INPUT
Outline 20P4
Vee
LOCAL BUS
DATA
SYSTEM BUS
DATA
~~I~~J INPUT
11 ..... T TRANSMIT INPUT
GND
Outline 20P4
BLOCK DIAGRAM
LOCAL BUS
DATA
SYSTEM BUS
DATA
)-~======:::.L--
ex>
6
en
MEMORciu~~t~ MRDC~
Low power dissipation
s::
01
14
INTERRUPT
~ INTA ACKNOWLEDGE
COMMAND OUTPUT
i\OV,4,NCEO _ _
MEMORY WRITE AMWC
COMMAND OUTPUT
4-
13 ~IORCggM~~~D OUTPUT
co~J~~b~~~1
~
12 - AIOWC
Bus controller and bus driver for maximum mode operation
of th e 8086 an d 8088
MWTC
(OV)GND
11
'--------'
Outline
¢?R~~~~~OM~~ND
OUTPUT
~ 10WC ggJt~~~ OUTPUT
2081
FUNCTION
The M5L82888 is a bus controller and driver for maximum
mode operation of the 8086 and 8088 processors.
The command signals and control signals are decoded
by means of the 80- 82 outputs from the CPU and the control signals for I/O devices and memory are output.
The device can be used in the Multimaster mode in
which several CPUs acting as masters are connected to one
data bus. An input pin for the control signal AEN from an
8289 bus. arbiter is provided.
By using the M5L82888 as a bus controller, a highperformance 16-bit microcomputer system can be configured.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
vee
I----------~
I
STATUS INPUTS
1r ~s,
I
7 MRDC MEMORY READ COMMAND OUTPUT
STATUS
DECODER
8 AMWC
COMMAND
SIGNAL
f-------IGENERATOR
~gv:~;~g ~~~p~~Y
WRITE
9
MWfC
MEMORY WRITE COMMAND OUTPUT
11
iC5WC
1/0 WRITE COMMAN D OUTPUT
12 AIOWC
COMMAND
OUTPUTS
~gXf~.f~g g8T~tfr
1/0 READ COMMAND OUTPUT
INTERRUPT ACKNOWLEDGE
COMMAND OUTPUT
1/0 BUS MODE INPUT lOB
I
CLOCK INPUT ClK
2
ADDRESS· ENABLE INPUT AEN
6
COMMAND ENABLE INPUT CEN
15
DATA TRANSMITIRECEIVE OUTPUT
CONTROL 1-_ _--1 C~~~~~L
lOGIC
GENERATOR
DATA ENABLE OUTPUT
16 DEN
17 MCE/PDEN
I
L-----------4
GND
3-20
ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE OUTPUT
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
~:~~~~RCA~S~~~~ ~~~~t~ ~~i~~il
CONTROL
) OUTPUTS
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Pin
Input of
Name
~--~~-~-,-
- -So, S" S2
r-----
-~
~--
These are connected to the CPU status output $0 ...... 5;.
Status input
Input
-~
~------~~-~
--_.
Input
Clock input
CLK
Functions
output
----
--_._.-_..
. --,--------
The M5L828BS uses these signals to generate the proper timing command signals and control signals.
All pins are provided with internal pull-up resistors.
Used to connect the clock generator M5L8284AP clock output elK.
All outputs of the M5L8288S change in synchronization with the clock input.
Provides the strobe signal output for the address latches.
This pin is connected to the STB pin of the M5L8282P or M5L8283P and used to latch the address from the
Address latch enable
ALE
Output
output
CPU. When using any other address latch, the fonowing conditions must be satisfied.
l. The enable input must be active high.
2. Data reading is always performed while the enable input is high.
3. The latching operation is performed as the enable input goes from high to low.
DEN
Output
Data enable
--
Provides the data enable signal for the local bus or a data transceiver on the system bus.
Operates in active high mode.
- - f - - - - - r------------~---
Controls the flow of data between CPU and memory or peripheral t/O devices.
-
Data transmit/receive
DTIR
Output
control output
+~~-~~-
When this pin is high, the CPU can write data to the peripheral devices. When it is low, it can read data
from the peripheral devices.
It is connected to the transmit input T of the M5L8286P or M5L8287P bus transceivers.
-~~--~---
1------------
When the lOB input is low and the AEN input is set to high, all command outputs are put in the high--
--~
AEN
Input
Address enable input
c-------
~-------
CEN
--lOB
Input
Command enable input
I------.~---
Input/output bus mode
input
--
------
impedance state. When the lOB input is high, there is no effect on the tORC, 10WC, AIOWC, and INTA out.puts, the command output other than these four going into the high-impedance state.
None of the command outputs will go low until at least 115ns after AEN transits from high to low.
----
~---
When this pin is set to low, all command outputs and DEN are prohibited by the PDEN control output (not
high-impedance state). When set to high, the above outputs are enabled.
~~~
--~
I When this pin is set to high, the M5L8288S fUnctions in the I/O bus mode, and when set to low it functions in
I
Input
the system bus mode. (The 1/0 bus mode and system bus mode are described in the functional
description)
-~
--AIOWC
--10WC
-10RC
Advanced I/O write
Output
command output
I/O write command
Output
output
I/O read command
Output
output
The AIOWe issues an lID Write Command earlier in the machine cycle to give I/O devices an early indication of a write instruction its timing is the same as a read command signal. Active low.
Instructs an I/O device to drive its data onto the data bus. Active low.
-~-
---
AMWC
Advanced write
f------rThe AMWC
Output
command output
-
--MWTC
Memory write command
output
----~---,-.-----~
---
Memory read command
--
Interrupt acknowledge
MRDC
INTA
output
command output
Output
c--
i~sue;-;;;'emory
write command earlier in the machine cycle to give memory devices an
Output
~-;;;;;
• indication of a write instruction. Its timing is the same as a read command signal. Active low.
I Provides a write instruction to memory for the current data on the bus.
Active low.
-
Output
--
Instructs an 110 device to read the data on the data bus. Active low.
~~-
Provides an output instruction to memory for the present data on the bus.
Active low.
This output informs an interrupting device that it has accepted the interrupt. outputting a vector address out--
put instruction to the data bus. IORC operates in the same manner for interrupt cycles. Active low.
----
This output pin has two functions.
1. When the lOB input is set to low:
The MCE function is enabled. The signal acts as the enable signal which allows a slave PIC
(M5L8259AP) to read the cascade address output to the bus by the master PIC during an interrupt sequ-
Master cascade
MCEI
--PDEN
Enable output!
Peripheral data
Enable output
Output
ence. Active high.
2. When the lOB input is set to high:
--
The PDEN function is enabled. This output provides the enable signal to the data bus transceiver con-
nected to the liD interface bus when an instruction occurs (lORC, lOWe, Alowe, INTA). Operates the
same way as DEN with respect to the system bus.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
3-21
a
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The state of the command outputs and control outputs are
determined by the CPU status outputs Sa - 82. The table
summarizes the states of the outputs 80 - 82 and their cor-
responding valid command output names.
Depending upon whether the M5L82888 is in the I/O bus
mode or system bus mode, the command output sequence
will vary.
STATUS INPUTS AND COMMAND OUTPUTS RELATIONSHIPS
S,
5,
So
L
L
L
Interrupt acknowledge
L
L
H
Data read from an 110 port
IORC
L
H
L
Data write to an I/O port
IOWC,AIOWC
L
H
H
Halt
-
H
L
L
Instruction fetch
MRDC
H
H
H
.
8086, BOB8 status
Valid command output name
INTA
L
H
Read data from memory
MRDC
H
L
Write data to memory
MWTC, AMWC
H
H
Passive state
-
1. 1/0 bus mode operation
When lOB is high, the M5L82888 function in the 1/0 bus
mode.
In the I/O Bus mode all I/O command lines (IORC, 10WC,
AIOWC, INTA) are always enabled (i.e., not dependent on
AEN). When an 1/0 command is initiated by the processor,
the 8288 immediately activates the command lines using
PDEN and DT/R to control the 110 bus transceiver. The 110
command lines should not be used to control the system bus
in this configuration because no arbitration is present. This
mode allows one 8288 Bus Controller to handle two external
busses. No waiting is involved when the CPU wants to gain
access to the 1/0 bus. Normal memory access requires a
"Bus Ready" signal (AEN LOW) before it will proceed. It is
advantageous to use the lOB mode if 1/0 or peripherals dedicated to one processor exist in a multi-processor system.
the AEN Line is activated (LOW). This mode assumes bus
arbitration logic will inform the bus controller (on the AEN
line) when the bus is free for use. Both memory and 1/0
commands wait for bus arbitration. This mode is used when
only one bus exists. Here, both 1/0 and memory are shared
by more than one processor.
3. AMWC and AIOWC outputs
With respect to the normal write control Signals MWTC and
10WC, the advanced-write command signals AMWC and
AIOWC transit low one clock cycle earlier and remain low
for two clock cycles.
These Signals are used with peripheral devices or static
RAM devices which require a long write pulse, so that the
CPU does not go into an unnecessarily wait cycle.
2. System bus mode operation
When lOB is set to low, the M5L82888 enters the system bus
mode. In this mode no command is issued until 115 ns after
3-22
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
(Ta =0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation
~
..
----------
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Limits
Unit
-0.5-+7
V
-0.5-+5.5
V
Conditions
Parameter
Vee
-O.5- V ee
V
1.5
W
0-75
'c
'c
-65-+150
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
II
(Ta =0-75'C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Min
Vee
IOH
taL
4.5
Supply voltage
Nom
Max
5
5.5
High-level output
Command outputs
-5
current
Control outputs
-1
Low-Jevel output
Command outputs
32
current
Control outputs
16
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
rnA
mA
(Ta =0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Test conditions
Parameter
Unit
Typ
Min
V'H
High-level input voltage
V'L
Low-level input voltage
V,e
Input clamp voltage
V OH
High-level output voltage
VOL
LOW-level output voltage
Max
2
V
0.8
V
-1
V
Command outputs
Vcc=4. SV, V,=2V
IOH=-5mA
2.4
Control outputs
V,=O.8V
IOH=-lmA
2.4
Command outputs
Vcc=4. SV, V,=2V
IOL=32mA
0.5
Control outputs
V,=O.8V
IOL=16mA
0.5
V
V
I'H
High-level input voltage
Vcc=S. SV, V,=S. SV
III
Low-Ieve) input voltage
Vcc=S. SV, V,=O. 4SV
IOZH
Off-state output current with high-level applied to output Vcc=S. SV, Vo=S. 2SV
IOZL
Off-state output current with lOW-level applied to output
Vcc=S. SV, Vo=O. 4V
lee
Supply current
Vcc=S. SV
50
/-lA
-0.7
rnA
100
/-lA
~
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
-100
/-lA
160
rnA
3-23
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8288S
BUS CONTROLLER FOR 8086/8088/8089 PROCESSORS
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
Parameter
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK input to DEN output
t pHL
Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From elK input to PDEN output
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK Input to DEN output.
t pHL
Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From elK input to PDEN output
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK input to ALE output
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagaton time
From elK input to MCE output
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From
SO-Sl inputs to ALE output
Test conditions
symbol
Limits
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
TCVNV
5
45
ns
TCVNX
10
45
ns
TCLLH
20
ns
TCLMCH
20
ns
TSVLH
20
ns
TSVMCH
20
ns
Output
From
tpHL
Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From ClK input to ALE output
TCHLL
4
15
ns
tpHL
Output high~level to low~level propagation time
From ClK input to MRDC, IORC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and lowe outputs
TCLML
10
35
ns
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From ClK input to MRDC, IOAC, INTA.
AMWC, MWTe, AIOWe, and lowe outputs
TCLMH
10
35
ns
t pHL
Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From ClK input to DT/R output
TCHDTL
t pLH
Output low-level to high-level propagation time
From elK inptJt to DTiR output
t pzH
High-level output enable time
From AEN input to MADC, IOAC, INTA.
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and IOWC outputs
t pHZ
High-level output disable time
From AEN input to MADC, IORC, INTA,
AMwe, MWTC, A10WC, and lowe outputs
TAEHCZ
high~level
propagation time
Alternate
t pLH
low~level
to
(Vcc=5V±10%, Ta=0-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
SO-s, inputs to MCE output
---
--(Note 1)
50
ns
TCHDTH
30
ns
TAELCH
40
ns
40
ns
200
ns
20
ns
25
ns
35
ns
~-
t pHL
Output high-level to low-level propagation time
From AEN input to MADC, IORC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWC, and IOWC outputs
TAELCV
115
---~--
t pLH
t pHL
Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time
From AEN input to DEN output
TAEVNV
t pLH
t pHL
Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time From CEN input to
DEN and POEN outputs
TCEVNV
Output low-level to high-level and high-level to
low-level propagation time.
From CEN input to MADC, IOAC, INTA,
AMWC, MWTC, AIOWe and lowe outputs
TCELRH
t pLH
t pHL
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol
---
(Vcc =5V±10%, Ta=0-75'C , unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Alternate
symbol
Test conditions
Limits
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
te
Clock CLK cycle time
TCLCL
100
ns
tW(CLKL)
Clock CLK low pulse width
TCLCH
50
ns
tWCCLKH)
Clock CLK high pulse width
TCHCL
30
ns
tSU ("§o-S2)
5o-S, setup time with respect to
T for the T, state
TSVCH
35
ns
TCHSV
10
ns
TSHCL
35
ns
TCLSH
10
th
I\)
ex>
INIT-
<0
\l
BREO
<-
<-
CLK CLOCK INPUT
LOCK LOCK INPUT
COMMON
CROLCK BUS LOCK
INPUT
16
<-
15
<-
14
<-
ANYROST~Ep2 of T1 and before 1>1 of T4 should be stable.
AEN negative-edge is related to ClK, positive-edge to ClK.
ANE positive-edge is generated after as ricrity is lost.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
3-35
NMOS PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH 1/0 PORTS AND TIMER
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8155P is a 2K-bit RAM (256-word by 8-bit) fabricated with the Nchannel silicon-gate EO-MOS technology.
This IC has 3 I/O ports and a 14-bit counter/timer which
make it a good choice to extend the functions of an 8-bit
microcomputer. It is incased in a 40-pin plastic OIL package
and operates with a single 5V power supply.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
jPC3- 1
I/O PORT C ) PC, ~ 2
RESET INPUT RESET -
3
4
1/0 PORT C PC s -
5
TIMER INPUT TIMER IN -
110
1PORT
C
TIMER OUTPUT TI MER OUT ~ 6
SELEC~E~~Bt
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Compatible with MELPS 85 devices
Static RAM: 256 words by 8 bits
Programmable 8-bit I/O port: 2
Programmable 6-bit I/O port: 1
Programmable counter/timer: 14 bits
Multiplexed address/data bus
CHIP ENABLE INPUT CE -
10/M -
7
8
READ INPUT RD -
9
WRITE INPUl WR
I/O
PORT B
-10
ADmllBSLSE l~~b~ ALE - 11
ADo-12
AD I
-13
BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESSIDATA BUS
I/O
PORT A
APPLICATION
Extension of I/O ports and timer function for MELPS 85 and
MELPS 8-48 devices
(av)v ss
Outline 40P4
FUNCTION
The M5L8155P is composed of RAM, I/O ports and counter/
timer. The RAM is a 2K-bit static RAM organized as 256
words by 8 bits. The I/O ports consist of 2 programmable 8bit ports and 1 programmable 6-bit port. The terminals of the
6-bit port can be programmed to function as control terminals for the 8-bit ports, so that the 8-bit ports can be operated
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(5V)V
cc
in a handshake mode. The counter/timer is composed of 14
bits that can be used to count down (events or time) and it
can generate square wave pulses that can be used for
counting and timing.
@ ---- - - - - ---- - - - - -----
(av)vss ~
STATIC RAM
(256 WORDS X 8 BITS)
I/O
PORT A
BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
I/O
PORT B
RESET INPUT RESET 4
MEMORY SELECT INPUT 10/M
CHIP ENABLE INPUT
CE
READ
WRITE
ADDRESS
ENABLE
INPUT
INPUT
LATCH
INPUT
RD
I/O
PORT C
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-3
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8155P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Pin assignment of control signals of port C
Table
OPERATION
Data Bus Buffer
PC5
PC.
PC3
PC2
PC,
ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic controls the transfer of data by
interpreting I/O control bus output signals (RD, WR, 10/M
and ALE) along with CPU signal (CE). RESET signal is also
used to control the transfer of data and commands.
Bidirectional AddresslData Bus (AD o-AD 7 )
The bidirectional address/data bus is a 3-state 8-bit bus.
The 8-bit address is latched in the internal latch by the failing edge of ALE. Then if 10/M input signal is at high-level,
the address of I/O port, counter/timer, or command register
is selected. If it is at low-level, memory address is selected.
The 8-bit address data is transferred by read input (RD)
or write input (WR).
Chip Enable Input (CE)
When CE is at low-level, the address information on
address/data bus is stored in the M5L8155P
Read Input (RD)
When RD is at low-level the data bus buffer is active. If 10/
M input signal is at low-level, the contents of RAM are read
through the address/data bus. If 10/M input is at high-level,
the selected contents of I/O port or counter/timer are read
through the address/data bus.
Write Input (WR)
When WR is at low-level, the data on the address/data bus
are written into RAM if 10/M is at low-level, or if 10/M is at
high-level they are written into I/O port, counter/timer or
command register.
Address Latch Enable Input (ALE)
An address on the address/data bus along with the levels of
CE and 10/M are latched in the M5L8155P on the falling
edge of ALE.
10lMemory Input (101M)
When 10/M is at low-level, the RAM is selected, while at
high-level the I/O port, counter/timer or command register
are selected.
1/0 Port A (PAo-PA1)
Port A is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Inputloutputsetting is controlled by the system software.
1/0 Port B (PB o-PB 7)
Port B is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.
1/0 Port C (PCo-PC s)
Port C is a 6-bit I/O port that can also be used to output
control signals of port A (PA) or port B (PB). The functions
of port C are controlled by the system software. When port C
is used to output control signals of ports A or B the assignment of the signals to the pins is as shown in Table 1.
4-4
Function
Pin
ThiS 3-state bidirectional 8-bit buffer is used to transfer the
data while input or output instructions are being executed by
the CPU. Command and address information is also transferred through the data bus buffer.
PCa
B STB
B BF
(port B strobe)
(port B buffer full)
BINTR
(port B interrupt)
A STB
(port A strobe)
A BF
(port A buffer full)
AINTR
(port A interrupt)
Timer Input (TIMER IN)
The signal at this input terminal is used by the counter/timer
for counting events or time. (3M Hz max.)
Timer Output (TIMER OUT)
A square wave signal or pulse from the counter/timer is output through this pin when in the operation mode.
Command Register (8 bits)
The command register is an 8-bit latched register. The
loworder 4 bits (bits 0-3) are used for controlling and determination of mode of the ports. Bits 4 and 5 are used as interrupt enable flags for ports A and B when port C is used
as a control port. Bits 6 and 7 are used for controlling the
counter/timer. The contents of the command register are rewritten by output instructions (address I/O XXXXXOOO).
Details of the functions of the individual bits of the command register are shown in Table 2.
Table
2
Bit
Symbol
a
PA
I
PB
2
PC,
3
PC2
4
Bit functions of the command register
Function
PORT A 1/0 FLAG
I: OUTPUT PORT A
0: INPUT PORT A
PORT B 1/0 FLAG
I: OUTPUT PORT B
0: INPUT PORT B
PORT C FLAG
00: ALTI
II: ALT2
01: ALT3
lEA
5
IEB
6
TMI
10: ALT4
PORT A INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG
PORT B INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG
I: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT
I: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT
COUNTERITIMER CONTROL
00: NO INFLUENCE ON COUNTERITIMER OPERATION
01: COUNTERITIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED (IF
NOT ALREADY STOPPED)
10: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED AF-
7
TM2
•. MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
TER THE CURRENT COUNTERITIMER OPERATION
IS COMPLETED
II: COUNTERITIMER OPERATION STARTED
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH 1/0 PORTS AND TIMER
Status Register (7 bits)
The status register is a 7-bitlatched register. The loworder 5
bits (bits 0-4) are used as status flags for the 1/0 ports. Bit
6 is as a status flag for the counter/timer. The contents of
Table
3
the status register are transferred into the CPU by reading
(INPUT instruction, address 1/0 XXXXXOOO). Details of the
functions of the individual bits of the status register are
shown in Table 3.
Bit functions of the status register
Bit
Symbol
Function
0
INTR A
PORT A INTERRUPT REQUEST
1
A BF
PORT A BUFFER FULL FLAG
2
INTE A
PORT A INTERRUPT ENABLE
3
INTR B
PORT B INTERRUPT REQUEST
4
B BF
PORT B BUFFER FULL FLAG
5
INTE B
PORT B INTERRUPT ENABLE
6
TIMER
COUNTER/TIMER INTERRUPT
7
-
(SET TO 1 WHEN THE FINAL LIMIT
OF THE COUNTER/TIMER IS REACHED
II
AND IS RESET TO 0 WHEN THE
STATUS IS READ)
THIS BIT IS NOT USED
1/0 Ports
Command/status registers (8 bits/7 bits)
These registers are assigned address XXXXXOOO. When executing an OUTPUT instruction, the contents of the command register are rewritten. When executing an INPUT instruction the contents of the status register are read.
Port A Register (8 bits)
Port A Register is assigned address XXXXX001. This register
can be programmed as an input or output by setting the
appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table
2.
Port A can be operated in basic or strobe mode and is
assigned 1/0 terminal PAa-PA7.
Table
4
State
Terminal
PCs
PC.
PC3
PC2
PC,
PCa
Port B Register (8 bits)
Port B register is assigned address XXXXX010. As with Port
A register, this register can be programmed as an input or
output by setting the appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table 2. Port B can be operated in basic or
strobe mode and is assigned 110 terminals PBa-PB7·
Port C Register (6 bits)
Port C register is assigned address XXXXXOll. This port is
used for controlling inputloutput operations of ports A and B
by selectively setting bits 2 and 3 of the command register
as shown in Table 2. Details of the functions of the various
setting of bits 2 and 3 are shown in Table 4. Port C is
assigned 1/0 terminals PCa - PC5 and when used as port
control signals, the 3 low-order bits are assigned for port A
while the 3 high-order bits are assigned for port B.
Functions of port C
ALT 1
ALT 2
Input
Output
Output
ALT 3
Input
Output
Output
Input
Output
Output
Input
Output
A STB (port A strobe)
B STB (port B strobe)
B B F (port buffer full)
B INTR (port B interrupt)
A STB (port A strobe)
Input
Output
A BF (port A buffer full)
A BF (port A buffer full)
Input
Output
A INTR (port A interrupt)
A INTR (port A interrupt)
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
ALT4
4-5
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL815SP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Configuration of ports
A block diagram of 1 bit of ports A and B is shown in Fig. 1.
While port A or B is programmed as an output port, if the
port is addressed by an input instruction, the contents of the
selected port can be read. When a port is put in input mode,
the output latch is cleared and writing into the output latch is
disabled. Therefore when a port is changed to output mode
from input mode, low-level signals are output through the
port. When a reset signal is applied, all 3 ports (PA, PB, and
PC) will be input ports and their output latches are cleared.
Port C has the same configuration as ports A and B in modes AL T1 and ALT2.
M5L8155P
EXTERNAL PIN
( PORT A OR)
PORT B
1. WR PORT=IOiM"WR'CE'
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)
2. RD PORT=IOiM"RD'CE'
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)
3. MULTIPLEX CONTROL
*1 STROBE INPUT MODE
*2 INPUT MODE
MD
Fig. 1
Table
Configuration for 1 bit of port A or B
5
The basic functions of the 1/0 ports are shown in Table 5.
The control signal levels to ports A and B, when port C is
programmed as a control port, are shown in Table 6.
Basic functions of I/O ports
Address
Function
RD
WR
0
1
AD bus - status register
1
0
Command register - AD bus
0
1
AD bus - port A
1
0
Port A - AD bus
0
1
AD bus - port B
1
0
Port B - AD bus
0
1
AD bus - port C
1
0
Port C - AD bus
XXXXXOOO
"
XXXXXOOI
XXXXX010
XXXXX011
Table
4-6
*3 OUTPUT MODE
4. MD= 1 : OUTPUT MODE
o : INPUT MODE
6 Port control signal levels at ALT3 and ALT4
Control Signal
Output mode
Input mode
STS
Input
Input
SF
"L"
"L"
INTR
"H"
"L"
CounterlTimer
The counterltimer is a 14-bit counting register plus 2 mode
flags. The register has two section&: address I/O XXXXX100
is assigned to the low-order 8 bits and address I/O
XXXXX101 is assigned to the high-order 8 bits. The laworder bits O~ 13 are used for counting or timing. The counter
is initialized by the program and then counted down to zero.
The initial setting can range from 2'6 to 3FFF,6. Bits 14 and
15 are used as mode flags.
The mode flags select 1 of 4 modes with functions as
follow:
Mode 0: Outputs high-level signal during the former
half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half
of the counter operati on
• MITSUBISH,I
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81SSP
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Table
7
Format of counter/timer
Mode 1:
Mode 2:
Outputs square wave signals as in mode 0
Outputs a low-level pulse during the final
count down
Mode 3: Outputs a lOW-level pulse during each final
count down
Starting and stopping the counter/timer is controlled by
bits 6 and 7 of the command register (see Table 2 for
details). The format and timer modes of the counter/timer
register are shown in Table 7 and Table 8.
The counter/timer is not influenced by a reset, but counting
is discontinued. To resume counting, a start command must
be written into the command register as shown in Table 2.
While operating 2n+ 1 count down in mode 0, a high-level
signal is output during the n+ 1 counting and a low-level signal is output during the n counting.
Bit Number
Function
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
XXXXXIOO T7 T6 Ts T4 T3 T z T, To
TH E LOW-ORDER 8 BITS
OF THE COUNTER REGISTER
Ml,M2: TIMER MODE
THE HIGH·ORDER 6 BITS
XXXXX101 M2 M, T13 T'2 T11 TlO Tg T8
T,-T13: OF THE COUNTER REGISTER
Table
8 Timer mode
M,
Timer operation
0
0
Outputs high-level signal during the former half of Ina counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half of the counter operation
{mode O}
0
1
Outputs square wave signals in mode 0
1
0
M2
1
1
(mode 1)
Outputs a low-level pulse during the final count dowm
II
(mode 2)
Outputs a lOW-level pulse during each final count down
(mode 3)
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Maximum power diSSipation
T apr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
With respect to vss
Limits
Unit
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
------
Ta=25'C
W
1.5
-~
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
-20-75
"C
-65-150
'c
(Ta=-20-75"C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Power-supply voltage
4.75
V ,L
LOW-level input voltage
-0.5
V 1H
High-Ieve! input voltage
2
Nom
Max
5
5.25
V
0.8
V
Vcc+O.5
V
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=-20-75"C, Vcc=5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
V OH
High-level output voltage
Vss=OV, IOH=-400,uA
VOL
LOW-level output voltage
Vss=OV, 10L=2mA
I,
Input leak current
VsS=OV,V,=O-VCC
-10
10
/-I A
-100
100
/-I A
-10
10
/-I
10
pF
It(CE)
Input leak current, CE pin
Vss=OV, V,=O-VCC
loz
Output floating leak current
Vss=OV, V,=O. 45-Vcc
Ci
Input capacitance
VIL =OV, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C
Cilo
Input/output terminal capacitance
VIIOL=OV, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C
lee
Supply current from Vee
Vss=OV
Note 1
V
2.4
0.45
V
A
20
pF
180
mA
Current flowing into an IC is positive, out is negative.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-7
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8155P
2048·BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a=-20-75·C, Vcc=5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Unit
Test conditions
symbol
Min
Typ
Max
tSU(A-U
Address setup time before latch
tAL
50
ns
theL-A)
Address hold time after latch
tLA
80
ns
thCL-RWH)
Read/write hold time after latch
tLc
100
ns
tw(U
Latch pulse width
tLL
100
ns
theRw-u
Latch hold time after read/write
tCL
20
ns
tW(RWL)
Read/Write low-level pulse width
tcc
250
ns
tSU(D-W)
Data setup time before write
tow
150
ns
theW-D)
Data hold time after write
two
0
ns
tW(RWH)
Read/write high-level pulse width
tRY
300
ns
tSU(P-R)
Port setup time before read
tpR
70
ns
th(R_P)
Port hold time after read
IRP
50
ns
tW(STS)
Strobe pulse width
Iss
200
ns
tSU(P-STB)
Port setup time before strobe
tpss
50
ns
th(STB-P)
Port hold time after strobe
t pHS
120
ns
tW<¢H)
Timer input high-level pulse width
12
120
ns
tw(';U
Timer input low-level pulse width
t,
80
ns
Icc 1)
Timer input cycle time
teye
320
ns
Ire" )
Timer input rise time
Ir
30
ns
Ife
Timer input faU time
If
30
ns
1 )
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=-20-75·C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Unit
Test conditions
symbol
Min
Typ
Max
tPXV(R-DQ)
Propagation time from 'read to data output
IRD
170
ns
tPZX(A-OQ)
Propagation time from address to data output
lAD
400
ns
tPVZ(R-OQ)
Propagalion lime from read to data floating (Nole 2)
100
ns
400
ns
tRDF
0
Iwp
tPHL(W_P)
Propagation time from write to data output
twp
tPLH(W_P)
tPlH(STB-BF)
Propagation time from strobe to SF flag
tSBF
400
ns
tPHL(A-BF)
Propagation time from read to SF flag
tRBE
400
ns
IpLH(STB-INTR)
Propagation time from strobe to interrupt
lSI
400
ns
tPHL[R.INTR)
Propagation time from read to interrupt
tRo'l
400
ns
tPHL(STB-BF)
Propagation time from strobe to SF flag
tSBE
400
ns
tPLH(W.SF)
Propagation time from write to SF flag
tWBF
400
ns
tPHUW-INTR)
Propagation time from write to interrupt
IWI
400
ns
400
ns
tpHu f-OUT)
Propagation time from timer input to timer output
tTH
tpLH ( f -OUT}
tPZX(R_DQ)
Nole 1
2
4-8
ITL
propagation time from read to data enable
tRDE
Measurement conditions C=150pF
Measurement condilions of nole 1 are not applied.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
10
ns
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8155P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
TIMING DIAGRAM
(reference level, high-level=2V, low-level=O.8V)
Basic output
~
PORT
tpHL{W-P)
tPlH(W-P)
~
I
l
th(w-oJ
th(L-RWHl
101M
lL-
tW(RWH)
tW(RWU
\
V
\
\
V
\
)
K
ADDRESS
)
~
DATA
th(RW-Ll
tSU(o-w)
th(L-A)
tSU(A-Ll
..
ALE
tW(Ll
Basic input
)
PORT
K
tSU(P-R}
-I-- I-- thlR-pi
jZftW(RwLl
te(l-Rwl
tpXV(R-DQ)
i'-
_I
tW(RWH)
tC(Rw-Ll
~DQ)
f---tPXZ(R-OOJ
101M
'\
\
'"'
)t
lJ
\
/
\
tplX(A-O)
7.l
ADDRESS
tSU(A-Ll
ALE
/
!hIL-Ai
~
DATA
>--<=
/
1\ . .
tw(ll
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-9
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81SSP
2048·BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Strobed output
PORT __........................................~~............................................................_
tpLH(W-P)
tpHuw-p)
INTR
SF
Strobed input
Timer (Note 1)
TIMER IN
TIMER OUT
PULSE MODE
\.. ____ J
(Note2)
TIMER MODE
OUT _________ ~-.J' (Note 2)
SQUARE WAVE
Note 1
2
4-10
The wave form is shown counting down from 5 to 1.
As long as the M1 mode flag of the timer register is at
high-level, pulses are continuously output.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8156P is a 2K-bit RAM (256-word by 8-bit) fabricated with the N-channel silicon-gate EO-MOS technology.
This IC has 3 I/O ports and a 14-bit counter/timer which
make it a good choice to extend the functions of an 8-bit
microcomputer. It is incased in a 40-pin plastic OIL package
and operates with a single 5V power supply.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Compatible with MELPS 85 devices
Static RAM: 256 words by 8 bits
Programmable 8-bit I/O port 2
Programmable 6-bit I/O port 1
Programmable counter/timer: 14 bits
Multiplexed address/data bus
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
J PC3- 1
110 PORT C ) PC, _ 2
TIMER INPUT TIMER IN -
3
RESET INPUT RESET -
4
5
I/O PORT C PC5 -
1/0
1PORT
C
TIMER OUTPUT TIMER OUT ~ 6
SELEC~E~~~t 10/M CHIP ENABLE INPUT CE -
8
READ INPUT RD -
9
WRITE INPUl WR
ADE~Jl1;lSE 1~~~~
7
I/O
PORT B
-10
ALE - 11
ADo-12
BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
I/O
PORT A
APPLICATION
Extension of I/O ports and timer function for MELPS 85 and
MELPS 8-48 devices
(OV)vss
Outline 40P4
FUNCTION
The M5L8156P is composed of RAM, I/O ports and counter/
timer. The RAM is a 2K-bit static RAM organized as 256
words by 8 bits. The I/O ports consist of 2 programmable 8bit ports and 1 programmable 6-bit port. The terminals of the
6-bit port can be programmed to function as control terminals for the 8-bit ports, so that the 8-bit ports can be operated
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(5V)Vcc~
(ov) vss
in a handshake mode. The counter/timer is composed of 14
bits that can be used to count down (events or time) and it
can generate square wave pulses that can be used for
counting and timing.
-----------------
~
STATIC RAM
(256 WORDS X 8 BITS)
I/O
PORT A
DATA BUS
BUFFER
BIDIRECTIONAL
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
I/O
PORT B
RESET INPUT RESET 4
MEMORY SELECT INPUT 10iM 7
CHIP ENABLE INPUT
CE
READ
WRITE
ADDRESS
ENABLE
INPUT
INPUT
LATCH
INPUT
RD
READ/
WRITE
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
I/O
PORT C
4-11
a
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
OPERATION
Pin assignment of control signals of port C
Table
Data Bus Buffer
Pin
This 3-state bidirectional 8-bit buffer is used to transfer the
data while input or output instructions are being executed by
the CPU. Command and address information is also transferred through the data bus buffer.
Bidirectional Address/Data Bus (ADo-AD 7 )
The bidirectional address/data bus is a3-state 8-bit bus.
The 8-bit address is latched in the internal latch by the failing edge of ALE. Then if 10/M input signal is at high-level,
the address of I/O port, counter/timer, or command register
is selected. If it is at low-level, memory address is selected.
The 8-bit address data is transferred by read input (RD)
or write input (WR).
Chip Enable Input (CE)
When CE is at high-level, the address information on
address/data bus is stored in the M5L8156P
Read Input (RD)
When RD is at lOW-level the data bus buffer is active. If 10/
M input signal is at low-level, the contents of RAM are read
through the address/data bus. If 10/M input is at high-level,
the selected contents of I/O port or counter/timer are 'read
through the address/data bus.
Write Input (WR)
When XR is at low-level, the data on the addressldata bus
are written into RAM if 101M is at low-level, or if 10/M is at
high-level they are written into I/O port, counter/timer or
command register.
Address Latch Enable Input (ALE)
An address on the address/data bus along with the levels of
CE and 10/M are latched in the M5L8156P on the falling
edge of ALE.
10/Memory Input (101M)
When 10/M is at low-level, the RAM is selected, while at
high-level the I/O port, counter/timer or command register
are selected.
I/O Port A (PAo-PA 1)
(port B strobe)
B BF
BINTR
(port B buffer full)
A STB
(port A strobe)
PC,.
A BF
(port A buffer full)
PCa
AINTR
(port A interrupt)
PC.
PC 3
(port B interrupt)
Timer Input (TIMER IN)
The signal at this input terminal is used by the counter/timer
for counting events or time. (3MHz max.)
Timer Output (TIMER OUT)
A square wave signal or pulse from the counter/timer is output through this pin when in the operation mode.
Command Register (8 bits)
The command register is an 8-bit latched register. The
loworder 4 bits (bits 0-3) are used for controlling and determination of the mode of the ports. Bits 4 and 5 are used
as interrupt enable flags for ports A and B when port C is
used as a control port. Bits 6 and 7 are used for controlling
the counter/timer. The contents of the command register are
rewritten by output instructions (address I/O XXXXXOOO).
Details of the functions of the individual bits of the command register are shown in Table 2.
Table
2
Bit
Symbol
a
PA
1
PB
2
PC,
3
PC 2
4
5
Bit functions of the command register
Function
PORT A I/O FLAG
PORT B I/O FLAG
-_.-
1: OUTPUT PORT A
0: INPUT PORT A
1: OUTPUT PORT B
0: INPUT PORT B
PORT C FLAG
00: ALTl
11: ALT2
01: ALT3
lEA
IEB
- - - _00. __ 00.-
Port A is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.
10: ALT4
PORT A INTERRUPT
ENABLE FLAG
PORT B INTERRUPT
1: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: DISABLE INTERRUPT
1: ENABLE INTERRUPT
0: . __
DISABLE
INTERRUPT
_ _ _ENABLE
_ _ _ .FLAG
_ _ _ ._._00 ____
.. _ _ _ . _
_____
COUNTER/TIMER CONTROL
6
TMl
I/O Port B (PB o-PB 7 )
00: NO INFLUENCE ON COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION
01: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED (IF
Port B is an 8-bit general-purpose I/O port. Input/output setting is controlled by the system software.
I/O Port C (PCo-PC s)
Port C is a 6-bit I/O port that can also be used to output
control signals of port A (PA) or port B (PB). The functions
of port C are controlled by the system software. When port C
is used to output control signals of ports A or B the assignment of the signals to the pins is as shown in Table 1.
4-12
--
PC 2
ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic controls the transfer of data by
interpreting I/O control bus output signals (RD, WR, 10/M
and ALE) along with CPU signal (CE). RESET signal is also
used to control the transfer of data and commands.
Function
B STB
PCs
•
NOT ALREADY STOPPED)
10: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION DISCONTINUED AF-
7
TM2
MITSUBISHI
IIhI.. ELECTRIC
TER THE CURRENT COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION
IS COMPLETED
11: COUNTER/TIMER OPERATION STARTED
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8156P
204S-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Status Register (7 bits)
The status register is a 7-bit latched register. The loworder 5
bits (bits 0-4) are used as status flags for the liD ports. Bit
6 is as a status flag for the counter/timer. The contents of
Table
Bit functions of the status register
3
Bit
Symbol
0
INTR A
--'-'-'
the status register are transferred into the CPU by reading
(INPUT instruction, address liD XXXXXOOO). Details of the
functions of the individual bits of the status register are
shown in Table 3.
1-------
i
·--1----·
...
-------~-----,-----~
1
A BF
PORT A BUFFER FULL FLAG
2
INTE A
PORT A INTERRUPT ENABLE
4
B BF
PORT B BUFFER FULL FLAG
5
INTE B
PORT B INTERRUPT ENABLE
- - - _.
3
INTR B
6
Function
PORT A INTERRUPT REOUEST
-
PORT B INTERRUPT REQUEST
.-
r----
.-
(SET TO 1 WHEN THE FINAL LIMIT
OF THE COUNTER/TIMER IS REACHED
COUNTER/TIMER INTERRUPT
TIMER
AND IS RESET TO 0 WHEN THE
STATUS IS READ)
-7
THIS BIT IS NOT USED
-
I/O Ports
Port B Register (8 bits)
Command/status registers (8 bits/7 bits)
These register~ are assigned address XXXXXOOO. When executing an OUTPUT instruction, the contents of the command register are rewritten. When executing an INPUT instruction the contents of the status register are read.
Port B register is assigned address XXXXX01 O. As with Port
A register, this register can be programmed as an input or
output by setting the appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table 2. Port B can be operated in basic or
strobe mode and is assigned liD terminals PBa-PB7.
Port A Register (8 bits)
Port C Register (6 bits)
Port A Register is assigned address XXXXX001. This register
can be programmed as an input or output by setting the
appropriate bits of the command register as shown in Table
Port C register is assigned address XXXXXOll. This port is
used for controlling input/output operations of ports A and B
by selectively setting bits 2 and 3 of the command register
as shown in Table 2. Details of the functions of the various
setting of bits 2 and 3 are shown in Table 4. Port C is
assigned liD terminals PCa - PC 5 and when used as port
control signals, the 3 low-order bits are assigned for port A
while the 3 high-order bits are assigned for port B.
2.
Port A can be operated in basiC or strobe made and is
aSSigned liD terminal PAa-PA7.
Table
4
Functions of port C
State
Terminal
ALT 1
PC5
PC,
PC 3
PC 2
PC,
PCo
Input
Output
Output
Input
Output
Output
Output
B BF (port buffer full)
Input
Output
B I NTR (port B interrupt)
Input
Output
A STB (port A strobe)
A STB
Input
Output
A BF (port A buffer full)
A BF (port A buffer full)
Output
A INTR (port A interrupt)
A INTR (port A interrupt)
Input
_.
I
ALT 2
ALT 3
- - - - - - - - , - - --------
- .-----_.-._------- ---
----"--._--
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
-+--=B
ALT 4
STB (port B strobe)
(port A strobe)
4-13
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8156P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Configuration of ports
A block diagram of 1 bit of ports A and B is shown in Fig. 1.
While port A or B is programmed as an output port, if the
port is addressed by an input instruction, the contents of the
selected port can be read. When a port is put in input mode,
the output latch is cleared and writing into the output latch is
disabled. Therefore when a port is changed to output mode
from input mode, low-level signals are output through the
port. When a reset signal is applied, all 3 ports (PA, PB, and
PC) will be input ports and their output latches are cleared.
Port C has the same configuration as ports A and B in modes AL T1 and ALT2.
M5L8156P
Q
INTERNAL
DATA BUS
c--J
I
D
CLK
STB
1*1
I
EXTERNAL PIN
( PORT A OR)
PORT B
.
RD PORT
~------------------~D
Q
WR PORT
1. WR PORT=IOiWi·WR·CE·
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)
2. RD PORT=IO/M·RD·CE·
(PORT ADDRESS SELECTED)
3. MULTIPLEX CONTROL
1 STROBE INPUT MODE
*2 INPUT MODE
*
MD
Fig. 1
Table
Configuration for 1 bit of port A or B
5
Basic functions of I/O ports
Address
1--------.
The basic functions of the I/O ports are shown in Table 5.
The control signal levels to ports A and B, when port C is
programmed as a control port, are shown in Table 6.
RD
WR
0
1
AD bus - status register
1
0
Command register - AD bus
0
1
AD bus
1
0
Function
--
XXXXXOOO
-XXXXXOO1
1
- - - - - _ ..
0
XXXXX010
f---
XXXXXOll
4-14
6
-
~
port A
._-
Port A ~ AD bus
AD bus
~
port B
0
Port B ~ AD bus
0
1
AD bus
1
0
Port C ~ AD bus
1_.
Table
*3 OUTPUT MODE
4. MD= 1 : OUTPUT MODE
o : INPUT MODE
~
port C
Port control signal levels at ALT3 and ALT4
Control Signal
Output mode
Input mode
STB
Input
Input
BF
"L"
"L"
INTR
··H"
··L"
Counter/Timer
The counterltimer is a 14-bit counting register plus 2 mode
flags. The register has two sections: address 1/0 XXXXX100
is assigned to the .Iow-order 8 bits and address 1/0
XXXXX101 is assigned to the high-order 8 bits. The loworder bits 0-13 are used for counting or timing. The counter
is initialized by the program and then counted down to zero.
The initial setting can range from 216 to 3FF16 .. Bits 14 and 15
are used as mode flags.
The mode flags select 1 of 4 modes with functions as
follow:
Mode 0: Outputs high-level· signal during the former
half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half
of the counter operation
• MITSUBI.SHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81S6P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Table
7
Format of counter/timer
1:
Mode
Mode 2:
Bit Number
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XXXXX100 T7 Ts T5 T. T3 T2 T, To
XXXXX101 M2 M, T'3 T'2 T" TlO Tg T8
Outputs a low-level pulse
3:
Mode
THE LOW-ORDER 8 BITS
OF THE COUNTER REGISTER
Outputs a low-level pulse during each final
count down
Starting and stopping the counter/timer is controlled by
Ml ,M2: TIMER MODE
THE HIGH-ORDER 6 BITS
T,-T13: OF THE COUNTER REGISTER
bits
6 and 7 of the command register (see Table 2 for
details). The format and timer modes of the counter/timer
register are shown in Table
Table
8
is discontinued. To resume counting, a start command must
be written into the command register as shown in Table 2.
M2
M,
Timer operation
0
0
Outputs high-level signal during the former half of the counter operation
Outputs low-level signal during the latter half of the counter operation
(mode 0)
0
1
1
1
0
1
7 and Table 8.
The counter/timer is not influenced by a reset, but counting
Timer mode
r-----
0
during the final
count down
Function
0
Outputs square wave signals as in mode
Outputs square wave signals as in mode
a
While operating 2n + 1 count .down in mode 0, a high-level
signal is output during the n+l counting and a low-level signal is output during the n counting.
(mode 1)
II
Outputs a low-level pulse during the final count dowm
(mode 2)
Outputs a low-level pulse during each final count down
(mode 3)
ABSOI::UTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Vo
Output voltage
Pd
Maximum power dissipation
Conditions
With respect to Vss
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Ta=25"C
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Parameter
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Power-supply voltage
4.75
Nom
Max
5
5.25
V
-0.5-7
V
l.5
W
-20-75
"C
-65:""'150
"C
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.5
V'H
High-level input voltage
2
Unit
V
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
-0.5-7
(Ta=-20-75"C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unil
Limits_ ..
-0.5-7
0.8
V
Vcc+O.5
V
(Ta=-20-75"C, Vcc=5V+5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
V
VOH
High-level output voltage
vss=OV,loH=-400tlA
VOL
Low-level output voltage
vss=ov, 10L=2mA
I,
Input leak current
vss=ov,v,=O-vcc
-10
10
t-
I
,
-~
ns
-ns
ns
--------ns
Timer input high-level pulse width
12
120
t w ( '" L)
Timer input low-level pulse width
I,
80
le(. )
Timer input cycle time
tCYC
t r ( '" )
Timer input ris,e time
Ir
30
If( • )
Timer input fall time
If
30
H)
--
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
ns
-ns
--ns
(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted.)
Alternative
Symbol
i
320
Limits
Parameter
Test conditions
Min
symbol
tPXVCR-OQ)
Propagation time from read to data output
lAD
tpzxCA-OQ)
Propagation time from address to data output
lAD
tPVZCR-OQ)
Propagation time from read to data floating (Note 7)
tRDF
tPHL(W_P)
Propagation time from write to data output
Typ
Max
0
I
Iwp
twp
tPLH(W_P)
i
I
Unit
170
-ns
400
ns
100
ns
400
ns
400
400
ns
-ns
tPLH(STB-BF)
Propagation time from strobe to SF flag
tSBF
tPHLCR-BF)
Propagation time from read to BF flag
tABE
tPLH(STB-INTR)
Propag.ation time from strobe to interrupt
lSI
400
ns
tpHL( R-INTRl
Propagation time from read to interrupt
tRDI
400
ns
tPHL(STB-BF)
Propagation time from strobe to BF flag
tSBE
400
ns
tPLH(W-BF)
Propagation time from write to BF flag
tWBF
400
ns
tPHL(\rV-INTR)
Propagation time from write to interrupt
IWI
400
ns
400
ns
tpHL( ¢ -OUT)
Propagation time from timer input to timer output
tpLH ( if. -OUT)
tpzxCR-OQ)
Nole
4-16
i
I
ITL
ITH
propagation time from read to data enable
tRDE
Measurement condilions C=150pF
Measuremenl condilions of nole 6 are not applied_
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
10
ns
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL81S6P
204S-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
TIMING DIAGRAM
(reference level, high-level=2V, low-level=08V)
Basic output
)(
PORT
tPHUW-p)
tPlH(W-P)
~
II
I
~
tW(RWH)
tW{RWL)
th{W-Dl
th(L-RWHl
101M
CE
\
/
J
~\.
~
\
~
K
ADDRESS
V-
DATA
th(l-Al
tSU(A-Ll
II
/
th(RW-U
tSU{D-W)
ALE
tw(U
Basic input
K
)
PORT
--r--
tSU(P-R)
th(R~P)
'-
jl
tW(RWL)
te(l-Rwl
-I
tW(RWH)
tC(RW-U
tPXV(R-OQ)
I tPZX (R-DQ)
<4
i------tpXZ(R-DQ)
101M
CE
'\
I
V
\.
f\
/
tpZX(A-O}
)
ADDRESS
th(L~A)
tSU(A-Ll
ALE
/l
i
)
DATA
~
r-c=
V
I\~
tw(U
. • MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
4-17
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8156P
2048-BIT STATIC RAM WITH I/O PORTS AND TIMER
Strobed output
PORT
tpLH(W-P)
tPHL(W-P)
INTR
BF
Strobed input
PORT
BF
INTR
Timer (Note 1)
TIMER IN
TIMER OUT
PULSE MODE
\.. ____ J
(Note 2)
TIMER OUT
,
SQUARE WAVE MODE - - - - - - - - - - - - ' (Note2)
Note 1
The wave form is shown counting down from 5 to 1.
2 : As long as the M1 mode flag of the timer register is at
high-level, pulses are continuously output.
4-18
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8251 AP-5 is a universal synchronous/asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data
communications use. It is produced using the N-channel silicon-gate ED-MaS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit microprocessors.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
r
BIDIRECTIONAL
02 ....
DATA BUS" 03 ....
RECEIVERiH~8~ Rx D ~
(OV) Vss
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
Synchronous and asynchronous operation
Synchronous:
5~8-bit characters
Internal or external synchronization
Automatic SYNC character insertion
Asynchronous system:
5~8-bit characters
Clock rate-1, 160r 64 times the baud rate
1, 11/ 2 , or 2 stop bits
False-start-bit detection
Automatic break-state detection
Baud rate: DC~64k-baud
Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver
Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing
APPLICATIONS
•
•
Modem control of data communications using microcomputers
Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal equipment
FUNCTION
The M5L8251 AP-5 is used in the peripheral circuits of a
CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems
BLOCK DIAGRAM
RESET INPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
04
....
05
....
II
Outline 28P4
including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5L8251 AP-5 receives parallel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format,
and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent
in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it
into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of
parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial
data for the CPU from external devices, the M5L8251 AP-5 .
informs the CPU using the TxRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition,
the CPU can read the M5L8251 AP-5 status at any time. The
M5L8251 AP-5 can detect the data received for errors and inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information.
Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors.
---------,
CLOCK INPUT
CONTROL/DATA-CONTROL
INPUT
READ-DATA CONTROL INPUT
WRITE-DATA CONTROL INPUT
TRANSMITTER-DATA OUTPUT
CHIP-SELECT INPUT
TRANSMITTER-READY OUTPUT
TRANSMITTER-EMPTY OUTPUT
DATA-SET READY INPUT
DATA-TERMINAL READY OUTPUT
TRANSMITTER-CLOCK INPUT
CLEAR-TO-SEND INPUT
REQUEST-TO-SEND OUTPUT
RECEIVER-READY OUTPUT
25 RxC
RECEIVER-CLOCK INPUT
16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
DATA
BUS
BU FFER t---P-----I
3 RxD
RECEIVER-DATA INPUT
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ---.JI
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
4-19
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
OPERATION
Table
The M5L8251 AP-5 interfaces with the system bus as shown
in Fig.1, positioned between the CPU and the modem or terminal eqUipment, and offers all the functions required for
data communication.
16
ADDRESS BUS
An
4
M5LB251AP-5 Access Methods
C/D
RD
WR
CS
L
L
H
l
L
H
L
L
Function
Data
Data
bus -
in
USART - Data
USART
bus
H
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
Control
X
H
H
L
3-State - Data
bus
X
X
X
H
3-State - Data
bus
Data bus
+-
+-
Staus
Data bus
CONTROL BUS
IIOR
8
IIOW RESET
~
2(TTl
ReadlWrite Control Logic
DATA BUS
This logic consists of a control word register and command
word register. It receives signals from the CPU control bus
and generates internal-control signals for the elements.
8
CID
CS
Do"""" 07
Modem Control Circuit
RD WR RESET ClK
M5LB251AP-5
Fig. 1 M5LB251AP-5 interface to BOBOA standard system bus
When using the M5L8251 AP-5, it is necessary to program, as
the initial setting, assignments for synchronous/asynchronous
mode selection, baud rate, character length, parity check,
and even/odd parity selection in accordance with the communication system used. Once programming is completed,
functions appropriate to the communication system can be
carried out continuously.
When initial setting of the USART is completed, data
communication becomes possible. Though the receiver is
always in the enable state, the transmitter is placed in the
transmitter-enable state (T xEN) by a command instruction,
and the application of a lOW-level signal to the CTS pin
prompts data-transfer start-up. Until this condition is satisfied, transrhission is not executed. On receiving data, the receiver informs the CPU that reading for the receiver data in
the USART by the CPU has become possible (the RxRDY
terminal has turned to '1'). Since data reception and the entry of the CPU into the data-readable state are output as status information, the CPU can assess USART status without
acceSSing the RxRDY terminal.
During receiving operation, the USART checks errors and
gives out status information. There are three types of errors:
parity, overrun, and frame. Even though an error occurs, the
USART continues its operations, and the error state is retained until error reset (ER) is effected by a command instruction. The M5L8251 AP-5 access methods are listed in
Table 1.
This is a general-purpose contrOl-signal circuit designed to
simplify the interface to the modem. Four types of control
signal are available: output signals DTR and RTS are controlled by command instructions, input signal DSR is given to
the CPU as status information and input signal CTS controls
direct transmission.
Data-Bus Buffer
This is an 8-bit 3-state bidirectional bus through which control words, command words, status information, and transfer
data are transferred. Fig. 2 shows the structure of the databus buffer.
~ID7
Do
D1
IBUFFER
H RECEIVE-DATA
HCONTROL BUFFER rLJ TRANSMIT-DATA
BUFFER
~
Fig.
TO INT ERNAl
0 ATA BUS
I STATUS BUFFER :
I
Do
2
I---
Data-bus-buffer structure
Transmit Buffer
This buffer converts parallel-format data given to the databus buffer in to serial data with addition of a start bit, stop
bits and a parity bit, and sends out the converted data
through the TxD pin based on the control signal.
Transmit-Control Circuit
This circuit carries out all the controls required for serial
data transmission. It controls transmitter data and outputs the
signals required by external devices in accordance with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.
4-20
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Receive Control Circuit
Read-Data Control Input (RD)
This circuit offers all the controls required for normal reception of the input serial data. It controls receiver data and outputs signals for the external devices in accord ace with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.
Receiver data and status information are output from the
CPU by a low-level input for the CPU data bus.
Receive Buffer
This buffer converts serial data given via the RxD pin into a
parallel format, checks the bits and characters in accordance with the communication format designated by mode
setting, and transfers the assembled characters to the CPU
via the data-bus buffer.
Receiver-Data Input (RxD)
Serial characters sent from another device are input to this
pin and converted to a parallel-character format to serve as
data for the CPU. Unless the '1' state is detected after a
chip-master reset procedure (this resetting is carried out to
prevent spurious operation such as that due to faulty connection of the RxD to the line in a break state), the serial
characters are not received. This applies to only the asynchronous mode. When the RxD line enters the low state instantaneouslybecause of noise, etc, the mis-start prevention
function starts working. That is, the start bit is detected by its
falling edge but in order to make sure that it is the correct
start bit, the RxD line is strobed at the middle of the start bit
to reconfirm the low state. If it is found to be high a faultystart judgment is made.
Transmitter-Clock Input (f~C)
This clock controls the baud rate for character transmission
from the T xD pin. Serial data is shifted by the falling edge of
the T xC signal. In the synchronous mode, the T xC frequency
is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode,
the frequency is specified as 1,16, or 64 times the baud rate
by the mode setting.
Example When the baud rate is 110 bauds:
T xC=110Hz(lX)
TxC=l. 76kHz(16X)
T xC=7. 04kHz(64X)
Write-Data Control Input
(WR)
Data and control words output from the CPU by the lowlevel
input are written in the M5L8251 AP-5. This terminal is usually
used in a form connected with the control bus U6W of the
CPU.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
This is a device-select signal that enables the USART by a
low-level input. Usually, it is connected to the address bus
directly or via the decoder. When this signal is in the high
state, the M5L8251 AP-5 is disabled.
Control/Data Control Input (C/O)
This signal shows whether the information on the USART
data bus is in the form of data characters or control words,
or in the form of status information, in accordance with the
RD and WR inputs while the CPU is accessing the
M5L8251 AP-5. The high level identifies control words or status information, and the low level, data characters.
Receiver-Ready Output (RxRDY)
This signal indicates that the received characters have entered the receiver buffer, and further, the receiver-data buffer in the data-bus buffer shown in Fig,2. It is possible to
confirm the RxRDY status by using this signal as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing the CPU to read the
0 1 bit of the status information by polling. The RxRDY is
automatically reset when a character is read by the CPU.
Even in the break state in which the RxD line is held at low,
the RxRDY remains active. It can be masked by making the
RxE( D2 ) of the command instruction O.
Transmitter-Ready (TxRDY)
This signal shows that the data is ready for transmission. It is
possible to confirm the status of serial-data transmission by
using it as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing
the CPU to read the Do bit of the status information by polling. Since the TxRDY signal shows that the data buffer is
empty, it is automatically reset when a transmission character is loaded by the CPU. The T xRDY bit of the status information means that the transmit-data buffer shown in Fig. 2
has become empty, while the T xRDY pin enters the highlevel state only when the transmit-data buffer is empty, T xEN
equals '1', and a lowlevel input has been applied to the CTS
pin.
Status (Do): When transmit-data buffer (TDB) is empty, it
becomes '1 '.
TxRDY terminal: When (TDB is empty)' (T xEN=l)' (CTS
=0)=1 or resetting, it becomes active.
Sync Detect/Break Detect Output-Input
(SYNDET/BD)
In the synchronous mode this pin is used for input and output
operations. When it is specified for the internal synchronous
mode by mode setting, this pin works as an output terminal.
It enters the high state when a SYNC character is received
through the RxD pin. If the M5L8251 AP-5 has been programmed for double SYNC characters (bi-sync), a high is entered in the middle of the last bit of the second SYNC character. This signal is automatically reset by reading the status
i nformati on.
On designation of the M5L8251 AP-5 to the external synchronous mode, this pin begins to serve for input operations.
Applying a high signal to this pin prompts the M5L8251 AP-5
to begin assembling data characters at the next rising edge
of the RxC. For the width of a high-level signal to be input, a
minimum RxC period is required.
Designation of the asynchronous mode causes this pin to
function as a SD (output) pin. When the start, data, and parity bits and stop bits are all in the low state for two characters period, a high is entered. The SD (break detect) signal
can also be read as the D6 bit of the status information. This
signal is reset by resetting the chip master or by the RxD
line's recovering the high state.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-21
..
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Clear-To-Send Input (CTS)
When the TxEN bit (Do) of the command instruction has
been set to '1' and the CTS input is low serial data is sent
out from the TxO pin. Usually this is used as a clear-to-send
signal for the modem.
Note: CTS indicates the modem status as follows:
ON means data transmission is possible;
OFF means data transmission is impossible.
Transmitter-Empty Output (TxEMPTY)
When no transmisison characters are left in the transmit buffer, this pin enters the high state. In the asynchronous mode,
the following transmission character is shifted to the transmit
buffer when it is loaded from the CPU. Thus, it is automatically reset. In the synchronous mode, a SYNC character is
loaded automatically on the transmit buffer when no transferdata characters are left. In this case, however, the TxEMPTY
does not enter the low state when a SYNC character has
been sent out, since TxEMPTY = H denotes the state in
which there is no transfer character and one or two SYNC
characters are being transferred or the state in which a
SYNC character is being transferred as a filler. TxEMPTY is
unrelated to the TxEN bit of the command instruction.
Transmi.ssion-Data Output (TxD)
Parallel-format transmission characters loaded on the
M5L8251 AP-5 by the CPU are assembled into the format designated by the mode instruction and sent in serial-data form
via the TxO pin. Data is output, however, only in cases
where the Do bit (TxEN) of the command instruction is '1'
and the CTS terminal is in the low state. Once reset, this pin
is kept at the mark status (high level) until the first charac-'
ter is sent.
Clock Input (ClK)
This system-clock input is required for internal-timing generation and is usually connected to the clock-output (CLK)
pin of the M5L8085AP. Although there is no direct relation
with the data-transfer baud rate, the clock-input (CLK) frequency is more than 30 times the TxC or RxC input frequency in the case of the synchronous system and more than 4.5
times in the case of the asynchronous system.
Reset Input (RESET)
Once the USART is shifted to the idle mode by a high-level
input, this state continues until a new control word is set.
Since this is a master reset, it is always necessary to load a
control word following the reset process. The reset input requires a minimum 6-clock pulse width.
Data-Set Ready Input (DSR)
This is a general-purpose input signal, but is usually used as
a data-set ready signal to test modem status. Its status can
be known from the status reading process. The 07 bit of the
status information equals '1' when the OSR pin is in the low
state, and '0' when in the high state.
OSR=L.... 07 bit of status information=l
OSR=H .... 07 bit of status information=O
Note: OSR indicates modem status as follows:
4-22
•
ON means the modem can transmit and receive;
OFF means it cannot.
Request-To-Send Output (RTS)
This is a general-purpose output signal but is used as a request-to-send signal for the modem. The RTS terminal is
controlled by the 0 5 bit of the command instruction. When 0 5
is equal to '1', RTS=L, and when 0 3 is 0, RTS=H.
Command register 05=1 .... RTS=L
Command register 05=0.... RTS=H
Note: RTS controls the modem transmission carrier as follows:
ON means carrier dispatch;
OFF means carrier stop.
Data-Terminal Ready Output (DTR)
This is a general-purpose output Signal, but is usually used
as a data-terminal ready or rate-select signal to the modem.
The OTR pi!) is controlled by the 01 bit of the command instruction; if 01=1, OTR=L, and if 01=0, OTR=H.
0, of the command register=1 .... 0TR=L
0, of the command register=O .... OTR=H
Receiver-Clock Input (RxC)
This clock signal controls the baud rate for the sending in of
characters via the RxO pin. The data is shifted in by the rising edge of the RxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the
RxC frequency is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode, the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64
times the baud rate by mode setting. This relationship is parallel to that of TxC, and in usual communication-line systems the transmission and reception baud rates are equal.
The TxC and RxC terminals are, therefore, used connected
to the same baud-rate generator.
PROGRAMMING
It is necessary for the M5L8251 AP-5 to have the control word
loaded by the CPU prior to data transfer. This must always
be done following any resetting operation (by external RESET pin or command instruction IR). There are two types of
control words: mode instructions specifying general operations required for communications and command instructions
to control the M5L8251 AP-5 actual operations.
Following the resetting operation, a mode instruction
must be set first. This instruction sets the synchronous or
asynchronous system to be used. In the sysnchronous system, a SYNC character is loaded from the CPU. In the case
of the bi-sync system, however, a second SYNC character
must be loaded in succession.
Loading a command instruction makes data transfer
possible. This operation after resetting must be carried out
for initializing the M5L8251AP-5. The USART command instruction contains an internal-reset IR instruction (Osbit) that
makes it possible to return the M5L8251 AP-5 to its reset
state. The initialization flowchart is shown in Fig. 3 and the
mode-instruction and command-instruction formats are
shown in Figs. 4 and 5.
MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
SYNC
SINGLE CHARACTER
I
I
CHARACTER
I
I
SYNC
I=SINGLE
O=DOUBLE
SYNC DETECTION
II =EXTERNAL
10=INTERNAL
EXTERNAL SYNC DETECT
PARITY CHECK
EVEN PARITY
I
I
I-EVEN
O=ODD
I
PARITY
I
PARITY ENABLE. I I = ENABLE
I O=DISABLE
CHARACTER LENGTH
o 0 I I
oTITo111
SYNCHRONOUS
MODE
I scs I ESD I EP I PEN I
I
L2
I
I
L,
5 6 7 8
I
0
I
0
I
•
EVEN PARITY
PARITY ENABLE
CHARACTER LENGTH
o0
I I
I 0 I
5 6 7 8
o
Fig.
3
Initialization flow chart
ASYNCHRONOUSr-~r-~~~~~~-r~~~-r~,
MODEL-__L-~~~__~__-L__~~-L~~
Fig.
4
Mode-instruction format
( C/5=1 )
WR =0
I
I
I
I
I
I ENTER HUNT MODE
ENTER HUNT MODE
,I-ENABLE SEARCH FOR
SYNC CHARACTERS
INTERNAL RESET
_I INTERNAL RESET
II-TO INITIALIZATION
J TRANSMISSION
REQUEST TO SEND
CARRIER
I CO.t!Itl OL
I-RTS~O
JI ERROR
RESET
(\-CLEAR ALL ERROR FLAGS
ERROR RESET
PE OE. FE)
SEND BREAK
SEND BREAK CHARACTER
II-TxD~LOW
Rx ENABLE
I EH I
D7
Fig.
5
IR lRTS
D6
D5
RECEIVER ENABLE
I =ENABLE
O=DISABLE
I
DATA
TERMINAL
READY
I DATA-TERMINAL READY
II-DTR=Q
I
I~ TRANSMISSION ENABLE
T ENABLE I = ENABLE
x
Q=DISABLE
~
LER ISBRK I RxE I DTR ITxENI
D,
D,
D,
D,
Command-instruction format
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
J
I
Do
(C/D=I. WR=O)
4-23
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Asynchronous Transmission Mode
When data characters are loaded on the M5L8251 AP-5 after
initial setting, the USART automatically adds a start bit (low)
, an odd or even parity bit specified by the mode instruction
during initialization, and a specified number of stop bits
(high). After that, the assembled data characters are transferred as serial data via the TxD pin if, transfer is enabled
(TxEN = l'CTS= L). In this case, the transfer data (baud
rate) is shifted by the mode instruction at a rate of lX, l/16X,
or 1164X the TxC period.
If the data cha.racters are not loaded on the M5L8251 AP5, the TxD pin enters a mark state (high). When SBRK is
programmed by the command instruction, break characters
(low) are output continuously through the TxD pin.
Asynchronous Reception Mode
The RxD line usually starts operations in a mark state (high),
triggered by the falling edge of a low-level pulse when it
comes to this line. This signal is again strobed at the middle
of the bit to confirm that it is a perfect start bit. The detection of a second low indicates the validity of the start bit
(restrobing is carried out only in the case of l6X and 64X) .
After that, the bit counter inside the M5L8251 AP-5 starts
operating; each bit of the serial information on the RxD line
is shifted in by the rising edge of RxC, and the data bit, parity bit (when necessary), and stop bit are sampled at the
middle position.
The occurrence of a parity error causes the setting of a
parity-error flag. If the stop bit is in the low state, a frame
error flag is set. Attention should be paid to the fact that the
receivenequires only one stop bit even though the program
has designated 1'1, or 2 stop bits.
Reception up to the stop bit means reception of a complete character. This character is then transferred to the receiver-data buffer shown in Fig.2, and the RxRDY becomes
active. In cases where this character is not read by the CPU
and where the next character is transferred to the receiverdata buffer, the preceding character is destroyed and an
overrun-error flag is set.
These error flags can be read as the M5L8251 AP-5 status
information. The occurrence of an error does not stop
USART operations. The error flags are cleared by the ER(D 4
bit) of the command instruction.
The asynChronous-system transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 6 and 7.
Synchronous Transmission Mode
In this mode the TxD pin remains in the high state until initial
setting by the CPU is completed. After initialization, the state
of CTS=L and TxEN =,1 enables serial transmission of characters through the TxD pin. Then, data characters are sent
out and shifted by the falling edge of the TxC signal. The
transmission rate equals the TxC rate.
Thus, once data-character transfer starts, it must continue
through the TxD pin at the same rate as that of TxC. Unless
data characters are provided from the CPU before the transmitter buffer becomes empty, one or two SYNC characters
are automatically output from the TxD pin. In this case, it
should be noted that the TxEMPTY pin enters the high state
when there are no data characters left in the M5L8251 AP-5
to be transferred, and that the low state is not entered until
the USART is provided with the next data character from the
CPU. Care should also be taken over the fact that merely
setting a command instruction does not effect SYNCcharacter insertion, because the SYNC character insertion is
enabled after sending out the first data character.
In this mode, too; break characters are sent out in succession from the TxD pin when SBRK is designated (D 3 =1)
by a command instruction.
CPU-USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
DATA
CH~RACTER
ASSEMBLED
!§TARTIDATA
~IT
.
DATA
CH~RACTER
!
I
FORMAT
RECEIPTION FORMAT
ISTBAITRTI
-"'-'-J..L.._ _....:;;....,;;.;...._ _-'-~-'-(;;.,1.1,2:.ill
STO'PiiiTI
(5-8) PARITY STOr BITSI
BIT
(1.'5.2)
L.
TRANSMITTER DATA OUTPUT (TxD)
USART-CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
DATA
Note
CHARA~TER
(5-8)
I
: When the data character is 5, 6, or 7 bits/character
length, the unused bits (tor USART- CPU) are set to
zero.
Fig. 6 Asynchronous transmission format I
( transmission)
4-24
Fig.
7
Asynchronous transmission format II (reception)
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Synchronous Reception Mode
Character synchronization in this mode is carried out internally or externally by initial-setting designation.
Programming in the internal synchronous mode requires
that an EH instruction (D7= 1, enter hunt mode) is included
in the first command instruction. Data on the RxD pin is sampled by the rising RxC signal, and the receiver-buffer contents are compared with the SYNC character each time a bit
is input. Comparison continues until an agreement is
reached. When the M5L8251 AP-5 has been programmed in
the bi-sync mode, data received in further succession is
compared. The detection of two SYNC characters in succession makes the USART end the hunt mode, setting the SYNDET pin to the high state. This reset operation is prompted
by the reading of the status information. When the parity has
been programmed, SYNDET is not set in the middle of the
last data bit but in the middle of the parity bit.
In the external synchronous mode, the M5L8251 AP-5 gets
out of the hunt mode when a high synchronization signal is
given to the SYNDET pin. The high signal requires a minimum duration of one RxC cycle. In the asynchronous mode,
however, the EH signal does not affect th.e operation at all.
Parity and overrun errors are checked in the same way
as in the asynchronous system. During hunt-mode operations
the parity bit is not checked, but parity checking is carried
out even when the receiver is disabled.
The CPU can command the receiver to enter the hunt
mode, if synchronization is lost. This prevents the SYNC
character from erroneously becoming equal to the received
data when all the data in the receiver buffer is set to '1'
Attention should be paid to the fact that the SYNDET F/F is
reset each time status information is read irrespective of the
synchronous mode's being internal or external. This, howev-
er, does not return the M5L8251 AP-5 to the hunt mode. Synchronism detection is carried out even though it is not the
hunt mode. The synchronous transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 8 and 9.
Command Instruction
This instruction defines actual operations in the communication mode designated by mode setting. Command instructions include transmitter/receiver enable error-reset, internal-reset, modem-control, enter-hunt and break transmission
instructions.
The mode is set following the reset operation. A SYNC
character is set as required, and the writing of high-level
signals on the control/data pin (C/O) that follows it is regarded as a command instruction. When the mode is set all
over again from the beginning, the M5L8251 AP-5 can be reset by using inputting via the reset terminal or by internal resetting based on the command instruction.
Note 1: The command error reset (ER), internal reset (IR)
and enter-hunt-mode (EH) operations are only
effective when the command instruction is loaded,
so that these bits need not be returned to '0'.
2: When a break character is sent out by a command,
the TxD enters the low state immediately irrespective of whether or not the USART has sent out data.
3: Operations of the USART's receiver section which is
always in the enable state cannot be inhibited. The
command instruction RxE = 0 does not mean that
data reception via the RxD pin is inhibited; it means
that the RxRDY is masked and error flags are inhibited.
CPU~USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
DATA
SERIAL INPUT DATA (RxD)
CH:~RACTER I
USART~CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
Fig. 8 Synchronous transmission format I
( transmission)
Note
DATA
C:~ARACTER I
When the data character is 5, 6. or 7 bits/character
length, the unused bits (for USART ~ CPU) are set to
zero.
Fig.
9
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Synchronous transmission format II (reception)
4-25
4
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
FE:
Status Information
The CPU can always read USART status by setting the C/O
to '1' and RO to '0',
The status information format is shown in Fig, 10, In this
format RxROY, TxEMPTY and SYNOET have the same definitions as those of the pins, This means that these three
pieces of status information become '1' when each pin is in
the high state, The other status information is defined as follows:
When the OSR pin is in the low state, status inOSR:
formation OSR becomes '1',
The occurrence of a frame error in the receiver
section makes the status information FE '1',
The occurrence of an overrun error in the receiver
section makes the status information OE '1',
The occurrence of a parity error in the receiver
section makes this status information PE '1',
This information becomes '1' when the transmitdata
buffer is empty, Be careful because this has a
different meaning from the TxROY pin that enters
the high state only when the transmitter buffer is
empty, when the CTS pin is in the low state, and
when TxEN is '1',
OE:
PE:
TxROY:
11
FOR DSR
LOW
LEVEL
a FOR
DSR
HIGH
LEVEL
I SAME DEFINITION AS SYNDET/BDPIN
I FE IS SET WHEN A VALID STOP BIT IS NOT DETECTED AT THE END OF EVERY CHAR·
I ACTER (ASYNC ONLY)
IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION
FE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251Ap·5
I ~~c!3~n ':::'~II~ATBHL~ 7f~s ~~~~TN~J f~t~t~~~Rl.pJ~~gIT~:~DT~Es~~GMi~~
OE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251AP·5
.1 PE IS SET WHEN A PARITY ERROR IS DETECTED IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE
I COMMAND
INSTRUCTION PE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5L8251AP·5
SAME DEFINITION AS TxEMPTV PIN
SAME DEFINITION AS RxRDY PIN
I I 5~~ I I
DSR
D7
Fig.
10
D6
FE
OE
D5
D,
I
PE
D3
I
TxE
D2
I
I
=OY
D,
1---1
I ~OY I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Do
Status information (C/D=l, RD=O)
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Fig, 11 shows an application example for the M5L8251 AP-5
in the asynchronous mode, When the port addresses of the
M5L8251 AP-5 are assumed to be 00 # and 01 # in this figure,
initial setting in the asynchronous mode is carried out in the
following manner:
MVI
A, B6#
Mode setting
OUT
01 #
Command instruction
MVI
A,27#
OUT
01 #
In this case, the following are set by mode setting:
Asynchronous mode
6 bits/character
Parity enable (even)
11/2 stop bits
Baud rate: 16X
Command instructions set the following
RTS=1""RTS pin=L
RxE=1
OTR=1""OTR pin=L
TxEN =1
When the initial setting is complete, transfer operations are
allowed. The RTS pin is initially set to the low-level by setting RTS to '1', and this serves as a CTS input with TxEN
4-26
1 FOR TRANSMIT DATA BUFFER IS EMPTY
1
1
being equal to '1', For this reason the same definition applies
to the status and pin of TxROY, and '1' is assigned when the
transmit-data buffer is empty, Actual transfer of data is carried out in the following way:
IN
01 ;I:
Status read
The IN instruction prompts the CPU to read the USART's
status. The result is; if the TxROY equals '1' transmitter data
is sent from the CPU and written on the M5L8251 AP-5,
Transmitter data is written in the M5L8251 AP-5 in the following manner:
MVI
A,2D#
20'6 is an example of transmitter data,
OUT
USART~(A)
00#
Receiver data is read in the following manner:
IN
00#
(A)~USART
In the above example, the status information is read and
as a result, the transmitter data is written and read, Interruption processing by using the TxROY and RxROY pins is also
possible,
Fig, 12 shows the status of the TxO pin when data written
in the USART is transferred from the CPU, When the data
shown in Fig,12 enters the RxO pin, data sent from the
M5L8251 AP-5 to the CPU becomes 20 16 and bits 0 6 and 0 7
are treated as '0',
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
rr-rl DI-r11
j
L
BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
(DIVIDER)
C
TxC
RxC
RTS
CTS
x,
DTR
DSR
RD
RD
WR
WR
TO TRANSMISSION
CS
FROM
RESET IN
RESET OUT
RESET
P--- EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
CPU
M5l8085AP
USART
M5l8251 AP-5
TO EXTERNAL CIRCUIT {
x,
ClK
ClK
P----c-
cio I---
10iM
ADDRESS
DECODER
A'5-Ag
T,D
LINE {
RxD
D7---Do
AD7- ADo
8
8
8
ALE
J
TO MEMORY AND OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Fig,
11
Example of circuit using the asynchronous mode
STOP BIT (1.5 BITS)
START
BIT~ f--...~~.-o.DA...TA ------J
I-l-.j
PARITY BIT
Fig,
12
I--
START BIT
Example of data transmission
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Conditions
Parameter
Vee
Power-supply vollage
V,
Inpul voltage
Vo
Oulput vollage
Pd
Power dissipation
With respect to vss
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
TSlg
Storage temperature range
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Limits
Unit
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
1000
mW
-20-75
·C
-65-150
·C
(Ta=-20-7S·C, unless olherwise noled)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Min
Nom
Max
5
5.25
4.75
V
Vee
Supply vollage
Vss
Power-supply vollage
V'H
High-level inpul vollage
2.0
Vee
V
V'L
Low-level input vollage
-0.5
0.8
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc=5V±S%, Vss=OV, unless olherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
Unit
Min
V OH
High-level outpul voltage
IOH=-400,uA
VOL
low-level output voltage
IOL=2.2mA
Icc
Supply current from Vee
All outpuls are high
Typ
Max
2.4
V
0.45
V
100
mA
I'H
High-level input current
VI=VCC
-10
10
J-lA
III
low-level input current
V,=O.45V
-10
10
J-lA
loz
Off-state input current
Vss=OV, V,=O. 45-5. 25V
-10
10
J-lA
C,
Input capacitance
Vcc=Vss, f=lMHz, 25mV rms , Ta=25'C
10
pF
GIIO
Input/output capacitance
Vcc=Vss, f=lMHz, 25mV rms . Ta=25'C
20
pF
4-~
.... 'MITSUBISHI
.... ELE:CTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
TIMING REQUIREMENTS(T a=-20-75'C
, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise notedJ
I
Limits
Alternative
I
Symbol
Test conditions
Parameter
Symbol
------1----------------r--
Unit
Min
Typ
Max
ns
_tel '- ,-_~IDCk cycle _~me ~~~~~___________ _+-tc-y----____1--------____1--3-2-0____1---_t_-13-5-O_t__---___j
tw ( • I
Clock high pulse width
t.
120
ns
---- .. _ - - - - - t w (,- I
Clock low pulse width
t..
90
ns
_
--.--
_I,
-.!t_. __
-. --.-.-- ..--
.----.----------.---+-----------+-----1----+-------+-------1
_Clock ":etime____
~IOCk fall time
ns
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~----.-____t---------____1---+---t_-2-0-t__---___j
ns
tF
20
lX baud rate
DC
64
kHz
DC
310
kHz
DC
615
Transmitter input clock
16X baud rate
hx
frequency
64X baud rate
~ 1X baud rate
Transmitter input clock low
pulse width
I Rx
15
l,'
te( • I
pulse width
15X, 64X baud rate
tTPO
3
tet. I
- . - -..- . - . - - - .---------.--__+--=------+-----------I------I-----I'-----f--~-~--1
64
kHz
Receiver input clock
1X baud rate
__ fIRRxx---.-------I,
DC
16X baud rate
DC
310
kHz
1
l
I.' frequency
~IRx--'~---'1
64X baud rate
I
I
tW(RPwLl
_
tTPD
1X baud rate
R€C8lver Input clock low
_
tet. )
.
Transmitter input clock high
kHz
te(' I
16X, 64X baud rate
~-,.---~,.------.~.~..
tW(TPWH)
12
pulse Width
-------
15X, 64X baud rate __ ~~ _ _
I 1X baud rate
Receiver mput clock high
12
kHz
tet. I
tet. I
-----------+---+---I-----+---=--'-'--'----j
tRPO
15
tet. )
f-----'-"-.c.....----I
tW(RPWH)
_ _ _ _ _ .""Is" Width _ _ _ _
615
DC
t HPW
1X baud rate
tet. )
I 1~ 6~_balJd rl>t_(j/IJ~ote~
ns ---1
+ ______+ __0---1'---_--+___-+___
tAR _ _ _ _
ns
A~d~es~_hol~me al_te_r_re,,~~CS, C_I_D._l __i_N_o_t_e_3_J_ _--+_tRccA
c. _ _ _ __ + - - - - - - - - - - + - - -0f----L---__+---t---------I
th(R-A)
tW ( RI
Read pulse width
--------.---- -.
tSU(A-W)
250
ns
tAW
0
ns
0
ns
tRR
----.---------- -+------+----------+----+-------+---c-----j
~_~_~=~~_.time_befo~ewr~~ ___________
theW-A)
Address hold time after write
tWA
tw(w)
Write pulse width
tww
--
--_._----_._-------_._.\-----------+----+----+----+-------j
ns
250
- - - - ----.- . -- -----.------- -.---,,----- . - - " . - - - 1--------------+-----+------+---+-----1
~~-W) _
~a~tlJ.tJ..lim_"__beforew~te_______
two
20
ns
-----.------.---- . - - - - - - - - -------1----------+----+-----+----+-----1
t ES
18
tet. )
thl
}
tW(f)
-------
Transmitter Clock & data
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TxC(16X)
II
Receiver Clock & data
Rx-BIT COUNTER STARTS HERE
Rx D
DATA BIT
START BIT
DATA BIT
RxC(16X)
INTERNAL
SAMPLING
PULSE
tSU(RxD-ISl
•
MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
4-31
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Write Control Cycle (CPU-USART)
\
c/o
I
tSU(A~W)
~v
l"\hIW-A~ ~
tSU(A-W)
tW(W)
~tSU{DQ_W)
~
0 7 -00
(DATA INPUT)
l~hIW-D'i!.
K
VALIb
tPHUw_c)
}
Read Control Cycle (USART-CPU)
tSU(C A}
OSR, CTS
}
\
tSU(A-R)
thIR_A)
/
tSUIA-R)
th{R_A)
C/i)
tWIRl
¥
~DQ)
tPZV(R_DQ)
/IJ
07- DO
(DATA OUTPUT)
4-32
\~
• --MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
VALID
/
\
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Write Data Cycle (CPU--+USART)
heW-A)
SU(A-W)
c/o
t
Ih(WOAi
Isut'owl
tW(W)
tSU(OQ-W)
07 ........ 00
(DATA INPUT)
th(W_DQ)
VALID
>-
II
K
TxRDY
I
Read Date Cycle (USART--+CPU)
tSU(A-R)
c/o
Dr-Do
(DATA OUTPUT)
Rx RDY
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-33
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S1AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Transmitter Control & Flag Timing (Async Mode)
c/o
-J
~ l
l ____~-L~------~/
l____- J~ _ _~
~ 0
~L-~~~~
~
\~---
____________________
W_R,-SB~R~K~_____
WR
CTS
TxRDY
(PIN)
TxRDY
(STATUS)
TxEMPTY
TxD
DATA 1
Note 8
Note 9
Note 10
DATA 4
DATA 3
DATA 2
BREAK STATE
Example format = 7 bits/character with parity & 2 stop bits
TxRDY(pin)= 1 -(Transmit-data buffer is emoty) • (TxEN = 1) • (CTS= 0)= 1
TxRDY(status)= 1 -(Transmit-data buffer is emoty)= 1
Receiver Control & Flag Timing (Async Mode)
c/o
=oJ \'-_______'.1--1.-1__________---1....\--L....JI! \.....___'.Lo.--...l-l _ _....J!
Vt
____________________~R~D DATrA__1__________________~R~D DATrA~3________~R~D~A;LLOrD~A~TA~-----------------
WR-RxE WR-RxE
WR-Rrx~E________________~--------------------------~--~ ~------~----------,
BD
(PIN)
DATA 2
LOST
OE
(STATUS)
RxRDY
S
RxD
S
BREAK STATE
Note 11·: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity
4-34
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
S
0123456P~S0123456P ~
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8251AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Transmitter Control & Flag Timing (Sync Mode)
o
:=J
c/o
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
DATA 1 DAT?A_2_________D~AT~A-3----D~ATA?_4----------S,BRK
u
,\
WR
SBRK
WR
DATA~:--------------------
TxRDY
(PIN)
Tx RDY
(STATUS)
TxEMPTY
II
Tx D
MARK
STATE
DATA 1
DATA 2
SYNC
CH 1
SYNC
CH 2
BREAK
STATE
DATA 3 DATA 4
MARK
STATE
DATA 5
SYNC
CH 1
SYNC
CH 2
Note 12: Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.
Receiver Control & Flag Timing (Sync Mode)
INTERNAL
C/O
J
\~
SYNC
EXTERNAL SYNC MODE
MODE
__________________~I~1
L.J
CH 2
WR-ER
WR-EH-Rx E
SYNDET
(PIN)
RD STATUS
r
RD DATA
WR-EH-Rx E
EXTERNAL
SYNC
(INPUT)
INTERNAL
SYNC
(OUTPUT)
--+-----~
SYNDET
(STATUS)
DATA 2
LOST ri---'j
OE
(STATUS)
Rx RDY
RXD
SYNC
CH 1
-
SYNC:: DATA 1 DATA 2 DATA 3 SYNCCH 2 : :
CH 1
EXITS HUNT MODE
SYNDET SET
j
SYNC
CH 2
l CHARACTER
ASSEMBLY BEGINS
EXITS HUNT MODE
SYNDET SET
(STATUS)
Note 13: Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
4-35
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8253P-5 is a programmable general-purpose timer
device developed by using the N-channel silicon-gate EDMOS process. It offers counter and timer functions. in systems using an 8-bit parallel-processing CPU.
The use of the M5L8253P-5 frees the CPU from the execution of looped programs, count-operation programs and
other simple processing involving many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved system throughputs.
The M5L8253P-5 works on a single power supply, and
both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
vee (5V)
23 -WR WRITE INPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
00 -
8
•
•
•
•
•
•
cg~~~~~
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Clock period: DC-2MHz
3 independent built-in 16-bit down counters
6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter
Binary or decimal counts
RD READ INPUT
21 _
CS ~~~;.SELECT
20 19 -
A,
Ao
18 -
CLK2 CLOCK INPUT
17
CLOCK INPUT ClKO~ 9
FEATURES
22 -
l ADDRESS
r INPUTS
~OUT2 gS~~JiR
16 -GATE2 GATE INPUT
OUTO- 10
15 -ClKI CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT GATEO~ 11
14 -GATEl GATE INPUT
(OV) GND
12 _ _ _ _--1"13
-....
Outline
~OUTl g8¥~JfR
24P4
APPLICATION
Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in
microcomputers.
FUNCTION
Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming
based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When
roughly classified, there are 6 modes (0-5). Mode 0 is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode I
as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators,
mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a
hardware triggered strobe. The count can be monitored and
set at any time. The counter operates with either the binary
or BCD system.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
READ INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
WRITE INPUT
GATE INPUT
CHIP-SELECT INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
INTERNAL ~---'
_ _ _ _ _ _ _D_A_T_A :U_S_ _ _ _
4-36
.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
~
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS
CONTROL WORD AND INITIAL-VALUE LOADING
Data-Bus Buffer
This 3-state, bidirectional, 8-bit buffer is used to interface
the M5L8253P-5 to the system-side data bus. Transmission
and reception of all the data including control words for
mode designation and values written in, and read from, the
counters are carried out through this buffer.
The function of the M5L8253P-5 depends on the system software. The operational mode of the counters can be specified by writing control words (Ao, Al = 1, 1) into the controlword registers.
The programmer must write out to the M5L8253P-5 the
programmed number of count register bytes (1 or 2) prior to
actually using the selected counter.
Table 2 shows control-word format, which consists of 4
fields. Only the counter selected by the 07 and 0 6 bits of the
control word is set for operation. Bits 0 5 and 04 are used for
specifying operations to read values in the counter and to initialize. Bits 0 3 ~ 01 are used for mode designation, and 00
for specifying binary or BCD counting. When 00 = 0, binary
counting is employed, and any number from 0000 16 to FFFF16
can be loaded into the count register. The counter is
counted down for each clock. The counting of 0000 16 causes
the transmission of a time-out signal from the count-output
pin.
The maximum number of counts is obtained when 0000 16
is set as the initial value. When 00=1, BCD counting is employed, and any number from 000010 to 9999 10 can be loaded
on the counter.
Neither system resetting nor connecting to the power
supply sets the control word to any specific value. Thus to
bring the counters into operation, the above-mentioned control words for mode designation must be given to each counter, and then 1 ~ 2 byte initial counter values must be set.
The following is an example of this programming step.
To designate mode 0 for counter 1 ,with initial value 825316
set by binary count, the following program is used:
MVI
A, 70'6
Control word 70 16
OUT
n,
nl is control-word-register address
MVI
A, 53'6
Low-order 8 bits
OUT
n2 is counter 1 address
MVI
High-order 8 bits
OUT
n2
n2 is counter 1 address
Thus, the program generally has the following sequence:
(ll Control-word output to counter i (i=O, 1,2).
(2) Initialization of low-order 8 counter bits
(3) Initialization of high-order 8 counter bits
The three counters can be executed in any sequence. It is
possible, for instance, to designate the mode of each counter and then load initial values in a different order. Initialization of the counters designated by RL 1 and RL 0 must be
executed in the order of the low-order 8 bits and then the
high-order 8 bits for the counter in question.
Read/Write Logic
The read/write logic accepts control signals (RD, WR) from
the system and generates control signals for each counter. It
is enabled or disabled by the chip-select signal (CS); if CS
is at the high-level the data-bus buffer enters a floating
(high-impedance) state.
Read Input (RD)
The count of the counter designated by address inputs Ao
and Al on the lOW-level is output to the data bus.
Write Input (WR)
Data on the data bus is written in the counter or control word
register designated by address inputs Ao and Al on the lowlevel.
Address Inputs (Ao, A1)
These are used for selecting one of the 3 internal counters
and either of the control-word registers.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
A low-level on this input enables the M5L8253P-5. Changes
in the level of the CS input have no effect on the operation
of the counters.
Control-Word Register
This register stores information required to give instructions
about operational modes and to select binary or BCD counting. Unlike the counters, it allows no reading, only writing.
Counters 0,1 and 2
These counters are identical in operation and independent
of each other. Each is a 16-bit, presettable, down counter,
and has clock-input, gate-input and output pins. The counter
can operate in either binary or BCD using the falling edge of
each clock. The mode of counter operation and the initial
value from which to start counting can be designated by
software. The count can be read by input instruction at any
time, and there is a "read-on-the-fly" function which enables
stable reading by latching each instantaneous count to the
registers by a special counter-latch instruction.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-37
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
Table
Basic Functions
CS
RD
WR
A,
a
1
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
1
a
1
a
1
a
1
1
Data bus-Control-word register
a
a
1
a
a
Data bus-Counter 0
a
a
a
a
1
a
1
Data bus-Counter 1
1
1
a
Data bus-Counter 2
a
a
1
1
1
3-state
1
X
X
X
X
3-state
a
1
1
X
X
3-state
Table
2
Function
"'a"
Data bus-Counter 0
1
Data bus-Counter 1
a
Data bus-Counter 2
Control-Word Format
r--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-
.SC(Select Counter)
,--~~~~~~~~~~~~.
SCl
a
sca
a
a
1
1
a
Select counter 2
1
1
Prohibited combination
Select counter
a
Select counter 1
RL( Read/Load)
RLl
RLa
a
a
a
Counter Latch Command
Read/load low-order 8 bits only
a
Read/load high-order 8 bits only
Read/load low-order 8 bits and then high-order 8 bits
,--------.M(Mode)
Ma
a
ModeO
1
Model
1
a
Mode2
1
1
Mode3
1
a
a
Mode4
1
a
1
ModeS
M2
Ml
a
a
a
a
X
X
~
i · BCaD
I
Binary counter (16 bits)
r-_D~7~;-_D~6-,___D~5__,-_D_4~,-__D~3__r-_D~2~;-_D~'__r-_D~O~ ~___1____~B_in_a~~_-c_o_d_ed__d_eC_i_m_a_lc_o_u_nt_e_r_(4__
de_c_a_d_es_)____________~
I SCl I sca
~
4-38
sc
RLl
--r-~
I RLa
RL
M2
Ml
---I~~~-M
MO
I
BCD
BCD--1
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
MODE DEFINITION
Mode 0 (Interrupt on Terminal Count)
Mode set and initialization cause the counter output to go
low-level (see Fig. 1). When the counter is loaded with an
initial value, it will start counting the clock input. When the
terminal count is reached, the output will go high and remain
high until the selected count register is reloaded with the
mode. This mode can be used when the CPU is to be interrupted after a certain period or at the time of counting up.
Fig.1 shows a setting of 4 as the initial value. If gate input
goes low, counting is inhibited for the duration of the lowlevel period.
Reloading of the initial value during count operation will
stop counting by the loading of the first byte and start the
new count by the loading of the second byte.
Mode 1 (Programmable One-Shot)
The gate input functions as a trigger input. A gate-input rising edge causes the generation of low-level one-shot output
with a predetermined clock length starting from the next
clock. Fig. 2 shows an initial setting of 4. While the counter
output is at the low-level (during one-shot), loading of a new
value does not change the one-shot pulse width, which has
already been output. The current count can be read at any
time without affecting the width of the one-shot pulse being
output. This mode permits retriggering.
Mode 2 (Rate Generator)
LOW-level pulses during one clock operation are generated
from the counter output at a rate of one per n clock inputs
(where n is the value initially set for the counter). When a
new value is loaded during the counter operation, it is reflected on the output after the pulses by the current count
have been output. In the example shown in Fig. 3, n is given
as 4 at the outset and is then changed to 3.
In this mode, the gate input provides a reset function.
While it is on the low-level, the output is maintained high;
the counter restarts from the initial value, triggered by a rising gate-input edge. This gate input, therefore, makes
possible external synchronization of the counter by hardware.
After the mode is set, the counter does not start counting
until the rate n is loaded into the count register, with the
counter output remaining at the high-level.
Mode 3 (Square Rate Generator)
This is similar to Mode 2 except that it outputs a square
wave with the half count of the set rate. When the set value
n is odd, the square-wave output will be high for (n 1) 12
clock-input counts and low for (n-1) 12 counts. When a new
rate is reloaded into the count register during its operation, it
is immediately reflected on the count directly following the
output transition (high-to-Iow or low-to-high) of the current
count. Gate-input operations are exactly the same as in
Mode 2. Fig. 4 shows an example of Mode 3 operation.
Mode 4 (Software Triggered Strobe)
After the mode is set, the output will be high. By loading a
number on the counter, however, clock-input counts can be
started and on the terminal count, the output will go low for
one input-clock period and then will go high again. Mode 4
differs from Mode 2 in that pulses are not output repeatedly
with the same set count. The pulse output is delayed one
clock period in Mode 2, as shown in Fig. 5. When a new
value is loaded into the count register during its count operation, it is reflected on the next pulse output without
affecting the current count. The count will be inhibited while
the gate input is low-level.
Mode 5 (Hardware Triggered Strobe)
This is a variation of Mode 1. The gate input provides a trigger function, and the count is started by its rising edge. On
the terminal count, the counter output goes low for on one
clock period and then goes high. As in Mode 1, retriggering
by the gate input is possible. An example of timing in Mode
5 is shown in Fig. 6.
As mentioned above, the gate input plays different roles
according to the mode. The functions are summarized in
Table 3.
Table
3
~
Gate Operations
Low or going low
Rising
High
Mode
0
Enables
counting
Disables counting
(l) Initiates counting
(2) Resets output
after next clock
1
2
(1) Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately
(1) Reloads counter
(2) Initiates counting
Enables
counting
3
(1) Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately
(1) Reloads counter
(2) Initiates coun.ting
Enables
counting
4
Disables counting
5
Enables
counting
Initiates counting
+
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
4-39
a
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
OUT(GATE="H")
WR
---"L.j
:. L-...J
GATE
:4
OUT
Fig. 1
I
I
I
4
4
I
I
:3
I
I
2
1
0
1
Mode 0
Fig. 4
Mode 3
elK
GATE _ _ _ _ _
r:--::--::--:--------
WR
OUT
OUT
GATE
U
GATE
1 _ _ _ _ _ _--J
OUT _ _ _2_ _
Fig. 2
OUT
Mode 1
Fig. 5
elK
elK
WR
GATE
Mode 4
0
OUT(n=4)
GATE
4
3 13
1
Fig. 3
1
U
OUT
4
1
4
4
3
LJ"
Mode 2
OUT(n=4)
Fig. 6
COUNTER MONITORING
Sometimes the counter must be monitored by reading its
count or using it as an event counter. The M5L8253P-5 offers
the following two methods for count reading:
Read Operation
The count can be read by designating the address of the
counter to be monitored and executing a simple 1/0 read
operation. In order to ensure correct reading of the count, it
is necessary to cause the clock input to pause by external
logic or prevent a change in the count by gate input. An example of a program to read the counter 1 count.is shown below. If RLl, RLO=l, 1 has been specified in the control word,
the first IN instruction enables the low-order 8 bits to be read
and the second IN instruction enables the highorder 8 bits.
IN
n 2 .... n2 is the counter 1 address
MOV
D, A
IN
n2
MOV
E, A
The IN instruction should be executed once or twice by the
RLl and RLO designations in the control-word register.
4-40
LJ
GATE
3
0
Lr-
Mode 5
Read-on-the-Fly Operation
This method makes it possible to read the current count
without affecting the count operation at all. A special counter-latch command is first written in the control-word register. This causes latching of all the instantaneous counts to
the register, allowing retention of stable counts. An example
of a program to execute this operation for counter 2 is given
below.
A, 1000XXXX .... D5 = D4 = 0 designates counter
MVI
latching
OUT
n1 .... n1 is the control-ward-register address
IN
n3 .... n3 is the counter 2 address
MOV
D,A
IN
n3
MOV
E,A
In this example, the IN instruction is executed twice. Due to
the internal logic of the M5L8253P-5 it is absolutely essential
to complete the entire reading procedure. If two bytes are
programmed to be read, then two bytes must be read before
any OUT instruction can be executed to the same counter.
. • ·MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8253P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Power supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Maximum power dissipation
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
With respect to GND
Ta=25'C
Limits
Unit
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
1000
rnW
-20-75
'C
-65-150
'C
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Limits
Symbol
----------
Parameter
--
--Vee
Power supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage (GND)
~-----
_.
Min
Nom
Max
5
5.5
4.5
------
------------------_._-
High-level input voitage
V'L
Low-level input voltage
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
-~
0
V'H
Unit
-""
2.2
I
II
V
-------f----Vcc+O.5
V
0.8
V
-0.5
(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, unless otherwise noted.)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Test conditions
Parameter
Min
V OH
f--VOL
---I'H
Typ
Max
High-level output voltage
Vss =OV,loH=-400,uA
Low-level output voltage
vss=OV, IOL=2_ 2mA
0.45
V
High-level input current
Vss=OV, V,=5, 5V
±10
J-lA
2.4
V
Low-level input current
Vss=OV, V,=OV
±10
loz
Off-state output current
Vss=OV, VI=O--VCC
±10
lee
Power supply current
I'L
-
J-lA
--
140
J-lA
rnA
VIL =Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrmS, Ta=25'C
10
pF
V'!OL =Vss, 1=1 MHz,25mVrms.T a=25'C
20
pF
--- f----------Vss=OV
- - -
C,
C,iO
Input capacitance
------
Input/output capacitance
-
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-41
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S3P-S
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a=-20~75°C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, Vss= 0 V)
Read cycle
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Unit
Test condition
symbol
Min
Typ
Max
tWCRl
Read pulse width
tRR
300
ns
tSUCA-R)
Address setup time before read
tAR
30
ns
th(R~A)
Address hold time after read
tRA
5
ns
treCCR)
Read recovery time
tRV
1000
ns
CL =150pF
Write cycle
Limits
Alternative
Symbol
Unit
Test condition
Parameter
Min
symbol
Typ
Max
~-~
twU
Clock low pulse width
t PWL
150
tcc. )
Clock cycle time
teLK
tWCGHl
Gate high pulse width
tGW
tW(Gu
Gate low pulse width
Gate setup time before clock
Gate hold time after clock
tW
(1)H)
Typ
Max
ns
ns
~~
tsu(G-
~ )
the. ~G)
DC
380
ns
150
sn
tGL
100
ns
tGS
100
ns
tGH
50
ns
C L =150PF
)
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=-20~75'C, Vcc= 5 V±10%, Vss= 0 V)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Test condition
symbol
Typ
Max
200
ns
100
ns
t ODG
300
ns
too
400
ns
tPZV(R_Q)
Propagation time from read to output
tRO
tPVZ(R_Q)
Propagation time from read to output floating
tOF
tpxv(G_Q)
Propagation time from gate to output
t pxv ( 1>_0)
Propagation time from clock to output
4-42
Unit
Min
.MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
-25
C L =150pF
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8253P-5
PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
TIMING DIAGRAMS
(Reference Voltage: High=2.2V, low=O.8V)
Read Cycle
A" Ao, CS
~
K
thCA_A)
tSUCA_R)
~
~~
:1
tWCRl
f--
9
11
'\Sk
~
tPZV(R_Q}
~
tPVZ(R_Q)
Write Cycle
A" Ao, CS
)(
~~
II
~
tSUCA-wl
I
¥
I
tW(W)
I
~ft'
0,-00
K
t hew- DJ
tSU(D-W)
(recov:~
::e_)__________\""_ _ _- ' } ""'"' ".".'
/r---------
\ ' -_ _ _....
Clock and Gate Cycle
tW(GU
GATE
N
/
~
I.
OUT
1\
thl; -GI
tSU(G-f)
ClK
.J
y
tSU(G-¢ )
\
tel;)
JI
tw{{>U
r\
J
X
I
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
t w (1)Hl
l
th(;-G)
V
tpxv(G-Q)
l1-
4-43
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
This is a family of general-purpose programmable input/
output devices designed for use with an 8-bit/16-bit parallel
CPU as input/output ports. Device is fabricated using Nchannel silicon-gate ED-MOS technology for a single supply
voltage. They are simple input and output interfaces for TTL
circuits, having 24 input/output pins which correspond to
three 8-bit input/output ports.
INPUT/OUTPUT ( : : : :
PORT A PA,-
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT A
PAoREAD INPUT RD ~
CHIP
S~~~~~ CS~
35
~ RESET RESET INPUT
(OV) GND
PORT ADDRESS { A, ~
INPUTS Ao~
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL-compatible
Darlington drive capability
24 programmable I/O pins
Direct bit set/reset capability
PC,-
10
BI·DIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT C
APPLICATION
Input/output ports for MELPS85 microprocessor
FUNCTION
These PPls have 24 input/output pins which may be individually programmed in two 12-bit groups A and B with
mode control commands from a CPU. They are used in three
major modes of operation, mode 0, mode 1 and mode 2.
Operating in mode 0 , each group of 12 pins may be programmed in sets of 4 to be inputs or outputs. In mode 1, ihe 24
1/0 terminals may be programmed in two 12-bit groups,
group A and group B. Each group contains one 8-bit data
port, which may be programmed to serve as input or output,
and one 4-bit control port used for handshaking and interrupt
control signals. Mode 2 is used with group A only, as one 8-
Outline
40P4
bit bidirectional bus port and one 5-bit control port. Bit set!
reset is controlled by CPU. A high-level reset input (RESET)
clears the control register, and all ports are set to the input
mode (high-impedance state).
BLOCK DIAGRAM
1------------------.
I
READ INPUT RD
WRITE INPUT WR
ADDRESS
INPUTS
1Al
6
t=:
8
Ao 9
Sy~~St CS
~EAD/WRITE
CONTROL
LOGIC
i
DATA BUS
(5V) Vee
28~
29~
30~ DATA BUS
31)-3
4)--
t
(OV) GND 7
4-44
GR~UP
a
a
I
!--
--;;.
...,.
~~
4
I
),l~_~r-....I.-,
(?:
0,
0,
0,
03
02
0,
Do
a
CONTROL
1
6
GR~UP
--;..
X
RESET INPUT RESET ~
CHIP
3
~'
B
a-BIT
INTERNAL
DATA BUS
4
GROUP
B
CONTROL
PAs
~~:
1
2
3
4
PA3 PORT A
PA2
PA,
PAo
INPUT/OUTPUT
1 PC,
DPC,
1 PC,
~ PC, INPUT/OUTPUT
PC3 PORT C
GROUP
PORT CB
- FEAST SIGNIFI
-!1'iii PC,
-'15> PC,
L=t~:;:·CA:N:T:4:B:IT:S)~======~1~PCO
, - - - - - - - - 1 - - 1L
I
GROUP A I
PORT C
(MOST SIGNIFI.:·
CANT 4 BITS)
PA,
40
4 ...........
_I
~+-----r----~
BUFFER
_I
PORT A
(a-BIT)
3
a
a
PB,
--;;.
GROUP
B
PORT B
(B-BIT)
a
c_____________________________
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
PB,
PB,
PB, INPUT/OUTPUT
2 PB3 PORT B
PB2
~
8 PBo
-.J
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL825SAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Table
1
Basic Operations
RD (Read) Input
At low-level, the status or the data at the port is transferred
to the CPU from the PPI. In essence, it allows the CPU to
read data from the PPI.
A,
AJ
CS
RD
WR
0
0
0
0
1
Data bus - Port A
Operation
0
1
0
0
1
Data bus - Port B
WR (Write) Input
1
0
0
0
1
Data bus - Port C
At low-level, the data or control words are transferred from
the CPU and written in the PPI.
0
0
0
1
0
Port A - Data bus
0
1
0
1
0
Port B - Data bus
1
0
0
1
0
Port C - Data bus
1
1
0
1
0
Control register - Data bus
X
X
1
X
X
Data bus is in high-impedance state
1
1
0
0
1
illegal condition
Ao, A1 (Port address) Input
These input signals are used to select one of the three
ports: port A, port B, and port C, or the control register. They
are normally connected to the least significant two bits of the
address bus.
RESET (Reset) Input
At high-level, the control register is cleared. Then all ports
are set to the input mode (high-impedance state).
CS (Chip-Select) Input
At low-level, the communication between the PPI and the
CPU is enabled. While at high-level, the data bus is kept in
the high-impedance state, so that commands from the CPU
are ignored. Then the previous data is kept at the output
port.
Where, "0" indicates low level
"1" indicates high-level
Bit Set/Reset
When port C is used as an output port, anyone bit of the
eight bits can be set (high) or reset (low) by a control word
from the CPU. This bit set/reset can be operated in the
same way as the mode set, but the control word format is
different. This operation is also used for INTE set/reset in
mode 1 and mode 2 .
ReadIWrite Control Logic
The function of this block is to control transfers of both data
and control words. It accepts the address signals (Ao, A"
CS), I/O control signals (RD, WR) and RESET signal, and
then issues commands to both of the control groups in the
PPI.
Bit setlreset flag
I
Active -
I
a
Don't care
Bit selection code
Data Bus Buffer
Port C
Bit selected
This three-state, bidirectional, eight-bit buffer is used to
transfer the data when an input or output instruction is executed by the CPU. Control words and status information are
also transferred through the data bus buffer.
PC7
PC6
03 02 0,
1 1 1
1 1 0
PCs
1 0
PC,
1
0
1
0
1
0 0
Group A and Group B Control
PC3
Accepting commands from the read/write control logic, the
control blocks (Group A, Group B) receive 8-bit control
words from the internal data bus and issue the proper commands for the associated ports. Control group A is associated with port A and the four high-order bits of port C. Control group B is associated with port B and the four low-order
bits of port C. The control register, which stores control
words, can only be written into.
PC2
PC,
1 0
0 1
0 1
0 0
PCo
0
jsetlreset code
Set (high)
10710610510,1031021011001
1
Reset (low) = 0
I
Fig. 1 Control word format for port C set/reset
Port A, Port B and Port C
The PPI contains three 8-bit ports whose modes and input/
output settings are programmed by the system software.
Port A has an output latch/buffer and an input latch. Port
B has an I/O latch/buffer and ,!n input buffer. Port C has an
output latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C can be divided into two 4-bit ports which can be used as ports for
control signals for port A and port B.
The basic operations are shown in Table 1.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-45
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
BASIC OPERATING MODES
The PPI can operate in anyone
modes.
Mode 0: Basic input/output
Mode 1: Strobed input/output
Mode 2: Bidirectional bus
The mode of both group A and
independently. The control word
shown in Fig. 2.
of three selected basic
(group A, group B)
(group A, group B)
(group A only)
group B can be selected
format for mode set is
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
11101010101011101
11101010101011111
Mode set flag
I
Active
I
PA,~PAo
I
=1
Group A mode set
0:
1.
0, 0
0, 1
= 1, X
Mode
0" 05 _
Mode
0" 05 Mode 2: 0" 05
I
I
Por! A input/output set
I
I
0
=1
I
1= 1
Ild}~::·:m;'
I
Ir= I 0 I
D, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
0, D, 05 0, 03 D, 01 Do
11101010111010101
11101010111010111
0
=1
output Input
' - ' _ ' _ Port C (hlgh·order four bits) input/output set
output input
...'
Mode
PA,~PAo
0, D, 05 0, 0 3 02 01 Do
0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 01 Do
11101010111011101
\1101010111011111
Port B input/output set
Port C (Iow·order four bits) input/output set
,--'--.,
output
10,10,10510,1031021011001. input
=1
•
0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 01 Do
Fig. 2
1.
11101011101010101
Control word format for mode set
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
\1101011101010111
Mode 0 (Basic Input/Output)
This functional configuration provides simple input and output operations for each of the three ports. No "handshaking"
is required; data is simply written in, or read from, the specified port. Output data from the CPU to the port can be held,
but input data from the port to the CPU cannot be held. Any
one of the 8-bit ports and 4-bit ports can be used as an input
port or an output port. The diagrams following show the
basic input/output operating modes.
07 06 05 D4 03 02 01 Do
07 06 Os D4 03 D2 0, Do
11101011101011101
11101011101011111
PA,~PAo
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
0, 0, 05 D, 03 0, 0, Do
11101011111010101
11101011111010111
PA,~PAo
4-46
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 01 Do
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, 0, Do
0, 0, 05 0, 0 3 0, 01 Do
11101010101010101
11101010101010111
11 10 10 1111 I 01110 1
11101011111011111
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
MODE 1 (PORT B)
8
OBFa
ACKa
OBF--+--'"'\
INTRa
ACK
--+----+-----'"'\
INTR
CONTROL WORD
CONTROL WORD
D, De D5 D, D, D, D, Do
111xlxlxlxll1olxl
Mode 1 output example
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
When INTE is low-level. then the output of INTR is
aways low-level.
Fig. 6 Timing diagram
OBFA
STB.
RD
ACKA
IBFA
INTRA
INTRA
1/0
1/0
STBa
PC,
IBFa
PCo
INTRa
PORT A (STROBED OUTPUT)
PORT B (STROBED INPUT)
(Nme2)
OUTPUT----~~-----------------------
Nme 2:
O=OUTPUT
Fig. 5
~_~
PORT----~',_----------
OBFa
WR
ACK a
PORT A (STROBED INPUT)
PORT B (STROBED OUTPUT)
PCo
INTRa
CONTROL WORD
O=OUTPUT
Fig. 7
Mode 1 port A and port B 1/0 example
Fig. 8
. • . MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
Mode 1 port A and port B 1/0 example
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
3.
Mode 2 (Strobed Bidirectional Bus Input!
Output)
Mode 2 can provide bidirectional operations, using one 8-bit
bus for communicating with terminal units. Mode 2 is only
valid with group A and uses one 8-bit bidirectional bus port
(port A) and a 5-bit control port (high-order five bits of port
C). The bus port (port A) has two internal registers, one for
input and the other for output. On the other hand, the control
port (port C) is used for communicating control signals and
bus-status signals. These control signals are similar to mode
1 and can also be used to control interruption of the CPU.
When group A is programmed as mode 2, group B can be
programmed independently as mode 0 or mode 1. When
group A is in mode 2, the following five control signals can
be used.
IBF
OBF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output)
The OBF output will go low-level to indicate that the CPU
has sent data to the internal register of port A. This signal
lets the terminal units know that the data is ready for transfer
from the CPU. When this occurs, port A remains in the floating (high-impedance) state.
ACK (Acknowledge Input)
DATA FROM
TERMINAL UNIT
DATA FROM
CPU
-------------(::::~_(::::~-----
PORTA
Fig. 9
Mode 2 timing diagram
Note 3:
INTR=IBF' MASK, STB' RD
+ OBF' MASK· ACK' WR
A low-level ACK input will cause the data of the internal register to be transferred to port A. For a high-level ACK input,
the output buffer will be in the floating (high-impedance)
state.
STB (Strobe Input)
When the STB input is low-level, the data from terminal units
will be held in the internal register, and the data will be sent
to the system data bus with an RD signal to the PPI.
IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output)
When data from terminal units is held on the internal register, IBF will be high level.
INTR (Interrupt Request Output)
This output is used to interrupt the CPU and its operations
the same as in mode 1. There are two interrupt enable flags
that correspond to INTEA for mode 1 output and mode 1
input.
INTE, is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with OBF and ACK. INTE, is controlled by bit setting of PCs.
INTE2 is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with IBF and STB. INTE2 is controlled by bit setting of PC4.
Fig. 9 shows the timing diagram of mode 2, and Fig. 10 is
an example of mode 2 operation.
I/O
IBFA STB A ACK A OBFA I/O INTRA
CONTROL WORD
0, 0, 05 0, 03 02 0, Do
Ll I ll x l x lxll/011/011/01
I
L--_ _
PC2-PCO
1 =INPUT
O=OUTPUT
L--_ _ _ _ _
PORT B
1 =INPUT
O=OUTPUT
GROUP B MODE
'-----____ a =MOOE a
1 =MOOEl
Fig. 10
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
An example of mode 2 operation
4-49
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
4.
Control Signal Read
Table
In mode 1 or mode 2 when using port C as a control port, by
CPU execution of an IN instruction, each control signal and
bus status from port C can be read.
Read-out control sIgnals
~
Mode
5. Control Word Tables
Mode 1, input
Control word formats and operation details for mode 0, mode
1, mode 2 and set/reset control of port C are given in Tables
3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively.
Table
2
Ds
D7
D6
I/O
I/O
OBFA INTE,
D3
Da
D,
Dz
IBFA INTEA INTRA INTEs IBFs INTRs
Model. output OBFA INTEA
Mode 2
D.
I/O
I/O
INTRA INTEs OBFs INTRs
IBFA INTEz INTRA
By group B mode
3
Mode 0 control words
D7
D6
D5
D,
D3
D2
D,
Do
Hexadecimal
Port A
Port C (high order 4 bits)
Port C (low order 4 bits)
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
80
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
81
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
82
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
1
0
a
0
a
0
1
1
83
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
1
0
0
0
1
0
a
0
88
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
Port B
1
0
a
0
1
0
0
1
89
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
8A
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
8B
OUT
IN
IN
IN
1
0
0
1
0
90
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
1
0
0
1
1
0
a
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
a 0 0
a 0 0
a 0 1
a a 1
1
a a
1
a a
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
a
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
91
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
0
92
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
1
93
IN
OUT
IN
IN
0
98
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
1
99
IN
IN
IN
OUT
0
9A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
9B
IN
IN
IN
IN
Note 4:
OUT indicates output port, and IN indicates input port.
Table
4
Mode 1 control words
Control words
D7 D6 D5 D, D3 D2 D,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
1
0
1
0
a
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Do
a x
Port C
Port A
decimal
A4
A5
A6
0
1
1
X
1
1
0
X
1
1
1
X
0
1
a
X
1
X
A7
Note 5:
6:
0
1
1
PC6
OUT
-OBFA
-ACKA
OUT
-o,BFA
OUT
OUT
AC
AD
1
1
1
0
AF
1
1
1
PortC
PCs
B5
B6
B7
PCz
PC,
PCa
OUT
INTRA
-ACK s
-OBFa
INTRs
OUT
-ACKA
OUT
INTRA
-STBs
IBFs
INTRs
IN
-OBFA
-ACKA
IN
INTRA
ACK s
OBFs
INTRa
OUT
-OBFA
-ACKA
IN
INTRA
-STBa
IBFs
INTRa
IN
IN
OUT
IBFA
-STBA
INTRA
ACKs
-OBFa
INTRa
OUT
IN
OUT
IBFA
-STBA
INTRA
-STBs
IBFs
INTRs
IN
IN
IN
IBFA
-STBA
INTRA
-ACK s
-OBFa
INTRa
OUT
IN
IN
IBFA
-STBA
INTRA
-STBa
IBFa
INTRa
IN
BC
X
BE
X
BF
Port B
PC3
PC.
B4
BD
1
PC7
AE
0
Group B
Group A
Hexa-
4-50
Group B
Group A
Control words
Mode of group A and group B can be programmed independently.
It is not necessary for both group A and group B to be in mode 1.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
~--
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
Table
5
Mode 2 control words
D7 DB Ds D, D3 D2 D,
Group B
Group A
Control words
Do
Port C
Hexadecimal
PortC
Port 8
Port A
(Ex)
PC 7
PC 6
PCs
PC,
PC 3
PC2
PC,
I
I
PCa
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
0
CO
bus
OBF A
=-- IBFA
ACKA
STBA
INTRA
OUT
--OUT
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
1
C1
Bidirectional
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
IN
OUT
1
1
X
X
X
0
1
0
C2
Bidirectional
bus
OBFA
ACKA
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
OUT
IN
1
1
X
X
X
0
1
1
Bidirectional
OBF A
ACKA
IBFA
1
1
X
X
X
1
----0 X
C3
1
1
X
X
X
1
1
Table
6
X
C4
C6
Bidirectional
bus
=-- r - -
bus
OBFA
INTRA
1----------- - - -------IBFAACKA
STBA
INTRA
Bidirectional
OBF A
ACK;
bus
STBA
IN
IN
ACKB j OBFB jlNTRB
OUT
STBB
~.----
Bidirectional
bus
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
I
IBFB
IINTRB
IN
Port C set/reset control words
PortC
Control words
D, D6 D5 D, D, D2 D,
Do
Hexadecimal
0
X
0
00
0
0
X
X
0
0
0
X
X
X. 0
0
0
1
01
X
X
X
0
0
1
0
02
0
X
X
X
0
0
1
1
03
0
X
X
X
0
1
0
0
04
0
X
X
X
0
1
0
1
05
0
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
06
PC 7
PC 6
PCs
PC,
Remarks
PC,
PC2
PC,
PCa
--
0
--
1
---
--
--
0
1
----
0
INTEB set/reset for mode 1 input
1
INTEB set/reset for mode 1 output
0
X
X
X
0
1
1
1
07
0
X
X
X
1
0
0
0
08
0
INTEA set/reset for mode 1 input
0
X
X
X
1
0
0
1
09
1
INTE2 set/reset for mode 2
0
X
X
X
1
0
1
0
OA
1
0
0
X
X
X
1
0
1
1
OB
0
X
X
X
1
1
0
0
OC
0
INTEA set/reset for mode 1 output
0
X
X
X
1
1
0
1
OD
1
INTEl set/reset for mode 2
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
0
OE
0
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
OF
1
Note 7:
8:
--
0
1
The terminais of port C should be programmed for the output mode, before the bit set/reset operation is executed.
Also used for controlling the interrupt enabie flag(INTE)
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-51
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Vo
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation
Topr
Tstg
Operating free-air temperature range
Conditions
With respect to GND
Ta=25'C
Storage temperature range
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol
Min
Nom
Max
5
5.25
Supply voltage
GND
Supply voltage
V ,H
High-level input voltage
2
Vee
V
V ,L
Low-level input voltage
-0.5
0.8
V
Symbol
4.75
V
1000
mW
-20-75
65 150
°C
°C
V
(T a=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, GND= 0 V, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Test conditions
Data bus
High-level output voltage
V
-0.5-7
V
0
Parameter
V OH
V
-0.5-7
Unit
Vee
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit
(T a =-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Parameter
limits
-0.5-7
Port
Data bus
GND=OV
Min
IOH=-400",A
IOH=-200"A
GND=OV
Typ
Max
2.4
Unit
V
IOL=2.5mA
I
VOL
Low-level output voltage
10H
High-level output current (NoteIO)
GND=OV, VOH=1. 5V, R'XT=750n
Ice
Supply current from Vee
GND=OV
I'H
III
High-level input current
GND=OV, V,=5. 25V
Low-level input current
GND=OV, V,=OV
±1O
loz
Off-state output current
GND=OV, V,=O-5. 25V
±10
mA
mA
J.lA
J.lA
J.lA
Cj
Input capacitance
VIL=GND, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms Ta=25°C
10
pF
Cilo
Input/output terminal capacitance
VI/DL =GND, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms Ta=25'C
20
pF
Note
9:
10:
Port
10L=1. 7mA
-1
0.45
-4
120
±10
V
Current flowing into an IC is positive: out is negative.
It is valid only for any 8 input/output pins of PB and PC.
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol
(Ta =-20-75'(, Vcc=5V±5%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Prameter
Alternative
symbol
Limits
Test conditions
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
tW(R)
Read pulse width
tRR
300
ns
tSU(PE-R)
Peripheral setup time before read
t,R
0
ns
th(R-PE)
Peripheral hold time after read
tHR
0
ns
tSU(A-R)
Address setup time before read
tAR
0
ns
thCR-A)
Address hold time after read
tRA
0
ns
tw(w)
Write pulse width
tww
300
ns
tSU(DQ-W)
Data setup time before write
tow
100
ns
'th(W-DO)
Data hold time after write
two
30
ns
tSU(A-W)
Address setup time before write
tAW
0
ns
thCW_A)
Address hold time after write
twA
20
ns
tW(ACK)
Acknowledge pulse width
tAK
300
ns
tW(STS)
Strobe pulse width
tST
500
ns
tSU(PE-STB)
Peripheral setup time before strobe
t ps
0
ns
th(sT8-PE)
Peripheral hold time after strobe
t pH
180
ns
tC(RW)
Read/write cycle time
tRV
850
ns
4-52
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta =-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
---
Limits
Parameter
- f-
Test conditions
symbol
---
tPZV(R-DQ)
Propagation time from read to data output
tRO
tPVZ(R-OQ)
Propagation time from read to data floating (Notel 1)
tOF
Propagation time from write to output
tWB
_.-
-----.---~
f---~M;;;-r-TYP1=~
Unit
200
----ns
100
ns
350
ns
I-10
tPHUW_PE)
tPLH(W_PE)
---~-,--.------.--~~--
_.
Propagation time from strobe to ISF flag
~~-18F)
---,-.-~
~~T8-INTR)
Propagation time from strobe to interrupt
=-:0;~
Propagation time from read to interrupt
tPHL(R-IBF)
Propagation time from read to ISF flag
tPHUW-INTR)
Propagation time from write to interrupt
tPHUW-OBF)
Propagation time from write to OBF flag
IplH(ACK-OBF)
Propagation time from acknowledge to OBF flag
Propagation time from acknowledge to interrupt
tPZV{ACK_PE)
Propagation time from acknowledge to data output
tPVZ(ACK-PE)
~-tWOB
-
tAOS
tAIT
- - f--tAD
Propagation time from acknowledge to data floating (Note 11 )
Test conditions are not applied
A.C Testing waveform
Input pulse level
Input pulse rise time
Input pulse fall time
Reference level input
output
_.-
-"-
0.45-2.4V
20ns
20ns
V'H=2V, VIL =0. SV
VoH=2V, VOL =0. BV
t KO
-ns
300
------300
ns
- _.. _- 1---- r-------I-~
400
ns
f---- f----. -----300
ns
--,---
tSIT
ttT
-
tPLH(ACK-INTA)
Note 11
12 .
-
---I
I
~--I
- - - I : - B -~
- - - - _ . _ - - , , - _..
tPHL(R-INTR)
---,
CL =150pF
~--------
-'"--~--
r--r-
f---
I
I
i
2.4
0.45
i
650
f-----
350
~
I
--
850
-----
--------
350
-~
300
20
250
ns
1-----ns
--
ns
_._--
ns
--------ns
-ns
""'12
2Y-A...O",.S,--_O"",,,,-s.A..
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
4-53
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
TIMING DIAGRAM
Data Bus Read Operation
w(Rl
.V
~,
-' ~
~
CS, Ao, A,
~
~
:K
X~
-"or
tPVZ(R_DQ)
tPZV(R_OQ)
ff
~
~:
~
.If
Data Bus Write Operation
Ihlw-A)
CS, Ao, A,
tSU(OQ-W)
Do-D,
ModeO Port Input
PORT INPUT
ModeO, 1 Port Output
w(w)
'\",
,:.1
ftPHL(W-PE)
tPLH(W-PE)
~
PORT OUTPUT
4-54
• MITSUBIS.HI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
Mode1 Strobed Input
tW(STsl
\ <-
_V
tPlH(STS-IBF2.J
-I
\
IBF
tPHLtR_IBF}
(
.~
\
~
tPHL(R-INTA)
tPlH(STB-INTR]1
-I
~
\~
INTR
II
th(STB-PE)
tSU(PE-STB)
PORT INPUT
~
~\\
J'--
-'
It-
""~//
Mode1 Strobed Output
tw(w)
tPLH(ACK-OBF)
tPLH(ACK-INTR)
INTR
tPHL(W-PE)
tPlH(W-PE)
PORT OUTPUT
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-55
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL825SAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
Mode2 Bidirectional
~
l~-
'\
tPHLCW-OBF)
\
\
J
tpLH(ACK-OBF)
INTR
tW(ACK)
~
\ ~/y
tW(STS)
f-
\r
tPLH(STB-IBF)
-Y
~
..,fIBF
--'
tPLH(R_IBF)
~
--.'th(STB-PE)
tSU(PE-STB)
PORT A
,~//
~
Note 13: INTR=IBF' MASK· STB • RD
4-56
I7J
~\\
/h
\\~
tPZV{ACK-PE)
~
\\).
+ OBF • MASK· ACK' WR
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
tPVZ(ACK-PE)
~
~~\\
..., ~//
~
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
Circuit Examples for Applications
1.
Mode 0
An example of a circuit for an application using mode
shown in Fig. 11.
a is
t
PA7
PORT A
\
RESET
1r
RESET
OUT
PAD
RD
RD
WR
WR
II
RESET IN
PC7
PORT C
\
PC,
PORT C
CS
AQ, Al
PPI
M5L8255AP-5
PC3
ADDRESS
loiM
DECODER
CPU
M5L8085AF
\
PCo
ALE
PB7
PORT B
\
PSo
Fig. 11
AD7
D7
\
\
Do
ADo
Circuit example for an application using mode O.
In this example, the PPI is in mode 0, and the control
word should be 10010000 (90,6).
MVI
A,90#
OUT
03#
The PPI Will be initialized by executing the above two instructions.
Then, for example, to read data from port A and to output
data to port Band C, the following three instructions can be
used.
CPU A register ~ Port A
Port B ~ A register
01 #
MVI
A, 01 # Bit-setting control word for PCa
Outputting to control address
OUT
03#
(CS = "0", A, = Aa = "1")
The other bits of port C, in this case, are not affected.
IN
00#
OUT
IN
00# CPU A register ~ Port A
OUT
01 # Port B ~ A register
OUT
02 # Port C ~ A register
After setting the mode, each port operates as a normal port.
After setting the mode, as shown in Fig. 11, to read data
from port A, to output to port B, and to set the first bit of port
C "1 ", the following four instructions can be used.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-57
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
2.
Mode 1
The actual program for the circuit of Fig. 12 is as follows:
An example of a circuit for an application using mode 1 is
shown in Fig. 12.
FROM
FROM
FROM
FROM
INPUT{
DATA
ADDRESS Al
ADDRESS Ao
DECODER
CPU
1
MVI
A,BO#
OUT
MVI
OUT
EI
HLT
03#
A,09#
03#
Control word is 1011 0000, port A is
the mode 1 input and the others are
output
Outputting to the control address
PC 4 bit-set 00001001
Outputting to the control address
Interrupt enable
Halt
If the data has been set in a terminal unit, and the
strobe signal has been input, then the data will be latched in
port A and the CPU RST7.5 goes high-level. In the case of
Fig. 11, a jump to 003C16 is executed to continue the program as follows:
TO DATA
D,
PC,
D,
003C'6 IN
;SUS
D6
PBo-P87
EI
D7
RET
~~-~~~~-
Fig. 12
CPU
TO RST7.5
(INTERRUPT INPUT)
A circuit for an application using mode 1
Transferring data from a terminal unit to port A and sending a strobe signal to PC 4 will hold the data in the internal
latch of the PPI, and PC5 (IBF input buffer full flag) is set to
"1" If a bit-set of PC 4 has been executed in advance, the
CPU can be interrupted by the INTR signal of PC3 when the
input data is latched in the PPI. In this way, port A becomes
an interrupting port; and at the same time, port B can select
its mode independently.
4-58
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
00# CPU register A +- Port A
PC3 interrupt signal becomes low-level
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8255AP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
3.
Mode 2
4. When the slave CPU senses that OBF has become low-
An example of a circuit for an application using mode 2 is
shown in Fig. 13.
In Fig. 13, the data bus of the slave system is connected
with the corresponding PPI A bit of the master station. The
input port consists of a three-state buffer and gate B which
allow the slave CPU to read flag outputs (IBF, OBF) of the
PPI as data.
When the following instruction is executed in this example, the action is as described:
IN 01 # (reading in from 01 16 input port)
The data which is made up of the least significant bit
(Do), the OBF (output buffer full flag output) and the next
least significant bit (D 1) , the IBF (input buffer full flad
output)will be read into the slave CPU.
When the following instruction is executed, the action is
as described:
IN 00# (reading in from 00 16 input port)
ACK (PC6) of the PPI becomes low-level by gate C,
and the contents of the port A output latch will be read into
the slave CPU.
When the following instruction is executed, the action is
as described:
OUT 00# (writing out to 0016 output port)
STB (PC4) of the PPI becomes low-level by gate D, then
the contents of the slave CPU register A will be written into
the port A input latch of the PPI.
Actual operations are as follows:
1. PPI is set in mode 2 by the master CPU (03 address).
2. The master CPU writes the data, which is transferred to
the slave CPU, into port A of the PPI (in turn, OBF becomes low-Ievell.
3. The slave CPU continues to read the state of flags (OBF
and IBF) as data while OBF is high-level (i.e. no datd
from the master CPU).
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
level, the slave CPU starts to read the data from 00 16
(Which is the input address for the preceding data)
which is in the output latch of port A (in turn, OBF returns
to high-level).
During this period, the master CPU reads the status flags
(reading in from 02 of port C) and checks the states of
both the bit 7 (bBF) and bit 5 (IBF). If OBF is low-level,
it indicates that the slave CPU has not yet received the
data; so the maser does not write new data. If OBF is
high-level, the master CPU writes the next data.
When data is to be transferred to the master CPU, the
contents of the slave CPU A register will be transmited to
the port input latch of the PPI. The slave CPU transfers
the data to address 00 16 (in turn, the IBF becomes highlevel).
The master CPU transfers data to port C and then checks
the status flag. If the input latch contains data from the
slave CPU, which is indicated by IBF having a high-level
output, the data is read from port (00 16 ) (in turn, the IBF
returns to low-level).
The slave CPU reads the status flag from 01 16 to determine if IBF has returned to low-level. If it has not, new
data will not be written as long as IBF is high-level.
In this way, data can be exchanged. Since there are two
sets of independent registers, input latch and output
latch, used by port A of the PPI, it is not necessary to
alternate input/output transfers.
A program which has operating functions as described
above, is explained as follows.
The operation, in mode 2, for group A of the PPI is considered here.
PPI MODE SET ADDRESS
0316
!-.':m,-,"1');:---~::":":~~=-C::"'--'~"-'--Fo=-----; ~D7
10iM
ADo
ALE
MASTER
CPU
SLAVE
CPU
ALE
10iNi
0,
RD~----~~RD
WR
MASTER SYSTEM
Fig. 13
'----------1 RD
PPI
L-_ _ _ _ _--j
WR
WR
SLAVE SYSTEM
TO CPU
INT INPUT
A circuit for an application using mode 2
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-59
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
1. Master CPU subroutine for transmitting data to the slave
CPU.
2. Subroutine for receiving data from the slave CPU.
Program example
Program example
MIN
IN
02#
02#
ANI
20#
80#
JZ
MIN
JNZ
OBF
IN
00#
POP
PSW
RET
OUT
00#
MOUT
PUSH
PSW
OBF
IN
ANI
RET
R8
R8
3. Slave CPU subroutine for transmitting data to the master
CPU.
4. Subroutine for receiving data from the master CPU.
Program example
Program example
SOUT
PUSH
PSW
IN
01#
IBF
IN
01
#
ANI
01
SIN
ANI
02#
JNZ
SIN
JZ
IBF
IN
00#
POP
PSW
RET
OUT
00#
RET
RET
4-60
#
RET
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82SSAP-S
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
4. Address Decoding
Address decoding with multiple PPI units is shown in Figs.
14 and 15. These are functionally equal.
The same address data is output to both the upper and
lower 8-bit address bus with the execution of IN or OUT instruction by the CPU.
5. PPI Initialization
It is advisable to rest the PPI with a system initial reset and
to select the mode at the beginning of a system program.
The initial state of the PPI used as an output port is shown in
Fig. 16.
POWER
SUPPLY Vee
M74LS373P
r---
CPU
M5L8085AP
A7
A,
RESET
SIGNAL
r-
A5----··~
AD7
\
ADo
~
101M
Ao
TO
ADDRESS
BUS
ALE~
j
PORT
OUTPUT PORT OUTPUT ="1··
UNSTA~
FLOATING
(INPUT MODE)
Fig. 16
r
Note 14:
B C E2 E:/
'---.,--J M74LS138P
TO PORT ADDRESS INPUT E, 0 1
6 7
Ao AND Al OF EACH PPI
r
~
:
SELECTING MODE AT THE
:
r-
A4
A3
A2
A,
E Oc
~ OV
II
PPI initialization
Period of reset pulse must be at least 50"s during or after power on. Subsequent reset pulse can be 500ns
minimum.
n-n
~
TO THE CHIP SELECT INPUT CS OF
EACH PPI
Fig. 14
PPI address decoding (case 1)
CPU
M5L8085AP
A'5 fA'4
Al3
A12
All
AID
Ag
Aa
101M
I
Jl
TO PORT ADDRESS INPUT
Ao AND A, OF EACH PPI
I
TO
ADDRESS
BUS
I
I
J.
IABCE2E31
M74LS138P
E, 0 1
6 7
lrr- orr
~
TO THE CHIP SELECT INPUT CS OF
EACH PPI
Fig. 15
PPI address decoding (case 2)
.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-61
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8257P-5 is a programmable, 4-channel direct memory access (DMA) controller. It is produced using the Nch'annel silicon-gate ED-MaS process and is specifically
designed to simplify data transfer at high speeds for microcomputer systems.
The LSI operates on a single 5V power supply.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
INPuif8u~~t9
INPUV?Os;.n~
1/'oR ADDRESS
OUTPUTS
I/OW-
MEMOR6u~~t9 MEMR ~
MEMOR'S~~8~
MEMW
~
4-7
4
TERMINAL
COUNT
OUTPUT
MARK OUTPUT MARK ~ 5
READY INPUT READY ~ 6
HOLDE~8~~2m;:
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HLDA
~
ADDRESS
INPUTI
OUTPUTS
0-3
7
STOROBlg8~~B¥ ADSTB ~ 8
ENABLEAg8~~~¥ AEN ~ 9
Single 5V supply voltage
Single TTL compatible
Priority DMA request logiC
Channel-masking function
Terminal count and Modulo 128 outputs
4-channel DMA controller
Compatible with MELPS85 devices
HOLD
R63Y~crt
HRQ ~ 10
CHIP ST~~8t CS ~ 11
CLOCK INPUT CLK ~ 12
DMA
ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT 2.3
i
DATA
INPUTI
OUTPUTS
DACK, ~ 14
__
DACK) ~ 15
DRQ3~16
APPLICATION
DMA control of peripheral equipment such as floppy disks
and CRT terminals that require high-speed data transfer.
DMA'
REQUEST
INPUT 0-3
GROUND
FUNCTION
The M5L8257P-5 controller is used in combination with the
M5L8212P 8-bit input/output port in 8-bit microcomputer systems. It consists of a channel section to acknowledge DMA
requests, control logic to exchange commands and data with
the CPU, read/write logic, and registers to hold transfer
addresses and count the number of bytes to be transferred.
When a DMA request is made to an unmasked channel from
the peripherals after setting of the transfer mode, transferstart address and the number of transferred bytes for the
registers, the M5L8257P-5 issues a priority request for the
use of the bus to the CPU. On receiving an HLDA signal
GND
Outline 40P4
from the CPU, it sends a DMA acknowledge Signal to the
channel with the highest priority, starting DMA operation.
During DMA operation, the contents of the high-order 8 bits
of the transfer memory address are transmitted to the
M5L8212P address-latch device through pins Do ~ 0 7 . The
contents of the low-order 8 bits are transmitted through pins
Ao ~ A7 . After address transmission, OMA transfer can be
started by dispatching read and write signals to the memories and peripherals.
----------------------,
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(5V) Vee 3
DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-O
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-O
(OV) GND
DATA INPUTS/OUTPUTS
li~<1o---~----'
DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-1
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-I
02 ""8"-----'
0, 9
Do~==~===~
DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-2
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH-2
1/0 READ INPUT/OUTPUT I/O R ij
I/O WRITE INPUT/OUTPUT I/O W"2"-----'
CLOCK INPUT
CLK I
RESET INPUT RESET 3
ADDRESS INPUTS/OUTPUTS
{~A021 CI2)-~~-I
A30;3g}----L..."..._ _.J
CHIP SELECT INPUT
ADDRESS OUTPUTS
3-BIT
INTERNAL
BUS
IT-I-ITI~r---.J
CS 11
{~:Ao 389
A, ('iO}-----I
READY INPUT READY 6
HRQ OUTPUT
HRQ 10
RE~~~~~=~~ ;~~~ ,,~;------. MO~~DSET 1 - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
MEMORY
MEMORY WRITE OUTPUT
'iiifEMW
4
ADDRESS ENABLE OUTPUT
AEN 9
ADDRESS STROBE OUTPUT ADSTB 8
4-62
REGISTER
DMA REQUEST
INPUT CH-3
DMA ACKNOWLEDGE
OUTPUT CH·3
1-'---+---------------'
-----------~
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
TC
TERMINAL COUNT
OUTPUT
MARK OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
OPERATION
Hold Request Output (HRQ)
I/O Read Input/Output (I/OR)
This output requests control of the system bus. HRQ will normally be applied to the HOLD input on the CPU.
When the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, this
threestate, bidir~ctional pin serves for inputting and reads
the upper/lower bytes of the 8-bit status register or 16-bit
DMA address register and the high/low order bytes of the
terminal counter.
In the master mode, the pin gives control output and is
used to obtain data from a peripheral equipment during the
DMA write cycle.
I/O Write Input/Output
(UOW)
This pin is also of the three-state bidirectional type. When
the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, it serves for inputting and loads the contents of the data bus on the upper/
lower bytes of the 8-bit status register or 16-bit DMA
address register and the upper/lower bytes of the terminal
counter.
Memory Read Output (MEMR)
This active-low three-state output is used to read data from
the addressed memory location during DMA read cycles.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
This pin is active on a low-level. It enable the lORD and
IOWR signals output from the CPU, when the M5L8257P-5 is
in slave-mode operation.
In the master mode, it is disabled to prevent the chip
from selecting itself while performing the DMA function.
Clock Input (ClK)
This pin generates internal timing for the M5L8257P-5 and is
connected to the ~ 2 (TTLl output of the M5L8224P-5 clock
generator.
Reset Input (RESET)
This asynchronous input clears all registers and control lines
inside the M5L8257P-5.
DMA Acknowledge Outputs (DACKO~DACK3)
These active-low outputs indicate that the peripheral equipment connected to the channel in question can execute the
DMA cycle.
Memory Write Output (MEMW)
DMA Request Inputs
This active-low three-state output is used to write data into
the addressed memory location during DMA write cycles.
These independent, asynchronous channel-request inputs
are used to secure use of the DMA cycle for the peripherals.
(DRQO~DRQ3)
Mark Output (MARK)
Data-Bus Buffer
This signal notifies that the DMA transfer cycle for each
channel is the 128th cycle since the previous MARK output.
This three-state, bidirectional, 8-bit buffer interfaces the
M5L8257P-5 to the CPU for data transfer. During a DMA cycle the upper 8 bits of the DMA address are output to the
M5L8212P latch device through this buffer.
Ready Input (READY)
This asynchronous input is used to extend the memory read
and write cycles in the M5L8257P-5 with wait states if the
selected memory requires longer cycles.
Hold Acknowledge Input (HlDA)
This input from the CPU indicates that the system bus is
controlled by the M5L8257P-5.
Address Strobe Output (ADSTB)
This output strobes the most significant byte of the memory
address into the M5L8212P 8-bit input/output port through
the data bus.
Address Inputs/Outputs
(Ao~A3)
The four bits of these input/output pins are bidirectional.
When the M5L8257P-5 is in slave-mode operation, serve to
input and address the internal registers. In the case of master operation, they output the low-order 4 bits of the 16-bit
memory address.
Terminal Count Output (TC)
This output signal notifies that the present DMA cycle is the
last cycle for this data block.
(A4~A7)
Address Enable Output (AEN)
Address Inputs/Outputs
This signal is used to disable the system data bus and system control bus by means of the bus enable pin on the
M5L8228P system controller. It may also be used to inhibit
non-DMA devices from responding during DMA cycles.
These four address lines are three-state outputs which constitute bits 4 through 7 of the memory address generated by
the M5L8257P-5 during all DMA cycles.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
4-63
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
Register Initialization
Two 16-bit registers are provided for each of the 4 channels.
DMA Address register
a
15
DMA TRANSFER STARTING ADDRESS
Terminal count register
15
a
1413
~------------------~----------~--------
DMA MODE
NUMBER OF TRANSFERRED BYTES-l
The DMA transfer starting address, number of transferred
bytes, and OMA mode are written for each channel in 2
steps using the 8-bit data bus. The lower-order and upperorder bytes are automatically indicated by the firstlast flipflop for the writing and reading in 2 continuous steps.
The OMA mode (read, write, or verify) is indicated by
the upper 2 bits of the terminal count register. The read
mode refers to the operation of peripheral devices reading
data out of memory. The write mode refers to data from
peripheral devices being written into memory. The verify
mode sends neither the read nor the write signals and performs a date check at the peripheral device.
In addition to the above-mentioned registers, there is a
mode set register and a status register.
Mode set register (write only)
7
0
=A:L=I=T:c:s~I=E:w=:1=R:p::I,::E:N:3==E:N:2=:::E:N:l::1:E:N:O~_
MODESET:
MVI A,ADDl
OUT 00 *1::
Channel
MVI A, ADDH
OUT 00 *1::
Channel
MVI A, Tel
OUT 01 *1::
Channel
OUT 01 *1::
Channel
MVI A, XX
OUT 08 *1::
0 lower-order address
0 upper-order address
0 terminal count lower-order
0 terminal count upper-order
Mode set resister
As can be seen from the above example, until the contents
of the address register and terminal count register become
valid, the enable bit of the mode set register must not be
set. This prevents memory contents from being destroyed by
improper ORO signals from peripheral devices.
DMA Operation Description
When a DMA request signal is received at the DRO pin from
a peripheral device after register initialization for a channel
that is not masked, the M5L8257P-5 outputs a hold request
signal to the CPU to begin DMA operation (S1)'
The CPU, upon receipt of the HRO signal, outputs the
H LDA signal which reserves capture of the bus after it has
executed the present instruction to place this system in the
hold state.
When the M5L8257P receives the HLOA signal, an internal priority determining circuit selects the channel with the
highest priority for the beginning of data transfer (So).
Upon the next S1 state, the address signal is sent. The
lower-order 8-bits and upper-order 8-bits are sent by means
of the Ao-A7 and 0 0 - 07 pins respectively, latched into the
CHANNEL ENABLE BITS
ADDED FUNCTION SETTING BITS
M5L8212P and output at pins As-A15. Simultaneous with this,
Status Register (read only)
the AEN signal is output to prohibit the selection of a device
7
a not capable of DMA.
In the S2 state, the read, extended write, and DACK siga
a
a
UP
TC3
TC2
TCl
TCO 1
nals are output and data transferred from memory or a
The upper-order 4-bits of the mode set register are used to peripheral device appears on the data bus.
select the added function, as described in Table 1. The lowIn the S3 state, the write signal required to write data
er-order 4-bits are mask kits for each channel. When set to from the bus is output. At this time if the remaining number
1, DMA requests are allowed. When the reset signal is input, of bytes to be transferred from the presently selected chanall bits of the mode set and status registers are reset and nel has reached 0, the terminal count (TC) signal is output.
OMA is. inhibited for all channels. Therefore, to execute Simultaneously with this, after each 128-byte data transfer a
OMA operations, registers must first be initialized. An exam- mark signal is output as required. In addition, in this state
ple of such an initialization is shown below.
the READY pin is sampled and, if low, the wait state (Sw) is
entered. This is used to perform OMA with slow access
memory devices. In the verify mode, READY input is
ignored.
....:1
4-64
• .MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
In the 54 state, the ORQ and HLOA pins are sampled at
the end of a transferred byte as the address signal, control
signals, and OACK signal are held to determine if transfer
will continue.
As described above, transfer of 1 byte requires a minimum of 4 states for execution. For example, if a 2MHz clock
input is used, the maximum transfer rate is SOak byte/so
Memory Mapped I/O
When using memory mapped I/O, it is neccessary to change
the connections for the control signals.
RESET
1/0 RD
MEM RD
1/0 WR
MEM WR
MEM RD
1/0 RD
MEM WR
1/0 WR
SYSTEM BUS
Fig.
2
M5L8257P-5
Memory mapped liD
Also, the read mode and write mode specifications for setting the mode of the terminal count are reversed.
Fig.
DMA Operation state transition diagram
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
4-65
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
INTERNAL REGISTERS OF THE M5L8257P-5
Upper
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
Lower
D2
D,
Do
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D,
Do
DMA address
channel-O
terminal count
DMA address
channel-l
terminal count
DMA address
channel-2
terminal count
DMA address
channel-3
terminal count
Mode setting (tor write only)
I 0 I 0 I 0 I UP ITC*c2 1TC1I Tcol
Ao-A"
CO........ C13
Rd. Wr
AL
EW
TCS
RP
: Address of the memories for which DMA will be carried out from now on. In initialization, DMA start addresses must be wrihen.
: Terminal counts-in this IC (the number of remaining transfer bytes minus 1 )
: Used for DMA-mode.setting by the following convention:
Rd
Wr
Mode to be set
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
DMA verify
DMAwrite
DMA read
Prohibition
: Automatic load mode. When this bit has been set, contents of the channel 3 register are written, as are on the channel 2 register when
channel 2 DMA transfer comes to an end. This mode allows quick, automatic chaining operations without intervention of the software.
: Extended write signal mode. When this bit has been set, write signals can be transmitted in advance to memories and peripheral equipment requiring long access time.
: Terminal count stop. When a DMA transfer process is complete, with terminal-count output, the channel-enable mask of that channel is reset, prohibiting subsequent DMA cycles.
: Rotating priority mode. The setting of this mode allows the priority order to be rotated by each byte transfer.
CH-O
CH-l
CH-2
1
CH-l
CH-2
CH-3
CH-O
2
CH-2
CH-3
CH-O
CH-l
3
CH-3
CH-Qi
CH-l
CH-2
4
CH-O
CH-l
CH-2
CH-3·
Channel used for the present data transfer
Priority list for the next cycle
ENO-EN3
UP
TCO-TC3
4-66
Status (tor read only)
CH-3
Channel-enable mask. This mask prohibits or allows the DMA requesl.
Update flag. This is set when register contents are transferred in an automatic load mode from channel 3 to channel 2.
Terminal-count status flags. At the time of terminal-count output, the flag corresponding to the channel is set.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S7P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
REGISTER ADDRESS
Address input
F/L
A,
A2
0
0
0
0
AI
0
Register
AD
0
0
channel 0 DMA address Low-order
..
_._-
'---~
f-----
0
0
1
channel 0 DMA address High-order
-----~
-
-~-------------------
aterminal count Low-order
aterminal count High-order
0
0
0
1
0
channel
0
0
0
1
1
channel
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
a
channel 3 DMA address Low-order
0
1
1
0
1
channel 3 DMA address High-order
0
1
1
1
0
channel 3 terminal count Low-order
0
1
1
1
1
channel 3 terminal count High-order
1
0
0
0
0
Mode Setting (for Write Only)
1
0
0
0
0
Status (for Read Only)
I--~---
c---
0
channell DMA address Low-order
-
--
- ------------
---~-
---
1
channel 1 DMA address High-order
0
channell terminal count Low-order
1
1
channell terminal count High-order
0
0
channel 2 DMA address Low-order
1
I channel 2 OMA address High-order
--
-----
-~
1---F/L
0
1
o ~nnel2 terminal count Low-order
- - f----~
cha~~eI2 terminal count High-order
0
1 1-----
1-"
--.~
II
----
----------------------------
First/last flip-flop. This is toggled when program and register-read operations for each channel are finished, and specifies whether the next
program or read operation is to be for the upper bytes or the lower bytes. This means that write and read operations for each register must be
carried out for a set of lower and higher bytes.
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
4-67
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Conditions
Power-supply voltage
Vcc
V,
Input voltage
Vo
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation (max.)
Topr
Tstg
Operating free-air temperature range
With respect to GND
Ta=2S'C
Unit
V
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
1000
mW
-20-75
'c
·c
-65-150
Storage temperature range
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol
Limits
-0.5-7
(Ta=-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Parameter
Min
Nom
Max
5
5.25
4.75
Vcc
Power-supply voltage
Vss
V ,H
Power-supply voltage (GND)
V'L
Low-level input voltage
Unit
---
V
-.-~--,-.
0
High-level input voltage
--_.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
__.,--
2
Vcc +O,5
- - -- - -0.5
0.8
Low-level output _voltage
IOL=1.6mA
VOH'
High-level output voltage lor AB, DB and AEN
IOH=-150"A
V OH2
High-level output voltage for HRQ
V OH3
High-level output voltage for others
Icc
I,
Power-supply current from Vcc
IOH=-BO"A
,,--,--,--
Input current
V,=Vcc- OV
VI=VCC ........ OV
C,
Input capacitance
Ta=25'C, Vcc=Vss=OV
CliO
Input/output terminal capacitance
, , -
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol
1--
Min
Typ
----,-
V
2.4
Vee
V
3.3
Vce
V
2.4
Vee
120
mA
-10
10
J.l.A
-10
10
I'A
10
pF
20
pF
(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=ov, V,H=V OH =2V, V IL =VOL=0.8V, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Test conditions
J
symbol
- - - - ---
Rea~ pulse _~. _ _ _ _ _ ~_~ ___ ~ .. __
TRR
!
Limits
Min
Typ
250
ns
0
ns
Address or CS setup time before read
Address or CS hold time after read
TRA
0
tSUCR-DO)
Date setup time before read
TRD
0
200
thCR-DO)
Data hold time after read
20
100
twCw)
White pulse width
r----'-"
TAR
'-
_TDF
-I
__
Tww
200
tSUCA~W)
Address setup time before write
TAW
20
theW-A)
Address hold time after write
a
tSU(DQ~W)
Data setup time before write
TWA
T DW
thCW-DQ)
Data hold time after write
tWCRST)
Reset pulse width
TWD
T RSTW
tSUCVcc-RST)
Supply voltage setup time before reset
T RSTD
tr
Input signal rise time
Tr
tf
Input signal fall time
tSU(RST-W}
Reset setup time before write
Clock cycle time
Clock pulse width
-
tSU(DRQ- ~)
ORO setup time before clock
thCHlDA-DRQ)
DRQ hold time after HLDA
tSU(HlDA- "'}
HLDA setup time before clock
tSU(RDY- "')
Ready setup time before clock
thc '" -RDY)
Ready hold time after clock
Note I
4-68
CL=150pF
Tf
T RSTS
Tcy
- - - - - - - - ~----Tos
TOH
T HS
T RS
T RH
Measurement conditions: M5LB257P CL=IOOpF, M5L8257P-5 CL=150pF
",,". MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Unit
Max
twCR)
tsu(A-R)
ts (CS-R)
th(R-A)
th(R-CS)
tec "')
V
Pins ather than that under measurement are set
to OV, Ic=1 MHz
Parameter
twl' )
Unit
Max
0,45
,------
Off-state output current
r--
Limits
Test conditions
-------.~---,,----------.-
VOL
~-
V
V
(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc= 5 V± 5 %, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
r-----'--
V
ns
ns
ns
-"~
ns
ns
-- --
200
-
0
ns
ns
300
ns
500
I'S
20
r---- t-----
20
2
0.32
4
O. Btell)
80
ns
ns
tcc. )
I'S
ns
ns
70
a
lOa
---
ns
i
ns
30
ns
20
ns
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8257P-S
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(T a =-20-75·C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=OV, VoH =2V, Vol =O,8V, unless otherwise noted) (Note2)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Unit
Test conditions
symbol
Typ
Min
Max
--
~-~-
t pLH (
¢ "-HRQ)
~---=HRQl
t pLH ( 1> ~HRQ)
Propagation time from clock to HRQ (Note3)
Too
Propagation time from clock to HRQ (NoteS)
160
ns
f
T DOI
250
ns
tpHL(
t pLH (
of -AEN)
Propagation time from clock to AEN (Note3)
TAEL
300
ns
t pHL ( 1> -AEN}
Propagation time from clock to AEN (Note3)
TAET
200
ns
Propagation time from AEN to address active (Note6)
TAEA
--
-HRQ)
--------------
tPZV(AEN-A)
20
ns
~-
t pzv ( 1>
-A)
Propagation time from clock to address active (Note4)
TFAAB
250
ns
t pvz ( 1>
-A}
Propagation time from clock to address floating (Note4)
TAFAB
150
ns
Address setup time after clock (Note4)
TASM
250
ns
t pLH (
the
1> -Al
Address hold time after clock (Note4)
7>-A)
tpLH ( 1>-
TAH
ns
A)-50
~-
-
60
ns
theR-A)
Address hold time after read (Note6)
TAHR
thCW-A)
Address hold time after write (Note6)
T AHW
tpzvc '" -DO)
Propagation time from clock to data active
TFADB
t pvz ( 1> -DO)
Propagation time from clock to data floating (Note4)
TAFDB
tpHLlA-ASTB)
Propagation time from address 10 address strobe (Note4)
TASS
100
thcASTs-A)
Propagation time from address strobe to address hold (Note6)
T AHS
50
Propagation time from clock to address strobe (Note3)
TSTL
200
ns
Propagation time from clock to address strobe (Note3)
TSTT
140
ns
300
t pHL( ~
ns
-
AST,I+20
300
ns
170
ns
ns
ns
~-
tpLH ( ~ -ASTSl
-,-~.--
~_-AST8l
Address strobe pulse width (Note6)
tWCASTB)
tpHL(AS-Rl
tPHLCAS-WE)
(Note6)
thCDQ-R)
Read or extended write hold time after data
thCDO-WE)
(Note6)
tPLH(¢-DACK}
IpHL (1)-TcfMARKl
Propagation time from clock to DACK or TC/MARK
(Note3, 7)
-
tce. )
-100
ns
T ASC
70
ns
Tosc
20
ns
Tsw
Propagation time from address strobe to read or
I extended write
-
TAK
250
ns
TOCL
200
ns
TaCT
200
ns
T FAC
300
ns
150
ns
tpLH (1-TCfMARKl
t pHL( '"
-R)
tpHLC 1>
-w)
Propagation time from clock to read, write or extended
write (Note4, 8)
t pHL( '" -WE)
t pLH ( 1>
-R)
t pLH ( 1>
-w)
I Propagation time from clock to read or write
(Notes4,9)
-"
tpzvc 1> -Rl
Propagation time from clock to read active or write
t pzv ( 1>
-w)
active (Note4)
t pvz < 1>
-R)
~(1)-W)
Propagation time from clock to read floating or
write floating (Note4)
T AFC
twCRl
Read pulse width (Note6)
TRAM
twcw)
Write pulse width (Note6)
TWWM
tW(WE)
Extended write pulse width
TWWME
Note
Reference level is VoH =3, 3V
Load=lTTL
Load=lTTL+50pF
Load=lTTL+(R l =3, 3kD),
VoH =3,3V
Note
2tcil )+
tWill-50
ns ns
tce. )
-50
ns
2tce. I
-50
ns
Tracking specification
b.. t pLH ( ~ -DACKl <50ns, 6. tpHu ~ -TC/MARK)<50ns, b.. tpLHC <} -TC/MAAK)<50ns
t. tpHLi; -RI<50ns, t. tpHLi I -w) (
f---r-
tpHLi¢-HRO)
tSU(HC~.)+ I--r-
HRQ
~
th(HLDA-DRQ)
-
1
HlDA
tPLH (1)-AEN)....;:oo------r-
1
AEN
.-
tpzvl<~A) ~
~tSU(¢-A)
.........,tPVZC¢_A)
Ao~A7
'1&
(lOWER ADORE ss)
tpZV(1)-DQ)
...
!.o, t pvz ( iDa)
..;..
00 ....... 07
(UPPER ADORE ss)
tPLH(¢-ASTS} ~
--!
ADSTB
t~I
......;;.+27
... ~ tPLH(O-R)
tpHLI<~R) ~
'"
,
'-_.
------------
------------
TCIMARK
tSU(RDY
¢)~
f
tW(Rl
,
~
ri th(qI
~
1
~L(~tPLH(¢-W)
j..---oo
, -rh{
tPVZ(¢-R)
~
ROY)
tpLH('~TC/MARK) ~PHLi'~ TC/MARK)
/ \
/\
------------
Slave Mode
PHL(ASTB-R)
tPH UAS1B-WE)
1
\-
/u
~
tPHl(A-ASTB)
... ~~)~"'t
'\
tpZV(¢-R)
D/
th(¢-A),.., th(ASTB~A)
n
1
tPHL'I~ASTB)
~+ tpHu ¢-~ACK)
READY
\ ____ f
~HLi¢-AEN)
(Reference voltage: "H"=2V "l"=O.8V)
Read
Write
Ao~A7
________~r~__~------r_---+~'-~-------
Do~D7 ------------------"l<-r_---+--~'-----00 ...... 0 7
----------------------4(==~--------RESET
Vee
4-70
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
S,
I s, I
S3
I
S,
I s, I s, I
So
I s, I s, I
S3
I
SW
I sw I s, I s, I s, I s,
ClK
DROo-DRO,
HRO
\
\
HlDA
'-----AEN
~.,....-_ _
~
Ao-A7
____+ ____+ _____.....tU (lOWER ADDRESSES)
II
~------~-----~~~--.....t~t-----t-------(UPP!~
Do-D7
'=---"'"""fv
"
(UPPER ADDRESSES)
ADSTB
~-r------4---------------
......- - - - - MEMR/I/OR
tSU( RDY-¢)
'--------------
o
/
\
READY
TC/MARK
Note 1
The center line indicates a floating
(high-impedance) state.
•
MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
4-71
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER.
DESCRIPTION
The M5LB259AP is a proqrammable LSI for interrupt control.
It is fabricated using N-channel silicon-gate ED-MaS technology and is designed to be used easily in connection with
an BOB5A, BOB6 or BOB8.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
CHIP
ST~~8t
CONTROL
CONTROL
I~~tl~ ~,D:
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
CS- 1
l¥.~;)f WR 06
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
CALL instruction to the CPU is generated automatically
Priority, interrupt mask and vectored address for each interrupt request input are programmable
Up to 64 levels of interrupt requests can be controlled by
cascading with M5LB259AP
Polling functions
0,
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
I
1
Vc d5V)
27 - Ao ADDRESS INPUT
_ _ INTERRUPT
26 -INTAACKNOWLEDG
2
!
INPUT
~
~
~
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
INPUTS
0,
03 ~
I 02 ~
l Do ~ 11
18 -IRo
CASCADdCASo~ 12
LlNES\CAS,~
(OV)Vss
'NTERRUPT
17 -INT ~'0'i~5~T
13
14
16
15
~SP/EN~~~Y{~3+~~~
~CAS, CASCADE
" _ _ _ _ _.J -
LINES
APPLICATION
The M5L8259AP can be used as an interrupt controller for
CPUs 8085A, 8086 and 8088
Outline 28P4
FUNCTION
The M5L8259AP is a device specifically designed for use in
real time, interrupt driven microcomputer systems. It manages eight level requests and has built-in features for expandability to other M5L8259APs. The priority and interrupt
mask can be changed or reconfigured at any time by the
main program.
When an interrupt is generated because of an interrupt
request at 1 of the pins, the M5L8259AP based on the mask
and priority will output an INT to the CPU. After that, when
an INTA signal is received from the CPU or the system controller, a CALL instruction and a programmed vector address
is released onto the data bus.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
INTERRUPT
REQUEST OUTPUT
INT
DATA BUS
BUFFER
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
I Ro 180----1-'--....,
IR,
IR,
INTERRUPT
REQUEST INPUTS
IR3 21
IR,
READ/WRITE
CONTROL
LOGIC
IR,
IR6
2 WR WRITE CONTROL INPUT
3 RD READ CONTROL INPUT
27 Ao ADDRESS INPUT
:==~=~-(I
IR,
CS CHIP SELECT INPUT
12 CASO}
13 CAS,
15
L
4-72
CASCADE LINES
AS,
~---(16 SP/EN
- --- - --- - .--- - --- - --- -
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
SLAVE PROGRAM INPUT/
ENABLE BUFFER OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
PIN DESCRIPTION
Symbol
Input or
Pin name
Functional significance
output
CS
Chip select input
Input
This input is active at low-level, but may be at high-Jevel during interrupt request input and interrupt processing
WR
Write control input
Input
Command write control input from the CPU
RO
Read control input
Input
Data read control input for the CPU
Input!
Bidirectional data bus
0 7-00
CAS2CASo
output
Input!
Cascade lines
output
-------
Data and commands are transmitted through this bidirectional data bus to and from the CPU.
-These pins are outputs for a master and inputs for a slave. And these pins of the master will be able to
address each individual slave. The master will enable the corresponding slave to release the device routine
address during bytes 2 and 3 of INTA.
-----==--.~
--
Slave program input/
Enable buffer output
output
EN: In the buffered mode, whenever the M5L8259AP's data bus output is enabled, its
INT
Interrupt request output
Output
This pin goes high whenever a valid interrupt is asserted.
SP/EN
Input!
SP: In normal mode, a master is designated when SP/EN=l and a slave is designated when SP/EN=O.
Sf5iEN pin will go low.
-
The asynchronous interrupt inputs are active at high-level. The. interrupt mask and priority of each interrupt
IR7-IRo
Interrupt request input
Input
input can be changed at any time. When using edge triggered mode, the rising edge (low to high) of the
--
interrupt request and the nigh-level must be held until the first INTA. For level triggered mode, the high--
level must be held until the first INTA.
~-
--
Interrupt acknowledge
INTA
Input
input
Ao address input
Ao
I
Input
When an interrupt acknowledge (INTA) from the CPU is received, the M5L8259AP releases a CALL instruction or vectored address onto the data bus.
This pin is normally connected to one of the address lines and acts in conjunction with the the
OPERATION
The M5L8259AP is interfaced with a standard system bus as
shown in Fig. 1 and operates as an interrupt controller.
ADDRESS BUS
Ao
0,
D3
RD WR
CS
0
- - c-~ f-- f--- - ]
0
0
]
0
]
0
Input operation (read)
IRR, ISR or interrupting level-data bus
IMR-Data bus
Output operation (write)
CONTROL BUS
DATA BUS
Ao
07-00
RD
WR
M5L8259AP
INT
INTA
CASo
CAS,
---
0
0
0
]
0
0
Data bus-OCW2
0
0
1
1
0
0
Data bus-OCW3
0
]
X
1
0
0
Data bus-ICW]
1
X
X
1
0
0
Data bus-OCW], ICW2, ICW3, ICW4
X
X
X
]
]
0
Data bus-High-impedance
X
X
X
X
X
1
Data bus-High-impedance
Disable function
CS
and
Table 1 M5LB259AP basic operation
-
]6
es, WR
I RD when writing commands or reading status registers.
.-
]c'"" "
LINES
CAS,
SLAVE PROGRAM
INPUTI
INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS
ENABLE
BUFFER OUTPUT
Fig.
The M5LB259AP interfaces to standard system
bus.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
4~73
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Interrupt Sequence
1. When the CPU is an 8085A:
(1) When one or more of the interrupt request inputs are
raised high, the corresponding IRR bit(s) for the highlevel inputs will be set.
(2) Mask state and priority levels are considered and, if
appropriate, the M5L8259AP sends an INT signal to
the CPU.
(3) The acknowledgement of the CPU to the INT signal,
the CPU issues an INTA pulse to the M5L8259AP.
(4) Upon receiving the first INTA pulse from the CPU, a
CALL instruction is released onto the data bus.
(5) A CALL isa 3-byte instruction, so additional two
INTA pulses are issued to the M5L8259AP from the
CPU.
(6) These two INTA pulses allow the M5L8259AP to release the program address onto the data bus. The
low-order 8-bit vectored address is released at the
second INTA pulse and the high-order 8-bit vectored
address is released at the third INTA pulse. The ISR
bit corresponding to the interrupt request input is set
upon receiving the third INTA pulse from the CPU,
and the corresponding IRR bit is reset.
(7) This completes the 3-byte CALL instruction and the
interrupt routine will be serviced. The ISR bit is reset
at the trailing edge of the third INTA pulse in the
AEOI mode. In the other modes the ISR bit is not reset until an EOI command is issued.
IR~IRRSET
IRU"IRR SET
INTA~
1
~
2
r-
/L--J\!~~
L--J
RESET
ISR RESET (AEOI MODE)
ISR SET
The interrupt request input must be held at high-level until the first INTA pulse is issued. If it is allowed to return to
low-level before the first INTA pulse is issued, an interrupt
request in IR7 is executed. However, in this case the ISR bit
is not set.
This is a function for a noise countermeasure of interrupt
reguest inputs. In the interrupt routine of IR7, if ISR is checked by software either the interrupt by noise or real interrupt
can be acknowledged. In the state of edge trigger mode
normally the interrupt request inputs hold high-level and its
input low-level pulse in the case of interrupt.
Interrupt sequence outputs
1. When the CPU is an 8085A:
A CALL instruction is released onto the data bus when
the first INTA pulse is issued. The low-order 8 bits of the
vectored address are released when the second INTA
pulse is issued, and the high-order 8 bits are released
when the third INTA pulse is issued. The format of these
three outputs is shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Formats of interrupt CALL instruction and vectored address
First iNTA pulse (CALL instruction)
06
0,
o
2. When the CPU is an 8086 or 8088:
(1) When one or more of the interrupt request inputs are
raised high, the corresponding IRR bit(s) for the highlevel inputs will be set.
(2) Mask state and priority levels are considered and if
appropriated, the M5L8259AP sends an INT signal to
the CPU.
(3) As an acknowledgement to the INT signal, the CPU
issues an INTA pulse to the M5L8259AP.
(4) Upon receiving the first INTA pulse from the CPU,
the M5L8259AP does not drive the data bus, and the
data bus keeps high-impedance state.
(5) When the second INTA pulse is issued from the
CPU, an 8-bit pointer is released onto the data bus.
(6) This complete~ the interrupt cycle and the interrupt
routine will be serviced. The ISR bit is reset at the
trailing edge of the second INTA pulse in the AEOI
mode. In the other modes the ISR bit is not reset until an EOI command is issued from the CPU.
4-74
o
Do
o
Second INTA pulse (low-order 8-bit of vectored address)
IR
Interval= 4
07
06
05
04
03
02
0,
Do
IRa
A7
A6
A5
0
0
0
0
0
IR,
A7
A6
A5
0
0
1
0
0
IR2
A7
A5
0
1
0
0
0
1R3
A7
A5
0
1
1
0
0
IR4
A7
As
A6
A6
A5
1
0
0
0
0
IR5
A7
A6
A5
1
0
1
0
0
IR6
A7
A6
A5
1
1
0
0
0
IR7
A7
A6
A5
1
1
1
0
0
• .MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
,
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
IR
Interval=8
07
Da
Os
0,
03
O2
0,
Do
IRa
A7
Aa
0
0
0
0
0
0
IR,
A7
Aa
0
0
1
0
0
0
IR2
A7
Aa
0
1
0
0
0
0
1R3
A7
Aa
0
1
1
0
IR,
A7
Ao
1
0
0
0
IRs
A7
Aa
1
0
1
0
0
0
- -- - 0
0
..0
0
IRa
A7
Aa
1
1
0
0
0
0
IR7
A7
Aa
1
1
1
0
0
0
-
Third INTA pulse (high-order 8 bits of vectored address)
0,
A"
0,
Do
Ag
As
mode. After that an INT signal is released and the interrupt
request signal is latched in the corresponding IRR bit if the
high-level is held until the first INTA pulse is issued. It is important to remember that the interrupt request signal must
be held at high-level until the first INTA pulse is issued.
The interrupt request latching in the IRR causes a signal
to be sent to the priority resolver unless it is masked out.
When the priority resolver receives the signals it selects the
highest priority interrupt request latched in IRR. The ISR is
set when the last INTA pulse is issued while the corresponding bit of IRR is reset and the other bits of IRR are unaffected.
The bit of ISR that was set is not reset during the interrupt routine, but is reset at the end of the routine by the EOI
command (end of interrupt) or by the trailing edge of the last
INTA pulse in AEOI mode.
Priority Resolver
2. When the CPU is a 8086 or 8088:
The data bus keeps a high-impedance state when the
first INTA pulse is issued. Then the pointer T7~To is released when the next INTA pulse is issued. The content
of the pOinter T7~To is shown in Table 3. The T2~To are
a binary code corresponding to the interrupt request
level, AlO ~ A5 are unused and ADI mode control is
ignored.
Table 3 Contents of interrupt pointer
Second I NTA pulse (8-bit pointer)
The priority resolver examines all of the interrupt requests
set in IRR to determine and selects the highest priority. The
ISR bit corresponding to the selected (highest priority) request is set by the last INTA pulse.
Interrupt Mask Register (IMR)
The contents of the interrupt mask register are used to mask
out (disable) interrupt requests of selected interrupt request
pins. Each terminal is independently masked so that masking a high priority interrupt does not influence the lower or
higher priority interrupts. Therefore the contents of IMR
selectively enable reading.
Interrupt Request Output (INT)
The interrupt request output connects directly to the interrupt input of the CPU. The output level is compatible with
the input level required for the CPUs.
07
Da
Os
0,
03
02
0,
Do
IRa
T7
Ta
Ts
T,
T3
0
0
0
IR,
T7
Ta
Ts
T.
T3
0
0
1
IR,
T7
Ta
Ts
T.
T3
0
1
0
IR3
T7
Ta
Ts
T,
T3
0
1
1
IR,
T7
Ta
Ts
T,
T3
1
0
0
Data Bus Buffer
IRs
T7
Ta
Ts
T,
T3
1
0
1
IRa
T7
Ta
Ts
T4
T3
1
1
0
IR7
T7
Ta
Ts
T,
T3
1
1
1
The data bus buffer is a 3-state bidirectional data bus buffer that is used to interface with the system bus. Write commands to the M5L8259AP, CALL instructions, vectored
addresses, status information, etc. are transferred through
the data bus buffer.
-
Interrupt Request Register (IRR), In-service Register
(ISR)
As interrpt requests are received at inputs IR7~IRo, the corresponding bits of IRR are set and as an interrupt request is
serviced the corresponding bit of ISR is set. The IRR is used
to store all the interrupt levels which are requesting service,
and the ISR is used to store all the interrupt levels which are
being serviced. The status of these two registers can be
read. These two registers are connected through the priority
resolver.
An interrupt requst received by I Rn is acknowledged on
the leading edge when in the edge triggered mode or it is
acknowledged on the level when in the level triggered
Interrupt Acknowledge Input
(ii,iTA)
The CALL instruction and vectored address are released
onto the data bus by the INTA pulse.
ReadlWrite Control Logic
The read/write control logic is used to control functions such
as receiving commands from the CPU and supplying status
information to the data bus.
Chip Select (CS)
The M5L8259AP is selected (enabled) when CS is at lowlevel, but during interrupt request input or interrupt processing it may be high-level.
Write Control Input (WR)
When WR goes to low-level the M5L8259AP can be written.
Read Control Input (RD)
When RD goes low status information in the internal register
of the M5L8259AP can be read through the data bus.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-75
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Address Input (Ao)
The address input is normally connected with one of the
address lines and is used along with WR and RD to control
write commands and reading status information.
Cascade Buffer/Comparator
The cascade buffer/comparator stores or compares identification codes. The three cascade lines are output when the
M5L8259AP is a master or input when it is a slave. The identification code on the cascade lines select it as master or
slave.
PROGRAMMING THE M5L8259AP
The M5L8259AP is programmed through the Initialization
Command Word (ICW) and the operation command word
(OCW) . The following explains the functions of these two
commands.
Initialization Command Words (ICWs)
The initialization command word is used for the initial setting
of the M5L8259AP. There are four commands in this group
and the following explains the details of these four commands.
ICW1
The meaning of the bits of ICWI is explained in Fig. 3 along
with the functions. ICWI contains vectored address bits A7As. a flag indicating whether interrupt input is edge triggered or level triggered. CALL address interval. whether a
single M5L8259AP or the cascade mode is used. and
whether ICW4 is required or not.
Whenever a command is issued with Ao = 0 and D4 = 1.
this is interpreted 'as ICWI and the following will automatically occur.
(a) The interrupt mask register (IMR) is cleared.
(b) The interrupt request input IR7 is assigned the lowest
priority.
(c) The special mask mode is cleared and the status read
is set to the interrupt request register (IRR).
(d) When IC4=O all bits in ICW4 are set to zero.
ICW2
ICW2 contains vectored address bits A'5 - As or interrupt
type T7-T3 • and the format is shown in Fig. 3.
ICW3
When SNGL= 1 it indicates that only a single M5L8259AP is
used in the system. in which case ICW3 is not valid. When
SNGL=O. ICW3 is valid and indicates cascade connections
with other M5L8259AP devices. In the master mode. a " 1 .. is
set for each slave.
When the CPU is an 8085A the CALL instruction is released from the master at the first INTA pulse and the vectored address is released onto the data bus from the slave
at the second and third INTA pulses.
When the CPU is a 8086 the master and slave are in
high-impedance at the first INTA pulse and the pointer is released onto the data bus from the slave at the second INTA
pulse.
The master mode is specified when SP/EM pin is highlevel or BUF = 1 and MIS = 1 in ICW4. and slave mode is
specified when SP/EM pin is low-level or BUF= 1 and MIS
ICW1
ICW2
ICW3
ICW4
Fig. 2
4-76
Initialization sequence
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
J VECTOR ADDRESS LOW-ORDER BITS
1 (A,-A,)
11: LEVEL TRIGGERED MODE
1 0: EDGE TRIGGERED MODE
11:
CALL ADDRESS INTERVAL IS 4
L0:
CALL ADDRESS INTERVAL IS8
11:
SINGLE
I
0
Ao
I
I
A,
0,
I
A6
I
I
As
D,
06
I
1
I LTIM
D4
03
I
ADI
I SNGLl
IC4
0,
0,
Do
I
] (Note 1)
I
ICW4 NEEDED
NO ICW4 NEEDED
Note 1
(Note 1)
J
LO: CASCADE MODE
J1:
1 0:
I
8085A ONLY
J
ICW1
II
1 VECTOR ADDRESS HIGH-ORDER BITS
I (A,,-A,)OR INTERRUPT TYPE (T7-T3)
I
I
I
1
I A15/T 71
Ao
0,
I
A14/T61 A13/l sl A12/T41 AII/T3
0,
06
04
03
AlO
I
Ag
I
0,
D2
A,
I
Do
ICW2
11: IRn INPUT HAS A SLAVE
0: IRn INPUT DOES NOT HAVE A SLAVE
I
I
I
1
I
S,
I
07
Ao
I
S6
I
S,
I
I
0,
06
84
I
04
S3
S2
03
02
I
8,
I
0,
So
I
Do
SLAVE IDENTIFICATION CODE
ICW3 (MASTER DEVICE)
I
1
I
Ao
0
I
0
I
06
07
0
05
I
0
04
I
0
102
03
02
I
I
10,
0,
I
100
0
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
I
Do
ICW3 (SLAVE DEVICE)
11:
10:
0
X
NON BUFFERED MODE
1
0
BUFFERED MODE/SLAVE
1
1
BUFFERED MODE/MASTER
SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE
NOT SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE
J1:
L0:
.j ~
I
1
Ao
I
0
I
0,
0
06
I
0
0,
I SFNM I BUF
04
03
I
M/S
D2
AEOI MODE
NORMAL EOI MODE
8086, 8088 MODE
8085A MODE
I
I AEOI I ,uPM I
0,
Do
ICW4
Fi9_ 3
Initialization command word format
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-77
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
=0 in ICW4. In the slave mode, three bits ID2~IDo identify
the slave. And then when the slave code released on the
cascade lines from the master, matches the assigned ID
code, the vectored address is released 'by it onto the data
bus at the next INTA pulse.
M5L8259AP, the device is ready to accept interrupt requests.
There are three types of OCWs; explanation of each follows,
and the format of OCWs is shown in Fig. 4.
OCWl
The meaning of the bits of OCWl are explained in Fig. 4
along with their functions. Each bit of IMR can be independently changed (set or reset) by OCWl.
ICW4
Only when IC4=l in ICWl is ICW4 valid. Otherwise all bits
are set to zero. When ICW4 is valid it specifies special fully
nested mode, buffer mode master/slave, automatic EOI and
microprocessor mode. The format of ICW4 is shown in Fig. 3.
OCW2
The OCW2 is used for issuing EOI commands to the
M5L8259AP and for changing the priority of the interrupt request inputs.
Operation Command Words (OCW s)
OCW3
The operation command words are used to change the contents of IMR, the priority of interrupt request inputs and the
special mask. After the ICW are programmed into the
The OCW3 is used for specifying special mask mode, poll
mode and status register read.
, - _ - . -_ _.--_---._ _-.--_---._ _-,--_---._ _ _ _---11:
0:
INTERRUPT MASK SET
INTERRUPT MASK RESET
OCW1
0 0 1 NON-SPECIFIC EOI
0 1 1 SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BITS L2~Lo)
1 0 1 ROTATE ON NON-SPECIFIC EOI
1 0 0 SETS AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP
0 0 0 RESET AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP
} EOI
} AUTOMATIC ROTATION
1
1 1
ROTATE ON SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BIT L2~Lo)
1
1 0
SETS PRIORITY COMMAND (SET LOWEST PRIORITY BIT L,-Lo)
0
1 0
NO OPERATION
:J
} SPECIFIC ROTATION
10 LEVEL TO BE ACTED UPON
0
0
I
0
1
R
0,
Ao
1
SL
EOI
I
0
06
I
0
03
I
L2
0,
I
0
0
I
I
I
L,
0,
Lo
Do
1 2 3
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
4 5 6
7
1
1
1 1
0 0 1 1
1 0 1
0
I
OCW2
0
1
X
NO OPERATION
0
RESET SPECIAL MASK MODE
1
1
SETS SPECIAL MASK MODE
J1
LO
L
0
Ao
I
0
X
NO OPERATION
1
0
SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN IRR
1
1
SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN ISR
I
0
0,
ESMM 1 SMM 1
D6
D5
0
1
1 '1
03
P
0,
1
RR
0,
I
1 RIS
Do
OCW3
Fig. 4
4-78
POLL COMMAND
NO POLL COMMAND
Operation command word format
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSI!>
MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
FUNCTION OF COMMAND
Interrupt masks
The mask register contains a mask for each individual interrupt request. These interrupt masks can be changed by
programming using OCW1.
Special mask mode
When an interrupt request is acknowledged and the ISR bit
corresponding to the interrupt request is not reset by EOI
command (which means an interrupt service routine is
executing) lower priority interrupt requests are ignored.
In special mask mode interrupt requests received at interrupt request inputs which are masked by OCW1 are disabled, but interrupts at all levels that are not masked are
possible. This means that in the mask mode all level of interrupts are possible or individual inputs can be selectively
programmed so all interrupts at the selected inputs are disabled. The masks are stored in IMR and special mask is
set/reset by executing OCW3.
2. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced
the software must check ISR to determine if there are
additional interrupts requests to be serviced. If the ISR
bit is 0 the EOI command may be sent to the master too.
But if it is not 0 the EOI command should not be sent to
the master.
Poll mode
The poll mode is useful when the internal enable flip-flop of
the microprocessor is reset, and interrupt input is disabled.
Service to the device is achieved by a programmer initiative
using a poll command. In the poll mode the M5L8259AP at
the next RD pulse puts 8 bits on the data bus which indicates whether there is an interrupt request and reads the
priority level. The format of the information on the data bus is
as shown below.
Binary code of the highest priority
Buffered mode
The buffered mode will structure the M5L8259AP to send an
enable signal on SP/EN to enable the data bus buffer, when
the data bus requires the data bus buffer or when cascading
mode is used. In this mode, when data bus output of the
M5L8259AP is enabled, the SP/EN output becomes lowlevel. This allows the M5L8259AP to be programmed
whether it is a master or a slave by software. The buffered
mode is set/reset by executing ICW4.
Fully nested mode
The fully nested mode is the mode when no mode is specified and is the usual operational mode. In this mode, the
priority of interrupt request terminals is fixed from the lowest
IR7 to the highest IRa. When an interrupt request is acknowledged the CALL instruction and vectored address are released onto the data bus. At the same time the ISR bit corresponding to the accepted interrupt request is set. This ISR
bit remains set until it is reset by the input of an EOI command or until the trailing edge of last INTA pulse in AEOI
mode. While an interrupt service routine is being executed,
interrupt requests of same or lower priority are disabled
while the bit of ISR remains set. The priorities can be
changed by OCW2.
Special fully nested mode
The special fully nested mode will be used when cascading
is used and this mode will be programmed to the master by
ICW4. The special fully nested mode is the same as the fully
nested mode with the following two exceptiol1s.
1. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced,
this slave is not locked out from the master priority logic.
Higher priority interrupts within the slave will be recognized by the master and the master will initiate an interrupt request to the CPU. In general in the normal fully
nested mode, a serviced slave is locked out from the
master's priority, and so higher priority interrupts from the
same slave are not serviced.
D5
D,
Do
When 1=0 (no interrupt request), W 2-Wo is 111. The poll
is valid from WR to RD and interrupt is frozen. This mode
can be used for processing common service routines for interrupts from more than one line and does not require any
INTA sequence. Poll command is issued by setting P= 1 in
OCW3.
End of interrupt (EOI) and specific EOI (SEOI)
An EOI commal1d is required by the M5L8259AP to reset the
ISR bit. So an· EOI command must be issued to the
M5L8259AP before returning from an interrupt service
routil1e.
When AEOI is selected in ICW4, the ISR bit can be reset
at the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. When AEOI is not
selected the ISR bit is reset by the EOI command issued to
the M5L8259AP before returning from an interrupt service
routine. When programmed in the cascade mode the EOI
command must be issued to the master once and to corresponding slave once.
There are two forms of EOI command, specific EOI and
non-specific EOI. When the M5L8259AP is used in the fully
nested mode, the ISR bit being serviced is reset by the EOI
command. When the non-specific EOI is issued the
M5L8259AP will automatically reset the highest ISR bit of
those that are set. Other ISR bits are reset by a specific EOI
and the bit to be reset is specified in the EOI by the program. The SEal is useful in modes other than fully nested
mode. When the M5L8259AP is in special mask mode ISR
bits masked in IMR are not reset by EOI. EOI and SEal are
selected when OCW2 is executed.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-79
I
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Automatic EOI (AEOI)
In the AEOI mode the M5L8259AP executes non-specific
EOI command automatically at the trailing edge of the last
INTA pulse. When AEOI=l in ICW4, the M5L8259AP is put in
AEOI mode continuously until reprogrammed in ICW4.
The AEOI mode can only be used in a master M5L8259AP
and not a slave.
Automatic rotation
The automatic rotation mode is used in applications where
many interrupt requests of the same level are expected
such as multichannel communication systems. In this mode
when an interrupt request is serviced, that request is
assigned the lowest priority so that if there are other interrupt requests they will have higher priorities. This means
that the next request on the interrupt request being serviced
must wait until the other interrupt requests are serviced
(worst case is waiting for all 7 of the other controllers to be
serviced). The priority and serving status are rotated as
shown in Fig. 5.
BEFORE ROTATION
IS,
Is.,
Reading the M5L8259AP internal status
The contents of IRR and ISR can be read by the CPU with
status read. When an OCW3 is issued to the M5L8259AP and
an RD pulse issued the contents of IRR or ISR can be released onto the data bus. A special command is not required to read the contents of IMR. The contents of IMR can
be released onto the data bus by issuing an RD pulse when
Ao = 1. There is no need to issue a read register command
every time the IRR or ISR is to be read. Once a read register command is received by the M5L8259AP, it remains valid
until it is changed. Remember that the programmer must
issue a poll command every time to check whether there is
an interrupt request and read the priority level. Polling overrides status read when P=l, RR=l in OCW3.
ISs
IS,
IS,
IS,
IS,
ISo
HIGHEST PRIORITY
i
I
AFTER ROTATION
(IR3 WAS SERVICED AND ALL OTHER
PRIORITIES ROTATED CORRESPONDINGLY)
IS,
ISs
Is.,
IS,
IS,
IS,
ISo
I
HIGHEST PRIORITY
i
PRIORITY
STATUS
Fig. 5
IS,
I
ISR STATUS
LOWEST PRIORITY
l
7
I
An example of priority rotation
In the non-specific EOI command automatic rotation mode is
selected when R=l, EOI=l, SL=O in OCW2. The internal
priority status is changed by EOI or AEOI commands. The
rotation priority A flip-flop is set by R=l, EOI=O and SL=O
which is useful when the M5L8259AP is used in the AEOI
mode.
Specific rotation
Specific rotation gives the user versatile capabilities in interrupt controlled operations. It serves in those applications in
which a sp.ecific device's interrupt priority must be altered.
As opposed to automatic rotation which automatically sets
priorities, specific rotation is completely user controlled.
4-80
Selection of level or edge triggered mode 01 the M5L8259AP
is made by ICW1, When using edge triggered mode not only
is a transition from low to high required, but the high-level
must be held until the first INTA. If the high-level is not held
until the first INTA, the interrupt request will be treated as if
it were input on IR7, except that the ISR bit is not set. When
level triggered mode is used the functions are the same as
edge triggered mode except that the transition from low to
high is not required to trigger the interrrupt request.
In the level triggered mode and using AEOI mode
together, if the high-level is held too long the interrupt will
occur immediately. To avoid this situation interrupts should
be kept disabled until the end of the service routine or until
the IR input returns low. In the edge triggered mode this
type of mistake is not possible because the interrupt request
is edge triggered.
(IR3 THE HIGHEST PRIORITY
LOWEST PRIORITY
PRIORITY
STATUS
Level triggered mode/Edge triggered mode
REQUIRING SERVICE)
I
ISR STATUS
That is, the user selects the interrupt lelter'that is to receive
lowest or highest priority. Priority changes can be executed
during an EOI command.
Cascading
The M5L8259AP can be interconnected in a system 01 one
master with up to eight slaves to handle up to 64 priority
levels. A system of three units that can be used with the
8085A is shown in Fig. 6.
The master can select a slave by outputting its identification code through the three cascade lines. The INT output of
each slave is connected to the master interrupt request inputs. When an interrupt request of one of the slaves is to be
serviced the master outputs the identification code of the
slave through the cascade lines, so the slave will release
the vectored address on the next INTA pulse.
The cascade lines of the master are nomally low, and will
contain the slave identification code from the leading edge
--01 the first INTA pulse to the trailing edge of the last INTA
pulse. The master and slave can be programmed to work in
different modes. ICWs must be issued for each device, and
EOI commands must be issued twice: once for the master
and once for the corresponding slave. Each CS 01 the
M5L8259AP requires an address decoder.
..• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
16
ADDRESS BUS
CONTROL BUS
DATA BUS
8
3
3
3
8
8
8
CASo
CAS,
M5LB259AP
MASTER
CS
I t
7
6
Ao
INT
CASo
M5L8259AP
SLAVE
CAS,
CAS,
CAS,
SP/EN M, M6 M5 M, M, M, M,Mo
Vee
l
I
j
INT
Ao
CS
SP/EN
! ! !!
6
5 4 3 2 1 0
SP/EN
tll!!l!!
GrD
13!
7
L.. CAS,
'------+ CAS,
GrD
r-
INT
-CS Ao
CASo
M5LB259AP
SLAVE
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!!!!!!t!
II
----------------------------------~y------------------------------------~
INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS
Fig. 6
Cascading the M5L8259AP
DEN
DATA BUS
ADDRESS BUS
Do -0,
(Note 1) ADo- AD,
RDOR-I
ORC
8
0 0-0,
~ Ao
WROR~
WC
-1-NTA
M/iO
I
10.
Ao
A,
A,
A,
A5
A6
.......
.Joo..y
.........
.......
....
AI
II
Fig. 7
REi
t5v
OE
TO BUS BUFFER
WR SP/EN
iN'fA
os
LS30
i..-
s::
»-----
' ' " "~[--REQUEST
INPUTS
Note 1
INTR
INT
-
r
'"
'"
-~
N
IRo
IR,
IR,
IR,
IR,
IR5
IR6
IR,
'"
<0
~
"1J
0 0-0, of the M5L8259AP are direct connected with ADD-AD, of the 8086.
Example of interfaCe with the 8086
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-81
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
INSTRUCTION SET
~
Number
Instruction code
Function
Mnemonic
Do ICW4 required?
AD
D7
D6
D5
D.
D3
D2
D,
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A5
A5
A5
A5
0
0
0
0
A5
A5
A5
A5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
leWl
leW1
leWl
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
ICW1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17
18
19
ICW2
ICW3 M
ICW3 S
1
1
1
A'5
S7
0
A,.
A13
S5
0
A'2
S.
0
An
S3
0
Ala
S2
ID2
A9
S,
ID,
As
So
IDa
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
ICW4 A
ICW4 B
ICW4 C
ICW4 D
ICW4 E
ICW4 F
ICW4 G
ICW4 H
ICW4 I
ICW4 J
ICW4 K
ICW4 L
ICW4 M
ICW4 N
ICW40
ICW4 P
ICW4 NA
ICW4 NB
ICW4 NC
ICW4 ND
ICW4 NE
ICW4 NF
ICW4 NG
ICW4 NH
ICW4 NI
ICW4 NJ
ICW4 NK
ICW4 NL
ICW4 NM
ICW4 NN
ICW4 NO
ICW4 NP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
OCW1
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW2
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3
OCW3
1
M7
0
0
1
1
1
M6
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
o·
As
A6
As
A6
A6
A6
A6
As
As
As
As
Ss
0
0
1
0
1
0
Note:
4-82
E
SE
RE
RSE
R
CR
RS
P
RIS
RR
SM
RSM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M5
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
M3
M2
M,
Mo
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
L2
0
L2
L,
La
1
1
Single
Trigger
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
y
y
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
y
y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
8
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8-bihvectored address
Slave connections (master mode)
Slave identification code (slave mode)
SFNM
0
Intervel
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
y,
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
y
Y
Y
y
y
y
y
y
BUF
AEOI
8086
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
y
y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
Y
y
N
N
y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
y
Y
Y
y
y
y
y
y
S
S
S
S
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
S
S
S
S
M
M
M
M
Interrupt mask
EOI
SEOI
0
0
Rotate on Non-Specific EOI command (Automatic rotation)
L,
La
Rotate on Specific EOI command (Specific rotation)
0
0
0
L2
1
0
L,
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
La
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Y: yes, N: no, E: edge, L: level, M: master, S: slave
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Rotate in AEOI Mode (SET)
Rotate in AEOI Mode (CLEAR)
Set priority without EOI
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5L8259AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
-0.
---~
V,
Input voltage
Vo
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation
T opr
Operating
Tstg
Storage temper ature range
free~air
With respect to Vss
-
5~7
V
----~---
-0.
5~7
-0.
5~7
Ta=25°C
---~---
V
V
mW
1000
-20~75
'c
-65~150
°C
temperature range
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Unit
Limits
Conditions
Supply voltage
Vcc
(Ta=~20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Nom
Min
Max
--~-
4.5
5
V
5.5
Vec
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage
V'H
High-level input voltage
2
Vcc +O.5
V
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.5
0.8
V
--
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Symbol
' [ - - - -- - -
II
(Ta=~20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Limits
'---
Test conditions
Unit
Typ
Min
High-level output voltage
V OH
-------
VOH(INT)
High-level output voltage, interrupt requset output
IOH=~400"A
2.4
IOH=~100"A
3.5
IOH=-400"A
2.4
--
Max
--
V
V
IOL=2.2mA
0.45
VOL
Low-level output voltage
Ice
Supply current from Vee
I'H
High-level input current
VI=VCC
-10
10
III
Low-level input current
V,=OV
-10
10
1-------
85
---
V
mA
f.lA
-~
f.lA
/-lA
---
Vss=O, V,=O. 45-5. 5V
-10
loz
Off-state output current
('H('R)
High-level input current, interrupt request inputs
Vr=Vcc
(.L(.R)
Low-level input current, interrupt request inputs
V,=OV
Output capacitance
Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C
Input/output capacitance
Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C
Ci
.-
Ci/o
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
10
-t--I
.- I
10
,-
-300
I
/-lA
/-lA
10
pF
20
pF
-
Unit
(T a=-20-75"C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Limits
Parameter
Symbol
Typ
Min
Max
t WLWH
290
ns
tSU(A-W)
Address setup time before write
t AHwL
0
ns
thew_A)
Address hold time after write
tWHAX
0
ns
tSU(DQ_W)
Data setup time before write
t DVWH
240
ns
th(w-DQ)
Data hold time after write
tWHDX
0
ns
tW(R)
Read pulse width
tRLRH
235
ns
~w~
Write pulse width
.~-
--
tSU(A_R)
Address setup time before read
tAHRL
0
ns
th(R_A)
Address hold time after read
tRHAX
0
ns
tWC'R)
Interrupt request input width, low-level time, edge triggered mode
t JLJH
100
ns
tSU(CAS-'NTA)
Cascade setup time after INTA (slave)
t CV•AL
55
ns
trec(w)
Write recovery time
tWHRL
190
ns
Read recovery time
tRHRL
160
ns
500
ns
625
ns
treCCR)
--
End of command to next command (Not same command type)
td(RW)
End of INTA sequence to next INTA sequence
t CHCL
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-83
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Symbol
Typ
Min
Unit
Max
200
ns
100
ns
tAHDV
200
ns
Propagation time from read to enable signal output
tRLEL
125
ns
tPLHCR-EN)
Propagation time from read to disable signal output
tRHEH
150
ns
t plH ( IR-INT)
Propagation time from interrupt request input to interrupt request output
tJHIH
350
ns
tPLV(INTA-CAS)
Propagation time from INTA to cascade output (master)
tlALGV
565
ns
t pzv ( CAS-DQ)
Data output enable time after cascade output (slave)
tCVDV
300
ns
tPZV(R_DQ)
Data output enable time after read
tRLDV
tpvzeA-DQ)
Data output disable time after read
tRHDZ
tpzvCA-DQ)
Data output enable time after address
tPHLCR-EN)
Notel:
INTA signal is considered read signal
CS signal is considered address sianal
Input pulse level
0.45-2, 4V
Input pulse rise time
20ns
Input pulse fall time
20ns
Reference level input
V,H =2V, V,l =0. 8V
output VoH=2V, Val =0. 8V
Load capacitance
Cl =100pF, where SP/EN
pin is 15pF
10
V-
2.4-y:
0.45-A.:;:~..: 8_ _ _.:;:0.~:A-
TIMING DIAGRAM
Write Mode
~
K
thlw-Ai
tSU(A-W)
~
\
tw(w)
r- '--
r
,l
~
---
thlw-bQi
tSU(DQ-W)
It
:~
Read Mode
CS, Ao
}:
thlR-Ai
tSU(A-Rl
K
tW(R)
\
JI
tPVZ(A-OQ)
tpZV(R-OQ)
tpZV(A-DQ}
/11
~\
~
W
tpHL(R-EN)
tPLH(R-EN)
I
\
4-84
r
• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82S9AP
PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Interrupt Sequence
IR
tPlH(IR-INT)
INT
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
II
(Note 3)
tpLV(INTA-CAS)
I"'
~Note
2)
Other Timing
WR
RD
INTA
WR
RD
INTA
Note 1
2
3
8086, 8088 mode
8085A mode
8086,8088 mode is in high-impedance state, pOinter is released during the next INTA.
When in single 8085A mode, data is released by all INTAs. When master, CALL instruction is released during the first INTA, high impedance state...QLJ.ring the second and
third INTA. When slave, high impedance state during the firstlNTA, vectored address
is released during the second and third INTA.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-85
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
The M5L8279P-5 is a programmable keyboard and display
interface device that is designed to be used in combination
with an 8-bitl16-bit microprocessor. This device is fabricated
with N-channel silicon-gate ED-MOS process technology
and is packed in a 40-pin OIL package. It needs only single
5V power supply.
RETURN LINE
INPUTS
•
R2 ~ 1
R3 ~ 2
Vee
15v)
CLOCK INPUT ClK ~ 3
REQud~T6n~~8t
Single 5V supply voltage
Keyboard mode
Sensor matrix mode
Strobed mode
Internally provided key bounce protection circuit
Programmable debounce time
2-key 10ckoutiN-key roUover
8-character keyboard FI FO
Internally contained 16 X 8-bit display RAM
Programmable right and left entry
~
4
R4~
5
R,
8
INT
~
SCAN TIMING
OUTPUTS
RESET INPUT RESET ~ 9
READ S~~~~f RD ~ 10
WRITE STI~~~f WR ~ 11
Do~
DISPLAY (8)
OUTPUTS
12
DISPLAY (A)
OUTPUTS
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
APPLICATIONS
•
•
I
RETURN LINE
INPUTS
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
IOV) Vss
Microcomputer I/O device
64 contact key input device for such items as electronic
cash registers
Dual 8- or single 16-alphanumeric display
FUNCTION
The total chip, consisting of a keyboard interface and a display interface, can be programmed by eight 8-bit commands. The keyboard portion is provided with a 64-bit key
Outline 40P4
debounce buffer and an 8 X 8-bit FIFO/SENSOR RAM. It
operates in anyone of the scanned keyboard mode, scanned sensor matrix mode or strobed entry mode. The display
portion is provided with a 16 X 8-bit display RAM that can
be organized into a dual 16X 4 configuration. Also, an 8-digit
display configuration is possible by means of programming.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
CONTROL/DATA SELECT INPUT
CHIP SELECT INPUT
WRITE STROBE INPUT
READ STROBE INPUT
I
I
RETURN LINE INPUTS
I
I
-~
4-86
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
PIN DISCRIPTION
pin
Input or
Name
Functions
output
- - -f - - - - -
---------
----------
These are the return lines which are connected with the scan lines through the keys or sensor switches,
Ro~R7
and are used for 8-bit input in the strobed entry mode. They are provided with internal pullups to maintain
In
Return line inpuls
them high until a switch closure pulls one low. They become active at low-level.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------------------- - - -
ClK
Clock input
Clock signal from the system which is used to generate internal timing.
in
_.-----------
--~.--~-----~--
When there is any data in the FIFO during the keyboard mode or the strobed mode, this signal turns high-
INT
Interrupt request output
--
-
Out
level so as to request interrupt to the CPU. It turns low each time data is read, but if any data remains in the
FIFO it will turn high again and request interrupt to the CPU. End Interrupt command resets INT signal.
---,-,,---------,-...
-~----~~----.--
--------,--.--,,---
Resets the chip when this signal is high. After the reset it assumes 16-digit, left-entry, encode display and
RESET
Reset input
RD
Read strobe input
WR
Write strobe 'input
2-key lockout mode, and the prescale value of the clock becomes 31. The display RAM, however, is not
In
cleared.
- - - - - - - - ------- t--------------- ... -.------
Do~D7
In
Functions to control data transfer to the data bus.
In
.-_._--------.----
-
In/out
Control/data select
input
-
BD
1
Blanking display output
In
When low, It indicates they are data (in/out).
-Out
----.-----"--_..- .
--
When this signal is high, it indicates that the signals in and out are either command (in) or status (out).
In
Chip select input
CS
f----- 1---------
-----
All data and commands between the CPU and the chip are transferred through these lines.
-
Ao
------------
Functions to control command/data transfer from the data bus.
--- - - -
Bidirectional data bus
-----------
------
Chip select is enabled when this signal is low.
-----------------------------------------~------
This signal is used in preventing overlapped display during digit swiching. It also may be brought to lowlevel by display blanking command.
~-----,---
, These output ports can be used either as a dual 4-bit port or a single 8-bit port depending on an applica-
OAo-OA3
Display (A) and
OBo-OB3
(8) outputs
Out
by means of clear command.
c----SO~S3
tion, and the contents of the display RAM are output synchronizing with the scan timing Signals. These two
4-bit ports may be blanked independently. Blanking may be activated with either high- or low-level signal
--
These signals are used to scan the key switch, the sensor matrix or the display digit. They can be either
Scan timing outputs
Out
----
1---
decoded or encoded, but it requres an external decoder in the encode mode. Signals SO'-"'S3 are all turned
to low-level when RESET is high.
----------
In the keyboard mode, the shift input becomes the second highest bit of the key input information and is
SHIFT
Shift input
In
stored in the FIFO. This input is ignored in the other modes. It is constantly kept at high-level by an internal
pull resistor. The signal is active at high-level.
1--
----'--
lin the keyboard mode, the control input becomes the most significant bit of the key input information and is
CNTl
Control input
In
stored in the FIFO. The signal is active at high-level. In the strobed entry mode, it becomes the strobe sig-
I nal and stores the', return
input data in the FIFO at the rising edge of the input. It affects nothing internal in
i the sensor mode. It is constantly kept at high-level by an internal pullup resistor.
OPERATION·
One of the three operating modes, the keyboard mode is
the most common, and allows programmed 2-key lockout
and N-key rollover. Encoded timing Signals corresponding
with key input are stored in the FIFO through the keydebounce logic, and the debouncing time of the key is also
programmable. In the sensor mode, the contents of the 8 X
8 key contacts are constantly stored in the FI FO/sensor
RAM, generating an interrupt Signal to the CPU each time
there is a change in the contents. In the strobed entry mode,
the CNTL input signal is used as a strobe for storing the B
return line inputs to the FIFO/sensor RAM.
The display portion is provided with a 16 X B-bit display
RAM that can be organized into a dual 16 X 4-bit configura-
tion. Also, an 8-digit display configuration is possible by
means of programming. Input to the register can be performed by either left or right entry modes. In the auto increment mode, read and write can be carried out after designating the starting address only.
Both the keyboard and display sections are scanned by
common scan timing signals that are derived from the basic
clock pulse. This frequency-dividing ratio is changeable by
means of programming. There are decode and encode modes for the scanning mode; timing signals that are decoded
from the lower 2 bits of the scan counter are output in the
decode mode, while the 4-bit binary output from the scan
counter is decoded externally in the encode mode.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
4-87
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
4.
There are eight commands provided for programming the
operating modes of the M5LB279P-5. These commands are
sent on the data bus with the signal CS in low-level and the
signal Ao in high-level and are stored in the M5L8279P-5 at
the rising edge of the signal WR. The order of the command
execution is arbitrary.
1. Mode Set Command
MSB
C~e:
LSB
lolololDIDIKIKIKI
~ (Display mode set command)
o0
o1
8-8-bit character display-left entry
16-8-bit character display-left entryl
8-8-bit character display-right entry
1 0
1 1 16-8-bit character display-right entry
KKK (Keyboard mode set command)
o 0 0 Encoded display keyboard mode - 2-key lockoutl
0 1 Decoded display keyboard mode - 2-key lockout
1 0 Encoded display keyboard mode - N-key rollover
o 1 1 Decoded display keyboard mode - N-key rollover
100 Encoded display, sensor mode
1 0 1 Decoded display, sensor mode
1 1 0 Encoded display, strobed entry mode
1 1 1 Decoded display, strobed entry mode
o
o
Note 1: Default after reset.
2.
Read Display RAM Command
MSB
LSB
1 0 1 ' I, 1AliA 1 A 1 A 1 A 1
Code :
This command is used to specify that the following data
readout (CS'Ao'RD) is from the display RAM. As long as
data is to be read from the display RAM, no additional commands are necessary.
The data AAAA is the value with which the display RAM
read/write counter is set, and it specifies the address of the
display RAM to be read or written next.
AI is the auto-increment flag. Turning AI to "1" makes the
address automatically incremented after the second read/
write operation. This auto-increment bit· does not affect the
auto-increment of FIFO readout in the sensor mode.
5. Write Display RAM Command
MSB
Code:
I,
LSB
1 0 1 0 1AliA 1 A 1 A 1 A 1
With this command, following display RAM read/write
addressing is achieved without changing the data readout
source (FIFO or display RAM). Meaning of AI and AAAA are
identical with read display RAM command.
6. Display Write inhibit/Blanking Command
MSB
LSB
1,101
Code:
1X
Program Clock Command
MSB
Code :
A
1 0 1 0 l i p 1 pip 1 pip 1
MSB
10
A
B
LSB
I,
1 0 1AI 1 X 1 A 1 A 1 A 1 X =
Don't care
The IW is a write inhibit bit to the display RAM that corresponds with the output A or B. Inhibit is activated by turning
the IW "1".
The BL is used in blanking the out A or B. Blanking is
activated by turning the BL "1 ". Setting both BL flags makes
the signal BD low so that it can be used in 8-bit display
mode.
Resetting the flags makes all IW and BL turn "0".
7. Clear Command
MBS
Code:
LSB
I, I,
10
IColColColcFlcAI
CD: Clears the display RAM.
CD CD CD
o
This command is used to specify that the following data
readout (CS'Ao'RD) is from the FIFO. As long as data is to
be read from the FIFO, no additional commands are necessary.
AI and AAA are used only in the sensor mode. AAA designates the address of the FIFO to be read, and AI is the
auto-increment flag. Turning AI to "1" makes the address
automatically incremented after the second read operation.
This auto-increment bit does not affect the auto-increment of
the display RAM.
4-88
B
LSB
The .external clock is divided by the prescaler value PPPPP
designated by this command to obtain the basic internal frequency.
When the internal clock is set to 100kHz, it will give a
5.1 ms keyboard scan time and a 10.3ms debounce time.
The prescale value that can be specified by PPPPP is from
2 to 31. In case PPPPP is 00000 or 00001, the prescale is set
to 2. Default after a reset pulse is 31, but the prescale value
is not cleared by the clear command.
3. Read FIFO Command
Code:
IlwllwlBLIBLI X=Don'tcare
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
X
X
o
X
a
No specific performance
Entire contents of the display RAM are
turned "0".
The contents of the display RAM are
turned 20H (00100000 = OA30A20AIOAo
OB30B2 0B10Bo) .
Entire contents of the display RAM are
turned "1 ".
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL82r9P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
CF
:
CA
:
Clears the status word and resets the interrupt signal
(INT).
Clears the display RAM and the status word and resets
the interrupt signal (INT).
Clearing condition of the display RAM is determined by
the lower 2 bits of the CD'
Clearing the display RAM needs some time (- 160
fl second) and causes the display-unavailable status (DU)
in the status word to be "1 ". The display RAM is not accessible for the duration of this time, even if the display mode
was in 8-digit display mode or a decoded mode.
As both C F and C A function to reset the internal keydebounce counter, the key input under counting is ignored,
and the internal FI FO counter is reset to make the interrupt
signal low-level.
C A resets the internal timing counter, forcing 80- 83 to
start from 83828180 = 0000 after the execution of the command.
8.
Status word
MSB
NNN:
F:
U:
0:
End Interrupt/Error Mode 8et Command
MSB
Code.
8/E:
~B
11 11 11 1 E 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1
~=
Don't care
In the sensor matrix mode, an interrupt signal is generated
at the beginning of the next key scan time to inhibit further
writing to the FI FO when there is a change in the sensor
switch. The interrupt request output INT is reset when the
sensor RAM is read with the Auto-increment flag "0", or the
execution 01 this command.
When E is kept in "0", depression of any sensor makes
the second highest bit of the status word "1 ". When E is kept
in "1 ", the status is kept "0" all the time.
When E is programmed to "1" in the N-key rollover mode,
the execution of this command makes the chip operate in
special error mode, during which time depression of more
than two keys in a key debounce time causes an error and
sets the second highest bit of the status word "1".
LSB
IDulSIEI 0 1 u1 FIN 1 N1 NI
DU:
Note 2
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Indicates the number of characters in the FIFO
during the keyboard and strobed entry modes.
Indicates that the FIFO is filled up with 8 characters.
The number of characters existing in the FIFO ( 0
- 8 characters) can be known by means of the
bits NNN and F (FNNN = OOOO-FNNN = 1000).
Underrun error flag
This flag is set when a master CPU tries to read
an empty FIFO.
Overrun error flag
This flag is set when another character is strobed
into a full FI FO.
The bits U and 0 cannot be cleared by status
read. They will be cleared by the clear command.
8ensorclosure/multiple error flag
When "111 EXXXX" is executed by turning E = 0 ,
the bit 8/E in the status word is set when there is
at least one sensor closure.
When "111 EXXXX" is executed by turning E = 1
(special error mode), the bit 8/E is set when
there are more than two key depressions made in
a key scan time.
Display unavailable
This flag is set when a clear display command is
executed, and announces that the display RAM is
not accessible.
The underrun, overrun and special error flags are reset by
either executing clear command (CF= 1 ) or reading status
word.
4-89
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
CPU INTERFACE
1. Command Write
A command is written on the rising edge of the signal WR
with CS low and Ao high.
2. Data Write
Data is written to the display RAM on the rising edge of the
signal WR with CS and Ao low.
The address of the display RAM is also incremented on
the rising edge of the signal WR if AI is set for the display
RAM.
3. Status Read
The status word is read when CS and RD are low and Ao is
high. The status word appears on the data bus as long as
the signal RD is low.
4. Data Read
Data is read from either the FIFO or the display RAM with
CS = RD = 0 and Ao = 0 . The source of the data (FIFO or
display RAM) is decided by the latest command (read display or read FIFO). The data read appears on the data bus
as long as the signal RD is low.
The trailing edge of the signal RD increments the
address of the FIFO or the display RAM when AI is set. After
the reset, data will be read from the FIFO, however.
for a maximum key matrix due to the Hmit of timing signals.
However, both the key scan cycleifancFthe key debounce
cycle are the same as in the encode'(if'm,ode.)
1. 2-Key Lockout (Scanned Keyb'O'ai'd mode)
The detection of a new key closure resets the internal debounce counter and starts counting, At the end of a key debounce cycle, the key is checked and entered into the FIFO
if it is still down. An entry in the FIFO sets the INT output
high. If any other keys are depressed in a key debounce cycle, the internal key debounce counter is reset each time it
encounters a new key. ThUs only a single-key depression
within a key debounce duration is accepted, but all keys are
ignored when more than two keys are depressed at the
same time.
Example 1 : Accepting two successive key depressions
KEY]
KEY2
t.
Note 3 :
KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE
: Debounce counter reset
: Key input
CS
Ao
RD
WR
Operation
0
1
1
0
Command write
0
0
1
0
Data write
Example 2 : Overlapped depression of three keys
KEY]
0
]
0
1
Status read
0
0
0
1
Data read
1
X
X
X
No operation
._------
KEY2
KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE
KEY3
t
KEYBOARD INTERFACE
Keyboard interface is done by the scan timing signals (So~
S3) , the return line inputs (Ro ~ R7), the SHIFT and the
CNTRl inputs.
In the decoded mode, the low order of two bits of the internal scan counter are decoded and come out on the timing
pins (So~S3). In the encoded mode, the four binary bits of
the scan counter are directly output on the timing pins, thus
a 3-to-8 decoder must be employed to generate keyboard
scan timing.
The return line inputs (Ro~R7), the SHIFT and the CNTl
inputs are pulled up high by internal pullup transistors until a
switch closure pulls one low.
The internal key debounce logic works for a 54-key matrix that is obtained by combining the return line inputs with
the scan timing.
For the keyboard interface, M5l8279P-5 has four distinctive modes that allow various kinds of applications. In the following explanation, a "key scan cycle" is the time needed to
scan a 54-key matrix, and a "key debounce cycle" needs a
duration of two "key scan" cycles. (In the decoded mode 32
keys, unlike 64 keys in the encoded mode, can be employed
4-90
u--u
Note 4
• 'MiTs1.tBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
Only key 2 is acceptable
t
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARDjDISPLA Y INTERFACE
2. N-Key Rollover (Scanned Keyboard Mode)
Each key depression is treated independently from all
others so as to allow overlapped key depression. Detection
of a new key depression makes the internal key debounce
counter reset and start to count in. a same manner as in the
case of 2-key lockout. But, in N-key rollover, other key closures are entirely ignored within a key debounce cycle so
that depression of any other keys would not reset the key
debounce counter. In this way, overlapped key depression is
allowed so as to enable the following key input:
KEY 1
KEY2
KEY3
The scanned key input signal does not always reflect the
actual key depressing action, as the key matrix is scanned
by the timing signal.
With N-key rollover, there is a mode provided with which
error is caused when there are more than two key inputs in
a key debounce cycle, which can be programmed by using
the end interrupt/error mode set command, In this mode
(special error mode), recognition of the above error sets the
I NT signal to "1" and sets the bit S/E in the status word.
In case two key entries are made separately in more
than a debounce cycle, there would be no problem, as key
depression is clearly identified. And no problem exists for 2key lockout, as the both keys are recognized invalid.
3. Sensor Matrix Mode
The key debounce logic is disabled in this mode. As the image of the sensor switch is kept in the FIFO, any change in
this status is reported to the CPU by means of the interrupt
signal INT. Although a debounce circuit is not used in this
mode, it has an advantage in that the CPU is able to know
how long and when the sensor was depressed.
In the sensor matrix mode with the bit E
of the end
interrupt/error mode set command, the second most significant bit of the status word (S/E bit) is set to "1" when any
sensor switch is depressed.
Any sensor change detected by the M5L8279P-5 in one
key scan cycle causes only once I NT generation at the 'first
timing of the next scan cycle.
4. Strobe Mode
The data is entered into the FIFO from the return lines (Ro~
R7 ) at the rising edge of a CNTL pulse. The INT goes high
while any data exists in the FIFO, in the same manner as in
the keyboard mode. The key debounce circuit will not
operate.
Formats of data entered into the FIFO in each of the
above modes are described in the following:
=a
Keyboard matrix
MSB
LSB
I ~ ~
I
CNTL
I
• ENCODED RETURN
INPUT
SHIFT SCAN TIMING SIGNALS (S,. S,. AND So)
Sensor matrix mode
Example of error (Special error mode)
KEY2
KEY1
KEY 2
I
M~
ur---.,Ur - - -
KEY1 ~
u
I
U
].,E;-----.
..j ~~6LSECAN
--U
u-
CNTL AND SHIFT INPUTS ARE IGNORED
Storobe mode
MSB
KEY SCAN
CYCLE
~B
I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I
LSB
I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I~I
CNTL AND SHIFT INPUTS ARE IGNORED
KEY DEBOUNCE CYCLE
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
4-91
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARDjDISPLA Y INTERFACE
DISPLAY INTERFACE
The display interface is done by eight display outputs (OAo
-OA3, OBo-OB3), a blanking signal (BO), and scan timing
outputs (8o-S3).
The relation between the data bus and the display outputs is as shown below:
Clearing the display RAM is not achieved by the reset
signal (9-pin) but requires the execution of the clear command.
The timing diagrams for both the encoded and decoded
modes are shown below.
For the encoded mode, a 3-to-8 or 4-to-16 decoder is required, according to whether eight or sixteen digit display
used.
Timing relations of So, BO, and display outputs (OAoOA3, OBo-OB3) are shown below.
So (Enc::lL_ _ _..J
mode)
II
So
s,
L
S3
L
(2) Decoded mode
So
S,
S,
S3
Note 5
4-92
iI
II
Note 6 : Values of the output data shown in the slanted line areas are
decided upon the clear command executed last to become
the value of the display RAM after the reset. The values in the
slanted areas after reset will go low. In the same manner, the
values OAo-OA3, OBo-OB3 are dependent on the clear command executed last. When the both A and B are blanked, the
signal BD will be in low-level.
(1) Encoded mode
So
II
Here Pw is 640" s if the internal clock frequency is set to
100kHz.
',. • MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
KEY ENTRY METHODS
1. Left
Address
position
address
Entry
0 in the display RAM corresponds to the leftmost
(83828,80 = 0000) of a display and address 15 (or
7 in 8-character display) to the rightmost position
(83828,80 = 1111 or 828,80 = 111). The 17th (9th) character
is entered back into the leftmost position.
Auto-increment mode
o
1st entry
ITI
14 15
L..:...l......l
o
2nd entry
1
1,'T11 -_ -_ -_ -_
1
-DISPLAY RAM
2. Right Entry
The first data is entered in the rightmost position of a display. From the next entry. the display is shifted left one character and the new data is placed in the rightmost position. A
display position and a register address as viewed from the
CPU change each time and do not correspond.
Auto-increment mode
1 2
14 15 0 -DISPLAY RAM'
1st entry
IT}
ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU
===
~~g~E~~EA~p~EN
-'-1---I.----l1_1...J1
2nd entry
14 15
[2DJ====ITI
3rd entry
o
16th entry
17th entry
II
14 15
[2DJ ====:GEJ
o
@DI ====:GEJ
~ ====:GEJ
o
18th entry
1
o
1
14 15
16th entry
1
14 15
17th entry
[2DJ===
~ ===
~ ===
2
14 15 0
1151161171
2
18th entry
13 14 15
1141151161
1
LEFT ENTRY
1
3
15 0
1
1161 17 118 1
Auto-increment mode
2
3
4
5
6
7
1st entry
-DISPLAY RAM
ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU
Auto-increment mode
1
1st entry
o
2nd entry
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
1
L-.l...-.L-...I--...I--..L-...l...-....l..-....J
-DISPLAY RAM
ADDRESS AS SEEN
FROM THE CPU
23456701
2nd entry
Execution of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
the command 11 1 2 1
10010101
L-.l...-.l...-.L-...I--..L-...l...-....l..-....J
ENTER NEXT AT LOCATIONS 5 AUTO-INCREMENT
1
0
I I
7
11 121
o
7
2
3
4
5
6
11 121
Execution of 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1
the command 1
11 121
10010101
L...-.L-...I--...I--..L--L-.....I-....I..-...J
ENTER NEXT AT LOCATIONS 5 AUTO-INCREMENT
7
3rd entry
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
4
5
6
701
2
3
3rd entry
01234567
4th entry
11 12 1
13 14 1
4th entry
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
13 1 4 1
11 121
4-93
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Conditions
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Maximum power dissipation
With respect to Vss
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Ta=25'C
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Limits
Unit
-0.5....:7
V
-0.5~7
V
-0.5~7
V
1000
rnW
-20~75
'c
-60~150
'C
(Ta=-20~75'C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage
Nom
Max
5
5.5
4.5
0
V
V
2.2
V
V1H(RL)
High-level input voltage, for return line inputs
V ,H
High-level input voltage, aH others
V1L(RL)
Low-level input voltage, for return line inputs
Vss -O.5
1.4
V
V ,L
Low-level input voltage, all others
Vss -O.5
0.8
V
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2
V
(T a=-20~75°C . Vcc =5V±10%. Vss=OV. unless otherwise noted.)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Test conditions
Min
V OH
High-level output voltage
IOH=-400,uA
2.4
VOHCINT)
Low-level output voltage, interrupt request output
IOH=-400,uA
305
VOL
low-level output voltage
IOL=2.2mA
Icc
Supply current from Vee
Typ
Max
V
V
0045
V
120
rnA
10
/-I A
Input current, return line inputs, shift input and control
VI=VCC
input
V,=OV
I,
Input current, all others
VI=VCC ...... OV
-10
10
/-I A
loz
Off-state output current
VI=VCC--" OV
-10
10
/-I A
C,
Input capacitance
VI=VCC
5
10
pF
Co
Output capacitance
Vo=Vcc
10
20
pF
II(AU
4-94
" . MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
-100
/-I A
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSL8279P-S
PROGRAMMABLE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY INTERFACE
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a=-20-75·C, Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted.)
Read Cycle
Alternative
Limits
Parameter
Symbol
Test conditions
symbol
tC(Rl
Read cycle time
t RCY
tWCR)
Read pulse width
tRR
tSUCA-R)
Address setup time befor RD
th(R-A)
Address setup time after RD
--
Min
-_._-
Unit
Typ
Max
1000
ns
250
ns
tAR
0
ns
tRA
0
ns
- - (Note 7)
Write Cycle
Limits
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
---
Unit
Min
symbol
Typ
Max
---
Tc(w)
Write cycle time
t wCY
1000
ns
TwREF( -).
REF(-)
Reference voltage( -)
>REF(-).
OE
Output enable signal
2'
\
2- 8
Digital signal
EOe
Input
The signal at this pin controls the digital output. When the signal is low~level, pins
r 1.-.., 2- 8 are
in a floating
state. When it is high-level, the data is output.
The analog signal, which was input through INo ....... IN7, is converted to digital data and is output from these
End of conversion
signal
Output
terminals. When DE is low~level, these terminals are floating. When OE is high-level, the converted digital
data is output. The MSB is 2- 1 and the LSB is T8.
This terminals is used to indicate the completion of an analog to digital conversion. It is reset by a START
Output
signal (high-level to low-level) and is set on completion of the conversion (low-level to high-level). This
output is normally used to generate an interrupt request for the CPU.
The input signal at this terminal is used to start·a conversion cycle by setting the successive approximation
START
Start conversion,signal
Input
register. The successive approximation register is reset by rising from low-level to high-level and conversion is started after being' set by falling from high-level to low-level.
elK
Clock input
Input
The signal at this terminal is the basic clocking signal used to determine internal timing.
5-4
•. .MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
M58990P,-1
a-BIT a-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER
Basic Function Blocks
8-channel Multiplexer
256R Ladder Network And Switch Tree
The M58990P has eight input pins (INo-IN?) used for entering analog signals. When analog signals are present at
INo - IN?, the 8-channel multiplexer selects one of those
signals and converts it into a digital signal.
The address decoder contains an input latch circuit which
functions to hold the input signal present at pins ADD AADD C. This circuit is illustrated in Fig. 1, while timing of
the address latch is shown in Fig. 2.
ALE
ALE
I
I
1
ALE
I
~
AL.E
•~S2~S4
ADD~S,
S3
To
} decoder
-ADD C
Fig.l
Address latch circuit
Fig. 3 shows the 256R resistor ladder and switch tree circuit. The 256R ladder network is created in the diffusion
process by forming 256 individual resistors into the substrate. 254 of these resistors have the same value R, while
the resistor on each end of the ladder carries the value 3/
2R and 1/2R respectively. The reference voltage source is
applied to both ends of the ladder, and the reference voltage used to compare analog input voltages is output at
each of the steps.
The reason for using different resistance values on the
ends of the ladder network is illustrated in Fig. 9 (a) showing the I/O characteristics of the A-D converter. The different resistance values provide symmetry between the zero
point and full scale point in the output characteristics transfer curve. As noted in this diagram, the width of the horizontal axis of each step is determined by the potential difference created by each ladder resistor. The step widths
for the zero and full scale pOints are respectively 1/2 and
Control code from successive approximation register
____
____
~A~
ALE _ _ _ _...J
'.
Address input latched here.
ADD A
-ADD C
REF~ffi~
R~~
R
When the ALE signal is "L", S1 and S4 (Fig. 1) are closed,
and S2 and S3 are open. At this time, external input is inhibited at S3. and the previous data is sent to the decoder.
When ALE transits from "L" to "H", S1 and S4 open, and S2
and S3 close. This simultaneously latches the address data,
and enables output to the decoder. At this point, the new
data arriving at ADD A - ADD C is blocked at S1' Subsequent transition of ALE from "H" to "L" does not produce a
change; the latched data remains held.
The method for determining selection of the analog input at
INo-IN? is by reading the value of the latched address signal. Value allocations are shown in Table 1.
Address signals as related to selected
analog signal pin
ADD C
ADD B
ADD A
Analog input
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
INo
IN,
IN,
IN3
IN.
IN5
INs
IN7
0
0
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
:
I
:R:I
Address latch timing
Table 1
I
J!k
REF
•
0
1
0
1
0
1
:I
II
f
tR
(+)
256R
Fig.2
~
~::J- V REF to
comparator
---
Input
+~~
(-)
Fig.3
256R ladder network and switch tree
3/2-times that of the intermediate steps.
The switch tree is an analog switch network made up of
510 MOSFETs, and is used to output the ladder step voltage selected by successive approximation register
(S.A.R.) code to the comparator. The output voltage
obtained from the 256R ladder and switch tree is increased
or decreased in accordance with the S. A. R. code, with the
monotonicity of the 256R ladder.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-5
MITSUBISHI LSls
M58990P,-1
I-BIT I-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER
Comparator
The comparator used in M58990P has a chopper type
amplifier used to minimize input offset voltage and drift.
This circuit is illustrated in Fig. 4. Fig. 6 shows the operational timing of the comparator.
At the start of the comparing cycle, 8 0 and 8, close on the
positive edge of ¢o and o;;,,;,M
¢>,
t'·,rl
~
from
'M'",;,:'~~ •. cl~-Fil! ~
J
rom
1
ladder output
V REF - - S2
f
_'>--
Fig.4
r-;-t
C
I
L ________ ...J
AC amplifier
I
To SAR.
Comparator
I/O characteristics
of CMOS inverter
"H"
1------,-..1
/
/
/
/
/
Q)
/
~
/~Input=output
~
:;
c.
:;
A//
o
/
/
/
When 6V>O
/
/
/
/
/
"l" It::..::.=..:=-=:..:=-=-~===
a
__
vee
Input voltage
Fig.5
AC amplifier I/O characteristics
ClK
I
-J
I
Comparing cycle
I
So closes,
short~circuiting
AC amplifier input and output
I
S, closes, entering
I
.J
analog signal in amplifier
I
I
I S2
closes. entering output from ladder in
I amplifier.
¢>2_--I-1__...-_______. . . 1.
:
C.,,,.,.« .~"......" '" & ....
¢>3=-i
Fig.6
5-6
Comparing cycle timing
:.... MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
I
I
I
I-I---rl---
'iJ_._1.....___
_n
MITSUBISHI LSls
MS8990P,-1
8-BIT 8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER
Successive Approximation Register
(S.A.R.)
The S.A.R. takes the results from the comparator and converts them to an a-bit binary code for use in determining
the reference voltage value that should be used in the next
input comparison. The relationship between reference voltage V REF and the binary code is as follows:
VREF = (27C7+2sCs+"'2oCo) X
~;s;
+ REF(-) -
VFSR ......(1)
512
Where C7+C S +·+Co*0.
When C 7=CS ="'=Co=O, VREF=REF( -)
Here, VFSR stands for full scale range of analog voltage,
which indicates the range between minimum and maximum
value, or
VFSR =REF(+)-REF(-)"'(2)
C7, Cs'" Co are each represented by a or 1 digit in the
binary code, with C7 the MSB and Co the LSB. Consequently, from equati'on (1), we have:
1
1
1
VREF= (2C'+22Cs+'+2lfCo) XVFSR
°
+REF ( - ) -
VFSR
512······(3)
When each digit (bit) in the right half of equation (3) is
weighted from 1/2 to 1/2 8 , the value relative to full scale
can be obtained. With the successive comparator method,
successive approximations are made from MSB to LSB until reference voltage VREF is as close to VIN as it can get.
The following explanation provides more specifics.
When the start pulse entered at the START pin transitions
from "L" to "H", the S.A.R. sets only the MSB "1", the other
bits being reset to "0". As a result, the voltage selected for
reference voltage V REF is approximately one-half of VFSR,
and this is used to compare with analog input VIN .
The conversion is started when the start pulse transition
from "H" to "L", and the first comparing cycle is entered.
At this time, should V IN be smaller than VREF, MSB will be
reset to "0". If larger, the MSB will remain "1" and the next
comparing cycle will be entered. For this cycle, the bit next
to MSB, C s will be set, and the previous results will be carried up. In other words, taking the next selected reference
voltage as V REF , when
VIN>VREF, then:
,_ 1
1
VFSR
VI'lEF- (2+"4) vFsR- 512 +REF (-)
v
V
FSR
FSR
-
V'N
L...J---I
--
1/4VFSR
VREF f--
VREF
L-
-
LJ--I::=
V'N
1/4VFSR
0
1
2
3
I
4
0
1
Comparing cycle
C7 (MSB)
C.
C.
C,
C.
C2
C,
C.(LSB)
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(aJ
Fig.7
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
I
3
4
Comparing cycle
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
C7 (MSB)
C.
C.
C,
C.
C2
C,
C.(LSB)
............
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(bJ
When V'N>V REF
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
............
When V'N REF( - ) must be observed.
The reason for 1 and 2 is that for M OS switches located
near the V REF pin, their souces and substate PN junctions
are likely to forward bias, with the resulting current flow
changing ladder potentials.
In 3, (REF(
REF( -)) 12 is the potential for the center
of the ladder, and as shown in Fig. 13, this is the borderline
between p-channel and n-channel switch operations. Consequently, if this potential varies greatly from Vee/2, turn-on
resistance of the n-channel swiches near the center of the
ladder will increase. (See Fig. 14.) On the other hand, if
this value is smaller than Vee/2, the turn-on resistance of
the p-channel switches will increase.
Where turn-on resistance is high, the required settling time
after fully charging the comparator's input capacitor becomes too long, and accuracy cannot be maintained.
In 4, if REF (+) < REF( -), the up-down transients of the
control signals from the S.A.R. will be reversed relative to
the up-down transients of the reference voltage from ladder
to comparator. In this case, instead of the approximations
converging, the bits will diverge all Os or all 1s. Also, as
noted previously, where REF (+) and REF (-) approach
GND and Vee respectively, the switches will not turn on.
256R ladder network and switch tree
RON
Vg
Nch
Vee
Pch
GND
~~-------_-v~e-e--------~~---VD
-~2-
Fig.14
5-10
MOS switch turn-on resistance
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
+) +
+) +
MITSUBISHI LSls
M58990P,-1
8-BIT 8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Maximum power dissipation
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
Limits
-0.
With respect to GND
3
V
V
500
I
0~70
-65~150
mW
-i~'e
(Ta~0-70'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Nom
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
GND
Supply voltage
4.75
Max
5
5.25
V
0
V
V ,H
High-level input voltage
2
Vee
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.3
0.8
V
V REF (+)
Max of reference voltage( +)
Vee Vee+0.1
V
VREFC-)
Min of reference voltage( -)
-0.1
Vee
VREF(+ltVREF( -)
2 - 0. 1
1
1
Analog input voltage
V
~+OI
1
.
V
5.25
V
VREF(+l
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
0
Vee
2
5.12
Defferential of reference voltage
V1(IN)
V
3~Vec+0.
O~Vee
Ta~25'C
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
L::::.V REF
Unit
-0.3~7
(Ta~0-70'C . Vee~5V ±5%, unless otherwise noted)
limits
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
.. -
Test conditions
symbol
Typ
Min
i
V ,H
High-level input voltage
VIN( T)
V'L
Low-level input voltage
VIN( 0)
V OH
High-level output voltage
V OUT ( T)
IOH=-360,uA, T a=70'e
--
Max
..
-
Unit
- -..
2
--_._- ------- - 0.8
Vee- 0. 4
Vee=5V
-.~
V
-----
V
--
V
VOL
Low-level output voltage, 2
V OUT ( 0)
IOL=1.6mA
0.45
VOUEOC)
Low-level output voltage, EOC output
V OUT ( 0)
IOL=1.2mA
0.4~~ __
I'H
High-level input current
IIN( 1 )
V,H =5.25V
I'L
Low-level input current
IINC 0)
V,L=OV
lozH
Off-state
lOUT
Vo=5V
1........ 2
8 output
V
-'-'-,-
1.0
,uA
----
. '
(high-imp~u~g~f~usrtr~~t)2-1_2-8 output
(high-im~~?p~tC~u~~~~1: r1.....,2-8 output
Vo=OV
IOZL
Off state
lee
Supply current from Vee input
liZ
Off-state input current, (lNo ........ IN7 input)
IOFF(+)
liZ
Off-state input current, (INo ........ IN7 input)
IOFF(-)
lOUT
Vec=5V, V,=5V
200
nA
Vec=5V, V,=OV
-200
--
M58990P
1-----
M58990P-1
c---VCC=VREFC+)=5.12V
Full-scale error
VAEFc-)=GND
I
M58990P
!
M58990P-1
,
Ladder resistances
C,
Input capacitance
G'N
v,~GND.
Co
Output capacitance
GOUT
Vo~GND, Vo~25mVrms, f~1
Vce=5V
Vo=25mVrms.
f~1
Bits
±+
±+
±+I
,
- - - - -- -
..
--~
±+
LSB
±1
LSB
±+
--±+
._±I
±1+
LSB
--.-~
LSB
._-LSB
LSB
.. -
k'o
MHz
MHz
.-
nA
~---
-
±-.t,
1
RLADDER
.-
8
I
\
Note 1
,uA
,u A
Zero error
Absolute accuracy
-3
---woo-
- -- - - -
-
,uA
----
~-
f e C¢)=500kH z , T a=70'e
Conversion resolution
Linearity error
-L~t;
- - - - - - - - ------ _ .
3
--~
.-~
i
8
pF
12
pF
-
Current flowing into an Ie is positive, and Min and Max show the absolute limit.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
5-11
MITSUBISHI LSls
M58990P,-1
8~BIT
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
8-CHANNEL A-D CONVERTER
(Ta=25"C, VCC=VREFI+)=5V, VREFI-)=GND unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Test conditions
Symbol
Typ
Min
Unit
Max
tW(START)
Start pulse width
tws
200
ns
tW(ALE)
ALE pulse width
tWALE
200
ns
Isul A)
Address setup time
Is
50
ns
Ih(A)
Address hold time
IH
50
fel~)
Clock frequency
fe
10
640
1200
kHz
Clock cycle
-
100
1.56
0.83
!-,S
le(,,)
Nole 2:
ns
Inpul vollage level Is V'l =0. BV, V'H=2V
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=25"C,
vcc=V REF I+)=5V,
VREFI-)=GND, unless otherwise noted)
limits
Alternative
Parameter
Symbol
Test conditions
tpzx(OE-DO) Propagation time from OE to output
t H1 ,
tHO
tPXZ(OE-OQ)
Propagation time from OE to output floating
tiH .
tOH
Ie
Cycle time
Ie
IdlEoe)
EOC delay time
tEoe'
Unit
Typ
Min
Symbol
Max
C L =50pF
ALE
ADD A
-ADD C
START
STABLE ANALOG
~NPUT
X
~
J
j------
1\
tW(START)
EOC
tdIEOC)
"'t
J
-I
Ic
\
OE
2-'-2-8 -------------------j~----------~:+ ) READY setup time before clock
Tos
T RS
0
0
0
ns
100
60
60
ns
1> ~READY)
READY hold time before clock
TRH
20
20
20
ns
tSU(HLDA- "')
HLDA setup time before clock
T Hs
100
75
75
ns
tSUCDO-MEMA)
Data setup time before MEMR
T fDS
250
190
170
ns
th(MEMR-DQ)
Data hold time after MEMR
TIDH
0
0
0
ns
th(
Note
5-28
A.C Testing waveform
Input pulse level
Input pulse rise time
I nput pulse fall time
Reference level input
Output
O. 45-2. 4V
10ns
10ns
V ,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V
V oH =2V, VOL =0, 8V
.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTIC
(i) SLAVE MODE
Symbol
(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Alternate
symbol
tpZV(R~DQ)
Data enable time after read
T RDE
tPVZ(R-OQ)
Data disable time after read
TADF
(ii)
Limits
M5M82C37AP
-~--I--Max
i
0
I
200
100
---
M5M82C37 AP-4
M5M82C37 AP-5
Min
I
I
Max
Min
0
I
200
100
0
i
Max
I
140
70
I
Unit
ns
.-
ns
DMA MODE
Symbol
Parameter
Alternate
symbol
t pLH (
'" -AEN)
Propagation time from clock to AEN
TAEL
tpHLC
f -AEN)
Propagation time from clock to AEN
TAET
-A)
Propagation time from clock to address active
TFAAB
tpHLC
1> -A)
Propagation time from clock to address stable
TASM
t pvz (
¢ -A)
Propagation tJrne from clock to address floating
TAFAB
~ZV(¢-DQ)
Propagation time from clock to data bus
TFADB
t pvz ( >-DO)
Propagation time from clock to data bus
TAFDB
t pzv ( '"
Limits
M5M82C37AP
M5M82C37 AP-4
M5M82C37AP-5
Min
Min
Min
Max
300
200
250
250
150
300
250
200
140
Max
225
150
190
190
120
225
190
150
110
tpLH { ~ -ADSTB)
Propagation time from clock to ADSTB
TSTL
tpHu ~ -ADSTB)
Propagation time from clock to ADSTB
TSTT
tsu< OB-ADSTS)
Data output setup time before ADSTB
TASS
thCADSTB-oo)
Data output hold time before ADSTB
T AHS
Propagation time from clock to read or write active
T FAC
200
150
Propagation time from clock to read or write
T DeL
270
200
t pLH ( '" -R)
Propagation time from clock to read
T DCTR
t pLH ( '"
Propagation time from clock to write
T DCTW
270
200
210
_._150
Propagation time from clock to read or write floating
T AFC
150
120
th(R-A)
Address output hold time after read
TAHR
te (; ,-100
th(W-A)
Address output hold time after write
T AHW
tc u,-50
tSU(DQ-MEMW)
Data output setup time before MEMW
T ODV
the MEMW-DO)
Data output hold time after MEMW
TODH
200
20
t pLH ( '" -DACK)
Propagation time from clock to DACK
TAK
tpHLC '"
-EOP)
Propagation time from clock to EOP
TAK
t pLH ( '"
-EOP)
Propagation time from clcok to EOP
TAK
t pzv { '" -R)
t pzv < '"
100
30
!
Unit
f-------ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
..-
ns
f-----ns
ns
II
ns
ns
150
ns
190
ns
-w)
-w)
t pvz ( '" -R)
t pvz ( '"
200
130
170
----.170
90
200
170
130
90
100
40
-w)
tpHu '" -R)
tpHu '"
100
50
Max
-w)
t pLH ( .p -HAO)
tpHu '" -HAO)
Propagation time from clock to HRQ
I "H"1.0V
TDO I "H"3. 3V
--
le(;,-100
tc ( I)-50
125
20
250
250
250
160
250
• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
220
190
190
120
190
.~-
..---
190
130
120
ns. _ ._
ns
--
ns
Ic (;,-100
ns
tc (;,-50
ns
125
10
ns
--
ns
170
170
170
120
120
ns
ns
ns
ns
5-29
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
TIMING DIAGRAMS
Reset timing
tSU(VCC-RESET)
Vcc
RESET
elK
tSU(RESET-R)
lOR
tSU(AESET-W)
Slave mode timing (READ)
es.
A,-Ao
)
-
es,
K
ADDRESS VALID
IhlR-csl
IhIR-AI
tSU(CS-R)
tSU(A_R)
tW(R)
-
tr-
tPZV(R_OQ)
tPVZ(R_OQ)
I-DATA VALID
•
MITSUBISHI
11"<& ELECTRIC
\
/
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
Slave mode timing (WRITE)
tsu(cs-w)
I
\
CS
Ih(w-A)
tSU(A-W)
~
~
ADDRESS VALID
tw(w)
lOW
\
-
th(W-DQ)
tsuCOQ-w)
)
INPUT DATA VALID
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
II
K
5-31
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
DMA transmit timing
S,
CLK
S,
So
So
S,
S2
S3
S4
S2
S3
S4
S,
S,
S,
--(1.-Jrv\}--Jh ~h ~f\-f\-/' ~f\..jO-rwFV"V\
*)
t~~Q_')
ts
DREQ
\'P+--+-+-+---
HRQ
~\
HLDA
_tTH(<-DACK)
f
~*-~~~+-~-+~~
DACK
tpLH(~AEN)
-
i
AEN
tpZV(.-ADSTB)
~~~r;I~~~--~_+~r_--+_--~--~----------th(ADSTB-DB)
tsu (DB-ADSTB) ---4--+---+1
DB,-DBa
~'--
--------------------------~~~~~
tPZV(¢-OQ)
_+------l-I
tpvz(.p..OQ)
tPLH(¢-R)
..-f--t-
R)~~~~~~ -~)
~)
_________________________t_pz_V_(<__
MEMR/IOR
tpzv~1--
1
~L·~:..-.,.(>--w. .,.)-----4.....J
tpHL(<_W)
-t----t--
I
J~~'-------------
tpLH(<_W)
L...J
l...IJl--
+--'~r----'rI-----"
\ ____ I'--- I#I'- ___
Ir---r,-...,
---------------------------'1
( - - - signifies expansion write)
1-------
1
tpHU¢-EOP)
tpLH(¢-EOP)
1
'0
EOP
(Internal)
tSU(EOP-¢)
EOP
(External)
j
\ \'
tw(eDP)
5--32
•. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
I
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,-4,-5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
READY input timing
ClK
READY
MEMR/IOR
MEMW/IOW
}-----I'------J
tpHL(¢>-W)
(- - -
II
I
signifies expansion write)
ClK
READY
MEMR/IOR
MEMW/IOW
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
5-33
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5M82C37AP ,.4,·5
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
Inter-memory transmission
So
eLK
rurvu~~ rurv-L
S"
J\j
S13
S"
S'4
S"
S"
S'3
S,
S'4
~
tPHL(4)-A)
S,
tPVZ(<,6-A)
tpzv(_Al
)
A,-Ao
tpLH ( ~ADSTB)
-
tpHL( ~ADSTB)
r-
ADSTB
\
A,-Ao
j
thCADSTB-DQ)
I-
~
/~
~
tSUCOQ-MEMR)
tpvz(¢-OQ)
tPZV(tb-DQ)
tSU(OQ-MEMW)
JthCMEMR-OQ)
A15 -A. \
J
III
\\\
Data
input
t
~.r
A15 -Aa
output
;--:-1
t(MEMW-OQJ
I
-~
tPlH(¢-R)
tpzV(9'>-Rl
tpH d9'>-R)
tPVZ(¢-R)
\
-
~
,
/
tpzv(-wl
l - f-
tpvz(..w)
r-
/~
\
MEMW
tpHU¢-EOP)
tpLH(¢-EOP)
I
\~
EOP
(Internal)
tSUCEOP-¢)
EOP
(External )
5-34
\\\)
JI/I
twe eop)
..• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C37AFP is a programmable 4-channel DMA
(Direct Memory Access) controller. This device is specially
designed to simplify data transfer at high trasfer rate for
microcomputer systems.
Fabricated using the silicon-gate CMOS technology, the
M5M82C37AFP operates using a single 5V power supply.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5V single supply, single TTL clock
Four channel DMA controls with priority DMA request
acknowledge functions
DMA enable/disable, automatic initialization enable/disable, address increment/decrement programmability for
each cannel
Programmable DREQ input and DACK output logic
polarity
Direct connecting permits easy DMA channel expansion.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
I/O READ
INPUT/OUTPUT
lOR -
1
:~~~~g~TPUT
lOW -
2
~fAMDO~GTPUT MEMR W~\"1-nYUTPUTMEMW NON-USABLE
NU -
READY INPUT READY HOLD
ACKNOWLEDGE INPUT HlDA ~~~~3~S STROBE ADSTB _
A'l
40 39 - As ADDRESS
38 _ Asj OUTPUTS
3
37 -
4
5
36 -
6
B
35 34 33 -
9
32 -
7
~E~~3~S ENABLE AEN HOLD REQUEST
OUTPUT
CHIP SELECT INPUT
CS CLOCK INPUT
ClK _
12
RESET INPUT RESET -
13
Ag~,;oWLEDGE J DAC K, -
14
OUTPUTS
I DACK3 -
15
DMA
REQUESTS
INPUTS
I
~~tu~:o~~g~iss
A, ADDRESS INPUTS/
A, j OUTPUTS
Ao
Vee (5V)
25 24 -
DREQ,- 17
DREQ,- 18
23 22 _
DREQo- 19
Vss (OV)
EOP
A3l
11
DREQ3- 16
Memory to memory data transfer
EOP input/output permits DMA operation completion
check as well as forcibly completing DMA operation.
A.
""-l_ _ _ _ _....r2....
1 -
Outline
DACK o l ~~:NOWLEDGE
DACK, [OUTPUTS
DBsl
DB
DATA INPUTS/
s [OUTPUTS
DB,
•
40P2R
APPLICATION
•
DMA control of peripheral equipment such as floppy
diskettes and CRT terminals that require high-speed
data transfer.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
::: f;: --- ----- --C-~-~-RRE-~'---!-~~~--------
-
DREQ o
DACKo
DREQ,
DMA
COUNT
REGISTER!
COUNTER
DACK,
COUNT
REGISTER!
COUNTER
DREQ,
DACK,
DREQ 3
DATA
15 DACK 3
BUS
ClK
BUFFER
A,
HlDA
As
As
A4
A3
A,
CURRENT
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
BUS
REGISTER!
COUNTER
BUFFER
BASE
ADDRESS
AEN
BUS
REGISTER
ADSTB
MEMW
MEMR
A,
lOW
Ao
lOR
- - - - - - -__ - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - - l
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
5-35
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,·4,·S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
FUNCTION
received from the CPU, the DMA acknowledge signal is
sent to DMA requesting channel with the highest priority
and begins DMA operation.
During DMA operation, the contents of the low-byte of the
transfer memory address are output through A7 - Aa. Every
time a change in the high-order 8-bit values is necessitated
immediately after DMA operation has begun or due to borrowing or decrement during DMA operation, the change is
output via pins DB7 - DBa to the externally mounted latch
circuit. After the address is transmitted, read and write signals are sent to the memories and peripherals activating
DMA transfer.
M5M82C37AFP is a programmable DMA controller LSI
used in microprocessor systems.
This device basically consists of a DMA request control
block for acknowledging DMA requests, a CPU interface
for exchanging data and commands with the CPU, a timing
control circuit for controlling each of the various types of
timing, and a register for holding and counting DMA
addresses and number of transfer words.
After setting the transfer mode, starting address, and byte
number in each of the registers and when a DMA request
is made to an unmasked channel, the M5M82C37AFP requires use of the bus to the CPU. When the HLDA signal is
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Top,
Operating free-air temperature range
Tsta
Storage temperature
With respect to vss
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltagelGND)
Symbol
Unit
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-20-75
°e
-65-150
°e
(Ta=-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Min
4,5
I
I
Typ
I
ELECTRICAL CHARCTERISTICS
Limits
-0.3-7
Conditions
Parameter
Vee
5
0
I
I
Max
5.5
I
Unit
V
V
(T a =-20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Test conditions
Limits
Min
V ,H
Hign-Ievel input voltage
2.0
V ,L
LOW-level input voltage
-0.3
V OH
High·level output voltage
Typ
Max
Vcc +O.3
0.8
Unit
V
V
IOH=-200,uA
2.4
V
IOH=-100,uA(HRQ only)
3.2
V
10L=2. OmA( data bus)
VOL
LOW-level output voltage
0.45
V
I,
Input current
V,=O-VCC
-10
+10
/LA
loz
Off-state output current
V,=O-VCC
-10
+10
/LA
lee
Supply current
V,H=VCC, Vll =Vss, fCLK=l/tc( ¢)min.
15
rnA
5-36
10L=3. 2mA( other outputs)
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,.4,·S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(i) SLAVE MODE
(T a=-20-75'C , Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Alternate
Symbol
Parameter
tSU(CS-R)
Address setup time before read
M5M82C37AFP
symbol
Min
TAR
50
M5M82C37 AFP-4
Max
Max
Min
M5M82C37 AFP-5
Min
Unit
Max
50(0)
50
ns
tSUCA-R)
tsu(CS-w)
cs setup time before write
Tcw
200
tSU(A-W)
Address setup time before write
TAW
200
tsu(OQ-w)
Data setup time before write
Tow
200
Address hold time after read
TRA
0
0
thcw-cs)
CS hold time after write
Twc
20
20
20 (0)
th(W-A)
Address hold after write
TWA
20
20
20(0)
theW-DQ)
Data hold after write
Two
30
30
tWCR)
Read pulse width
TRW
300
250
tw(w)
Write pulse width
Twws
200
200
160
tWCRESET)
Reset pulse width
T RSTW
300
300
300
tSU(VCC-RESET)
Vee setup time before to reset
T RSTD
500
500
tSU(RESET-R)
Reset setup time before read
2tc (.)
tSU(RESET-W)
Reset setup time before Write
2tc (. )
th(R-cs)
th(R-A)
(ii)
T RSTS
I
~H------ r--- 150
150
---
r---
1
150
ns _..ns
--1----.-ns - -
100
-
-~-~----
ns
----ns
30 (0)
200
--
._-
"---
ns
0
.. -
ns- - -_._
ns
- - ns
--~---
ns
500
ns
2tc (. )
ns
III
DMA MODE
Symbol
Parameter
Alternate
symbol
Limits
M5M82C37 AFP
Min
Max
M5M82C37AFP-4
Min
Max
M5M82C37AFP-5
Min
Unit
Max
tW (' )
Clock high-level pulse width
TCH
120
100
80
ns
t w (. )
Clock low-level pulse width
TCL
150
110
68
ns
tce. )
Clock period
Tcy
320
250
200
ns
tSU(EOP- )
tsu< READY- '"
)
DREQ setup time before clock
Tos
0
0
0
ns
READY setup time before clock
T Rs
100
60
60
ns
1> -READY)
READY hold time before clock
TRH
20
20
20
ns
tSU(HLDA- "')
HLDA setup time before clock
T Hs
100
75
75
ns
tSU(DQ-MEMR)
Data setup time before MEMR
TlDs
250
190
170
ns
th(MEMR_DQ)
Data hold time after MEMR
TIDH
0
a
0
ns
the
Note
-
A.C Testing waveform
Input pulse level
Input pulse rise time
Input pulse fall time
Reference level input
Output
o. 45-2. 4V
10ns
10ns
V,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V
VoH =2V, VOL =0. 8V
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
5-37
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTIC
(i) SLAVE MODE
(T a=-20-75"C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted)
Parameter
Symbol
Alternate
symbol
tPZVCR-OQ)
Data enable time after read
T ROE
tpvzeR-DQ)
Data disable time after read
TRDF
(ii)
Limits
M5M 82C37 AFP
Min
0
I
I
I
Max
M5M82C37AFP-4
Max
Min
200
100
M5M82C37AFP-5
Unit
I
I
I
140
ns
70
ns
Min
200
100
0
0
Max
DMA MODE
Symbol
Parameter
Alternate
symbol
Limits
M5M82C37AFP
Min
Max
M5M82C37AFP-4
Min
Max
M5M82C37AFP-5
Min
Unit
Max
j6 '-AEN)
Propagation time from clock to AEN
TAEL
300
225
200
ns
tpHL< > -AEN)
Propagation time from clock to AEN
TAET
200
150
130
ns
t pzv ( '" -A)
Propagation time from clock to address active
TFAAB
250
190
170
ns
t pHL (
Propagation time from clock to address stable
TASM
250
190
170
ns
Propagation time from clock to address floating
TAFAB
150
120
90
ns
'" -DO")
Propagation time from clock to data bus
TFADB
300
225
200
ns
~YZ(."'-DQ)
Propagation time from clock to data bus
TAFDB
250
190
170
ns
tpLH ( ¢ .ADSTB)
Propagation time from clock to ADSTB
TSTL
200
150
130
ns
tpHLt '" -ADSTB)
Propagation time from clock to ADSTB
TSTT
140
110
90
ns
tSU(OB-ADSTB)
Data output setup time before ADSTB
TASS
100
100
100
th(ADSTB-OQ)
Data output hold time before ADSTB
TAHS
50
40
30
Propagation time from clock to read or write active
T FAC
200
150
150
ns
Propagation time from clock to read or write
t pLH (
'" -A)
t pvz ( '"
t pZV (
t pzv( rp
t pZV (
t pHL (
-A)
-R)
ns
ns
'" -w)
1> -R)
t pHL( 1>-w)
TOCL
270
200
190
ns
t pLH (
f.-A}
Propagation time from clock to read
TOCTA
270
210
190
ns
t pLH (
F·W)
Propagation time from clock to write
TOCTW
200
150
130
ns
Propagation time from clock to read or write floating
T AFC
150
120
120
ns
t pvz ( '"
-R)
tpvze!>_w)
thIR-A)
Address output hold time after read
TAHR
tell)-100
tel I )-100
t ell)-100
ns
thIW-A)
Address output hold time after write
TAHW
tel II-50
tell )-50
tell )-50
ns
tsu( OQ-MEMWl
Data output setup time before MEMW
T oDv
200
125
125
ns
th(MEMW-OQ)
Data output hold time after MEMW
TacH
20
20
10
ns
t pLH (
Propagation time from clock to DACK
TAK
250
220
170
ns
tpHLC '" -EOP)
Propagation time from clock to EOP
TAK
250
190
170
ns
t pLH (
>
Propagation time from clcak to EOP
TAK
250
190
170
ns
t pLH (
'" -HRC)
160
120
120
t pHL{
'" -HRC)
250
190
120
5-38
'" -DACK)
-EOP)
Propagation time from clock to HRQ
TOQ
I"H"2.0V
I "H"3,3V
.• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
ns
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
TIMING DIAGRAMS
Reset timing
tSU(VCC-RESET)
Vee
RESET
CLK
tSU(RESET-R)
II
lOR
tSU(RESET-wl
lOW
Slave mode timing (READ)
CS. A3 -Ao
~
CS, ADDRESS VALID
tSU(CS-R)
th{R-CS}
tSU(A_R)
th(R_A)
I
lOR
K
-
tW(Rl
lr-
-,
tPVZ(A_DQ}
tPZV(A-OQ)
DB,-CBo
I---DATA VALID
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
\
/
5-39
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
Slave mode timing (WRITE)
tSu-DACK}
-I,
~
f'
DACK
tPLH(¢-AEN)
tPHL(¢-AEN)
-+AEN
1
]
,
tPHL(¢_A)
tPZV(o;I>_A)
~
A 7 ........ A o
f ::T'
II
tPVZ(¢_A)
~/
A7- AO
tPlH(¢.-ADSTB)
ADSTB
- t-
th(ADSTB_DB)
tsu( DB-ADSTS)
i....-k.
DB 7 -DB o
~~
t pzv ( ¢-DO}
tpvZ(¢-OQ)
,-
Ipzvl
o'R) "">--
~
Lzt)
tPLH(¢_Rl
--
f-t-
,...:
~ .........
MEMR/IOR
Ipzv~ l--
MEMW/IOW
1
.
\L
tPVZ(O/>_R)
Ir-
J
_~'#:W)
tPHL(f-wl
.
-t-t-
ff)
t pLH ( ¢-A)
___ j L - -
1
tpvz(¢-wl
~ft:-W)
(---sign ifies expansion write)
rl
u-~
~--~
I
t
tPHjU ¢-EOP}
tPLH(-EOP)
I
'U
EOP
(Inlerna I)
tSU(EOP-¢)
EOP
(Exlerna I)
j
\ \'
tW(EOPl
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
5-41
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
READY input timing
ClK
READY
MEMR/IOR
MEMW/IOW
}-----r--------J
tPHL(>-W)
I
( - - - signifies expansion write)
s,
S4
s,
ClK
READY
MEMR/IOR
MEMW/IOW
5-42
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
S4
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82C37AFP,-4,-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE DMA CONTROLLER
Inter-memory transmission
ru '\J\jru[\JUrururvL
5"
eLK
5"
5"
5'3
J\j
,
A7-AO
--
~
th(ADSTB-OQl
tpHu ..... ADSTB)
rh
l - I-
J"
tpVZ(~DQ)
tPZV(¢.-OQ)
tSU(OQ-MEMA)
tSU(OQ-MEMW)
th(MEMR-OQl
A,s-A. \
DB7-DBo
J
III
\\\
Data
input
A1S --As
II
outpuy
1-;--'
t(MEMW_OQl
I
-f--
-r-t--
t--
tPHU';"A)
,
MEMR
I
v-----!---.J
Data 1\
tPLH(';"R)
tPZV(-A)
J
A7- AO
AD5TB
5 23
tPHU';"A}
tpZV(~_A)
tpLH ( ..... ADSTS)
522
5"
\--
tPVZ (t,6-R)
1/
-
tpzv(fl.-wl
tPHL(¢-wl
l- t--
tPlH(¢-W)
tpvz(¢-w)
, In
MEMW
tpHU¢.-EOP)
tpLH(¢-EOP)
I
,
EOP
t-
t..-.l
(Interna il
tSU (EOP-4»
EOP
(Extern al)
\\\\ J///
tW(EOP)
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
I
5-43
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C51 AP is a universal synchronous/asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data
communications use. It is produced using the silicon-gate
CMOS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit
microprocessors.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
RECEIVERi~~~~
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Synchronous and asynchronous operation
Synchronous:
5-8-bit characters
Internal or external synchronization
Automatic SYNC character insertion
Asynchronous system:
5-8-bit characters
Clock rate- 1 , 16 or 64 times the baud rate
1 , 1y" or 2 stop bits
False-start-bit detection
Automatic break-state detection
Baud rate: DC-64K-baud
Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver
Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing
•
•
•
APPLICATIONS
•
•
Modem control of data communications using microcomputers
Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal eqUipment
FUNCTION
The M5M82C51 AP is used in the peripheral circuits of a
CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems
BLOCK DIAGRAM
01- I
03- 2
RxD -
(OV)V ss
FEATURES
•
•
•
r
l
2 -
0 1}
3
26
Vcc (5V)
4
25 - Rx C
2 - 00
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATE BUS
~tg~~~~PUT
DATA-TERMINAL
READY OUTPUT
REQUEST-TOSEND OUTPUT
21 -
DSR
m~ys:lJpuT
RESET RESET INPUT
2 -
ClK
CHIP-S~~~8i
18 -
TxEMPTY
~~~~~5i-~~i-
%~~~~~tPNA:CT
17 -
CTS
~~~~~J~UT
T x RDY
~~~~~~5i-~~T
2 -
T~t~~~liJ~ST
WRITE-DATA
CONTROL INPUT
CONT~Et~i~~~~
READ~Eg5~~ST RxRDY -
16 14 _ _ _ _r15 -
~
CLOCK INPUT
TRANSMITTERDATA OUTPUT
~6NDET/ g~~KD6~~~6~
Outline 28P4
including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5M82C51 AP receives parallel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format,
and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent
in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it
into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of
parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial
data for the CPU from external devices, the M5M82C51AP
informs the CPU using the TxRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition,
the CPU can read the M5M82C51 AP status at any time. The
M5M82C51 AP can detect the data received for errors and
inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information. Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors.
------------l
RESET INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
CONTROL/DATA-CONTROL
INPUT
READ-DATA CONTROL INPUT
WRITE-DATA CONTROL INPUT
TRANSMITIER-DATA OUTPUT
CHIP-SELECT INPUT
TRANSMITIER·READY OUTPUT
TRANSMITIER·EMPTY OUTPUT
TRANSMITIER·CLOCK INPUT
DATA-SET READY INPUT
DATA· TERMINAL READY OUTPUT
CLEAR-TO-SEND INPUT
REQUEST -TO-SEND OUTPUT
RECEIVER-READY OUTPUT
25 Rxe
RECEIVER-CLOCK INPUT
16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
RECEIVER-DATA INPUT
5-44
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
OPERATION
Table
The M5M82C51 AP interfaces with the system bus as shown
in Fig.l, positioned between the CPU and the modem or terminal equipment, and offers all the functions required for
data communication.
1
M5MB2C51AP Access Methods
c/o
RO
WR
CS
Function
L
L
H
L
Data bus - Data in USART
L
H
L
L
USART - Data bus
H
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
Control - Data bus
X
H
H
L
3-State - Data bus
X
X
X
H
3-State -
_.-.-
Data bus - Staus
----.----------~
16
ADDRESS BUS
Ao
4
IIOR IIOW RESET
8
~ 2(TTl
ReadlWrite Control Logic
DATA BUS
This logic consists of a control word register and command
word register. It receives signals from the CPU control bus
and generates internal-control signals for the elements.
8
Modem Control Circuit
C/D CS Do-D7 RD INR RESET ClK
M5MB2C51AP
Fig.
Data bus
CONTROL BUS
M5MB2C51AP interface to 80BOA standard sys-
tem bus
This is a general-purpose control-signal circuit designed to
simplify the interface to the modem. Four types of control
signal are available: output signals DTR and RTS are controlled by command instructions, input signal DSR is given to
the CPU as status information and input signal CTS controls
direct transmission.
Data-Bus Buffer
When using the M5M82C51 AP, it is necessary to program, as
the initial setting, assignments for synchronous/asynchronous
mode selection, baud rate, character length, parity check,
and even/odd parity selection in accordance with the communication system used. Once programming is completed,
functions appropriate to the communication system can be
carried out continuously.
When initial setting of the USART is completed, data
communication becomes possible. Though the receiver is
always in the enable state, the transmitter is placed in the
transmitter-enable state (TxEN) by a command instruction,
and the application of a low-level signal to the CTS pin
prompts data-transfer start-up. Until this condition is satisfied, transmission is not executed. On receiving data, the receiver informs the CPU that reading for the receiver data in
the USART by the CPU has become possible (the RxRDY
terminal has turned to '1 '). Since data reception and the entry of the CPU into the data-readable state are output as status information, the CPU can assess USART status without
accessing the RxRDY terminal.
During receiving operation, the USART checks errors and
gives out status information. There are three types of errors:
parity, overrun, and frame. Even though an error occurs, the
USART continues its operations,. and the error state is retained until error reset (ER) is effected by a command instruction. The M5M82C51 AP access methods are listed in
Table 1.
This is an 8-bit 3-state bidirectional bus through which control words, command words, status information, and transfer
data are transferred. Fig. 2 shows the structure of the databus buffer.
%2ID7
,
Do
Do
.1
STATUS BUFFER
L
H
RECEIVE-DATA
.BUFFER
r
CONTROL BUFFER
~
H
Y
Fig.
2
TRANSMIT-DATA
BUFFER
~
TO INT ERNAl
D ATA BUS
f--
Data-bus-buffer structure
Transmit Buffer
This buffer converts parallel-format data given to the databus buffer in to serial data with addition of a start bit, stop
bits and a parity bit, and sends out the converted data
through the T xD pin based on the control signal.
Transmit-Control Circuit
This circuit carries out all the controls required for serial
data transmission. It controls transmitter data and outputs the
signals required by external devices in accordance with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
5-45
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSIAP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Receive Control Circuit
This circuit offers all the controls required for normal reception of the input serial data. It controls receiver data and outputs signals for the external devices in accordace with the
instructions of the read/write control logic.
Receive Buffer
This buffer converts serial data given via the RxD pin into a
parallel format, checks the bits and characters in accordance with the communication format designated by mode
setting, and transfers the assembled characters to the CPU
via the data-bus buffer.
Receiver-Data Input (RxD)
Serial characters sent from another device are input to this
pin and converted to a parallel-character format to serve as
data for the CPU. Unless the '1' state is detected after a
chip-master reset procedure (this resetting is carried out to
prevent spurious operation such as that due to faulty connection of the RxD to the line in a break state), the serial
characters are not received. This applies to only the asynchronous mode. When the RxD line enters the low state instantaneously because of noise, etc, the mis-start prevention
function starts working. That is, the start bit is detected by its
falling edge but in order to make sure that it is the correct
start bit, the RxD line is strobed at the middle of the start bit
to reconfirm the low state. If it is found to be high a faultystart judgment is made.
Transmitter-Clock Input (rxC)
This clock controls the baud rate for character transmission
from the TxD pin. Serial data is shifted by the falling edge of
the TxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the TxC frequency
is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode,
the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64 times the baud rate
by the mode setting.
Example When the baud rate is 110 bauds:
TxC=110Hz(1X)
TxC=l. 76kHz(16X)
T xC=7. 04kHz(64X)
Write-Data Control Input (WR)
Data and control words output from the CPU by the lowlevel
input are written in the M5M82C51 AP. This terminal is usually
used in a form connected with the control bus I/OW of the
CPU.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
This is a device-select signal that enables the USART by a
low-level input. Usually, it is connected to the address bus
directly or via the decoder. When this signal is in the high
state, the M5M82C51 AP is disabled.
Control/Data Control Input (C/O)
This signal shows whether the information on the USART
data bus is in thEt form of data characters or control words,
or in the form of status information, in accordance with the
RD and WR inputs while the CPU is accessing the
M5M82C51 AP. The high level identifies control words or status information, and the low level, data characters.
5-46
Read-Data Control Input (RD)
Receiver data and status information are output from the
CPU by a low-level input for the CPU data bus.
Receiver-Ready Output (RxRDY)
This signal indicates that the received characters have entered the receiver buffer, and further, the receiver-data buffer in the data-bus buffer shown in Fig.2. It is possible to
confirm the RxRDY status by using this signal as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing the CPU to read the
D, bit of the status information by polling. The RxRDY is
automatically reset when a character is read by the CPU.
Even in the break state in which the RxD line is held at low,
the RxRDY remains active. It can be 'masked by making the
RxE( D2 ) of the command instruction O.
Transmitter-Ready (TxRDY)
This signal shows that the data is ready for transmission. It is
possible to confirm the status of serial-data transmission by
using it as an interruption signal for the CPU or by allowing
the CPU to read the Do bit of the status information by polling. Since the TxRDY signal shows that the data buffer is
empty, it is automatically reset when a transmission character is loaded by the CPU. The TxRDY bit of the status information means that the transmit-data buffer shown in Fig. 2
has become empty, while the TxRDY pin enters the highlevel state only when the transmit-data buffer is empty, TxEN
equals '1', and a lowlevel input has been applied to the CTS
pin.
Status (Do): When transmit-data buffer (TDB) is empty, it
becomes '1 '.
TxRDY terminal: When (TDB is emptY)'(T xEN=l)'(CTS
=0)=1 or resetting, it becomes active.
Sync Detect/Break Detect Output-Input
(SYNDET/BD)
In the synchronous mode this pin is used for input and output
operations. When it is specified for the internal synchronous
mode by mode setting, this pin works as an output terminal.
It enters the high state when a SYNC character is received
through the RxD pin. If the M5M82C51 AP has been programmed for double SYNC characters (bi-sync), a high is entered in the middle of the last bit of the second SYNC character. This signal is automatically reset by reading the status
information.
On designation of the M5M82C51 AP to the external synchronous mode, this pin begins to serve for input operations.
Applying a high signal to this pin prompts the M5M82C51 AP
to begin assembling data characters at the next rising edge
of the RxC. For the width of a high-level signal to be input, a
minimum RxC period is required.
Designation of the asynchronous mode causes this pin to
function as a BD (output) pin. When the start, data, and parity bits and stop bits are all in the low state for two characters period, a high is entered. The BD (break detect) signal
can also be read as the D6 bit of the status information. This
signal is reset by resetting the chip master or by the RxD
line's recovering the high state.
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Clear-To-Send Input (CTS)
When the T xEN bit (Do) of the command instruction has
been set to '1' and the CTS input is low serial data is sent
out from the T xD pin. Usually this is used as a clear-to-send
signal for the modem.
Note: CTS indicates the modem status as follows:
ON means data transmission is possible;
OFF means data transmission is impossible.
Transmitter-Empty Output (TxEMPTY)
When no transmisison characters are left in the transmit buffer, this pin enters the high state. In the asynchronous mode,
the following transmission character is shifted to the transmit
buffer when it is loaded from the CPU. Thus, it is automatically reset. In the synchronous mode, a SYNC character is
loaded automatically on the transmit buffer when no transferdata characters are left. In this case, however, the TxEMPTY
does not enter the low state when a SYNC character has
been sent out, since T xEMPTY = H denotes the state in
which there is no transfer character and one or two SYNC
characters are being transferred or the state in which a
SYNC character is being transferred as a filler. T xEMPTY is
unrelated to the T xEN bit of the command instruction.
Transmission-Data Output (TxD)
Parallel-format transmission characters loaded on the
M5M82C5l AP by the CPU are assembled into the format designated by the mode instruction and sent in serial-data form
via the T xD pin. Data is output, however, only in cases
where the Do bit (TxEN) of the command instruction is '1'
and the CTS terminal is in the low state. Once reset, this pin
is kept at the mark status (high level) until the first character is sent.
ON means the modem can transmit and receive;
OFF means it cannot.
Request-To-Send Output (RTS)
This is a general-purpose output signal but is used as a request-to-send signal for the modem. The RTS terminal is
controlled by the D5 bit of the command instruction. When D5
is equal to '1', RTS= l, and when D5 is 0, RTS= H.
Command register D5=l~RTS=l
Command register D5=0~RTS=H
Note: RTS controls the modem transmission carrier as follows:
ON means carrier dispatch;
OFF means carrier stop.
Data-Terminal Ready Output (DTR)
This is a general-purpose output signal, but is usually used
as a data-terminal ready or rate-select signal to the modem.
The DTR pin is controlled by the D, bit of the command instruction; if D,=l, DTR=l, and if D,=O, DTR=H.
D, of the command register=l~DTR=l
D, of the command register=O~DTR=H
Receiver-Clock Input
(R;;-C)
This clock signal controls the baud rate for the sending in of
characters via the RxD pin. The data is shifted in by the rising edge of the RxC signal. In the synchronous mode, the
RxC frequency is equal to the actual baud rate. In the asynchronous mode, the frequency is specified as 1, 16, or 64
times the baud rate by mode setting. This relationship is parallel to that of T xC, and in usual communication-line systems the transmission and reception baud rates are equal.
The TxC and RxC terminals are, therefore, used connected
to the same baud-rate generator.
Clock Input (ClK)
This system-clock input is required for internal-timing generation and is usually connected to the clock-output (ClK)
pin of the 8085A. Although there is no direct relation with the
data-transfer baud rate, the clock-input (ClK) frequency is
more than 30 times the T xC or RxC input frequency in the
case of the synchronous system and more than 4.5 times in
the case of the asynchronous system.
Reset Input (RESET)
Once the USART is shifted to the idle mode by a high-level
input, this state continues until a new control word is set.
Since this is a master reset, it is always necessary to load a
control word following the reset process. The reset input requires a minimum 6-clock pulse width.
Data-Set Ready Input (DSR)
This is a general-purpose input Signal, but is usually used as
a data-set ready signal to test modem status. Its status can
be known from the status reading process. The D7 bit of the
status information equals '1' when the DSR pin is in the low
state, and '0' when in the high state.
DSR=l ~D7 bit of status information=l
DSR=H~D7 bit of status information=O
Note: DSR indicates modem status as follows:
PROGRAMMING
It is necessary for the M5M82C5l AP to have the control word
loaded by the CPU prior to data transfer. This must always
be done following any resetting operation (by external RESET pin or command instruction IR). There are two types of
control words: mode instructions specifying general operations required for communications and command instructions
to control the M5M82C5l AP actual operations.
Following the resetting operation, a mode instruction
must be set first. This instruction sets the synchronous or
asynchronous system to be used. In the sysnchronous system, a SYNC character is loaded from the CPU. In the case
of the bi-sync system, however, a second SYNC character
must be loaded in succession.
loading a command instruction makes data transfer
possible. This operation after resetting must be carried out
for initializing the M5M82C5l AP. The USART command instruction contains an internal-reset IR instruction (Dsbit) that
makes it possible to return the M5M82C5l AP to its reset
state. The initialization flowchart is shown in Fig. 3 and the
mode-instruction and command-instruction formats are
shown in Figs. 4 and 5.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
5-47
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSIAP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
SINGLE CHARACTER
SYNC
EXTERNAL SYNC DETECT
EVEN PARITY
PARITY ENABLE
SYNCHRONOUS~~~~~-'~~~~~~---r--~------
MODEL-__L-~~~__~~~__-L__-L~~
EVEN PARITY
PARITY ENABLE
CHARACTER LENGTH
o0
oI
I I
0 I
5 6 7 8
Fig.
3
Initialization flow chart
ASYNCHRONOUS
MODE~~~~~~~~~L-~~~-=~
0,
Fig.
4
06
05
0,
03
Mode-instruction format
02
0,
Do
( C/O=' )
WR =0
I
I ENTER HUNT MODE
ENTER HUNT MODE
II-ENABLE SEARCH FOR
SYNC CHARACTERS
INTERNAL RESET
rlNTERNAL RESET
-II-TO INITIALIZATION
1
I
I
I
I TRANSMISSION CARRIER
. I CONTROL
I-RTS-O
REQUEST TO SEND
I ERROR RESET
r',~CLEAR ALL ERROR FLAGS
PE OE. FE)
ERROR RESET
1
SEND BREAK
I SEND BREAK CHARACTER
II-T,D=LOW
I
I
RECEIVER ENABLE
l'=ENABLE
O=DISABLE
Rx ENABLE
DATA
TERMINAL
READY -I DATA-TERMINAL READY
ll-DTR=o
l A M TRANSMISSION ENABLE
T ENABLE I = ENABLE
x
0= DISABLE
I EH I
0,
Fig.
5-48
5
IR I RTSI ER ISBRKI RxE IOTA ITxENI
06
05
0,
03
0,
0,
Command-instruction format
• .MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
Do
-
-
(C/O=I. WR=O)
I
1
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSIAP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Asynchronous Transmission Mode
When data characters are loaded on the M5M82C51 AP after
initial setting, the USART automatically adds a start bit (low)
, an odd or even parity bit specified by the mode instruction
during initialization, and a specified numbe( of stop bits
(high). After that, the assembled data characters are transferred as serial data via the T xD pin if, transfer is enabled
(T xEN = 1· CTS = U, In this case, the transfer data (baud
rate) is shifted by the mode instruction at a rate of 1X, 1/16X,
or 1/64X the T xC period.
If the data characters are not loaded on the
M5M82C51 AP, the T xD pin enters a mark state (high). When
SBRK is programmed by the command instruction, break
characters (low) are output continuously through the T xD
pin.
Asynchronous Reception Mode
The RxD line usually starts operations in a mark state (high),
triggered by the falling edge of a low-level pulse when it
comes to this line. This signal is again strobed at the middle
of the bit to confirm that it is a perfect start bit. The detection of a second low indicates the validity of the start bit
(restrobing is carried out only in the case of 16X and 64X) ,
After that, the bit counter inside the M5M82C51 AP starts
operating; each bit of the serial information on the RxD line
is shifted in by the rising edge of RxC, and the data bit, parity bit (when necessary), and stop bit are sampled at the
middle position.
The occurrence of a parity error causes the setting of a
parity-error flag. If the stop bit is in the low state, a frame
error flag is set. Attention should be paid to the fact that the
receiver requires only one stop bit even though the program
has designated 1%or 2 stop bits.
Reception up to the stop bit means reception of a complete character. This character is then transferred to the receiver-data buffer shown in Fig.2, and the RxRDY becomes
active. In cases where this character is not read by the CPU
and where the next character is transferred to the receiverdata buffer, the preceding character is destroyed and an
overrun-error flag is set.
These error flags can be read as the M5M82C51 AP status
information. The occurrence of an error does not stop
USART operations. The error flags are cleared by the ER( D4
bit) of the command instruction.
The asynchronous-system transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 6 and 7,
Synchronous Transmission Mode
In this mode the T xD pin remains in the high state until initial
setting by the CPU is completed. After initialization, the state
of CTS=L and TxEN =1 enables serial transmission of characters through the T xD pin. Then, data characters are sent
out and shifted by the falling edge of the T xC signal. The
transmission rate equals the T xC rate.
Thus, once data-character transfer starts, it must continue
through the T xD pin at the same rate as that of TxC. Unless
data characters are provided from the CPU before the transmitter buffer becomes empty, one or two SYNC characters
are automatically output from the TxD pin. In this case, it
should be noted that the T xEMPTY pin enters the high state
when there are no data characters left in the M5M82C51 AP
to be transferred, and that the low state is not entered until
the USART is provided with the next data character from the
CPU. Care should also be taken over the fact that merely
setting a command instruction does not effect SYNCcharacter insertion, because the SYNC character insertion is
enabled after sending out the first data character.
In this mode, too, break characters are sent out in succession from the T xD pin when SBRK is deSignated (D3= 1 )
by a command instruction.
CPU-USART (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
DATA
CH~RACTER
I
ASSEMBLED
RECEIPTION FORMAT
DATA BITS
(5-8)
TRANSMITTER DATA OUTPUT (T,D)
STD~
(I. 1 5.2)
USART-CPU (5-8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
DATA
Note
Fig. 6 Asynchronous transmission format I
(transmission)
PARIT
BIT
Fig.
7
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
CHARA~TER
(5-8)
I
When the data character is 5. 6, or 7 bits/character
length. the unused bits (for USART - CPU) are set to
zero.
Asynchronous transmission format II (reception)
5-49
II
MITsUBlsHI Lsis
MSM82CSIAP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Synchronous Reception Mode
Character synchronization in this mode is carried out internally or externally by initial-setting designation.
Programming in the internal synchronous mode requires
that an EH instruction (D 7 = 1, enter hunt mode) is included
in the first command instruction. Data on the RxD pin is sampled by the rising RxC signal, and the receiver-buffer contents are compared with the SYNC character each time a bit
is input. Comparison continues until an agreement is
reached. When the M5M82C51 AP has been programmed in
the bi-sync mode, data received in further succession is
compared. The detection of two SYNC characters in succession makes the USART end the hunt mode, setting the SYNDET pin to the high state. This reset operation is prompted
by the reading of the status information. When the parity has
been programmed, SYNDET is not set in the middle of the
last data bit but in the middle of the parity bit.
In the external synchronous mode, the M5M82C51 AP gets
out of the hunt mode when a high synchronization signal is
given to the SYNDET pin. The high signal requires a minimum duration of one RxC cycle. In the asynchronous mode,
however, the EH signal does not affect the operation at all.
Parity and overrun errors are checked in the same way
as in the asynchronous system. During hunt-mode operations
the parity bit is not checked, but parity checking is carried
out even when the receiver is disabled.
The CPU can command the receiver to enter the hunt
mode, if synchronization is lost. This prevents the SYNC
character from erroneously becoming equal to the received
data when all the data in the receiver buffer is set to '1'
Attention should be paid to the fact that the SYNDET F/F is
reset each time status information is read irrespective of the
synchronous mode's being internal or external. This, howev-
er, does not return the M5M82C51 AP to the hunt mode. Synchronism .detection is carried out even though it is not the
hunt mode. The synchronous transfer formats are shown in
Figs. 8 and 9.
Command Instruction
This instruction defines actual operations in the communication mode designated by mode setting. Command instructions include transmitter/receiver enable error-reset, internal-reset, modem-control, enter-hunt and break transmission
instructions.
The mode is set following the reset operation. A SYNC
character is set as required, and the writing of high-level
signals on the control/data pin (C/D) that follows it is regarded as a command instruction. When the mode is set all
over again from the beginning, the M5M82C51 AP can be reset by using inputting via the reset terminal or by internal resetting based on the command instruction.
Note 1: The command error reset (ER), internal reset (IR)
and enter-hunt-mode (EH) operations are only
effective when the command instruction is loaded,
so that these bits need not be returned to '0'.
2: When a break character is sent out by a command,
the T xD enters the low state immediately irrespective of whether or not the USART has sent out data.
3: Operations of the USART's receiver section which is
always in the enable state cannot be inhibited. The
command instruction RxE = 0 does not mean that
data reception via the RxD pin is inhibited; it means
that the RxRDY is masked and error flags are inhibited.
CPU-USART (5~8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
DATA CH:fRACTER
I
ASSEMBLED TxD OUTPUT
USART-CPU (5~8 BITS/CHARACTER)
I
Fig. 8 Synchronous transmission format I
(transmission)
Note
Fig.
5-50
9
• MITsUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
DATA
~;ARACTER I
When the data character is 5, 6, or 7 bits/character
length, the unused bits (for USART- CPU) are set to
zero.
Synchronous transmission format II (reception)
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Status Information
FE:
The CPU can always read USART status by setting the C/O
to '1' and RD to '0'.
The status information format is shown in Fig. 10. In this
format RxRDY, TxEMPTY and SYNDET have the same definitions as those of the pins. This means that these three
pieces of status information become '1' when each pin is in
the high state. The other status information is defined as follows:
DSR:
When the DSR pin is in the low state, status information DSR becomes '1'.
The occurrence of a frame error in the receiver
section makes the status information FE '1 '.
The occurrence of an overrun error in the receiver
section makes the status information OE '1 '.
The occurrence of a parity error in the receiver
section makes this status information PE '1 '.
This information becomes '1' when the transmit
data buffer is empty. Be careful because this has a
different meaning from the TxRDY pin that enters
the high state only when the transmitter buffer is
empty, when the CTS pin is in the low state, and
when TxEN is '1 '.
OE:
PE:
T xRDY:
11
I
FOR DSR
LOW
LEVEL 0 FOR DSR
HIGH
LEVEL
SAME DEFINITION AS SYNDET/BD PIN
I FE IS SET WHEN A VALID STOP BIT IS NDT DETECTED AT THE END OF EVERY CHAR
I ACTER (ASYNC ONLY) IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION
I
I
FE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5M82C51AP
OE IS SET WHEN THE CPU DOES NOT READ A CHARACTER BEFORE THE NEXT ONE
BECOMES AVAILABLE IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE COMMAND INSTRUCTION
OE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE M5M82C51AP
PE IS SET WHEN A PARITY ERROR IS DETECTED IT IS RESET BY THE ER BIT OF THE
COMMAND INSTRUCTION PE DOES NOT INHIBIT OPERATION OF THE MSM82C51AP
.I
I
DSR
I 8~~ I
D7
Fig.
10
D6
FE
D5
I
OE
D,
I
PE
I
T xE
D3
D2
I
I I
T~--j
:~Y ~~Y
D,
SAME DEFINITION AS TxEMPTY PIN
I
SAME DEFINITION AS RxRDY PIN
I
1 FOR TRANSMIT DATA BUFFER IS EMPTY
I
I
Do
Status information (C/D=l, RD=O)
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Fig. 11 shows an application example for the M5M82C51AP
in the asynchronous mode. When the port addresses of the
M5M82C51 AP are assumed to be 00 # and 01 # in this figure, initial setting in the asynchronous mode is carried out
in the following manner:
MYI
A,86#
Mode setting
OUT
01 #
MYI
A,27#
Command instruction
OUT
01 #
In this case, the following are set by mode setting:
Asynchronous mode
6 bits/character
Parity enable (even)
1'/2stoP bits
Baud rate: 16X
Command instructions set the following
RTS=l~RTS pin=L
RxE=l
DTR=l~DTR pin=L
TxEN =l
When the initial setting is complete, transfer operations are
allowed. The RTS pin is initially set to the low-level by setting RTS to '1', and this serves as a CTS input with TxEN
being equal to '1 '. For this reason the same definition applies
to the status and pin of TxRDY, and '1' is assigned when the
transmit-data buffer is empty. Actual transfer of data is carried out in the following way:
IN
01 #
Status read
The IN instruction prompts the CPU to read the USART's
status. The result is; if the TxRDY equals '1' transmitter data
is sent from the CPU and written on the M5M82C51 AP.
Transmitter data is written in the M5M82C51 AP in the following manner:
MYI
A,20#
2D 16 is an example of transmitter data.
USART~(A)
OUT
00#
Receiver data is read in the following manner:
IN
00#
(A)~USART
In the above example, the status information is read and
as a result, the transmitter data is written and read. Interruption processing by using the TxRDY and RxRDY pins is also
possible.
Fig. 12 shows the status of the TxD pin when data written
in the USART is transferred from the CPU. When the data
shown in Fig.12 enters the RxD pin, data sent from the
M5M82C51 AP to the CPU becomes 2D,6 and bits D6 and D7
are treated as '0'.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-51
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
r~rlDrti~
j
RxC
C
TO EXTERNAL CIRCUIT {
x,
TxC
L
BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
(DIVIDER)
RTS
RD
RD
CTS
WR
WR
p-- EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
CPU
8085A
p----
DSR
101M
ADDRESS
DECODER
c/B I--TO TRANSMISSION
FROM
RESET IN
RESET OUT
RESET
USART
M5M82C51AP
DTR
CS
x,
ClK
ClK
A15-Ag
Tx D
LlNE{
Rx D
07 . . . . . 00
AD,-ADo
8
8
8
ALE
j
TO MEMORY AND OTHER PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Fig.
11
Example of circuit using the asynchronous mode
STOP BIT (l. 5 BITS)
START
Fig.
5-52
12
BIT~
DATA
I
I----~"'-'---~
If--L--I
1 I
II--START
PARITY BIT
Example of data transmission
.• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
BIT
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Power-supply yoltage
V,
Input Yoltage
Vo
Output Yoltage
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
With respect to Vss
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Limits
Unit
-0.3-7
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-20-75
·C
-65-150
·C
(Ta =-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted.)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Min
Vce
Supply Yoltage
Vss
Power-supply voltage
Unit
Nom
Max
5
5.5
4.5
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
V
(Ta =-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted.)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Test conditions
" - .._ - - "
Min
Typ
Max
"
V'H
High-level input voltage
2
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.3
V aH
High-level output voltage
IOH=-400"A
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL=2.2mA
lec
Supply current from Vee
I'H
High-level input current
VI=VCC
I'L
Low-level input current
V,=ov
laz
Off-state input current
Vss=OV, v,=ov-Vcc
C,
Input capacitance
GIIO
Input/output capacitance
Vcc+0.3
V
0.8
V
2.4
V
0.45
V
5
rnA
-10
10
f.lA
-10
10
/.LA
-10
10
f.lA
Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms , T8=25'C
10
pF
Vcc=Vss, f=1 MHz, 25mV rms , T8=25'C
20
pF
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
.-
.-
5-53
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
TIMING REQUIREMENTS(T a =-20-75'C,
Vcc=5V±tO%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted.)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Unit
Test conditions
Symbol
Min
Typ
Max
tce, )
Clock cycle time (Notesl, 2)
tCY
320
1350
twe, )
Clock high pulse width
t,
120
tce,)-90
tweT)
Clock low pulse width
tT
90
ns
ns
ns
tr
Clock rise time
tR
20
ns
tf
Clock fall time
tF
20
ns
kHz
lX baud rate
hx
DC
64
16X baud rate
fTx
DC
310
kHz
64X baud rate
fTX
DC
615
kHz
Transmitter input clock
hx
frequency
tWCTPWL)
tWCTPWH)
Transmitter input clock low
lX baud rate
tTPW
12
tC(' )
pulse width
16X, 64X baud rate
hpw
1
tce. )
Transmitter input clock high
lX baud rate
tTPD
15
tC(' )
pulse width
16X, 64X baud rate
hPD
3
lX baud rate
fRx
16X baud rate
64
kHz
fRx
310
kHz
64X baud rate
fRx
DC
615
Receiver input clock low
lX baud rate
tRPw
pulse width
16X, 64X baud rate
Receiver input clock high
lX baud rate
pulse width
16X, 64X baud rate
Receiver input clock
fRx
frequency
tWCRPWU
tc (' )
DC
DC
tW(RPWH)
kHz
12
tce. )
t RPW
1
tcC' )
tAPO
15
tRPO
3
tce. )
!~
tSUCA-R)
Address setup time before read (CS, C/O) (Note3)
tAR
0
ns
th(R-A)
Address hold time after read (CS, C/O) (Note3)
tRA
0
ns
tweR)
Read pulse width
tRR
tSUCA-W)
Address setup time before write
tAW
0
ns
theW-A)
Address hold time after write
tWA
0
ns
twew)
Write pulse width
tww
250 (200)
ns
tSU(oo~w)
Data setup time before write
tow
150(100)
ns
two
20( 0 )
thew-DO) Data hold time after write
tSU(ESO~AxC)
ESYNOET setup time before RxC
250(200)
t ES
18
ns
ns
tce. )
tSU(C-R)
Control setup time before read
tCR
20
tce. )
tRv
Write recovery time between writes (Note4)
tRv
6
tce. )
tSU(Rxo-tS)
RxD setup time before internal sampling pulse
tSRx
2
!-IS
th{tS-RxD)
RxD hold time after internal sampling pulse
tHRx
2
!-IS
Note
5-54
The T xC and RxC frequencies have the following limitations with respect to ClK.
For 1X baud rate hx, fRx ;i;1/(30t c e.I). For 16X, 64X baud rate hx, f Rx ;i;1/(4, 5t c e,)
Reset p-ulse width=6t c e'l minimum. System clock must be running during reset.
CS, C/O are considered as address.
This recovery time is for mode initialization only. Write data is allowed only when T xRDY=l. Recovery time between writes for asynchronous
mode is 8tCI.), and that for synchronous mode is 16tce.).
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(T a=-20~75°C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted.)
Limits
Alternative
Symbol
Test conditions (Noten
Parameter
------
symbol
tPZV(R-DQ)
Output data enable time after read (Note5)
tPVZ{R-DQ)
Output data disable time after read
------
tPZV(TxC-TxD)
tDF
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - = - - - - - -f - - - - - - TXD enable time after falling edge of TxC
--------------------
hxADY
tPHUW-TxR)
Propagation time from write data to TxRDY (Note6)
hxRDY CLEAR
IpLH(CLB-RxR)
Propagation time from center of last bit to RxRDY (Nole6)
tRxRDY
tPHL(R-RxR}
Propagation time from read data 10 RxRDY (:Iear (Note6)
tRxRDY CLEAR
Propagation time from rising edge of RxC to internal SYNDET (Note6)
tiS
Propagation time from center of last bit to TxEMPTY (Note6)
hxEMPTY
Propagation time from rising edge of WR to control (Note6)
twc
6
7
8
/.LS
8
tCI .)
400
ns
26
tCI • )
.-
ns
26
tpLH ( RxO- SYD)
IpLH(cLB-TxE)
--
ns
1
400
--
------~~~----~
ns
100
--
r---
Propagation time from center of last bit to TxRDY clear (Note6)
tpHL(w-C)
200(170J
10
tCTx
l PLH (cLB-TxR)
Note 5
Max
CL=150pF
tAD
------ --------------
--
Typ
- - r-------~
-------------- ---------
--
Unit
Min
Assumes that address is vaild before falling edge of RD.
Status-up data can have a maximum delay of 28 clock periods from the event affecting the status.
Input pulse level
O. 45~2. 4V
Reference level Input
V ,H =2V, V,L =0. 8V
Input pulse rise time 10ns
Output VoH =2V, VOL =0. BV
Input pulse fall time 10ns
M5M82C51 AP is also invested with the extended specification showed in the brackets.
tCI. )
20
tcl. )
8
tcl. )
2.4--V
o.
45-A;:;~
V-
0::;".::.~A-
..::8_ _ _
TIMING DIAGRAMS
System clock (elK)
tC( ~)
tr
If
ClK
Transmitter clock & data
~."=4[
10
11
12
13
14
II
}
tW(1))
15
16
T xC(16X)
~ __---t-"W-'-(T-'-P-'-W.:cLl-------7>K-------t....W:.:(-"TP....Wc.H:...)------~
T,C(lX)
tPZVI TXC-TXD
I
T,D
Receiver clock & data
R,D
Rx-BIT COUNTER STARTS HERE
DATA BIT
START BIT
DATA BIT
RxC(16X)
RxC(lX)
INTERNAL
SAMPLING
PULSE
tW(¢)
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
5-55
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSIAP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Write control cycle (CPU-USART)
U
tSU(A_W)
j
cio
t
bA
tSU(A-W)
tWlw)
~.
tSU(OQ-wl
)
D)-DO
(DATA INPUT)
l!:hIW-D'i!
VALID
K
tPHL(W-cl
)
DTR, RTS
Read control cycle (USART -CPU)
tSU(C_R)
DSR, CTS
)
tSU(A-R)
thIR-A)
ftSUIA-RI
th(R_A)
c/o
.11\
tWIRl
¥
RD
tPVZIR_DQI
~
tPZV(R-DQ)
D)-DO
(DATA OUTPUT)
5-56
j!J
~,
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
VALID
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Write data cycle (CPU--+USART)
h(W-A)
tSU(A_W)
c/o
t
1
IhIW- AI
ISUIA_wl
tW(w)
tSU{DQ-wl
th(W_DQ}
~
}
D7~DO
(DATA INPUT)
VALID
K
II
TxRDY
r
Read data cycle (USART--+CPU)
tSU(A_R)
tSU(A-A}
c/o
D7~DO
(DATA OUTPUT)
Rx RDY
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-57
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Transmitter control & flag timing (async mode)
c/o
]
\~~\~[]~~/____~~/____~~L__~ __~I
WR-TxEN
WR-DATA 1 WR-DATA 2
WR-DATA 3
\
WR-DATA4
_-----""'\ _ - - - - - , R " - - - - - - - - ,
TxRDY
(PIN)
Tx RDY
(STATUS)
TxEMPTY
BREAK STATE
Note 8: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity & 2 stop bits
9: TxRDY(pin)= 1 -(Transmit-data buller is empty) - (TxEN = 1 ) - (CTS= 0)= 1
10: TxRDY(status)= 1 -(Transmit-data buller is empty) = 1
Receiver control & flag timing (async mode)
c/o
-.J \L-_ _ _---l\L--LI_ _ _ _ _............/L-J1
RD DATA 1
RD DATA 3
..J
~
\~_
___I\----I.l_ ___JI
V '"
RD ALL 0 DATA
\
WR-ER
WR-Rx E
WR-\jfi!
U
'1\
BD
(PIN)
DATA 2
LOST
OE
(STATUS)
tpt.HI r:LO.Rx'R) ~
Rx RDY
J:-
n
S/OIil213(415J61p
DATAl
p
r
WoN21*N61p1~ \sJoN213141*lp1~
DATA 2
p
DATA 3
p
Notell: Example format = 7 bits/character with parity
5-58
• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
t
S
S
\SOI23456P;SOI23456P~
BREAK STATE
L--
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
Transmitter control & flat timing (sync mode)
o
WR
DATA 1
WR
DATA 2
WR
DATA 3
I""""""---~
u
WR
DATA 4
~-~
,
\
WR
DATA 5
1""""""-------
I""""""---~
Tx RDY
(PIN)
Tx RDY
(STATUS)
TxEMPTY
Tx D
DATA I
Note12:
DATA 2
SYNC
CH 1
SYNC
CH 2
MARK
STATE
DATA3 DATA4
MARK
STATE
~~~~~
DATA 5
SYNC
CH 1
SYNC
CH 2
11
Example format = 5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.
Receiver control & flag timing (sync mode)
INTERNAL
SYNC
EXTERNAL SYNC MODE
MODE
:J ,\...______.L......J/L.J1
C/o
\
\ fIL.U\. ]
C;,;,H,;,,;2"-_ _ _
R_D..,STATUS
1""""""--+---+--
EXTERNAL
SYNC
(INPUT)
~:~~NAL
(OUTPUT)
RD DATA
WR-EH-RxE
WR-EH-RxE
SYNDET
(PIN)
c
tPLH(RxC-SYD)
tSU(ESD-RxC}
SYNDET
(STATUS)
OE
(STATUS)
DATA 2
LDST r+--~
Rx RDY
RxD
-
SYNC' SYNC: : DATA 1 DATA2 DATA3
CH 1
CH 2 : :
EXITS HUNT MODE
SYNDET SET
Note13:
Example format
=
j
SYNC
CH 1
SYNC
CH 2
lCHARACTER
ASSEMBLY BEGINS
5 bits/character with parity, bi-sync characters.
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
5-59
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS1AFP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C51 AFP is a universal synchronous/asynchronous
receiver/transmitter (USART) IC chip designed for data
communications use. It is produced using the silicon-gate
CMOS process and is mainly used in combination with 8-bit
microprocessors.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
RECEIVER;~~~~
•
•
•
3
26
Baud rate: DC-64K-baud
Full duplex, double-buffered transmitter/receiver
Error detection: parity, overrun, and framing
APPLICATIONS
•
Modem control of data communications using microcomputers
•
Control of CRT, TTY and other terminal equipment
FUNCTION
The M5M82C51 AFP is used in the peripheral circuits of a
CPU. It permits assignments, by means of software, of operations in all the currently used serial-data transfer systems
including IBM's 'bi-sync'. The M5M82C51 AFP receives para-
2 ~ RTS
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
T~tg~~IIJ~~;:
CON~~~C;~~~~
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATE BUS
V cc (5V)
D4- 5
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Synchronous and asynchronous operation
Synchronous:
5-8-bit characters
Internal or external synchronization
Automatic SYNC character insertion
Asynchronous system:
5-8-bit characters
Clock rate- 1 , 16 or 64 times the baud rate
1 ,1 y., or 2 stop bits
False-start-bit detection
Automatic break-state detection
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Rx D ~
(OV)Vss
FEATURES
•
•
•
2 - 0 1}
2 -DO
2
~
21
~
2
~ CLK
RECEIVER·
CI,OCK INPUT
DATA·TERMINAL
READY OUTPUT
~~~g~JT~~;'
0 SR
~~ItysfJpuT
RESET RESET INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
19 ~ T x 0
6~~~~MJn5~'
18 ~ T,EMPTY ~~'i.~W~Vr~~·T
CHIP.S~~~Si
%g~~~gIPN'lI~
CONTRREtE;~~~~
READ';!'g5~~~RxROY~ 14
'------~
Outline
17 ~ CTS ~f~t~J~UT
16 - ~~NDETI ~~~KDgm6~
15 ~ Tx RDY ~~~~~~~~~~T
28P2W
lIel-format data from the CPU, converts it into a serial format,
and then transmits via the TxD pin. It also receives data sent
in via the RxD pin from the external circuit, and converts it
into a parallel format for sending to the CPU. On receipt of
parallel-format data for transmission from the CPU or serial
data for the CPU from external devices, the M5M82C51 AFP
informs the CPU using the T xRDY or RxRDY pin. In addition,
the CPU can read the M5M82C51 AFP status at any time. The
M5M82C51 AFP can detect the data received for errors and
inform the CPU of the presence of errors as status information. Errors include parity, overrun and frame errors.
M5M82C51 AFP is different from M5M82C51 AP only in the
package outline. Refer to the M5M82C51 AP for more details.
-----------l
RESET INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
CONTROL/DATA·CONTROL
INPUT
READ·DATA CONTROL INPUT
WRITE·DATA CONTROL INPUT
TRANSMITIER·DATA OUTPUT
CHlp·SELECT INPUT
Tx RDY
TxEMPTY
DATA·SET READY INPUT
TRANSMlnER·READY OUTPUT
TRANSMITIER·EMPTY OUTPUT
TRANSMITIER·CLOCK INPUT
DATA·TERMINAL READY OUTPUT
CLEAR-TO·SEND INPUT
REQUEST·TO·SEND OUTPUT
RxRDY
RECEIVER·READY OUTPUT
25 RxC
RECEIVER·CLOCK INPUT
16 SYNDET/BD SYNC DETECT/BREAK DETECT
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
RECEIVER·DATA INPUT
5-60
•. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C54P is a programmable general-purpose timer
device developed by using the silicon-gate CMOS process.
It offers counter and timer functions in systems using an 8-bit
parallel-processing CPU. The use of the M5M82C54P frees
the CPU from the execution of looped programs, countoperation programs and other simple processing involving
many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved
system throughputs. The M5M82C54P works on a single
power supply, and both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit.
M5M82C54P
Parameter
Clock high pulse width
60ns
Clock low pulse width
60ns
Clock cycle time
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
vee (5V)
23 -
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
125ns
Propagation time
120ns
CS ~~~;.SELECT
18 17
CLOCK INPUT CLKO~ 9
CLK2 CLOCK INPUT
~OUT2 g~~~~R
16 -GATE2 GATE INPUT
cg~~~~~ OUTO~
10
15 -
GATEO~
11
14
~GATEI
13
~ OUTI g3¥~JiR
GATE INPUT
(Ov) GND
from read to output
RD READ INPUT
21 -
20 - Ao .}ADDRESS
19- A, INPUTS
M5MB2C54P-6
55ns
-110ns
-165ns
WR WRITE INPUT
22 -
--..----~
170ns
CLK1 CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
Outline 24P4
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Pin connection compatible with M5L8253P-5
Clock period: M5M82C54P-6 ......................
M5M82C54P .........................
FUNCTION
DC~6MHz
DC~8MHz
•
3 independent bult-in 16-bit down counters
•
•
•
6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter
Binary or decimal counts
Read-back command for monitoring the count and status
APPLICATION
Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in
microcomputers.
Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming
based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When
roughly classified, there are 6 modes (O~5). Mode 0 is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode 1
as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators,
mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a
hardware triggered strobe.
The count can be monitored and set at any time. Besides
the count, the status of the counter can be monitored by
Read-back command. The counter operates with either the
binary or BCD system.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(5V) vecf4[C~= --8--- ---iOv) GND 12
WORD
REGISTER
8
tI
-..
D/
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
--~CLK
a
--~GATE a
--(1)llOUT 0
D6
D5
D, 4
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
READ INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
WRITE INPUT
GATE INPUT
CHIP-SELECT INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
INTERNAL "------'
_ ._ _ _ _ _ _D_A_T_A :_U_S_ _ _
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
-----.J
5-61
11
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS
CONTROL WORD AND INITIAL-VALUE LOADING
Data-Bus Buffer
This 3-state, bidirectional,. 8-bit buffer is used to interface
the M5M82C54P to the system-side data bus. Transmission
and reception of all the data including control words for
mode designation and values written in, and read from, the
counters are carried out through this buffer.
Read/Write Logic
The read/write logic accepts control signals (RD, WR) from
the system and generates control signals for· each counter. It
is enabled or disabled by the chip-select signal (CS); if CS
is at the high-level the data-bus buffer enters a floating
(high-impedance) state.
Read Input (RD)
The count of the counter designated by address inputs Ao
and A1 on the low-level is output to the data bus.
Write Input (WR)
Data on the data bus is written in the counter or controlword
register designated by address inputs Ao and A1 on the lowlevel.
Address Inputs (Ao, Al)
These are used for selecting one of the 3 internal counters
and either of the control-word registers.
Chip-Select Input (CS)
A low-level on this input enables the M5M82C54P. Changes
in the level of the CS input have no effect on the operation
of the counters.
Control-Word Register
This register stores information required to give instructions
about operational modes and to select binary or BCD counting. Unlike the counters, it allows no reading, only writing.
Counters 0,1 and 2
These counters are identical in operation and independent
of each other. Each is a 16-bit, presettable, down counter,
and has clock-input, gate-input and output pins. The counter
can operate in either binary or BCD using the falling edge of
each clock. The mode of counter operation and the initial
value from which to start counting can be designated by
software. The count can be read by input instruction at any
time, and there is a "read-on-the-fly" function which enables
stable reading by latching each instantaneous count to the
registers by a special counter-latch instruction.
The function of the M5M82C54P depends on the system software. The operational mode of the counters can be specified by writing control words (Ao, A1 = 1, 1) into the controlword registers.
The programmer must write out to the M5M82C54P the
programmed number-of count register bytes (lor 2) prior to
actually using the selected counter.
Table 2 shows control-word format, which consists of 4
fields. Only the counter selected by the 0 7 and 0 6 bits of the
control word is set for operation. Bits 0 5 and 04 are used for
specifying operations to read values in the counter and to Initialize. Bits D3 ~ 0 1 are used for mode designation, and Do
for speCifying binary or BCD counting. When Do = 0, binary
counting is employed~ and any number from 0000 16 to FFFF16
can be loaded into the count register. The counter is
counted down for each clock. The counting of 0000 16 causes
the transmission of a time-out signal from the count-output
pin.
The maximum number of counts is obtained when 0000 16
is set as the initial value. When 0 0=1, BCD counting is employed, and any number from 0000 10 to 999910 can be loaded
on the counter.
Neither system resetting nor connecting to the power
supply sets the control word to any specific value. Thus to
bring the counters into operation, the above-mentioned control words for mode designation must be given to each counter, and then 1 ~ 2 byte initial counter values must be set.
The following is an example of this programming step.
To deSignate mode 0 for counter 1 ,with initial value 825316
set by binary count, the following program is used:
MVI
A, 70 16
Control word 70 16
OUT
n1 is contrOl-ward-register address
MVI
A, 53 16
Low-order 8 bits
OUT
n2 is counter 1 address
MVI
High-order 8 bits
OUT
"2.
n2 is counter 1 address
Thus, the program generally has the follbwing sequence:
(1) Control-word output to counter i (i=O, 1,2).
(2) Initialization of low-order 8 counter bits
(3) Initialization of high-order 8 counter bits
The three counters can be executed in any sequence. It is
possible, for instance, to designate the mode of each counter and then load initial values in a different order. Initialization of the counters deSignated by RL 1 and RL 0 must be
executed in the order of the low-order 8 bits and then the
high-order 8 bits for the counter in question.
5-62
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
"1
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
Table
Basic Functions
cs
AD
WA
A,
AD
0
I
0
0
a
Data bus-Counter
0
I
0
0
I
Data bus-Counter 1
0
I
a
Data bus-Counter 2
I
a
a
I
0
I
Data bus-Control-word register
0
a
I
a
Data bus-Counter 0
0
0
I
a
a
I
Data bus-Counter 1
0
0
I
I
a
Data bus-Counter 2
0
0
I
I
I
3-state
I
X
X
X
X
3-state
0
I
I
X
X
3-state
Table
I
I
Function
a
2 Control-Word Format
II
eSC(Select Counter)
SCI
sca
0
f-------
a
Select counter
a
I
Select counter 1
1
a
------
a
-------
Select counter 2
--~-
I
I
Prohibited combination
e RL( Read/Load)
All
ALa
0
a
a
~----
Counter Latch Command
- -
Read/load low-order 8 bits only
I
1---- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I
a Read/load high-order 8 bits only
- - f---
1
1
Read/load low-order 8 bits and then high-order 8 bits
eM(Mode)
M2
MI
Ma
a
a
1------
a
a
- - ---
a
ModeO
1
Model
X
I
a
Mode2
X
1
I
Mode3
a
a
a
Mode4
1
Mode5
--------
--
I----~--
1
1
1---
-----
1---------
eBCD
I~-- f--_ _ _
-+_B_in_a-=ry_c_o_u_nt_e_r_CI_6_b_it_sJ_ _ _ _ __
Binary-coded decimal counter (4 decades)
I SCI I sca I RLl
I----- sc - + -
I
RL
RLa
M2
Ml
Ma
BCD
M
---+BCD-1
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
5-63
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
MODE DEFINITION
Mode 0 (Interrupt on Terminal Count)
Mode set and initialization cause the counter output to go
low-level (see Fig. 1). When the counter is loaded with an
initial value, it will start counting the clock input. When the
terminal count is reached, the output will go high and remain
high until the selected count register is reloaded with the
mode. This mode can be used when the CPU is to be interrupted after a certain period or at the time of counting up.
Fig. 1 shows a setting of 4 as the initial value. If gate input
goes low, counting is inhibited for the duration of the lowlevel period.
Reloading of the initial value during count operation will
stop counting by the loading of the first byte and start the
new count by the loading of the second byte.
Mode 1 (Programmable One-Shot)
The gate input functions as a trigger input. A gate-input rising edge causes the generation of low-level one-shot output
with a predetermined clock length starting from the next
clock. Fig. 2 shows an initial setting of 4. While the counter
output is at the low-level (during one-shot), loading of a new
value does not change the one-shot pulse width, which has
already been output. The current count can be read at any
time without affecting the width of the one-shot pulse being
output. This mode permits retriggering.
Mode 2 (Rate Generator)
Low-level pulses during one clock operation are generated
from the counter output at a rate of one per n clock inputs
(where n is the value initially set for the counter). When a
new value is loaded during the counter operation, it is reflected on the output after the pulses by the current count
have been output. In the example shown in Fig. 3, n is given
as 4 at the outset and is then changed to 3.
In this mode, the gate input provides a reset function.
While it is on the low-level, the output is maintained high;
the counter restarts from the initial value, triggered by a rising gate-input edge. This gate input, therefore, makes
possible external synchronization of the counter by hardware.
After the mode is set, the counter does not start counting
until the rate n is loaded into the count register, with the
counter output remaining at the high-level.
Mode 3 (Square Rate Generator)
This is similar to Mode 2 except that it outputs a square
wave with the half count of the set rate. When the set value
n is odd, the square-wave output will be high for (n+l) 12
clock-input counts and low for (n-1 ) 12 counts. When a new
rate is reloaded into the count register during its operation, it
is immediately reflected on the count directly following the
output transition (high-to-Iow or low-to-high) of the current
count. Gate-input operations are exactly the same as in
Mode 2. Fig. 4 shows an example of Mode 3 operation.
Mode 4 (Software Triggered Strobe)
After the mode is set, the output will be high. By loading a
5-64
number on the counter, however, clock-input counts can be
started and on the terminal count, the output will go low for
one input-clock period and then will go high again. Mode 4
differs from Mode 2 in that pulses are not output repeatedly
with the same set count. The pulse output is delayed one
clock period in Mode 2, as shown in Fig. 5. When a new
value is loaded into the count register during its count operation, it is reflected on the next pulse output without
affecting the current count. The count will be inhibited while
the gate input is low-level.
Mode 5 (Hardware Triggered Strobe)
This is a variation of Mode 1. The gate input provides a trigger function, and the count is started by its rising edge. On
the terminal count, the counter output goes low for on one
clock period and then goes high. As in Mode 1, retriggering
by the gate input is possible. An example of timing in Mode
5 is shown in Fig. 6.
As mentioned above, the gate input plays different roles
according to the mode. The functions are summarized in
Table 3.
Table
3
I~
Gate Operations
Low or going low
Rising
High
Mode
0
Enables
counting
Disables counting
,
(1) Initiates counting
(2) Resets output
after next clock
2
(11 Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately
(11 Reloads counter
(2) Initiates counting
Enables
counting
3
(1) Disables counting
(2) Sets output high
immediately
(1) Reloads counter
(2) Initiates counting
Enables
counting
4
Disables counting
5
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Enables
counting
Initiates counting
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
OUT( GATE="H")
WR
~
:L-...J
GATE
:4
OUT
Fig. 1
I
I
I
Mode
4
4
I
:3
:
2
1
0
I
a
Fig. 4
Mode 3
elK
WR
GATE ________~r_~-:--~~--~----------
3
2
0
LJ
OUT
OUT
GATE
2
OUT
Fig. 2
L--J
1
OUT
Mode 1
Fig. 5
~
Mode 4
II
GATE
WR
4
0
3
OUT(GATE="H")
OUT(n=4)
GATE ~r---------------------_;:.4....3.....3'--...
3.....;:........:.._2;.......:,1
4 3
2 1 4 3
OUT
~
Mode 2
4
Sometimes the counter must be monitored by reading its
count or using it as an event counter. The M5M82C54P offers
the following two methods for count reading:
Read Operation
The count can be read by designating the address of the
counter to be monitored and executing a simple I/O read
operation. In order to ensure correct reading of the count, it
is necessary to cause the clock input to pause by external
logic or prevent a' change in the count by gate input. An example of a program to read the counter 1 count is shown below. If RLl, RLO=l, 1 has been specified in the control word,
the first IN instruction enables the I'ow-order 8 bits to be read
and the second I N instruction enables the highorder 8 bits.
IN
n2 is the counter 1 address
MOV
0, A
"2 ....
"2
MOV
E, A
The IN instruction should be executed once or twice by the
RLl and RLO designations in the control-word register.
3
OUT(n=4)
Fig. 6
COUNTER MONITORING
LJ
GATE
U
IN
0
elK
elK
Fig. 3
h--i
GATE
Lr--
Mode 5
Read-on-the-Fly Operation
This method makes it possible to read the current count
without affecting the count operation at all. A special counter-latch command is first written in the control-word register. This causes latching of all the instantaneous counts to
the register, allowing retention of stable counts. An example
of a program to execute this operation for counter 2 is given
below.
MVI
A, 1000XXXX .... 0 5 = 0 4 = 0 designates counter
latching
OUT
IN
"1 .... nl is the control-ward-register address
"3 .... n3 is the counter 2 address
MOV
0, A
IN
"3
MOV
E, A
In this example, the IN instruction is executed twice. Due to
the internal logic of the M5M82C54P it is absolutely essential
to complete the entire reading procedure. If two bytes are
programmed to be read, then two bytes must be read before
any OUT instruction can be executed to the same counter.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-65
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
Read Back Command
M5M82C54P has a function of reading not only the. count but
also status (Read Back Command). The read' back command enables the next four functions.
(1) read the current count "on the fly"
(2) monitor the current state of the OUT pin
(3) monitor the current state of the counter element
(whether the count is loaded into the counter element or
not)
(4) read the control word
Read back operation can be specified by writing read back
command into the control Word registers (Ao, A, = 1.1). Fig.
7 shows the format of read back command .
. Bits D7 and D6 are used for specifying read back command and fixed 1 (D 7 = 1, D6 = 1). Respectively bits D5
(count) and D, (status) are used for reading the count and
the status of the counter selected by the D3 - D, bits. Bit Do
must be fixed O.
Only the count can be read "on the fly" by setting D5 =0 '
and D, = 1 as well as counter latch command above mentioned. If D3 - D, are set 1 all, the counts of three counters
are simultaneously latched by one read back command. (By
counter latch command, it must be latched for each
counter.) Next, by read operation, the latched count is read
out.
Only the status can be latched by setting D5 = 1 and D,
= 0. By read operation, the status shown in Fig. 8 can be
5-66
read.
BIT D7 gives the current state of OUT pin. When D7 = 1,
OUT = "H", and when D7 =0, OUT =" "L". Bit D6 indicates
the current state of counter element. When D6 =1, the initial
counter value has not been loaded to counter element. This
state is following.
(1) The control word is written, but the initial counter value
is not loaded
(2) The initial counter value is written to count register, and
the ClK inputs are not.
When D6 = 0, the initial counter value has already been
loaded. It is the state when the CLK falls following the rising
edge after the initial Vi.lue is written. Bits D5- Do show the
current state of the control word regsiter.
It is possi ble to read both the count and the status. By
setting D5 = and D, = 0, the status can be read first, and
the count next.
The count and/or the status are unlatched when read, so
by the next read operation the current counting value can be
read. And they are unlatched too when the control word is
set, so the read back command must be set on all such
occasions.
If multiple read back commands are written before the
read operation, only the first one is valid.
Thus, the read of the status is effective when the state of
output and the timing of count reading can be monitored by
software.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
°
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - e Read Back Command
(0 7 =1, 0 6 =1 : fixed)
, - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - - eCOUNT=O: Latch Count
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - e STATUS=O : Latch Status
I
~e
{
CNT2=1
CNT1=1
CNTO=1
Select Counter 2
Select Counter 1
Select Counter 0
ieFixed on 0
_ _ _A _ _
~
~
~
~
~
I COUNT I STATUS I
~
CNT2
~
I
CNTl
~
I
CNTO
~
I
Fig. 7 Read Back Command Format
II
e State of OUT pin
OUT
o
lOUT pin is "H" level
Out pin is "L" level
e State of counter element
CNT
I
I
I
I
Initial value unloaded
Initial value loaded
1
I
e State of control word. register
(cf. Table 2)
~-----_A~-----_
0,
06
05
OUT
CNT
RLl
RLO
03
02
0,
00
M2
Ml
MO
BCO
Fig. 8 Status Byte
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
5-67
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Power supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Limits
Unit
-0.3-7
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
Conditions
Parameter
Vee
With respect to GND
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-20-75
'c
'c
-65-150
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
(Ta =-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Min
Vee
Power supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage (GND)
r-- -
Nom
Max
5
5.50
4.50
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
V
(Ta=-20-75'C, Vcc =5V±10%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Test condition
Min
V'H
High-level input voltage
2.0
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.3
V OH
High-level output voltage
Vss=OV,loH =-400!,A
VOL
Low-level output voltage
vss=OV,
I'H
High-level input current
I'L
loz
IOl =2.
OmA
Typ
Max
Vcc+O.3
V
0.8
V
V
2.4
0.45
V
Vss=OV, V,=5. 50V
±10
J."A
Low-level input current
Vss=OV, V,=OV
±10
J."A
Off-state output current
Vss=OV, VI=O--VCC
±10
J."A
10
mA
J."A
Icc
Power supply current
I M5M82C54P
Vss=OV, 1=8MHz
i M5M82C54P-6
Vss=OV, 1=6MHz
Icc
Power supply current during STAND BY
Vss=OV, other inputs are Vss or Vee
10
Gj
Input capacitance
VIL=VSS, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25'C
10
pF
Gila
Input/output capacitance
VI/OL =Vss, 1=1 MHz,25mVrms, Ta=25'C
20
pF
5-68
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a=-20-75'C , Vcc=5V±1 0%, Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted)
Read cycle
Alternative
Symbol
Limits
Test condition
Parameter
symbol
----
Unit
Typ
Min
Max
twCR)
Read pulse width
tRR
tSUCS-R)
CS setup time before read
tSR
tSUCA-R)
Address setup time before read
tAR
thCR-A)
Address hold time after read
150
c----
-- --
0
-------~
Read recovery time
trecCR)
f-----tRA
C--------tRV
CL=150pF
-
ns
-~
-~
"---- ns
---- -----
1-------
45
ns
------
"_0- __ -"
--
0
ns
200
ns
--
Write cycle
Alternative
Symbol
Limits
Test condition
Parameter
symbol
Unit
Typ
Min
Max
twL)
Clock low puLse width
M5M82C54P-6
t PWL
110
125
M5M82C54P
t c ( -0)
TIMING DIAGRAMS
(Reference vollage: High=2.0V, low=0.8V)
Read cycle
,,~
/
tSU(S'-R)
~
j/'
1\
tSU(A-R)
><
AD, A,
tPZV(A-Q)
I
IWIRI
r------
~ IhIR-AI
K
IpzvlR-al
I---
L}
~
tpVZ(R-Q)
"'' ' '
1oV/
Write cycle
~
~
tSU(S-W)
.J/F-
~~
ISUIA-Wl
l
Iwlwl
I
J
)<
tSU(D-W)
-----
thlw-Ai
K
Ihlw-ol
~X
X
(Recovery time)
RD, WR
5-70
I
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4P,·6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
Clock and gate cycle
tW(GL)
tW(GHJ
GATE
elK
OUT
II
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-71
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS4FP,-6
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERVAL TIMER
DESCRIPTION
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
The M5M82C54FP is a programmable general-purpose timer
device developed by using the silicon-gate CMOS process.
It offers counter and timer functions in systems using an 8-bit
parallel-processing CPU. The use of the M5M82C54FP frees
the CPU from the execution of looped programs, countoperation programs and other simple processing involving
many repetitive operations, thus contributing to improved
system throughputs. The M5M82C54FP works on a single
power supply, and both its input and output can be connected to a TTL circuit.
Parameter
M5M82C54FP
M5M82C54FP-6
Clock high pulse width (Min.)
60ns
55ns
Clock low pulse width
(Min.)
60ns
110ns
Clock cycle time
(Min.)
125ns
165ns
vee (5V)
23 ~ WR WRITE INPUT
22 ~ RD READ INPUT
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
20 ~ Ao ADDRESS
19 ~ AI JINPUTS
1
CLOCK INPUT CLKO~ 9
C~~~~~~ OUTO~
10
GATEO~
11
GATE INPUT
10v) GND
170ns
120ns
DJ-
18 ~ ClK2 CLOCK INPUT
-~
(Max.)
21 ~ CS ~~~~SElECT
17 ~OUT2 g~¥~JiR
r------~-----
Access time
D4-
FEATURES
16
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Pin connection compatible with M5L8253P-5
Clock period: M5M82C54FP-6 .................. · ..
M5M82C54FP .......................
•
•
•
•
•
3 independent bult-in 16-bit down counters
6 counter modes freely assignable for each counter
Binary or decimal counts
Read-back command for monitoring the count and status
Package in flat small outline package
DC~8MHz
~GATEI
~OUTI g8¥~JfR
GATE INPUT
24P2W
based on mode-control instructions from the CPU. When
roughly classified, there are 6 modes (O~5). Mode a is mainly used as an interruption timer and event counter, mode 1
as a digital one-shot, modes 2 and 3 as rate generators,
mode 4 for a software triggered strobe, and mode 5 for a
hardware triggered strobe.
The count can be monitored and set at any time. Besides
the count, the status of the counter can be monitored by
Read-back command. The counter operates with either the
binary or BCD system.
Refer to M5M82C54P/P-6 for detail information.
M5M82C54FP/FP-6's specification are fully compatible with
M5M82C54P/P-6. Only package outline is different.
Delayed-time setting, pulse counting and rate generation in
microcomputers.
FUNCTION
Three independent 16-bit counters allow free programming
15V)vccr.c~~-~-I--- ~t'
10v)
GND~
[REGISTER
I
9 ClK
r
COUNTER
D, 1
0
BIDIRECTIONALl~:' ~
DATA BUS
D3
D2
D,
Do
a
11 GATE 0
~OUT
-J
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
0
CLOCK INPUT
GATE INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
READ INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
WRITE INPUT
GATE INPUT
CHIP-SELECT INPUT
COUNTER OUTPUT
INTERNAL
DATA BUS
I
---------------.-----1
5-72
14
DC~6MHz
APPLICATION
BLOCK DIAGRAM
GATE INPUT
CLOCK INPUT
13
---.._----,
Outline
•
•
•
•
~GATE2
15~ClKI
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
DESCRIPTION
This is a family of general-purpose programmable input/
output devices designed for use with the 8/16-bit parallel
CPU as input/output ports.
This device is fabricated using silicon-gate CMOS technology for a single supply voltage. This LSI is a simple input
and output interface for TTL circuits, having 24 input/output
pins which correspond to three 8-bit input/output ports.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
(
j
PA3 -
INPUT/OUTPUT PA,_
PORT A PA,_
I
lPAoREAD INPUT RD ~
CHIP
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
STh~8+cs~
(ov) GND
35 -
RESET 'RESET INPUT
PORT ADDRESS { A, ~
INPUTS Ao ~
Single 5 V supply voltage
TTL compatible
Improved DC driving capability
Improved timing characteristics
24 programmable I/O pins
Direct bit set/reset capability
BI-DIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT C
APPLICATION
Input/output ports for MELPS85, MELPS86, MELPS88 microprocessor
INPUT/OUTPUT
PORT B
FUNCTION
These PPls have 24 input/output pins which may be individually programmed in two 12-bit groups A and B with
mode control commands from a CPU. They are used in three
major modes of operation, mode 0 , mode 1 and mode 2 .
Operating in mode 0 , each group of 12 pins may be programmed in sets of 4 to be inputs or outputs. In mode 1 , the
24 I/O terminals may be programmed in two 12-bit groups,
group A and group B. Each group contains one 8-bit data
port, which may be programmed to serve as input or output,
and one 4-bit control port used for handshaking and interrupt
II
Outline 40P4
control signals. Mode 2 is used with group A only, as one 8bit bidirectional bus port and one 5-bit control port. Bit set/
reset is controlled by CPU. A high-level reset input (RESET)
clears control register, and all ports are set to the input
mode (high-impedance state).
BLOCK DIAGRAM
1-----------------;
READ INPUT RD
WRITE INPUT WR
ADDRESS
INPUTS
JA,
t-----=
t=:
6
--..<:
8
lAo 9
RESET INPUT RESET
CHIP SELECT CS
INPUT
~
~~_IT'
CONTROL
LOGIC
GROUP
A
CONTROL
8
~
l~~ ~
4
I
~
GROUP
B
CONTROL
8
8
2
(5V) Vee'
(OV)
H
PORT C
I MOST SIGNIFI-
L
GROUP B
PORT C
LEAST SIGNIFI
CANT 4 BITS)
1
17 PC 3 PORT C
16 PC,
15 PC,
14 PCo
PB 7
PB6
2 PB5
PB, INPUT/OUTPUT
21 PB 3 PORT B
2 PB,
19 PB,
18 PBo
2
2
GROUP
B
PORT B
(8-BIT)
L-.,.
GND~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
I
PC 5
PC, INPUT/OUTPUT
L
r
8
PAo
:~:l
GROUP A
Wi
r-
DATA BUS
31~ BUFFER
: 02 3
~~:
3
4
CANT 4 BITS)
8-BIT
INTERNAL
DATA BUS
:~;1
PA 5
40 PA, INPUT/OUTPUT
I
jlPORT A
2
~
~H
I
I~;
Ig: 30~
".
r
I
~: 'J
GROUP
A
PORT A
(8-BIT)
8
8
-
2
28~
D5 29)..,.-
DATA BUS
8
J3j
.Ijg
~
-.-J
5-73
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Basic Operations
Table
RD (Read) Input
At low-level, the status or the data at the port is transferred
to the CPU from the PPI. In essence, it allows the CPU to
read data from the PPI.
A,
Ao
CS
RD
WR
0
0
0
0
1
Data bus - Port A
Operation
0
1
0
0
1
Data bus - Port B
WR (Write) Input
1
0
0
0
1
Data bus - Port C
At low-level, the data or control words are transferred from
the CPU and written in the PPI.
0
0
0
1
0
Port A - Data bus
0
1
0
1
0
Port B - Data bus
1
0
0
1
0
Port C - Data bus
1
1
0
1
0
Cont~ol
X
X
1
X
X
Data bus is in high-impedance state
1
1
0
0
1
illegal condition
Ao, A, (Port address) Input
These input signals are used to select one of the three
ports: port A, port B, and port C, or the control register. They
are normally connected to the least significant two bits of the
address bus.
RESET (Reset) Input
At high-level, the control register is cleared. Then all ports
are set to the input mode (high-impedance state).
CS (Chip-Select) Input
At loW-level, the communication between the PPI and the
CPU is enabled. While at high-level, the data busis kept in
the high-impedance state, so that commands from the CPU
are ignored. Then the previous data is kept at the output
port.
f----
register - Data bus
Where, "0" indicates low level
"1" indicates high-level
Bit Set/Reset
When port C is used as an output port, anyone bit of the
eight bits can be set (high) or reset (low) by a control word
from the CPU. This bit set/reset can be operated in the
same way as the mode set, but the control word format is
different. This operation is also used for INTE set/reset in
mode 1 and mode 2 .
Read/Write Control Logic
The function of this block is to control transfers of both data
and control words. It accepts the address signals (Ao, A"
CS), I/O control signals (RD, WR) and RESET signal, and
then issues commands to both of the control groups in the
PPI.
Bit set/reset flag
I
Active -
Bit selection code
Data Bus Buffer
Port C
Bit selected
This three-state, bidirectional, eight-bit buffer is used to
transfer the data when an input or output instruction is executed by the CPU. Control words and status information are
also transferred through the data bus buffer.
D, D, D,
PC,
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
PC,
PC5
PC,
Group A and Group B Control
PC,
Accepting commands from the read/write control logic, the
control blocks (Group A, Group B) receive 8-bit control
words from the internal data bus and issue the proper commands for the associated ports. Control group A is associated with port A and the four high-order bits of port C. Control group B is associated with port B and the four low-order
bits of port C. The control register, which stores control
words, can only be written into.
PC,
PC,
PCa
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
,set/reset code
Set (high)
ID71D61D51D41031D21D,iDoi
Fig. 1
Port A, Port B and Port C
The PPI contains three 8-bit ports whose modes and input!
output settings are programmed by th·e system software.
Port A has an output latch/buffer and an input latch. Port
B has an I/O latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C has an
output latch/buffer and an input buffer. Port C can be divided into two 4-bit ports which can be used as ports for
control signals for port A and port B.
The basic operations are shown in Table 1.
5-74
I
a
Don't care
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
- 1
Reset (low) = 0
J
Control word format for port C set/reset
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
BASIC OPERATING MODES
The PPI can operate in anyone
modes.
Mode 0: Basic input/output
Mode 1: Strobed input/output
Mode 2: Bidirectional bus
The mode of both group A and
independently. The control word
shown in Fig. 2.
of three selected basic
(group A, group B)
(group A, group B)
(group A only)
group B can be selected
format for mode set is
PA,-PAo
0, 0, 050, 03 0, 0, Do
11101010101011101
07 06 05 04 03 02 0, Do
111 01010101011111
r - - - - - - - - Mode set flag
1Active
PA,-PAo
- 1
, - - - - - - - Group A mode set
0: 0" 0,
0 7 06 Os 04 03 02 D, Do
111 01010111 010101
0, 0
Mode
~
Mode 1: 0,. 0, ~ 0, 1
Mode 2: 0" 0, ~ 1, X
07 06 D5 0 4 03 D2 0, Do
111 01010111010llj
,..-_ _ _ _ Port A input/output set
I
output - 0
_ rnput ~ 1
~
_
__ Port C (high-order four bits) input/output set
I~utput
_ rnput
~
,.---'-..,
I
I I
10,10,10510,10310" 0,[001
- 0
~ 1
I
PAr-PAo
07 06 Os 04 03 02 01 Do
_
11101010111011101
1.
11
Port B input/output set
Port C (low-order four brts) rnput/output set
output - 0
input ~
I
1
I
07 06 0 5 04 03 02 0, Do
Fig_ 2
0, 0, 05 0, 030, 0, Do
11101010111011llj
11101011101010101
Control word format for mode set.
07 0605 0 4 D3 D2 0, Do
11101011101010lq
Mode 0 (Basic Input/Output)
This functional configuration provides simple input and output operations for each of the three ports. No "handshaking"
is required; data is simply written in, or read from, the specified port. Output data from the CPU to the port can be held,
but input data from the port to the CPU cannot be held. Any
one of the 8-bit ports and 4-bit ports can be used as an input
port or an output port. The diagrams following show the
baSic input/output operating modes.
PAl-PAD
0 7 0 6 05 0 4 0 3 D2 01 Do
11 I 010111 0I 011 I 11
0, 0, 050, 03 O 0, Do
11101011111010101
0, 06 0, 0, 03 0, 0, Do
111010111110101 n
2
07 06 05 04 03 02 D1 Do
11101010101010101
0, 0, 05 0, 03 0, Dr Do
111010101010101 lj
0 7 06 0 5 0 4 03 D2 0, Do
11101011101011101
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 Do
11 I01011 11 I011 10 I
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
0, 0, 0, 0, 030, 0, Do
111010111110111 q
5-75
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
2.
Mode 1 (Strobed Input/Output)
This function can be set in both group A and B. Both groups
are composed of one 8-bit data port and one 4-bit control
data port. The 8-bit port can be used as an input port or an
output port. The 4-bit port is used for control and status signals affecting the 8-bit data port. The following shows operations in mode 1 for using input ports.
ISF
STB (Strobe Input)
A low-level on this input latches the output data from the terminal units into the input register of the port. In short, this is
a clock for data latching. The data from the terminal units
can be latched by the PPI independent of the control signal
from the CPU. This data is not sent to the data bus until the
instruction I N is executed.
IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output)
A high-level on this output indicates that the data from the
terminal units has been latched into the input register. IBF is
set to high-level by the falling edge of the STB input, and is
reset to low-level by the rising edge of the RD input.
INTR (Interrupt Request Output)
This can be used to interrupt the CPU when an input device
is requesting service. When INTE (interrupt enable flag) of
the PPI is high-level, INTR is set to high-level by the rising
edge of the STB input and is reset to lOW-level by the falling
edge of RD input.
INTEA of group A is controlled by bit setting of PC 4 . INTEB of group B is controlled by bit setting of PC2.
Mode 1 input state is shown in Fig. 3, and the timing chart
is shown in Fig. 4.
RD ---r----1-----------~
INTR
PORT
_-+__--1
_________-+::=~==:
--+------_/
INPUT
:=t;;:A==~=====t===+===
LATCH
00-0,
Note 1
Fig. 4
OBF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output)
This is reset to low-level by the rising edge of the WR signal
and is set to high-level by the falling edge of the ACK
(acknowledge input). In essence, the PPI indicates to the
terminal units by the OBF signal that the CPU has sent data
to the port.
STS B
ISF B
INTRB
CONTROL WORD
RD
CONTROL WORD
07 0 6 05 0, 0, 0, 0, Do
111xlxlxixll111xl
Fig. 3
5-76
(Acknowledge Input)
INTR (Interrupt Request)
8
1/0
Timing chart
Receiving this signal from a terminal unit can indicate to the
PPI that the terminal unit has accepted data from a port.
MODE 1 (PORT S)
8
When INTE is low-level. INTR is always lOW-level.
The following shows operations using mode 1 for output
ports.
ACI<
MODE 1 (PORT A)
------~L~
When a peripheral unit is accepting data from the CPU, seting INTR to high-level can be used to interrupt the CPU.
When INTE (interrupt enable flag) is high and OBI" is set to
high-level by the rising edge of an ACK signal, then INTR
will also be set to high-level by the rising edge of the ACK
signal. Also, INTR is reset to lOW-level by the falling edge of
the WR signal when the PPI has been receiving data from
the CPU.
I NTEA of group A is controlled by bit setting of PC6.
I NTEB of group B is controlled by bit setting of PC2.
Mode 1 output state is shown in Fig. 5, and the timing
chart is shown in Fig. 6.
Combinations for using port A and port B as input or output in mode 1 are shown in Fig. 7 and Fig. 8.
An example of mode 1 input state
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP·S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
MODE 1 (PORT B)
OBFs
!lCKs
INTRs
OBF--+---"
ACK--~~---~----~
INTR
CONTROL WORD
CONTROL WORD
0, 06 05 04 03 02 0, Do
'-_-+_________--'
(Note 2)
PORT----~r_-----------
OUTPUT-----~~-------------
Illxlxlxl xillolxl
Note 2:
O=OUTPUT
Fig. 5
Mode 1 output example
PORT A (STROBED OUTPUT)
PORT B (STROBED INPUT)
Fig. 6 Timing diagram
PC,
IBFs
PCa
INTRs
PORT A (STROBED INPUT)
PORT B (STROBED OUTPUT)
PCa
CONTROL WORD
CONTROL WORD
O=OUTPUT
Fig. 7
When INTE is low-level. then the output of INTR is
aways low-level.
Mode 1 port A and port B lID example
O=OUTPUT
Fig. 8
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
Mode 1 port A and port B lID example
5-77
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
3.
Mode 2 (Strobed Bidirectional Bus Input!
Output)
Mode 2 can provide bidirectional operations, using one 8-bit
bus for communicating with terminal units. Mode 2 is only
valid with group A and uses one 8-bit bidirectional bus port
(port A) and a 5-bit control port (high-order five bits of port
C). The bus port (port A) has two internal registers, one for
input and the other for output. On the other hand, the control
port (port C) is used for communicating control signals and
bus-status signals. These control signals are similar to mode
1 and can also be used to control inte,rruption of the CPU.
When group A is programmed as mode 2, group B can be
programmed independently as mode
or mode 1. When
group A is in mode 2, the following five control signals can
be used.
a
IBF
OSF (Output Buffer Full Flag Output)
The OBF output will go low-level to indicate that the CPU
has sent data to the internal register of port A. This signal
lets the terminal units know that the data is ready for transfer
from the CPU. When this occurs, port A remains in the floating (high-impedance) state.
ACK
(Acknowledge Input)
DATA FROM
TERMINAL UNIT
PORT A
Fig, 9
DATA FROM
CPU
------~C==~<=:::::~---
Mode 2 timing diagram
Note 3:
INTR=IBF' MASK, STB'
FlD + OBF'
MASK' ACK' WR
A lOW-level ACK input will cause the data of the internal reg-
ister to be transferred to port A. For a high-level ACK input,
the output buffer will be in the floating (high-impedance)
state.
RD
WR
STB (Strobe Input)
When the STB input is low-level, the data from terminal units
will be held in the internal register, and the data will be sent
to the system data bus with an RD signal to the PPI.
IBF (Input Buffer Full Flag Output)
When data from terminal units is held on the internal register, IBF will be high level.
INTR (Interrupt Request Output)
This output is used to interrupt the CPU and its operations
the same as in mode 1. There are two interrupt enable flags
that correspond to INTEA for mode 1 output and mode 1
input.
INTEl is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with OBF and ACK. INTEl is controlled by bit setting of PC6.
INTE2 is used in generating INTR signals in combination
with IBF and STB. INTE2 is controlled by bit setting of PC4.
Fig. 9 shows the timing diagram of mode 2, and Fig. 10 is
an example of mode 2 operation.
1/0
IBFA STB A
CONTROL WORD
ACK A OBF A 1/0 INTRA
PC2~PCO
1 =INPUT
o =OUTPUT
L-._ _ _
PORT B
1 =INPUT
o=OUTPUT
L--_ _ _ _~
GROUP B MODE
O=MODEO
1 =MODE 1
Fig. 10
5-78
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
An example of mode 2 operation
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
4.
Control Signal Read
Table
In mode 1 or mode 2 when using port C as a control port, by
CPU execution of an IN instruction, each control signal and
bus status from port C can be read.
Mode
Mode 1, input
.control word formats and operation details for mode 0, mode
1, mode 2 and set/reset control of port C are given in Tables
3, 4, 5 and 6, respectively.
Table
3
Read-out control signals
A
Control Word Tables
5.
2
D7
D6
1/0
1/0
D3
D2
D,
Do
IBFA INTEA INTRA INTEB IBFB INTRB
Mode 1. output OBFA INTEA
Mode 2
D,
D5
1/0
INTRA INTEB OBFB INTRB
1/0
IBFA INTE2 INTRA
OBFA INTE,
By group B mode
Mode 0 control words
1----
Control words
J~
Group A
Group B
r._D-,-~~._~D-,_~~~_~~~2"~~d~~aI _ Port A~= Por~~;;;;;;-4b,;;! -~CU~;;;~~P~B1 a a a a a a a
80
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
1"-.--..- - - - - - -------------'r--.-----a
a
a
a
a
a
81
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
1---r----- - - - .-f--- ----------I
a a a a a 1 a...- - t--- .---82
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
- - " " - - - . - - - - - - -..
.. IN
1
a a..- a -a- a -1-.. 1
83
OUT
OUT
IN
f------.------.--.--"".
r---- --------OUT
a a a 1 a a a
88
OUT
IN
OUT
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - . - - - - ""-- - - - - - - t-------------I------~a a a 1 a a 1
89
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
---~
--.-.--.--.--~----
---~-
---~--_r-----~
~-------
--~-
-~----------t--~---
f-----a-~a·----~- o-1--a---t8-A---0l;T-~IN ------~+-----O-U-T----+----IN-- - - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - j - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---~------
a
a a a
8B
OUT
IN
IN
---~------~---------
IN
~---------
a
a a a
90
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
I----------------+----~-----t_---------+_-------~-------a
a a
91
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
a
a a
a
92
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
I--------------~-+--~----------.--.-----------------+---a
1
a
a
1
1
93
IN
OUT
IN
IN
I - - - - - - -..- -..-~----_+_- - ----.~--.. -.---.------------~-+_----__l
a 1 1 a a a
98
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
.
IN
IN
OUT
a a
a a
99
IN
..- - - -----+-------+-----------------_.._- ._-- ------ - - - - - - a a
a
a
9A
IN
IN
OUT
IN
..
-1----IN
a a
a
9B
IN
IN
IN
-------------r-~---+_------+_----------+_----------
~-
~.-
~-
----~-
Note 4:
OUT indicates output port, and IN indicates input port.
Table
4
Mode 1 control words
Control words
07
06
05
----..-~ I'
04
03
02
01
I
1
a
a
1
1
a a
1
a x
t
A4
OUT
a 1 a
1
1
a x
1
1
1
X
OBFA
I
a 1
1
a
1
1 1
1
1
a x
1
I
I
I
AC
AD
a
1
I
OUT
PC3
INTRA
~--.---
-OBFA
--ACKA I
OUT
INTRA
- -
OUT
OBFA
OBFA
I
PortB
PC;'-I- PC~ _ _ _ _
PC2
--,-AC~FB
STBB I
IN
INTRA
A<5Ks
ACKA
IN
INTRA
-STBB
IBFB
1
~-
OElFs
IBFB
i
Note 5:
6:
a
1
1
1
B4
1
INTRB
INTRB
IN
----~
OUT
IN
--
--
- -
- -
IBFA
STBALTRA
ACKB
OBFB
INTRB
OUT
IN
OUT
IBFA
STB A ·1 INTRA
-STBB
IBFB
INTRB
IN
IN
IN
IBFA
STB A
INTRB
OUT
i
BC
BD
BE
X
OUT
OUT
IN
B5
B7
1
INTRB
f-----
f-----
II~TRA
- -
ACKB
-OBFB
~-
I
INTRB
--f----
1---.
-ACKA
B6
a x
-,-
'-~
I
- -- - - - AE
OUT
AF
X
--
I
ACK A
Group B
_.
Port C
PC7
PC.
PC6
PC5
1---..
..
'~G
-_.-
~-
a 1 1 a
.------~--
porte
~-
~-
a 1 a
Group A
L
- - - - - - - - - -A5
--I
A6
a a 1 1 X GA7O U T
._-_..
I
PortA
decimal
~~-
1
Hexa- '
Do
--
I
-.-----~--
--
IN
IN
BF
IBFA
STBA
I-~
- -
INTRA
STB B
IBFB
INTRB
IN
Mode of group A and group B can be programmed independently.
It is not necessary for both group A and group B to be in mode 1.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
5-79
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
Table
5
Mode 2 control words
Group A
Control words
D7 D, Ds D, D, D2 D,
Do
1
1
X
X
X
1
1
X
X
X
1
1
X
X
X
1
1
X
X
X
1
1
X
X
X
a a a
a a 1
a 1 a
a 1 1
1 a X
1
1
X
X
X
1
Table
6
1
X
Group B
Port C
Hexadecimal
Port A
co
Bidirectional
C1
Bidirectional
C2
(Ex)
PortC
Port B
PC7
PC6
PCs
PC.
PC,
OBF A
ACK A
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
OUT
OUT
bus
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
IN
OUT
Bidirectional
bus
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
OUT
IN
C3
Bidirectional
bus
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STB A
INTRA
IN
IN
C4
Bidirectional
bus
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STBA
INTRA
ACK B [ OBFB [INTRB
OUT
C6
Bidirectional
OBFA
ACK A
IBFA
STB A
INTRA
STBB
bus
bus
PC2
I PC,
I PCa
I IBFB I INTRB
Port C set/reset control words
Port C
Control words
D7 D, D5 D, D, D2 D,
a X X
a x x
a X X
a x X
a X X
a X X
Do
Hexadecimal
PC7
PC6
PCs
PC,
Remarks
PC,
PC2
PC,
PCa
a a a
a a 1
a 1 a
a 1 1
1 a a
00
X
a
a
a
a
a
04
a
INTEs set/reset for mode 1 input
X
0
1
0
1
05
1
INTEs set/reset for mode 1 output
1
1
0
06
X
X
X
X
a
1
01
-
a
02
03
1
0
X
X
X
0
a
a
X
X
X
0
1
1
1
07
X
X
X
1
0
0
0
08
0
INTEA set/reset for mode 1 input
0
X
X
X
1
0
0
1
09
1
INTE2 set/reset for mode 2
0
X
X
X
1
0
1
0
OA
0
X
X
X
1
a
1
1
OB
0
X
X
X
1
1
a a
OC
0
INTEA set/reset for mode 1. output
0
X
X
X
1
1
0
1
00
1
INTEl set/reset for mode 2
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
0
OE
0
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
OF
1
Note 7:
8:
5-80
0
1
a
1
--
The terminais of port C should be programmed for the output mode, before the bit set/reset operation is executed.
Also used lor controlling the interrupt enabie Ilag(INTE)
•. MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
IN
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CSSAP-S
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL INTERFACE
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
1----Vee
~--
Parameter
Conditions
-- -
- -
Unit
-V
Limits
Supply voltage
-0.3-7
---
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
T opr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
With respect to GND
V
,--
---~
--
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
Symbol
Parameter
--
Vee
Supply voltage
GND
Supply voltage
-~
V
-20-75
'C
-65-150
'C
(T a =-20-75'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
-,----Min
Nom
4.5
----
,--~
5
I---~
Unit
Max
5.5
V
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
(T a =-20-75'C, Vee=5V±10%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Test conditions
Unit
~==Vv=',HL=====:~=H=i9=h=-I=e=ve=l=in=p=u=t=v=ol=ta=g=e======================:===============--,_-~~~_-,-_~===-_-_=- r-.:._M_20·_.i:3-+--T-y-P-+V--=C~0;.~80.3
-~--Vv~·~l-
__
Low-level input voltage
~----'+-:-~-::-~-:-~o-i:-h-v:-~t-1:-:9-:---=(-N-o_t-e~'_o~)~~~-~~~__~-__-~=_=_=-__~~_J_>_:_~=_;~-,-:_:-_~-A_,,_A--~~=_-_-=-_-_-_-=~-~-------==-+t------2=.-4----++------------_~f--_-O-.-,~-__
5-- ~_--_-~
__ _
lee
I GND=OV, All input mode,
RESET=OV, Other pins=Vce,
Supply current from Vee
1----+---------------------------+--------------
'a
/-lA
------ ----+----+--------
I'L
Input leak current
GND=OV, V,=OV, Vee
±10 ___~
loz
Off-state output current
GND=OV, VI=O--VCC
±10
J-lA
Cilo
Input/output terminal capacitance
VIIOL=GND, f=1 MHz, 25mVrms, T a=25"C
20
pF
I - - - = - = - - + - - - - - - - = - - - - - - - - - - - - - - f - - ---------------+---+-----+--------------~-----_t-I-np-u-t-e-a-p-ac-i-ta-n-c-e--,-----------__+_V,L_=_G_N_D:f,",,' M~z:25m~r_m:!~=_25_o_C__ ___________ ~_~_
Note 9
Current flowing into an IC is positive, out is negative.
10: IOH current must be less than -4mA for each Port pin.
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a =-20-75'C, Vcc=5V±10%, GND=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
Limits
Test conditions
symbol
Min
Unit
Max
300 [200)
tWCR)
Read pulse width
tSUCPE~R)
Peripheral setup time before read
t'R
a
the R~PE)
Peripheral hold time after read
tHR
0
tSU(A-R)
Address setup time before read
tAR
a
th(R-A)
Address hold time after read
tRA
0
tw.01
As
06
Os
I
I
I LTIM
0,
04
ADI
SNGL
I IC4 I
0,
0,
Do
J
(Note 1)
J
1
Note I
I
I
SINGLE
CASCADE MODE
JI: ICW4 NEEDED
0: NO ICW4 NEEDED
I
I
8085A ONLY
ICW1
.1 VECTOR ADDRESS HIGH-ORDER BITS
I (A15- A8)OR INTERRUPT TYPE (T,-T,)
I
I
I
I
I A15/T71 A14/T61 A13/Tsl A12/T41
Ao
07
06
04
Os
AI1IT,
AlO
Ag
0,
0,
0,
I
I
A8
I
Do
ICW2
II
I
I
I
Ao
I
S7
0,
IRn INPUT HAS A SLAVE
IRn INPUT DOES NOT HAVE A SLAVE
LO
I
S6
I
I
Ss
I
Os
06
S4
04
I
S,
s,
s,
0,
0,
0,
I
I
So
Do
I
SLAVE IDENTIFICATION CODE
ICW3 (MASTER DEVICE)
0
0
0
0
II
I
AD
I
0
0,
I
o
I
06
o
Os
I
o
04
I
0
102
0,
0,
I
10,
0,
I
I
100
I 2 3 4 5 6
0 0 0 I I I
0 I I 0 0 I
I 0 I 0 I 0
7
I
I
I
J
Do
ICW3 (SLAVE DEVICE)
JI: SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE
LO
0
X
NON BUFFERED MODE
I
0
BUFFERED MODE/SLAVE
I
1
BUFFERED MODE/MASTER
NOT SPECIAL FULLY NESTED MODE
J 1:
L0:
J I:
10:
I
I
Ao
I
0
0,
I
0
06
I
0
Os
I SFNM I BUF
04
0,
I
M/S
0,
I AEOI I ,uPM I
0,
Do
ICW4
Fig. 3
5-92
Initialization command word format
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
AEOI MODE
NORMAL EOI MODE
8086, 8088 MODE
8085A MODE
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
=0 in ICW4. In the slave mode, three bits 102~IOD identify
the slave. And then when the slave code released on the
cascade lines from the master, matches the assigned 10
code, the vectored address is released by it onto the data
bus at the next INTA pulse.
M5M82C59AP, the device is ready to accept interrupt requests. There are three types of OCW s; explanation of each
follows, and the format of oews is shown in Fig. 4.
OCW1
The meaning of the bits of OCWl are explained in Fig. 4
along with their functions. Each bit of 1M R can be independently changed (set or reset) by OeWl.
ICW4
Only when IC4 = 1 in ICWl is ICW4 valid. Otherwise all bits
are set to zero. When ICW4 is valid it specifies special fully
nested mode, buffer mode master/slave, automatic EOI and
microprocessor mode. The format of ICW4 is shown in Fig. 3.
OCW2
The OeW2 is used for issuing EOI commands to the
M5M82C59AP and for changing the priority of the interrupt
request inputs.
Operation Command Words (OCWs )
OCW3
The operation command words are used to change the contents of IMR, the priority of interrupt request inputs and the
special mask. After the ICW are programmed into the
The OeW3 is used for specifying special mask mode, poll
mode and status register read.
, - - - - - - - - . - - , - - - - - - - , - - - , - - - r - - , - - - - - , - - - - - - - - f 1:
INTERRUPT MASK SET
INTERRUPT MASK RESET
0:
OCW1
0
0
1 NON-SPECIFIC EOI
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1 0
1 0
0
ROTATE ON NON-SPECIFIC EOI
SETS AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP
} AUTOMATIC ROTATION
RESET AUTOMATIC ROTATION FLIP-FLOP
ROTATE ON SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BIT L2-Lol
0
I
R
I
SL
} SPECIFIC ROTATION
SETS PRIORITY COMMAND (SET LOWEST PRIORITY BIT L2-Loi
NO OPERATION
~
I
IB
} EOI
SPECIFIC EOI (RESETS ISR BITS L,-Lol
ID LEVEL TO BE ACTED UPON
EOI
Ao
I
0
I
0
I
L,
I
I
L,
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1
0 I 0 1 0 1 0
I
I
Lo
7
1
1
1
I
Do
05
OCW2
0
1
X
NO OPERATION
0
RESET SPECIAL MASK MODE
1
1
SETS SPECIAL MASK MODE
11
I0
0
1
1
I
0
Ao
I
0
ESMM
I SMM I
D,
D5
0
I
1
D3
I
I
P
D2
I
RR
D,
I
POLL COMMAND
NO POLL COMMAND
X
NO OPERATION
0
SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN IRR
1
SETS STATUS READ REGISTER IN ISR
I
RIS
I
Do
OCW3
Fig. 4
Operation command word format
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-93
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
FUNCTION OF COMMAND
Interrupt masks
The mask register contains a mask for each individual interrupt request. These interrupt masks can be changed by
programming using OCWl.
Special mask mode
When an interrupt request is acknowledged and the ISR bit
corresponding to the interrupt request is not reset by EOI
command (which means an interrupt service routine is
executing) lower priority interrupt requests are ignored.
In special mask mode interrupt requests received at interrupt request inputs which are masked by OCWI are disabled, but interrupts at all levels that are not masked are
possible. This means that in the mask mode all level of interrupts are possible or individual inputs can be selectively
programmed so all interrupts at the selected inputs are disabled. The masks are stored in IMR and special mask is
set/reset by executing OCW3.
2. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced
the software must check ISR to determine if there are
additional interrupts requests to be serviced. If the ISR
bit is 0 the EOI command may be sent to the master too.
But if it is not 0 the EOI command should not be sent to
the master.
Poll mode
The poll mode is useful when the internal enable flip-flop of
the microprocessor is reset, and interrupt input is disabled.
Service to the device is a.chieved by a programmer initiative
using a poll command. In the poll mode the M5M82C59AP at
the next RD pulse puts 8 bits on the data bus which indicates whether there is an interrupt request and reads the
priority level. The format of the information on the data bus is
as shown below.
Buffered mode
Binary code of the highest priority
The buffered mode will structure the M5M82C59AP to send
an enable signal on SP/EN to enable the data bus buffer,
when the data bus requires the data bus buffer or when cascading mode is used. In this mode, when data bus output of
the M5M82C59AP is enabled, the SP/EN output becomes
low-level. This allows the M5M82C59AP to be programmed
whether it is a master or a slave by software. The buffered
mode is set/reset by executing ICW4.
Fully nested mode
The fully ne.sted mode is the mode when no mode is specified and is the usual operational mode. In this mode, the
priority of interrupt request terminals is fixed from the lowest
IR7 to the highest IR o. When an interrupt request is acknowledged the CALL instruction and vectored address are released onto the data b'Js. At the same time the ISR bit corresponding to the accepted interrupt request is set. This ISR
bit remains set until it is reset by the input of an EOI command or until the trailing edge of last INTA pulse in AEOI
mode. While an interrupt service routine is being executed,
interrupt requests of same or lower priority are disabled
while the bit of ISR remains set. The priorities can be
changed by OCW2.
Special fully nested mode
The special fully nested mode will be used when cascading
is used and this mode will be programmed to the master by
ICW4. The special fully nested mode is the same as the fully
nested mode with the following two exceptions.
1. When an interrupt from a certain slave is being serviced.
this slave is not locked out from the master priority logic.
Higher priority interrupts within the slave will be recognized by the master and the master will initiate an interrupt request to the CPU. In general in the normal fully
nested mode, a serviced slave is locked out from the
master's priority, and so higher priority interrupts from the
same slave are not serviced.
5-94
D,
When 1=0 (no interrupt request), W2-WO is 111. The poll
is valid from WR to RD and interrupt is frozen. This mode
can be used for processing common service routines for interrupts from more than one line and does not require any
INTA sequence. Poll command is issued by setting P= 1 in
OCW3.
End of interrupt (EO I) and specific EOI (SEOI)
An EOI command is required by the M5M82C59AP to reset
the ISR bit. So an EOI command must be issued to the
M5M82C59AP before returning from an interrupt service
routine.
When AEOI is selected in ICW4, the ISR bit can be reset
at the trailing edge of the last INTA pulse. When AEOI is not
selected the ISR bit is reset by the EOI command issued to
the M5M82C59AP before returning from an interrupt service
routine. When programmed in the cascade mode the EOI
command must be issued to the master once and to corresponding slave once.
There are two forms of EOI command, specific EOI and
non-specific EOL When the M5M82C59AP is used in the fully
nested mode, the ISR bit being serviced is reset by the EOI
command. When the non-specific EOI is issued the
M5M82C59AP will automatically reset the highest ISR bit of
those that are set. Other ISR bits are reset by a specific EOI
and the bit to be reset is specified in the EOI by the program. The SEOI is useful in modes other than fully nested
mode. When the M5M82C59AP is in special mask mode ISR
bits masked in IMR are not reset by EOL EOI and SEOI are
selected when OCW2 is executed.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Automatic EOI (AEOI)
In the AEOI mode the M5M82C59AP executes non-specific
EOI command automatically at the trailing edge of the last
INTA pulse. When AEOI=l in ICW4, the M5M82C59AP is put
in AEOI mode continuously until reprogrammed in ICW4.
Automatic rotation
The automatic rotation mode is used in applications where
many interrupt requests of the same level are expected
such as multichannel communication systems. In this mode
when an interrupt request is serviced. that request is
assigned the lowest priority so that if there are other interrupt requests they will have higher priorities. This means
that the next request on the interrupt request being serviced
must wait until the other interrupt requests are serviced
(worst case is waiting for all 7 of the other controllers to be
serviced) . The priority and serving status are rotated as
shown in Fig. 5.
BEFORE ROTATION
(IR3 THE HIGHEST PRIORITY
REQUIRING SERVICE)
IS 7
ISR STATUS
Is,;
a
I
HIGHEST PRIORITY
i
I
AFTER ROTATION
(IR3 WAS SERVICED AND ALL OTHER
PRIORITIES ROTATED CORRESPONDINGLY)
~
ISR STATUS
a
~
I I
1&
I~
I~
I~
1&
I~
LOWEST PRIORITY
PRIORITY
STATUS
Fig. 5
Level triggered mode/Edge triggered mode
Selection of level or edge triggered mode of the
M5M82C59AP is made by ICW1, When using edge triggered
mode not only is a transition from low to high required, but
the high-level must be held until the first INTA. If the highlevel is not held until the first INTA, the interrupt request will
be treated as if it were input on IR7, except that the ISR bit
is not set. When level triggered mode is used the functions
are the same as edge triggered mode except that the transition from low to high is not required to trigger the interrupt
request.
In the level triggered mode and using AEOI mode
together, if the high-level is held too long the interrupt will
occur immediately. To avoid this situation interrupts should
be kept disabled until the end of the service routine or until
the IR input returns low. In the edge. triggered mode this
type of mistake is not possible because the interrupt request
is edge triggered.
Reading the M5M82C59AP internal status
IS,
LOWEST PRIORITY
PRIORITY
STATUS
lowest or highest priority. Priority changes can be executed
during an EOI command.
!
An example of priority rotation
In the non-specific EOI command automatic rotation mode is
selected when R=l, EOI=l, SL=O in OCW2. The internal
priority status is changed by EOI or AEOI commands. The
rotation priority A flip-flop is set by R=l, EOI=O and SL=O
which is useful when the M5M82C59AP is used in the AEOI
mode.
Specific rotation
Specific rotation gives the user versatile capabilities in interrupt controlled operations. It serves in those applications in
wh,ich a specific device's interrupt priority must be altered.
As opposed to automatic rotation which automatically sets
priorities, specific rotation is completely user controlled.
That is, the user selects the interrupt level that is to receive
The contents of IRR and ISR can be read by the CPU with
status read. When an OCW3 is issued to the M5M82C59AP
and an RD pulse issued the contents of IRR or ISR can be
released onto the data bus. A special command is not required to read the contents of IMR. The contents of IMR can
be released onto the data bus by issuing an RD pulse when
Ao = 1. There is no need to issue a read register command
every time the IRR or ISR is to be read. Once a read register command is received by the M5M82C59AP, it remains
valid until it is changed. Remember that the programmer
must issue a poll command every time to check whether
there is an interrupt request and read the priority level. Polling overrides status read when P=l, RR=l in OCW3.
Cascading
The M5M82C59AP can be interconnected in a system of one
master with up to eight slaves to handle up to 64 priority
levels. A system of three units that can be used with the
8085A is shown in Fig. 6.
The master can select a slave by outputting its identification code through the three cascade lines. The INT output of
each slave is connected to the master interrupt request inputs. When an interrupt request of one of the slaves is to be
serviced the master outputs the identification code of the
slave through the cascade lines, so the slave will release
the vectored address on the next INTA pulse.
The cascade lines of the master are nomally low, and will
contain the slave identification code from the leading edge
of the first INTA pulse to the trailing edge of the last INTA
pulse. The master and slave can be programmed to work in
different modes. ICWs must be issued for each device, and
EOI commands must be issued twice: once for the master
and once for the corresponding slave. Each CS of the
M5M82C59AP requires an address decoder.
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
5-95
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
16
ADDRESS BUS
CONTROL BUS
DATA BUS
8
3
3
3
8
8
cs
8
I
INT
Ao
M5M82C59AP
MASTER
CS
1
CASo
CAS,
i
Vee
7
6
lcs
INT
CAS,
! 1l3! r !
I
INT
Ao
CASo
CASo
SP/EN M, M, M5 M, M, M, M,Mo
I
Ao
CAS,
CAS,
M5M82C59AP
SLAVE
SP/EN
7 6
~
-----
3
5 4
2 1 0
SP/EN
tl!!tl!!
GrD
CAS,
CAS,
GlD
M5M82C59AP
SLAVE
765 4 3 2 1 0
~!ll!!r!
~------------------------------~y~--------------------------------~--
INTERRUPT REQUEST INPUTS
Fig. 6
Cascading the M5M82C59AP
DEN
DATA BUS
ADDRESS BUS
Do -D,
(Note 1) ADo- AD,
RD OR-I
ORC
WRORroWC
INTA
M/TO
8
Do-D,
~ Ao
Ao
A,
A,
A,
A5
I
,..
.......
...... y
y
....
.Joo.. ...
....
A"
A,
-
II
RB
cs
=
M,"""~[ -
-
Fig. 7
5-96
OE
TO BUS BUFFER
iNfA
:;::
:;::
<.n
REQUEST
INPUTS
Note 1:
5v
WR SP/EN
LS30
)0---<
INTR
INT
CD
-~
'"0<.n
IRo
."
IR,
IR,
IR,
IR5
IR,
IR,
Do-D, of the M5M82C59AP are direct connected with ADo-AD, of the 8086.
Example of interface with the 8086
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
INSTRUCTION SET
Item
~
Instruction code
Mnemonic
Function
Ao
07
06
Os
0,
03
O2
0,
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
As
As
As
As
0
0
0
0
As
As
As
As
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
Do ICW4 required?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ICW1
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
ICWI
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
a
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
A7
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17
18
19
ICW2
ICW3 M
ICW38
1
1
1
A,s
87
0
A,4
86
0
A13
8s
0
A,2
84
0
A"
83
0
AlO
82
102
Ag
8,
10,
As
80
100
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
ICW4 A
ICW4 B
ICW4 C
ICW4D
ICW4 E
ICW4 F
ICW4 G
ICW4 H
ICW4 I
ICW4 J
ICW4 K
ICW4 L
ICW4 M
ICW4 N
ICW40
ICW4 P
ICW4 NA
ICW4 NB
ICW4 NC
ICW4 NO
ICW4 NE
ICW4 NF
ICW4 NG
ICW4 NH
ICW4 NI
ICW4 NJ
ICW4 NK
ICW4 NL
ICW4 NM
ICW4 NN
ICW4 NO
ICW4 NP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
0
0
0
a
0
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
0
0
1
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
OCWI
OCW2 E
OCW28E
OCW2 RE
OCW2 R8E
OCW2 R
OCW2 CR
OCW2 R8
OCW3 P
OCW3 RI8
OCW3 RR
OCW38M
OCW3 RSM
1
0
64
Note:
0
a
a
a
0
a
a
0
a
0
a
a
a
0
a
a
a
0
0
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
a
a
a
a
M7
0
0
1
1
1
M6
0
1
0
0
a
1
a
a
1
a
a
a
0
1
1
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
a
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
0
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
a
1
1
1
1
0
a
a
a
1
1
1
1
a
1
1
a
a
1
1
a
a
1
1
0
a
1
1
a
1
0
1
a
1
a
1
a
1
0
1
a
1
a
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
0
a
a
a
0
a
a
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
0
a
0
1
1
1
1
a
1
1
a
M4
M3
M2
M,
Mo
L2
0
L2
L,
La
0
La
0
0
L2
1
0
L,
0
1
1
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
0
0
0
0
a
Ms
1
1
1
1
0
0
a
a
0
0
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
a
a
0
a
0
0
0
a
1
1
1
1
1
a
a
0
a
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
a
0
a
a
a
1
1
a
a
1
1
a
a
1
1
0
a
a
L,
a
a
a
1
0
1
a
1
0
1
a I
1
a
Intervel
Single
Trigger
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
Y
Y
Y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
E
L
N
N
y
y
N
N
y
y
N
N
4
BUF
AEOI
8086
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
y
y
1
a
a
1
a
a
a
Y
Y
8FNM
y
y
La
N
N
8-bit vectored address
Slave connections (master mode)
Slave identification code (slave mode)
1
0
1
a
-
8
8
8
Y 8
Y M
y
M
y M
y M
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
y 8
Y 8
y 8
y 8
y M
y M
Y M
y M
Y
Y
N
N
y
y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
y
y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
--
.
Y .
__
N
N
Y
N
y
N
II
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
.-
Interrupt mask
EOI
SEOI
Rotate
o~
Non-Specific EOI command (Automatic rotation)
Rotate on Specific EOI command (Specific rotation)
Rotate in AEOI Mode (SET)
Rotate in AEOI Mode (CLEAR)
Set priority without EOl
Y: yes, N: no, E: edge, L: level, M: master, S: slave
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
5-97
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Power-supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
TsIg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
With respect to Vss
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
limits
Unit
-0.3-7
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-0. 3-Vee+0. 3
V
-20-75
°C
-65-150
°C
(Ta=-20-75°C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage
Nom
Max
5.5
5
4.5
V
V
0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(T a=-20-75°C, Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Test conditions
Typ
Min
V'H
High-level input voltage
2
V'L
Low-level input voltage
-0.3
V OH
High-level output voltage
VOH(INT)
IOH=-400"A
2.4
IOH=-100"A
3.5
IOH=-400"A
2.4
Max
Vcc+ O. 3
0.8
Low-level output voltage
IOL=2.2mA
Icc
Standby supply current from Vee
Vcc=5.5V, V,=Vcc or GND output open
V
V
V
High-level output voltage, interrupt request output
VOL
V
0.45
V
10
/-lA
I'H
High-level input current
V(==Vcc
-10
10
/-lA
III
Low-level input current
V,=OV
-10
10
/-lA
loz
Off-state output current
Vss=O, VI=O---..VCC
-10
10
/-lA
IIH(IR)
High-level input current, lnterrupt request inputs
Vl=VCC
10
/-lA
'IUIA)
Low-level input current, interrupt request inputs
V,=OV
Ci
Input capacitance
Vcc=Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C
10
pF
Ci/o
Input/output capacitance
Vcc=Vss, 1=1 MHz, 25mVrms, Ta=25°C
20
pF
TIMING REQUIREMENTS
/-lA
-300
(T a=-20-75°C , Vcc =5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Alternative
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Symbol
Typ
Min
Max
1wcw)
Write pulse width
tWLWH
290(200)
ns
1SUCA-W)
Address setup time before write
1AHWL
0
ns
Ih(w-Al
Address hold time after write
tWHAX
0
ns
TSUCDO-W)
Data setup time before write
tOVWH
240(100)
ns
Ih(w-oQ)
Data hold time after write
tWHDX
0
ns
IW(RI
Read pulse width
tALRH
235 (200)
ns
tSU(A-A)
Address setup time before read
tAHRL
0
ns
Ih(R-Al
Address hold time after read
tRHAX
0
ns
tW(IR)
Interrupt request input width, low·level time, edge triggered mode
tJLJH
100
ns
tSU(CAS-INTA)
Cascade setup time after INTA (slave)
tCVIAL
55
ns
IreC(wl
Write recovery time
tWHRL
190
ns
treCCR)
Read recovery time
tRHRL
160
ns
tCHCL
500
ns
End of Command to next Command (Not same Command type)
Id(Rw)
End of INTA sequence to next INTA sequence.
5-98
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Ta=-20-75°C, Vcc=5V±10%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Alternative
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Symbol
Typ
Min
Max
200 [1 70)
ns
lOa
ns
200[170)
ns
tRLEL
125
ns
Propagation time from read to disable signal output
tRHEH
150
ns
t pLH ( IR-INT)
Propagation time from interrupt request input to interrupt request output
tJHIH
350
ns
tPLV{INTA-CAS)
Propagation time from INTA to cascade output (master)
tlALGV
565
ns
tPZV(CAS_OQ)
Data output enable time after cascade output (slave)
tCVDV
300
ns
tPZV(R-DQ)
Data output enable time after read
tRLDV
tPVZ(R_DQ)
Data output disable time after read
tRHDZ
tPZV(A_OQ)
Data output enable time after address
tAHDV
tPHLCR-EN)
Propagation time from read to enable signal output
tPLH(R-EN)
Note 1
2
M5M82C59AP is also invested with the extended specification showed in the brackets,
INTA signal is considered read signal
CS signal is considered address signal
Input pulse level
0,45-2, 4V
2 4
Input pulse rise time
10ns
' ~2
Input pulse fall time
10ns
Reference level Input
V'H=2V, VIL =0, 8V
0,45
0,8
Output VoH=2V, VoL =0,8'L_
Load capacitance
C L =100pF, where SP!EN
pin is 15pF
10
x=
2
0,8
TIMING DIAGRAM
Write Mode
CS, Ao
IJ
K
}
th(W-Al
tSU(A-W)
~I--
\
~
I--
/--
tW{w)
...,~
--
thlw-DQI
tSU(DQ-wl
~~
0,-00
I--
~K
Read Mode
CS, Ao
)(
thlR-Ai
tSU{A_R\
tW(Rl
\
K
.J
jI
k-
tpVZ(R-OQ)
tPZV(A-OQ)
tpZV{A-OO)
mf--
0,-00
~\
~ktpHl(R-ENJ
1//
tPLH(R-EN)
I
\
r-
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
5-99
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Interrupt Sequence
IR
(Note 1)
INT
(Note 3)
07- 0 0
tpLV(INTA-CAS)
1<
CA&,,-CASo
Other Timing
WR
RO
INTA
/
tdlRw)
WR
RO
INTA
Note 1
8086, 8088 mode
2 : 8085A mode
3 : 8086,8088 mode is in high-impedance state, pointer is released during the next INTA.
When in single 8085A mode, data ~~eased by all INTAs. When master, CALL instruction is released during the first INTA, high impedance state during the second and
third INTA. When slave, high impedance state during the first INTA, vectored address
is released during the second and third INTA.
5-100
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
(Note 2)
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSM82CS9AFP
CMOS PROGRAMMABLE INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The M5M82C59AFP is a programmable LSI for interrupt control. It is fabricated using silicon-gate CMOS technology and
is designed to be used easily in connection with an 8085A,
8086 or 8088.
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
CHIP
ST~~8t CS~
1
~~~f WR ~
2
CONTROL
CONTROL
I~~~
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage
TTL compatible
CALL instruction to the CPU is generated automatically
Priority, interrupt mask and vectored address for each interrupt request input are programmable
Up to 64 levels of interrupt requests can be controlled by
cascading with M5M82C59AFP
Vee (5V)
27 ~ ~ ~~T~~~tWPUT
26 ~INTA ACKNOWLEDGE
RD ~ 3
07- 4
INPUT
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
INPUTS
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
19
~IR,
18 -IRo
17 -INT
INTERRUPT
~~~~~~T
16 -SP/EN ~~Hn~~LrrM
BUFFER OUTPUT
Polling functions
Packaged in flat small outline package
15 -.. _ _ _ _ _..r-
CAS,
CASCADE
LINES
APPLICATION
The M5M82C59AFP can be used as an interrupt controller
for CPUs 8085A, 8086 and 8088
FUNCTION
The M5M82C59AFP is a device specifically designed for use
in real time, interrupt driven microcomputer systems. It manages eight level requests and has built-in features for expandability to other M5M82C59AFP's. The priority and interrupt mask can be changed or reconfigured at any time by
the main program.
When an interrupt is generated because of an interrupt
Outline
28P2W
request at 1 of the pins, the M5M82C59AFP based on the
mask and priority will output an INT to the CPU. After that,
when an INTA signal is received from the CPU or the system controller, a CALL instruction and a programmed vector
address is released onto the data bus.
Refer
to
M5M82C59AP
for
detail
information.
compatible
with
M5M82C59AFP's
specifications
are
M5M82C59AP. Only package outline is different.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
,..----- - - - -
--- - --- - --- -
----,
INTERRUPT
ACK~OWLEDGE INPUT
INTERRUPT
REQUEST OUTPUT
INTA
CONTROL LOGIC
BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUS
2 WR WRITE CONTROL INPUT
INTERRUPT
REQUEST INPUTS
3 RD READ CONTROL INPUT
27
;1:
Ao ADDRESS INPUT
~:;}HI:A::~E:: ~:E:T
15 CAS,
'-----{liS SP/EN
- - - - --_. - - - - -
--- -
• MITSUBISHI
IIhtt.ELECTRIC
----"
SLAVE PROGRAM INPUT!
ENABLE BUFFER OUTPUT
5-101
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MS8992P
CMOS CRT CONTROLLER
DESCRIPTION
The M58992P is a raster scan type CRT interface device,
fabricated using silicon gate CMOS technology. This LSI is
a one-chip type high-performance video display generator
having the timing signal generator and attribute circuits required for CRT display so as to allow system configuration
with a small number of components.
FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Single 5V supply voltage.
Can generate· video display using simple external
circuit
10 programmable display modes
Some mode conditionally allows mixed use with other
mode.
Color display is programmable to use either 8 or 16
colors.
The R, G and B Signals are provided as video output
signals.
•
•
Can superimpose on TV screen
A 16K or 64K DRAM is used as the video RAM under
control of the built-in DRAM controller.
•
The video RAM area can be used concurrently for storage of display data and microprocessor program.
Paging and scrolling are possible.
Cursor control; blinking, blanking, underline and reverse
characters are possible.
Light pen input control function is provided.
Various interrupts generating function is provided.
•
•
•
•
APPLICATION
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
(OV)V55
DAD 7 2
DAD.- 3
MULTIPLEXED DADs DRAM
DAD, ADDRESS/DATA DAD3 BUS
5
6
DAD 2 -
7
ROW ADDRESS DADo STROBE OUTPUT RAS -
10
~~~g~~ ~~~~G~S
CAS -
WRITE ENABLE
OU:~:O
WE -
OUTPUTS
9
I~: :
B-15
1- 16
17
CLOCK M
19
MClK -
47 --+ READY READY OUTPUT
SYSTEM CLOCK ClK --+ 20
BD~~G~G
LIGHT PEN
STROBE INPUT
BLANK - 21
l TPEN --+ 22
~~~~~K{6~
RASTER ADDRESS
24
25
26
CODE DATA jCDRD, READ OUTPUTS) CDRD 2 _
27
OUTPUTS
46 -
~ft~g1~~8fDE CAL T HORIZONTAL HSYNC _
SYNCHRONIZE - OUTPUT
VSYNC -
~~~~r~nUTPUT
CHIP SELECT
INPUT
READ INPUT
WRITE INPUT
28
DATA BUS
29
30
31
(Ov) v 55
OUTPUT
Outline
The information or data to be displayed on the screen is
written in the video RAM by the microprocessor. The
M58992P can read the video RAM in the order of the CRT
scan, and can generate synchronization signal for a CRT.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
RESET RESET INPUT
45 --+ I NTR
44 - loiM IO/MEMORY INPUT
RAo _ 23
IRA, RA2 RA3 _
FUNCTION
5-102
ADDRESS BUS
11
12
BURST OUTPUT BRST CLOCK B
~~~~~~6NIZE
Display unit using home TV set or monitor TV set
4
64P48
DAD,
DAD.
DAD,
DADo
DAD?
DAD,
DAD3
DAD,
Y'-.
'-'-. '-.
I
'-
'-.
CDRD,
CALT
CDRD,
RAo RA, RA, RA3
CAS
RAS
'-
I
WE
'-.
'-.
'-. YY
'-.
'-
'-.
BLANK VSYNC
BRST
HSYNC
'-c
'-
'-c
R
'-
G
B
'--
'--
~
IV
I
,.
"':I
1""-
"'-I
(")(1)
-Ie::
!
A,
)
\
A,
A,
C=;iii
A?
COLOR
INTERFACE
ENCODER
~
r--
\
)
A3
A.
SYNCHRONIZE
16
8
1
)
J
/
J
~
:>0
0
VIDEO ADDRESS
AND TIMING
GENERATOR
::c
X
I---
START
DISPLAY
COMMAND COLOR
ADDRESS MODE
REGISTER REGISTER
REGISTER REGISTER
I---~
VIDEO AND
ATTRIBUTE
DATA
CONTROLLER
8
8
III
(fJ
:;
III
A9
/
."
A10
;;
A"
'!
A12
'/
A'3
~
A,.
~:;
A15
STATUS
REGISTER
joE
~~GG~~~~NI-
LTPEN
m
(fJ
(fJ
c
As
J
~
A,
::10m
=
\
Ao
M
DAD BUS COMMAND
AND CHARACTER
GENERATOR INTERFACE
DRAM INTERFACE
..
8
J
."
m
::c
/ 8
MICROPROCESSOR
COMMAND DECODER
DATA BUS BUFFER
L.....-
8
.. INTERNALBUS
. ..
c
I
IIIII111
MICROPROCESSOR
BUS INTERFACE
It III
"-./"....-/~"--./'-...-/
D~
D~
D~
D~
D~
D~
D~
D~
WR
RD CS
loiM
RESET
CLOCK AND
INTERNAL TIMING
GENERATOR
J
(")
s:0
(I)
(")
1
I I
I I
--0----@-0
45 I-{ 47
~ ~
INTR READY
::10
-I
CLK BCLK MCLK
Vss
Vss
Vee
J
(")
0
z
-I
::10
0
r
r
U1
I
'::10"
Cl
W
I
s:
i: ~
CII c:
GO !
U)
U)
(I)
N
r
-a
:5
~
MITSUBISHI LSls
MS8992P
CMOS CRT CONTROLLER
PIN DESCRIPTION
Pin
DAD7~
DADo
Name
Multiplexed
DRAM address
RAS
strobe output
Column address
-~
CAS
Input/output
Idata bus
Row address
-~
Input/output
strobe output
Functions
Causes data input from DRAM or data output for writing in DRAM by output of mltiplexed row and col-
umn address to DRAM.
~
Output
DRAM address input is latched at falling edge of RAS.
Output
DRAM address input is latched at falling edge of CAS.
Output
Data from microprocessor is written in DRAM when this signal is "L".
~
WE
Write enable output
R
Video output R
G
Video output G
B
Video output B
TTL level output of video signals R, G and 8.
Output
-~
Auxiliary output for R, G and B. By externC\1 Combination with R, G and B, up to 16 colors can be disVideo output luminance
I
played.
1= "H" indicates high luminance.
BRST
Burst output
Output
BClK
Clock B
Output
MClK
Clock M
Output
ClK
System clock
--BLANK
Blanking output
lTPEN
Light pen strobe input
Signal to indicate color burst signal position or sUb-carrier frequency phase-modulated by RGB in case
of NTSC system.
Frequency at 114 of clock input. Subcarrier frequency in NTSC color system.
--
RA3~
RAo
--CDRD1
--CDRD2
CAlT
Input
Output
Input
Internal timing clock. Indicates DRAM access by the M58992P for display when this signal is "L" in the
text 1, text 2, graphic 1, graphic 2, graphic 3 or graphic 5 mode.
14.31818MHz for display using NTSC system.
Indicates around the synchronizing pulse in horizontal or vertical blanking period of the M58992P.
Signal to latch internal address value.
Character generator
raster address
Output
Least significant 4 bits of address for use of character generater to be used in text mode.
outputs
Signal to control external circuit for input of display code pattern to the M58992P.
Code data read outputs
Output
---
--~
CDRD1 is the timing for direct data input from DRAM to the M58992P, and CDRD2 is the timing for input
from character generator.
Character code
latch output
Output
Signal to cause external latching of character generator pointer output from DRAM.
-
--HSYNC
---VSYNC
5-104
Horizontal
synchronize 'putput
Vertical
Open drain
output
Setting synchronizing signal input mode by command causes no generation of internal synchronizing
nal but internal counter reset by external signal.
synchronize output
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
sig~
MITSUBISHI LSls
MS8992P
CMOS CRT CONTROLLER
PIN DESCR1P11ON (CONTINUED)
Pin
Input/output
Name
Functions
1------1----------1-----_+------------------.-------------------------1
DB7~DBo
Data bus
Input/output
Data bus DB, : MSB
-~
WR
_._----,
Write input
Input
_.
Function
t-----
CS
101M
RD
WR
r----------------~--~----r---~-------
No LSI selection
-
RD
Read input
Input
DRAM Read
--
.-
DRAM Write
-
CS
Chip select input
Input
The M58992P register read
--
The M58992P register write
-
101M
IO/memory input
Input
The M58992P starts DRAM access or internal register read/write upon CS.
f-----+------.----+----~------
INTR
Interrupt request output
Output
----~.---
.. ----
Interrupt request output generated for any of four reasons in the M58992P can be masked. The status
register detects the type of interrupt. The INTR signal is reset upon status read.
f------I-------+---~-_+------------------------------------
RESET
Reset input
Input
The M58992P system reset signal to initialize various registers.
- - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .-
READY
Ready output
Output
Normally "H" signal. Goes to "L" upon selection of DRAM and returns to "H" upon completion of DRAM
read/write. This signal provides synchronism with the microprocessor.
I-~-~--+--------~I----+------------------------------
Address bus
Input
- -.... ---
Address input on the microprocessor side.
A15 is the MSB. Ao to A3 are used for register reading or writing.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
5-105
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MS8992P
CMOS CRT CONTROLLER
Table 1 The M58992P display mode list
8X8 dots
2000
16 bits/
FG:
aX10 dots
16 colors
BG:
8 colors
aX8 dots
BD:
16 colors
allowed.
character
(8 bits for
character
and 8'bits
for color
1600
Border colo
designation,
Unused
4000
designa-
tion)
2X2 dots
3200
FG:
1 block:
blinking
possible
without
flickering.
may be dis-
Always
ignated in
possible
character
Flickering is
caused at
units.
other than
blinking.
MSB 4 bits,
4 bits/dot
BG color
16 colors
X30 lines
40 characters
X24 lines
80 characters
X30 lines
80 characters
X24 lines
160H
8000
16 colors
BD:
Multiple
Always
2400
1920
positions
Unused
etc.
8X10 dots
1 block:
Cursor
X120V
4800
3840
9600
Unused
Always
16000
2Xl dots
Possible
160H
X240V
19200
without
FG : Semi
1 block:
1X1 dot
flickering.
16 colors
BD:
2 bits/dot
Color pallet for FG
320H
16000
X240V
19200
16 colors
FG:
1 block:
1X1 dot
16 colors
BD:
Border
4 bits/dot
or, etc.
col~
No
MS84 bits,
32000
8G color
Same as
text 3 and 4
modes
16 colors
320H
X240V
38400
Unused
FG: One
1 block:
1X1 dot
BG and FG
seleted
color
1 bits/dot
BD:
color de-
Same as
16000
signation
text 1 and 2
640H
19200
X240V
modes
16 colors
1 block:
1X1 dot
FG=Foreground
5-106
Same as
graphic 3
8G=8ackground
Same as
2 bits/dot
Color pallet for FG
32000
text 3 and 4
modes
BD=Border
CLRG1 ....... 3=Color register
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
640H
X240V
38400
APPLICATION
MITSUBISHI LSls
NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS
1. INTRODUCTION
3. OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
Mitsubishi
Electric's
microprocessor-support
CMOS
peripheral LSI devices are compatible with current NMOS
peripheral devices, and feature the additional advantages
listed below.
Fig. 3 illustrates what happens when supply voltage (V cc ) is
applied to the circuit shown in Fig. 2, varying input voltage
from Vss to Vcc. The Va curve indicates the change in output voltage and supply current (Icc).
As illustrated, these characteristics depend on input voltage, so can be better understood by dividing V, into three
regions, I ~ ill.
I : In this region, only the p-channel transistor T2 is on, so
that the Va output voltage becomes Vcc. In this condition, practically no current Icc flows.
IT : In this region, Va varies in accordance with V" When V,
is increased from region I, the n-channel transistor T,
begins to turn on, so that Va gradually decreases and
at some point begins to decrease rapidly. The value of
V, at this point of rapid Va decrease is known as the
circuit threshold voltage.
.When this voltage is exceeded, as V, is increased, Va
approaches V ss.
In the region IT, Va is determined by the ratio of the on
resistances of T, and T 2 .
Icc is always flowing in this region, and becomes maximum when V, is at the circuit threshold voltage.
ill : In this region, since only T, is on, Va becomes the voltage Vss. In this region, as was the case for region I ,
virtually no Icc current flows.
• Compatibility with 8251A, 8254, 8255A, 8237A, 8259A.
• Low power dissipation
• Wide supply voltage range, Vcc =5V±10%
• Wide operating temperature range, T a= - 20~ 75"C
• Improved timing conditions
Due to these advantageous features, CMOS peripheral devices can be used to replace conventional NMOS devices
in their typical applications, and can additionally be used in
applications requiring low power dissipation.
The following sections describe the basic characteristics of
Mitsubishi Electric's CMOS peripheral LSI devices for microprocessor support, and explain precautions and methods
of use.
2. BASIC CIRCUITS AND
CONSTRUCTION
The internal circuitry of CMOS devices consist of both pchannel and n-cha'nnel transistors.
There are two types of NMOS transistors. In the depletiontype, drain-to-source remains on even when gate-to-source
voltage is OV, and with the enhancement-type device, dropping gate-to-source voltage below the threshold voltage
level turns the transistor off. CMOS devices employ the enhancement type, regardless of whether they are p-channel
or n-channel devices.
Fig. 1 shows the typical inverter, which is the basis of
CMOS peripherals and Fig. 2 illustrates its equivalent circuit diagram.
vee
vss
PROCESS TECHNOLOGY
Fig.2
Single-stage inverter circuit
Silicon Gate N-Well CMOS
II
ill
vee
o
>
.s"'"
'5
>
'5
c.
'5
o
Substrate P-(GND)
,\
\ Icc
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
Fig.1
\
Single-stage inverter construction
"
Vee
Input voltage V,
Fig.3
Single-stage inverter voltage transfer and supply
current vs. input voltage characteristics
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-3
MITSUBISHI LSls
NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS
4. TRANSFER CHARACTERISTICS AND
POWER DISSIPATION
For COMS devices, the circuit threshold voltage is approximately one-half of Vcc. Contrasted with NMOS logic,
where threshold voltage is a fixed level not related to supply voltage, ideal transfer characteristics can be achieved.
In order to maintain compatibility with the conventional
NMOS devices, transfer characteristics of CMOS peripherals I/O circuits have been establiched at TTL level.
Fig. 4 illustrates input voltage V'N versus supply current Icc
for MSM82CS5AP-S. Here, when V'N reaches 1.3 to 1.5V,
the resulting switch in internal circuits causes a sharp increase in Icc flow.
creases power dissipation.
The M5M82C5SAP-5 illustrated in Fig. 4 has parallelconnected I/O ports, and is relatively limited in switching
operations. However, devices such as the programmable
timer MSM82C54P are subjected to constant clock operations, and the current flow for each CMOS circuit must be
added to get the total for the device. As shown in Fing. 5,
currnet dissipation increases along with increases in operating frequency.
5
Vec=5V
DUTY=50%
Ta-25"C
(PORT-Ao MODE 0 INPUT)
250
V1H min
3.15
Qi
V 1H min
>
~
V OH min
Q)
OJ
E
>
V OH min
2.7
2.4
0
2.0
2.0
2
V 1H min
V 1H min
V1L max
1.5
V1L max
0.45
0.9
0.4
VOL
max
VOL
CMOS peripherals
max
LSTTL (Note 1)
VOL
0.05
max
VOL
max
0.1
Standard CMOS logic
High-speed CMOS
4000B series
74HC series (Note 2)
TTL level,
Note
VOH min=2. 4V
Fig.?
II
V 1L max
V1l max
0.8
0.8
TI
2 : JEDEC V ee =4. 5V
DC noise margin comparison (V cc =5.0V)
6. FANOUT
}IOH=-l~OI'A
5~~~____________~~~~~~~I~o~H=
__
-~4rm~A
T a=-40, 25, 90'C
I
Ta =-40'C
o"
>
Ta =25'C
Ta =90'C
5
Vee (V)
Fig.8
V OH characteristics M5M82C55AP-5
The drive capability of CMOS peripheral devices generally
exceeds that of NMOS logic devices. This can be seen in
Fig. 8, where drive capability at "H" level is noticeably better than NMOS. This defference between logic types provides a slight difference when actually applied to ~riving a
load such as a transistor, and the value of the load resistance can affect fanout capability. This point will be covered
in more detail later.
For reference purposes, the "L" level drive capability of
M5M82C55AP-5 is illustrated in Fig. 9.
When driving a MOS-IC with a peripheral LSI, since it is
only necessary to drive the input leakage current of the
DC-connected IC, fanout capability is quite good. However,
where devices having many components (e.g., data bus,
etc.) are connected, the stray capacitance of the wiring and
device input capacitance (generally about 5pF) must also
• MITSUBISHI
;"'ELECTRIC
6-5
MITSUBISHI LSls
NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS
be driven, so signal switching response is slower. In this
case, the load (s) to be driven must be divided (or allocated to several devices) as with previous devices.
O.3~-----4-------+------~------+-----~
:;
lfj
iil
~~~:~i.y l ~8'Z
I2t.C
~~~:;~~~~vee=4.5V I
O. 2 ~------+-------+------~----;;>"":""';"'Vee=5. 5V
Vee =4.5V
Vee :5VI
Vee -5. ~v
f-««
e
~~ 0.1
I
T -
causing permanent demage to the device.. To prevent gate
damage, the diodes and input resistor shown in the diagram form a protection circuit.
Since threshold voltage for the input transistor is set at
approximately 1.5V, as noted in section 4, input voltage becomes unstable around this level, and a through current
starts to flow from Vcc to Vss. In systems where low dissipation current is required, this characteristic can cause
problems in the design of the power supply.
Where a data bus is left floating, through current is likely to
become a particular problem, so bus lines should be fixed
at a certain level with a pull-up (or pull-down) circuit having high resistance values.
T
vee=5vl
-.!40.C
.------------------------..,
Vee =5.5V
!
UNIT: v
10L
(DATA BUS)(mA)
Poly-Si
Input
Fig.9
10L-VOL
V TH =C1. 5V
Q9----'lM--+------+
characteristics M5M82C55AP-5
(at Vee =5V)
R=cl k!1
7. INPUT CIRCUIT
Fig. 10 shows an equivalent circuit diagram of the input circuit for CMOS peripheral devices. The gate oxide layer of
the transistors is extremely thin, and high voltages applied
directly to the gates are likely to rupture their insulation,
Fig.10
CMOS peripheral device input circuit
(equivalent diagram)
DATA BUS TIMING
READ
WRITE
(j)
o
::<
Address, CS
Address, CS
DATA (INPUT)
RD
z
DATA (OUTPUT)
WR
Address, CS
*(j)
o
::<
Address, CS
min200ns
DATA (INPUT)
RD
()
'~. max170ns
min200ns
WR
DATA (OUTPUT) - - - - - ' ( \
VALID
}-
"'--.-----
* M5M82C37AP, C51 AP, C55AP-5, C59AP
Fig.11
6-6
Bus timing characteristics
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
NOTICE FOR CMOS PERIPHERALS
8. TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
Conditions (al or (el
The timing conditions between the system and CMOS
eWhen using a dual power supply
When dual power supplies serve CMOS logic devices, differences in the rising edge of the power line signal tend to
cause latchup. This can be eliminated by using a series
connected resistor (R) to limit current flow to a maximum of
10mA. (Refer to Fig. 12)
peripheral LSI devices have been improved over their
NMOS type counterparts. Improvements include better
setup and hold times, and microprocessor interfacing is
easier. Fig. 11 summarizes there differences in comparison
form. Whereas NMOS devices required ts and th time,
these have been eliminated with CMOS peripherals by setting ts and th ta Ons.
VCC2
Vee1
9. USAGE PRECAUTIONS
(1)
vee
Dealing with NC input pins
Vee
R
Leaving unused input pins open results in instability input
voltage, which in turn can produce errors in output logic
levels and increase current dissipation. Unused input pins
Vss
should therefore be tied to Vee or Vss.
(2) Voltage supply lines
Power dissipation of CMOS peripherals whose internal
Vee
VCC2
tance of approx. 0.111 F) wired close between Vee and Vss.
Also, when devices such as M5L82C55AP-5 are used with
surges, etc. When this happens, a large current flows from
Vee to Vss , and if current flow continues, the device will be
destroyed. Provision must be made to clear latchup to prevent overcurrents from destroying the device, and that can
Vss
,...----Vee
power line impedance to filter the spikes. To accomplich
this, each device should be fitted with a ceramic capaCitor
(having good high frequency characteristics and a capaci-
The internal circuitry of CMOS devices often have parasitic
bipolar transistors formed in the substrate, and these opearate like thyristors, being triggered by external voltage
V,
Vee,
changes are small such as M5M82C55AP-5 and
M5M82C59AP is extremely low. However, the through current spikes that occur during switching are dealt with using
the traditional method applied to older ICs; by reducing
a high current drive circuit connected to output, power lines
should be run independently from the logic system and
driver circuit to reduce adverse affect on the logic system.
(3) Latchup
Input Output
Input Output
V, >V e
Fig.12
Preventing latchup when dual power supplies
are used
e When using differential circuits
When differential circuits are used, it is possible for input
voltage to exceed Vee or Vss , which could result in latchup.
In this case, use a diode for voltage clamping, combined
(a)
(b)
(c)
V,>Vee+V F
Vo>Vee+VF
V, Vce. Where possible, separate power supplies
should be used. If a common power supply must be used,
(d)
(e)
Vo---4>----wv'v----v-o---Ilnput Output--
I
~;";;;:':.::jr::::::~_.J.=_---.:+:::~~Vcc=4.
5V
V =5.5V
it'
cc
--,----Lvcc=5V
I
Vcc =4.5V
-2
-3
-4
IOH
(rnA)
IOL
(rnA)
1.=For a base current I. of -lmA, the difference in VOH is
approx. 1. 5V.
Flg.16
M5L8255AP-5/M5M82C55AP-5 V OH output
characteristics comparison
•
Fig.17
MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
M5L8255AP-5/M5M82C55AP-5
characteristics comparison
VOL
output
6-9
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
1.
DESCRIPTION
5.
The M5W1791-02P is a floppy disk formatter/controller de-
PIN CONFIGURATION (fOP VIEW)
vice which accommodates single and double density formats.
NC
WRITE Co~~~m WR ~
The device is designed for use with microprocessors or mic-
CHIP S~~~8t CS ~
READ CO~~~8f RD ~
REGISTER J Ao ~
rocomputers.
The device is fabricated with the Nchannel silicon gate
Single 5V supply voltage
•
Accommodate singe and double density formats
IBM 3740 single density format
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
IBM system 34 double density format
•
Selectable sector length (128, 256, 512 or 1024 bytes/
sector)
•
•
Side select compare
Single/multiple sector read or write with automatic sector search
•
Selectable track to track stepping time
•
•
Write precompensation
OMA or programmed data transfers
•
Window extension
- READY RE1~~\~Wm
~ WD ~m-1>lrpATA
~ WG ~~~1>~f'A TE
~
29
~
TG 43 TG43 OUTPUT
4-
D;"0;-
•
33
32
31
30
DO EN ~~~NE1!~fl~PUT
WPRT ~~rrf PROTECT
fP INDEX PULSE INPUT
TROD TRACK 00 INPUT
WFNFOE ~~~/i~lT
37 36 35 -
Do-
FEATURES
INTERRUPT
38 ~ DTRQ gt~~U~EQUEST
S~~~8t 1 A, ~
EOMOS technology is packaged in a 40-pin OIL package.
2.
NC
39 ~ INTRQ ~D9~o¥T
28 ~ HOLD ~D~~Jr0AD
27 - RAW READ ~P~TREAD
26 - RCLK FNEtST CLOCK
25 ~ RG READ GATE OUTPUT
Vc c(5V)
Outline 40P4
NC: NO CONNECTION
systems. The hardware of the M5W1791-02P consists of a
3.
•
•
APPLICATION
Single or double density floppy disk drive formatter/con-
floppy disk interface, a CPU interface and a PLA control
logic. The total chip can be programmed by eleven 8-bit
troller
commands. The floppy disk interface portion performs the
8-inch or mini floppy disk interface
communication with floppy disk drive under control of the
PLA control logic. The CPU interface portion has five regis-
4.
FUNCTION
The M5W1791-02P is a floppy disk formatter/controller that
ters - command, data, status, track and sector register and communicates with the CPU through the data bus.
can be used with most microprocessor or microcomputer
These functions are also controlled by the PLA.
6.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
BIDIRECTIONAL
DATI\ BUS
WRITE CONTROL INPUT Wii 2
CHIP SELECT INPUT C§ 3
READ CONTROL INPUT Ail •
REGISTER SELECT{Ao 5
INPUT A, 6
r----,..·-{;311 WPRT WRITE PROTECT INPUT
EARLY OUTPUT EARLY
LATE OUTPUT LATE
WRITE GATE OUTPUT WG
WRITE DATA OUTPUT WD
17
18
30
31
R~:b' I~~~~
27
RAW
READ CLOCK
3 jj5
3 i'ROO
r==j=rL:,,:,,~=~3 READY
II
23 HOLT
, - '-..J2'''9TG 43
2 TEST
TEST INPUT
I~~b~
26
CLK .
CLOCK INPUT 2.
DDEN
DOUBLE DENSITY MODE 37~----l>-----------~
SELECT INPUT
33
RG
WF/VFOE RESET
READ GATE ~~IT.M~gLT RESET INPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL OUTPUT
6-10
INDEX PULSE INPUT
TRACK 00 INPUT
READY INPUT
HEAD LOAD TIMING
INPUT
TG43 OUTPUT
HEAD LOAD OUTPUT
DIRECTION OUTPUT
STEP OUTPUT
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
INTERRUPT REQUEST
OUTPUT
DATA REQUEST OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
7.
PIN DESCRIPTION
Pin
Input or
Name
No internal
NC
NC(pin 1) is not internally connected
connection
Write control
-
WR
input
CS
Chip select input
-
Read control
RD
Functions
output
input
Input
Write signal from a master CPU (Active low).
Input
Chip select (Active low).
Input
Read signal from a master CPU (Active low).
._- r--Register select inputs. These inputs select the register under the control of the RD and WR.
A o, A,
-
-
Do-D7
Register select
Input
input
Bidirectional
In/Oul
data bus
A,
Ao
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
--
-
RD
WR
STATUS REGISTER
COMMAND REGISTER
TRACK REGISTER
TRACK REGISTER
SECTOR REGISTER
SECTOR REGISTER
DATA REGISTER
DATA REGISTER
Three-state, inverted bidirectional data bus.
- - - - t-----------.--- - - STEP
Step output
Output
Step pulse output (Active high).
DIRC
Direction output
Output
Direction output. High level means the head is stepping in and low level means the head is stepping out.
EARLY
Early output
Output
- --
lATE
Output
Late output
--
1----RESET
This signal is used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted earty.
This signal is also used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted
late.
Reset input (Active low). The device is reset by this signal and automaticaily loads "03" (hexadecimal) into
Reset input
Input
Test input
Input
the command register. The not-ready-status bit is also reset by this signal. When reset input is made to be
high, the device executes restore command even unless READY is active and the device loads "01"
(hexadecimal) to the sector register.
- -
TEST
HDlT
Head load timing
input
----
Input
Clock input
RG
Read gate output
Output
RClK
Read clock input
Input
Raw read input
Input
READ
HDlD
Head load output
actuated motors.
When the device finds high level on this input, the device assumes that the head is engaged on the media.
Active high.
--
ClK
r---=
RAW
This input is only used for test purposes, so user must tie it to Vee or leave it open unless using voice coli
Input
Output
Clock input to generate internal timing. 2MHz for 8-inch drives, 1MHz for mini drives.
This signal shows the external data separator that the syncfield is detected.
This signal is internally used for the data window. Phasing relation to raw read data is specified but polarity
(RCLK high or low) is not important.
This input signal from the drive shall be low for each recorded flux transition.
This output signal controls the loading of the head of the drive. The
h~ad
must be loaded on the media by
this high-level output.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-11
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Pin
Name
Input or
output
Functions
TG43
TG 43 output
Output
This output is valid only during disk readlwrite operation and it shows the position of the head. High level
on this output indicates that head Is positioned between track 44 to 76.
WG
Write gate output
Output
This signal becomes active before disk write operations are to occur.
WD
Write data output
Output
READY
Ready input
Input
This signal consists of data bits and clock bits. It becomes active for every flux transition. Active high.
This signal shows the device the drive is ready. In the disk read/write operation except for TYPE 1 command operation, low level Input terminates current operation and the device generates the INTRQ. In the
TYPE 1 command operation, this signal is neglected. Not ready bit in the status register is the inverted form
of this input.
This is a bidirectional signal. It becomes write fault input when WG is active. In the disk write operation,
WFIVFOE
Write fault Inputl
VFO enable
InlOut
low level signal on this input terminates the write operation and makes INTRQ active. This signal also
appears in the status register as the write fault bit. When WG is inactive, this signal works as VFO enable
output. VFOE output is also an open drain type, so pull it up to Vee and never input active write fault signal
output
write WG is inactive.
TROO
Track 00 Input
Input
This signal indicates that the head is located on the track 00 to the device. Active low.
IP
Index pulse input
Input
This input indicates to the device that an index hole of the diskette has been encountered.
--WPRT
Write protect
input
Input
write operations, this signal is sampled and an active low signal will terminate the current command and
---
Double density
Input
This input determines the device operation mode. When DDEN=O, double density mode is selected. When
DDEN= 1, Single density mode Is selected.
Output
that data is assembled in the data register. In the disk write mode, it indicates that the data register is
DDEN
DTRa
INTRa
NC
6..,...12
mode select input
Data request
output
Interrupt request
output
No internal
connection
Low level signal on this inpLlt informs the device that the drive is in the write protected state. Before disk
set INTRQ. The write protect status bit in the status register is also set.
DTRQ is an open drain output, so pull up to Vce by the 10k resistor. In the disk read mode, DTRQ indicates
empty. DTRQ is reset by the read data or write data operation.
Output
INTRQ is also a open drain output, so pull up to Vee by the 10k resistor. INTRQ becomes active at the
completion of any command and is reset when the CPU reads the status or writes the command.
NC (pin 40) is not internally connected.
•. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
--
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
8.
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
The following explanation is based on the block diagram is
Section 6.
The registers which are accessible by the CPU system
through the input/output buffer of the M5W1791-02P are the
command, status, track, sector and data registers. These are
ali 8-bit registers.
.
The register select inpus Ao and A, select one register
under RD, \Nfl and CS control as described in Section 7.
8.1 Retister Descriptions
(1) Command Register
This register is write-only, so the contents of the command
register cannot be read onto the bi-directional data bus. The
CPU system writes the command code into this register to
be executed by the M5W1791-02P. Except the force interrupt command, the command register should not be loaded
while the busy status bit is set.
(2) Status Register
This is the read-only register and holds the status information about the device and a connected floppy disk drive. The
meaning of each status bit is varied by the executing command.
(3) Track Register
This register is bi-directional, so the CPU system can read
or write the data through the data bus. The track register
has the track number of the floppy disk's current head position. The type 1 commands have the update flag option
according to this register. When this flag is set, the contents
of the track register are updated by one for each step. They
are incremented when the head is stepped in and decremented when the head is stepped out.
When the type 2 command which performs the read/write
operation for the floppy disk is executed, the track address
of the floppy disk's ID field and the contents of the track
register are compared. If they match, M5W1791-02P continues to check whether the sector address is the one
appointed by the sector register.
When the restore command is performed automatically
by the -RESET input transition from "0" to "1" or when the
CPU system executes the restore command, FF (HEX) is at
first loaded into the track register and every time the step
pulse is issued, the value of this register is decremented by
one. The contents of the track register are set to 00 (HEX)
when the TROO input is activated before the 255th step pulse
issued or after the step pulse was generated 255 times.
(4) Sector Register
This is also a bi-directional register.
For disk read or write operation, the CPU system must
set the desired sector address into this register.
By forcing the RESET input from "0" to "1", M5W1791-
02P also sets 01 (H EX) into the sector register, then begins
the restore operation.
In the type 2 command execution, the sector address of
the disk's 10 field and the contents of the sector register are
also compared as mentioned above.
When the m flag bit of the type 2 command code is set to
perform the multi-sector read/write operation, the sector
register value is automatically incremented by one upon
completion of the read/write operation of the one sector.
When the read address command of the type 3 command
has been executed, the track address which is read out from
the first encountered 10 field is loaded into the sector register.
(5) Data Register
This register is bi-directional.
During disk data read operation, the data read from the
floppy disk is held in this register. During the write operation, byte of data from the CPU system is held.
Prior to seek command execution, the desired track position must be written into the data register.
By executing the restore command or the RESET input
transition from "0" to "1", M5W1791-02P automatically loads
00 (HEX) into the data register.
The hardware blocks of access to the user are only the
reigsters mentioned above. Descriptions of inaccesible internal hardware blocks follow.
8.2 Control Circuit
(1) ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit)
This one-bit serial ALU executes the comparisons of the serial data and is used for the modification and comparison of
registers.
(2) Status Control Logic
The status control logic generates the status information for
the status register. It is divided into two sections: one reflects the state of the M5W1791-02P and the other reflects
the state fo the disk system. Disk states inclued write protect, index pulse, track 00, ready, head loak timing and write
fault.
(3) Head Control Logic
This circuit generates the signal which controls head movement of the floppy disk. It provides the head load signal,
direction signal, step signal and TG43 signal. The TG43 output controls the disk's write current.
When the type 1 command with the head load flag h at
"1" is executed, the head load output is set to "1" at the beginning of the command execution. The command execution
where the head load flag h is initially at "0" makes the head
load output "0" whether it has been "0" or "1 ".
After issuing the step pulses, the M5W1791-02P checks
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
6-13
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
the verify flag V in the command code. If V is "0", the command is terminated and the interrupt request output signal is
sent. If V is "1", the head load output is set to "1" (if h ="1"
, HDlD is already set to "1" at the beginning of this
command), and after an internal 15 ms delay (ClK = 2MHz,
TEST =1), the head load timing input HOLT is sampled until
HDlD andHlDT ="1" (logic true). Then M5W1791-02P updates the TG43 output signal and commences the disk read
operation. This means that during the type 1 command, the
TG43 signal is not updated unless the V flag is set to "1".
The TG43 output is set to "1" when the floppy disk head is
positioned beyond the 43rd track.
The type 2 and 3 commands confirm the ready input logic
high, and after a 15 ms delay (if flag E is set; if E = 0, no internal delay is initiated), HDlT is sampled until HDlD and
HDlT = "1" as mentioned above. M5W1791-02P then updates the TG43 output signal and begins the disk read/write
operation. If the ready input is low, then the command is terminated and INTRa is generated.
The head load output which was set to "1" is reset to "0"
under the following two conditions:
• If the M5W1791-02P is idle for 15 disk revolutions after
the prevous command terminates, the head load signal
resets to "0".
• If the type 1 command is executed when h = "0", the
head is also automatically disengaged.
(4) Head Engage Timer/Step Speed Timer
The M5W1791-02P can generate an internal 15 ms wait time
(ClK = 2MHz) before the head load timing input is sampled. The HDlT signal shows M5W1791-02P that the floppy
disk head is completely engaged after loading into the
media. The step speed can be selected at 3 ms, 6 ms, 10 ms
or 15 ms (ClK = 2M Hz) by the stepping motor rate bits r1
and r0 in the type 1 command.
These operations are controlled by the 1 ms timer and
presettable 4-bit binary counter inside the M5W1791-02P.
This 1 ms timer is disabled by setting the test input TEST
to "0", which initiates step pulse intervals of about 400",s in
the single-density mode and about 200",s in the doubledensity mode (ClK = 2MHz). The 15 ms wait time is also
reduced in the two modes to about 60",s and 30",s, respectively.
The test input signal is used only for interfacing with the
floppy disk drives and a voice coil motor.
Table 8.1 shows the relationship between the stepping
motor rate flags and the step pulse intervals.
Table 8.1
Step Pulse Intervals
(unit: ms)
r11
0
elK (MHz)
__________ DO EN
0,
0,
1,
1,
6-14
0
1
0
1
lMHz
2MHz
0
3
6
10
15
I
1
3
6
10
15
0
6
12
20
30
1
6
12
20
30
(5)
Index Pulse Counter/Se't~ounter/
Step Pulse Counter
As mentioned in Section 8.2 (3), the MlilW1791-02P has an
index pulse counter that returns the head' load output to "0"
in the idle state after command execution. This index pulse
counter is used to terminate the command when the
M5W1791-02P does not complete it within 5 index pulses.
There are 12 reasons why the command may be terminated
prematurely:
• The synchronize pattern of the 10 field is not found.
• The synchronize pattern of the 10 field is too short.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AM1 of the 10 field is not found.
AM1 of the ID field is not complete.
The 10 track address is not equal to the contents of the
track register.
The 10 sector address is not equal to the contents of the
sector register.
The side number of the 10 field is not equal to the side
select flag s in the command code when the side comparison flag C is set to "1 ".
The 10 field CRC error occurs.
The synchronize pattern of the data field is not found.
The synchronize pattern of the data field is too short.
AM2 of the data field cannot be found.
AM2 of the data field not complets.
When a CRC error of the data field occurs, an interrupt is
generated without a retry.
The index counter is also used as the sector counter/
step pulse counter. When this counter is used as a step
pulse counter, it counts a maximum of 255 step pulses during the restore command as described in Section 8.1 (3)
This counter is used as a sector counter in the type 2
command to count the data length of the data field for the
destination sector. In this sense, it is more appropriate to
call this counter the data length counter.
The M5W1791-02P allows one of four different data
length configurations in one sector: 128 bytes, 256 bytes, 512
bytes and 1024 bytes. The data length of the sector to be
read or written by the M5W1791-02P is decided by the
"sector length" parameter at the 4th byte of the ID field.
When the read/write operation is commenced for the desired data field, the M5W1791-02P use's this sector counter
to generate the data request signal at specified times in
accordance with the ID sector length byte.
(6) Interrupt Request Control Logic, Data
Request Control Logic
The interrupt request output INTRa is an open drain output
that notifies the CPU of command termination.
Once set, the interrupt request output INTRa is not reset to "0" until the status is read out from the status register
or the command is written into the command register by the
CPU.
."MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Refer to Section 11.5 concerning the response of the
INTRQ during the type 4 command.
The I NTRQ output· is not reset by the reset input signal.
This state is undefined'8fter power is applied.
The data request control output DTRQ is also an open
drain output that requests the CPU to read out the data from
the data register or write the data into the data register during the disk read or write operation.
The DTRQ output is reset to "0" by writing the data into
or reading the data out from the data register.
The DTRQ output is changed to "0" by the reset input.
(7) Write Control Logic
The M5W1791-02P provides frequency-modulated (FM) data
in the single-density mode or modified FM (MFM) data in
the double-density mode.
The data written into the data register from the CPU is
sent to the data shift register and then it is modulated by the
write control logic in accordance with the modulation type
selected by the DDEN input. This modulated data is sent to
the write data output WD.
The special patterns including the missing clock required
for disk formatting are also produced in the write control
logic under the control of the write command control circuit.
During the disk write operation, M5W1791-02P can predict the occurrence of the peak shift, depending on the previous bit pattern, so the write control logic provides the early
and late output signals for write precompensation.
(8) Write Track Command Control
Logic
The internal PlA program controls almost all the operations
of the M5W1791-02P. However, when the write track command is executed, the PlA program control speed is too
slow to perform the command. Therefore, the write track
command control logic implements the write track operation
directly.
When the CPU writes the data into the data register for
disk initialization, the contents are sent to the internal data
shift register and the write track command control logic.
When a special data byte is sent to the data register from
the CPU, the write control logic operates under the control
of the write track command control logic the provide the designated write data pattrern. When the other data bytes are
written into the data register, they are first sent to the data
shift register, then to the write control logic serially to be
modulated according to the DDEN input.
During the disk read operation, the internal data separator circuit demodulates the raw read data stream and produces the true data bit pattern. This demodulated data bit is
shifted into the data shift register in series and transferred to
the data register in parallel byte by byte.
(2) CRC Logic
The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) circuit generates the
cyclic redundancy check code. The polymonial is X'6
X12
+ X + 1.
+
S
The CRC code, generated by the CRC circuit from the
write data stream, is written onto the floppy disk during the
disk write operation.
During the disk read operation, the last two CRC bytes
read out in the 10 or data field are checked for errors by the
CRC logic.
(3) Prescaler
A pair of internal clocks are required to drive the M5W179102P's logic circuitry. During the disk read operation, these
clocks are derived from the read clock input RClK from the
differential circuit, the data transfer clock logic and the internal clock control logic.
At all times except for disk read operations, such as during type 1 commands or disk write operations, these two internal clocks are produced by the prescaler and the internal
clock control logic from the ClK input signal.
The prescaler generates the data transfer clock and the
data separator clock by dividing the ClK input clock by 2
and 4 in the double density mode and by 4 and 8 in the single density mode.
The internal PlA logic is driven by this data separator
clock.
(4) Differential Circuit, Data Transfer
Clock Logic
The differential circuit and the data transfer clock logic
generate the internal data transfer clock by multiplying the
PClK clock input and shaping its waveform.
(5) Window Extension Logic
When disk read operations are executed in the doubledensity mode, the raw read input occurs in both RClK clock
windows. At this time, the window extension logic samples
the raw read input at the edge of the internal data transfer
clock which is derived from the RClK input to provide that
the read clock input RClK window width is extended substantially.
8.3 Internal Control Logic
(1) Data Shift Register
(6) AM Detector Logic
During the disk write operation, the data bytes written into
the data register from the CPU are loaded into this register
in parallel. The data shift register transfers the serial data to
the write control logic for modulation.
a signal which has been modulated by either FM or MFM.
M5W1791-02P should synchronize the internal data separator clock with the data bit of the input data stream. For this
The raw read signal input ""R"'"A;-;W-;-O;:R"'EA~D from the floppy disk is
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-15
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
purpose, the AM detector logic is employed to detect the
special patterns which contain the missing clocks from' the
input raw read stream,
(7) Internal Clock Control Logic
This logic generates the data transfer clock and data separator clock.
(8) Data Separator
This separates the data bit from the raw read input signal by
using the data separator clock,
(9) PLA
This is the programmable logic array which controls the
M5W1791-02P, The size of this PLA ROM is approximately
230 X 19 bits.
6-16
," • ,." MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
9.
DESCRIPTION OF COMMANDS
There are 11 different commands. By setting CS to "0", Ao to
"0" and A, to "0" the commands are written inside the
M5W1791-02P from the data bus at the rising edge of the
Table 9.1
WR signal.
The commands are classified into four types: type 1, type
2, type 3 and type 4.
List of Commands
Command type
MSB
Command
Code
a
a
t--Seek command
a
a
Step command
a
a
Step-in command
1
a
Step-out command
a
1
f - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ..- - - - 1----------Read sector command
1
a
----_.---Write sector command
1
a
_ . _ - - - - ._---- ----------.
Restore command
f--~---
Type 1 commands
Type 2 commands
---
t-----
Type 3 commands
---------.-,,--
Type 4 commands
--
V
r,
ro
1
h
V
r,
ro
1
u
h
V
r,
a
u
h
V
r,
ro
1
u
h
V
r,
ro
a
m
S
E
C
a
S
E
C
ao
E
a
a
a
a
a ------0--
h
ro
--~
1
m
-------
1
1
--------1
1
1
a
a
1
1
-_..
a
a
a
0
1
Ie
1
Force interrupt command
h
a
- - j - - - - - - - ..
Read track command
Write track command
a
1
1
Read address command
LSB
a
a
-~
_ - _ .. _ - _ . _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1
E
E
I,
10
Note 1: Although the codes are written in TRUE form, the M5W1791-02P features a negative logic data bus. This means codes with 0 and 1 reversed
are written into the M5W1791-02P.
Each command comes with a flag option. These are
identified in Table 9.2.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-17
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Table 9.2
Flag Options
.....
Flag
Description
When h =1: The head is loaded at the beginning of the command execution.
h : Head load flag
When h =0: The head is loaded when the verify operation starts if the V flag is "1". It is not loaded
if the V flag is "0·'.
When V = 1: The contents of the track register are compared with the 10 track address after head
V : Verify flag
Type 1
positioning. The seek error status bit is set if the desired track address is not found by the time
the diskette has gone through 6 rotations.
When V =0: The track verification is not performed.
commands
r1, ro : Stepping rate flag
The stepping rate is determined by the value of these 2 bits as well as by the elK frequency and
TEST input pin.
When u = 1: The track register is updated with each step pulse: It is incremented (or
u : Update flag
decremented) by 1 for each step-in (or step-out) pulse.
When u =0: Track register is not updated.
When E = 1: Sampling of the head load timing input starts with the 15ms delay after the head load
output has been set to "1". An advance is made to the next step when HOLO'HLOT = "1" is
Type 2/Type3
Commands
E: 15ms delay flag(at 2MHz clock)
established.
When E =0: Sampling of the head load timing input starts immediately after the head load output
has been set to "1 ". An advance is made to the next step when HOLD' HLOT = "1" is established.
The "next step" is the TG43 output update.
When m = 1: Multi-sector read/write is performed. Upon completion of one sector read/write, the
sector register value is incremented by 1, the next sector is sought and read/write is performed
m : Multi-sector read/write flag
again. Upon completion of the final sector read/write operation, the next sector is not found even
when sought and so at the sixth rotation of the diskette the RNF error bit is set and the operation
is concluded. This command can also be concluded with the Type 4 command.
When m =0: Read/write for single sector is performed.
When S =1: "1" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is "1".
Type 2
commands
S : Side select flag
When S =0: "0" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is "1".
No comparison is performed when C =0.
C : Side compare flag
When C =1: The S flag and 10 side number are compared.
When C =0: The 10 side number is not compared.
When 80= 1: The deleted data mark "FS·' (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address
ao : Data address mark flag
mark.
When ao =0: The data mark "FB" (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address mark.
r-----c--
When 10 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input rising edge.
When h =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input falling edge.
When 12 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" with the index pulse input.
Type 4
command
I : Interrupt condition flag
When 13 =1: The command being executed is terminated and the interrupt request output is set to
"H" immediately.
When 10 =h =12 =13 =0: No interrupt request is generated but the command being executed is
terminated. This command is executed so that the interrupt request output, which has been set by
the Type 4 command, is reset by the following command write or status read.
6-18
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
10.
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
lists the flag options.
The M5W1791-02P is provided with an interface section for
the CPU system and an interface section for the floppy disk
system.
10.1
CPU System Interface Section
The CPU interface section is composed of the input/output
buffer, input/output control logic, five internal registers, interrupt request control logic and data request control logic.
The CPU reads/writes the contents of the internal registers through the M5W1791-02P's data bus.
Upon the completion of each command, and interrupt to
the CPU is generated by the interrupt control logic. INTRQ
is reset by command register write or status register read.
The M5W1791-02P generates the data request output
OTRQ for the CPU system using its data request control circuit while reading or writing floppy disk data.
The time required to transfer one byte of serial data
when ClK is 2MHz is 32,us in the single-density mode and
16,us in the double-density mode. However, the maximum
time from when OTRQ is set to "H" until the CPU system
reads or writes the data is actually shorter than 32,us (or 161'
s) and if the service is not completed whithin this time, the
lost data status bit is set. When the CPU system does not
respond to the first data request for write sector command or
write track command within the required time, the subsequent operation of the commands are theminated and the interrupt request output is set.
For instance, the service time Tservice (WR) for DTRQ
when a write sector command is being executed in the single-density mode is 23.5,us maximum. This is because it
takes 41' s for the DTRQ output to be set after the contents of
the data register have been transferred to the data shift register, and 4.5,us at most for the M5W1791-02P to transfer
data into the data register which has been written in response to DTRQ. In other words, unless the data is serviced
within 23.5,us (i.e. 32 - 4 - 4.5 = 23.5,us), there will no longer be time to begin transfer of data from the next data register to the data shift register.
For further details, refer to the section dealing with the
description of the commands.
10.2
Floppy Disk Interface Section
The floppy disk interface section is composed mainly of the
floppy disk head control section which relates to the head
pOSitioning control and the floppy disk read/write control
section which controls the serial data transfer.
(1) Floppy Disk Head Control Section
For details on the operation of the floppy disk head control
section, refer to Section 8.2 (3) on the read control circuit,
Section 8.2 (4) on the head load time timer/stepping rate
timer, and Section 8.2 (5) on the index pulse counter/sector
counter/step pulse counter as well as to Table 9.2 which
(2) Floppy Disk ReadlWrite Control
Section
The floppy disk read/write control section executes the disk
read and disk write operations.
The disk read and disk write operations have no direct
relation to the read and write commands. For instance, when
a write sector command is executed, the disk read operation
is performed first to find the desired ID. After the 10 is
found, the M5W1791-02P writes the sync pattern, data field
address mark, data and CRC, after which the command is
terminated.
Disk Read Operation
The M5W1791-02P is applicable to both the single- and
double-density recording formats, and selection between
these is performed by the ODEN double-density select
input.
When the disk read operation starts, the write fault input/
VFOE control output WFIVFOE is set to "l". (This pin is pulled up by a 10-kohm resistance since it serves as an opendrain output during signal output.
The pin serves as the VFOE output when the write gate output WG = "l".) This output is kept at "l" until the disk read
operation is terminated. The VFOE output can be used as
the signal that indicates that the Pll circuit employed as the
external RClK generator should enter into lock-in operation
from its free-running state.
The following description is for the single-density mode
which is almost the same as the double-density mode. When
the disk read operation starts and the 2-byte 00 (HEX) is
found, this is treated as a sync pattern and the read gate
output RG is set to "H". Address mark FE, FB or F8 (HEX)
are retrieved within the 10-byte period that follows. When
the address mark is not found, RG is reset to "l" and a retry
is made to retrieve the 2-byte 00 (HEX). If the address mark
is found on the 10 field and if the ID track address and sector address (and side number also when side compare bit C
= "1") are correct, RG is held at "H" until CRC reading is
completed and checked.
Whether there is a CRe error or not, RG is then reset to
"l". When there is no error, the sync pattern of the data
field is retrieved. When ID is not found properly, that is,
when AM1 cannot be read properly, the values of the track
register and track address do not match, the values of the
sector register and sector address do not match, the side
select flag of the command and side number do not match
(when e = 1), or when there is a eRC error in th ID field,
RG is reset to "0" and a retry is made to retrieve the 2-byte
00 (HEX).
However, when the read address command is executed,
the data is read as far as the CRC byte if the sync pattern
and AM1 are found properly, and the command is terminated
• MrtsuBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-19
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
regardless of whether there is a CRC error. When the data
address mark is found, RG is held at "1" until the data and
the CRC are read and CRC check is performed. RG is then
reset to "0" regardless of whether there is a CRC error. If
the command is single sector read or if a data field CRC
error occurs, the INTRQ interrupt request output is set to "1"
and the command is terminated. The CRC error status bit is
set with a CRC error.
The read gate output is active during reading of the valid
data stream from the sync field to the CRC. It is the signal
that controls the read data tracking sensitivity for the external PLL RCLK generator circuit.
Operation in the double-density mode is the same as that
for the single density mode except for the following points.
In the double density mode the 4-byte "00" or "FF" (HEX) is
treated as the sync pattern and the adress marks "A1" "A1"
"A1" "FE", "A1" "A1" "A1" "FB", or "A1" "A1" "A1" "F8"
Section 10 dealing with the DesCripJioii of Operation with
data request output DTRQ duril}g:i;the :disk write operation.
When the data is not written during"tn:e same service period,
the command is continued with 00 (HEX) as the data which
is written. The lost data status bit is set at this time. DRTQ is
not reset if it is not serviced.
During the disk write operation, the early output or the
late output is made active in accordance with the write data.
Both output signals are used when the user provides write
pre-compensation for the write data output, and they predict
late or early peak shifts of the disk write data which is output
at the same time.
The TG43 output is used to control the writing current of
the floppy disk system. It is "0" at the time when the track
register contents are 0 to 43, while it is "1" at 44 or above
(up to 255).
(HEX) are retrieved within the following 16-byte period.
Note that the VFOE output is active when the read track
command among the type 3 commands is executed but the
RG output remains at "0".
Also bear in mind the following pOints relating to the disk
read operation.
Even during the disk read operation, TG43 is updated in
accordance with the track register contents before VFOE is
made active.
During the disk read or write operations mentioned below (the execution of type 2 and 3 commands), the READY
input is checked at the beginning of the command's execution and if the input is not ready, the command is terminated,
the interrpt request output is set to "1" and an interrupt is
generated (this does not apply to type 1 and type 4
commands). In this case, the not ready status bit is set.
Disk Write Operation
During the disk write operation, the write gate output WG is
first set to "1". This enables the user to apply the write fault
input to the write fault inputlVFOE VFO control output pin.
Then write data are output from output WD. If the write fault
input is made active when WG = "1", the command is immediately terminated, interrupt reqest output INTRQ is set to
"1", an interrupt is generated, and the write fault status bit is
set.
When the disk write operation is about to be suspended
by the type 4 command and when the type 4 command is
accepted into the M5W1791-02P's command register before
the data field AM2 data mark or deleted data mark is written, the command is terminated when the type 4 command is
written and an interrupt is generated. The type 4 command,
which is written during disk write operation for the data field
subsequent to the above mark writing, is also acknowledged
immediately and the disk write operation is terminated.
The CPU system must write the data into the data register during the service period mentioned at the beginning of
6-20
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
11. DESCRIPTION OR COMMANDS
11.1 Command Standby Condition
After the execution ofa command has been completed, the
M5W1791-02P stands by for the next command to be executed. If the head load HDLD has been set to "1" by the
previous command and 15 index pulses are counted in the
standby condition, the head is unloaded from the media. After this the M5W1791-02P remains into the command standby condition. When a command is written in the command
register, the M5W1791-02P comes into operation according
to the execution flow for the command.
11.2 Type 1 Commands
(1) Restore Command
This command is used to position the head to track 00. This
command is automatically executed when the reset input is
set from "0" to "1". During reset, the h = "0", V = "0" and
r" ro ="1,1" flags are set automatically.
Refer to Section 8 dealing with the hardware configuration and in particular to Section 8.1 (3) on the track register
for details on the execution of the command. When the V
flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head
opsitioning operation. 00 (HEX) is automatically set in the
data register.
(2) Seek Command
This command is used to move the head onto the desired
track. After the destination track number is written into the
data register and the seek command is written into the command register, step pulses are generated until the contents
of both the track register and data register match. The
direction of head movement is indicated by direction output
DIRC.
The contents of the track register are updated every time
a step pulse is output. When the V flag ="1", the verify operation is perfomed after the head positioning operation.
(3) Step Command
ates a single step pulse. When the u flag is "1", the contents of the track register are decremented by 1. When the
V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head
pOSitioning operation.
11.3 Type 2 Commands
Using the type 2 commands, reading/writing the data in the
disk's data field is performed. When the desired sector is
found, the data is transferred into/from the CPU system using the data request output DTRQ as the data transfer timing
signal.
Side number comparison and multi-sector read/write can
be performed by setting the command flag.
(1) Read Sector Command
When the read sector command is executed, once the ID
field is found properly, the data is sent from the data shift
register to the data register and the M5W1791-02P requests
through DTRQ that the CPU system read out the data from
the data register. (For details on the service time for DTRQ,
refer to Section 10 dealing with the Description of
Operation.)
Unless the CPU reads out the data within the service
time, the next data is written from the data shift register into
the data register. The data which has not been read is destroyed and the lost data status bit is set. DTRQ is reset by
the data register readout, but when the data has not been
read out during the service time, DTRQ remains at "1 ".
The length of the data fields in each sector is indicated
by the sector length of the disk 10. This value is saved inside the M5W1791-02P and DTRQ is generated for the
necessary number of times in accordance with this value.
The relationship between the number of data in a single
sector and the data byte length is shown below.
Table 11.3
Data Byte Length
Sector length of the disk ID
This generates a single step pulse. Direction output DIRC is
not changed. Therefore, the head moves toward the same
direction as it did the previous time. When the update flag u
is "1", the contents of the track register are updated. When
the V flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the
head positioning operation.
OOH
01H
02H
03H
Bytes/sector
128
256
512
1024
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
When, for instance, the sector length, i.e. the 4th byte of
(4) Step-in Command
10 is 00 (HEX), data request output DTRQ is "1" for 128
This command sets direction output DIRC to "1" and generates a single step pulse. When the u flag is "1", the contents of the track regsiter are incremented by 1. When the V
flag is "1", the verify operation is performed after the head
positioning operation.
times unless lost data occurs. If, for example, lost data
occurs once, DTRQ is "1" for 127 times.
For multi-sector read, refer to the section on flag option
m in Table 9.2.
Depending upon the data address mark of the data field,
the record type status bit can be set. When the data mark is
FB (H EX), the record type status bit is set to "0" and when
the deleted data mark is F8 (HEX), it is set to "1".
(5) Step-out Command
This command sets direction output DIRC to "0" and gener-
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
6-21
II
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
(2) Write Sector Command
When the 10 field is found properly upon execution of the
write sector command and the CRC check is completed
without any errors detected, the M5W1791-02P generates a
single data request output DTRQ. In response to this DTRQ,
the CPU must write the data into the data register during the
a-byte time (1-byte time is 32,us in the single-density mode
and 16,us in the double-density mode with ClK = 2M Hz).
Whether or not the service has been performed during
the specified time is then determined.
When the service has not been performed in the specified time, the lost data status bit is set, the execution of the
command is terminated and interrupt request output INTRQ
is set to "1 ".
When the first service has been performed, the data is
written after the sync pattern and AM2 have been written.
After a lost data check, there is a 1-byte time delay (with
the single-density mode), then the write gate output WG is
set to "1", the 6-byte sync field 00 (HEX) is written into the
disk, and FB or Fa (HEX) is written depending on the value
of the command's data address mark flag aQ. DTRQ is
generated and data is written in succession until the number
per sector indicated by the 10 data length in that sector is
reached.
In the double-density mode, the write gate output WG is
. set to "1" after 12-byte time delay following the lost data
check, the 12-byte sync field 00 (HEX) is written, and the 3byte A1 (HEX) is written, after which the same operation is
peformed as for the single-density mode.
Unless the data are written into the data register from the
CPU system within the prescribed service time for the
second and further DTRQ data request outputs, data 00
(HEX) is written on the disk and the lost data status bit is
set The behavior of the DTRQ output when lost data is
generated is the same as that described in the section on
the read sector command.
Operations for multi-sector writing are the same as those
during the read sector command.
11.4 Type 3 Commands
Type 3 commands consist of 3 commands: read address,
read track and write track.
(1) Read Address Command
The 6 bytes of the ID field found first are read out with the
execution of the read address command. These 6 bytes in
order are: 1) track number, 2) side number, 3) sector number, 4) data length and 5) 2-byte CRC. When data is sent to
the data register, data request output DTRQ is generated
from the M5W1791-02P and the CPU system is requested to
read out the data from the data register. If DTRQ is not serviced within the service time, the lost data status bit is set
and the next data is written from the data shift register into
the data register as with the read sector command. When
6-22
the read address command is executed, the track number
which has been read out is also written· into the sector regsiter of M5W1791-02P along with the CRC check.
(2) Read Track Command
The read track command serves to read .out all the data of
an entire track, beginning and ending upon detection of the
index pulse. Unlike the read sector or read address commands, all the data including the gaps and sync pattern are
read out. The data are synchronized when the index mark,
10 address mark and data address mark are detected.
"Data synchronization" refers to reading the data string from
the floppy disk in 1-byte units. Read gate output RG, which
gives notification that the sync pattern has been detected, is
not output with this command.
Neither side number comparison nor CRC check is conducted with the read track command. Unless the CPU read
out data within the specified service time as with the other
disk read command, the data is lost.
(3) Write Track Command
The write track command formats the tracks on the disk.
Disk formatting requires not only that the gaps, sync pattern,
10 and data are written, but also that the marker including
the missing clock and the CRC are written .
When this command is executed, the first data request
output DTRQ is generated after the head has been loaded
into the media. In response to this, the CPU must complete
the writing of the data whithin the 3-byte time.
Unless the data are serviced during this time, the lost
data status bit is set, subsequent commands are terminated
the interrupt request output INTRQ is set to "1". When the
data is serviced during the specified time, data write starts
with the arrival of the index pulse. Then the CPU writes the
data into the data register in accordance with the data request output
When data written by the CPU are values from F5 to FE
(HEX), M5W1791-02P performs special processing consisting of writing the markers and generating and writing the
CRC. When other .data from 00 to F4 and FF (HEX) are written into the data register, the value is modulated as it is and
written onto the disk.
The write track command continues until the next index
pulse input IP is detected.
If the CPU hasn't loaded the data into the data register
within the service time, 00 (HEX) is written and the lost data
status bit is set
Table 11.4 shows the control bytes of the write track
command.
•. MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Table 11.4
Write Track Command Control Bytes
Single-density format
Data
register
contents
Function
Double-density format
Data
Clock
pattern
pattern
Data written
Function
Missing clock
onto disk
--
OO-F4
r----
F5
Data ragister values are
written onto the disk without
modification.
OO-F4
FF
Non-usable
~.
Data register values are
written onto the disk without
modification.
Marker A1 is written.
eRe is preset.
OO-F4
~
..
------ - - -
-~-
Not generated
A1
Generated
-~
F6
Non-usable
F7
2 calculated eRe bytes are
written.
F8-FB
Writing as data.
Used for writing data address
mark.
eRe is preset.
Marker C2 is written.
2-byte eRe
FF
2 calculated eRe bytes are
written.
F8-FB
e7
Writing as data.
Used for writing data address
mark.
eRe is preset.
Generated
e2
--
2-byte eRe
Not generated
F8-FB
Not generated
)
Fe
Index mark Fe is written.
Fe
07
Index mark Fe is written.
Fe
FA
Writing as data.
FO
FF
Writing as data.
FO
Not generated
~
--
Not generated
------~
FE
ID address mark is written.
eRe is preset.
FE
e7
10 address mark is written.
eRe is preset.
FE
Not generated
FF
Writing as data.
FF
FF
Writing as data.
FF
Not generated
Note: Hexadecimal notation is used throughout.
11.5
Type 4 Commands
This command generates the interrupt through detection of
conditions or generates the unconditional interrupt other
commands may be executed only it the M5W1791-02P is in
the standby condition (busy status bit is "a"), but the type 4
command may be executed at any time.
When a preceding command is being executed, it is suspended and operation is keyed to the flag bit of the type 4
command. Refer to Table 9.2 for the flag bits.
Interrupt request output INTRQ generated by the type 4
command is reset by reading the stauts register data or executing a command after the execution of the type 4 command with 10 -1 3 = "0"-
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
6-23
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
COMMAND STANDBY CONDITION
WARM START
RESET '0' - '1'
COLD START
STATUS CLEAR,
BUSY STATUS SET
NO
WHEN WRITE FAULT IS GENERATED
TYPE 4 COMMAND IS EXECUTED
AT ANY TIME EXCEPT
IN COMMAND STANDBY
NO
COMMAND
IS WRITTEN
NO
COMMAND
IS WRITTEN
STANDBY FOR NEW COMMAND
YES
6-24
'.MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
TYPE 1 COMMAND
II
Notel:
2:
The track register, sector register, data register and data shift
register are designated TR, SR, DR and DSR, respectively.
Information in parentheses indicates the contents of the registers.
"H" denotes hexadecimal notation.
The 15 ms delay is not applied when the test input TEST is "0".
15 ms is the delay time when clock input elK is 2MHz.
• MITSUBISHI
"'ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
TYPE 2 COMMAND
FROM WARM START
6-26
.JYllfSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
II
NO
• MITSUBISHI
~ELECTRIC
J' 1 SECTOR~
WRITE COMPLETE
6-27
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
. TYPE 3 COMMAND
FROM WARM START
6-28
.•.. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
READ TRACK COMMAND
READ ADDRESS COMMAND
DR-(DSR)
DTRQ-'1'
SR-TRACK
NUMBER
NO
•. MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
6-29
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
12. STATUS
The significance of the bits in the status register differs
according to the command. The bit 0 of the status register is
set during type 1, 2 and 3 commands to indicate the busy
status. When this bit is set, the other status bits may be reset or updated. When the type 4 command has been executed, the busy status bit is reset, but whether the remaining status bits are reset or not depends on whether the previous command is being performed or not when the type 4
command is issued. When M5W1791-02P is in standby, the
remaining status bits are reset or updates according to the
same status bit configuration as the type 1 command. When
the type 4 command has been issued during the execution
of the pervious command, the remaining status bits show the
status of the previous command.
Tables 12.1 and 12.2 show the significance of each status
bit.
Tabl 12.1
Status Composition
~t
Command
Bit 7
Type 1 command
Ni'
Read sector
Write sector
..
o.E
~~
'"'m
Co
~
!
Bit 6
Bit 5
' Bit 4
Not ready
Write protect
Head loaded
Not ready
a
Record type
Not ready
Write protect
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit
Seek error
CRC error
Track 00
Index
Busy
Record not found
CRC error
Lost data
Data request
Busy
Write fault
Record not found
CRC error
Lost data
Data request
Busy
0
Record not found
CRC error
Lost data
Data request
Busy
a
a
a
a
a
a
Lost data
Data request
Busy
a
Data request
Busy
Track 00
Index
a
Read track
Not ready
a
a
Write track
Not ready
write protect
Write fault
No preceding
Command
Not ready
Write protect
Head loaded
Preceding
command
Same as definition of status bit based on preceding command.
Read address Not ready
.,.
m
6-30
0
--
1
Co
~
a
Bit 3
• MI&tJBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
0
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Tabe 12.2
Command
c---.
Type 1
Status Register Contents
Status
bit
Status
Status Significance
7
Not ready
"1" denotes that the disk is not ready. This status is provided by the OR relationship
between the READY input inverted signal and the RESET input inverted signal.
6
Write protect
"1" denotes that the disk is in the write protect status. This status is the inverted signal
of the write protect input WPRT.
5
Head loaded
"1" denotes that the head has been loaded onto the disk and stabilized. This status is
provided by the AND relationship between the head load output HDLD and head load
timing input HDL T.
4
Seek error
"1" denotes that the verify opration was not successful. This status is reset at the beginning of the following command execution.
3
CRC error
"1" denotes that there is a CRC error in the ID field. This status is reset at the beginning of the next command execution. (Note 1 )
2
Track 00
-~
1
Index
"1" denotes that the head is on track 00. This status is the inverted signal of the track
00 input TROG.
"1" denotes that the index pulse input IP is active. This status is the inverted signal of
IP.
Type 2/
0
Busy
"1" denotes that the type 1 command is being executed. After the CPU has written the
command, a maximum of 24 clocks for single density and 12 clocks for double-denisty
are required for the busy status flag to be set.
7
Write protect
"1" denotes that the disk is not ready. This status is produced by the OR relationship
between the READY input inverted signal and the RESET input inverted signal.
6
Write protect
"1" denotes that the disk is in the write protect status. This status is the write protect
input WPRT inverted signal.
Record type
The record type is set during read. "1" denotes that the address mark of the data field
was the deleted data mark. "0" denotes that it was the data mark.
During write operations, "1" denotes that the command has been suspended by the
write fault iflput.
This status is reset when the next command execution begins (Note 1 )
Type 3
5
Write fault
Note 1
4
Record not found
"1" denotes that the deSignated ID has not been properly detected. This status is reset when the next command execution begins. (Note 1 )
3
CRC error
"1" denotes that a CRC error is detected in the ID field or data field.
This status is reset when the following command execution begins. (Note 1 )
2
Lost data
"1" denotes that lost data have arisen. This status is reset when the following command execution begins. (Note 1 )
1
Data request
0
Busy
"1" denotes that reading data from writing data to the data register is requested. This
status is the same as the data request output DTRQ.
-"1" denotes that the command is being executed. After the CPU system has written
the command, a maximum of 24 clocks for single-density and 12 clocks for doubledenistyare required until the busy status flag is set.
Refer to Table 12. 1 for details when the type 4 command is executed.
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
6-31
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
DISK FORMATTI~G
Disk formatting is performed by the write track command.
Formatting examples are giben below for both singledensity 128 bytes/sector based on the IBM 3740 format and
double-density 256 bytes/sector based on the IBM system
34 format.
13.
Table 13.1
Table 13.2
Disk IBM System 34 Format
Transfer byte
number
80
12
3
1
50
(Note 1)'12
Disk IBM 3740 Format
3
Transfer byte
number
40
6
1
26
(Note 1) ~ 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
6
1
128
1
27
(Note 2) 247
Note
2
6-32
Transfer data
(HEX)
--
FF
00
FC
FF
00
FE
00~4C
00 or 01
01~lA
00
F7
FF
00
FB
E5
F7
FF
FF
1
1
1
1
1
1
22
12
Significance of
transfer bytes
I
I
Gap 4
Sync pattern
index mark
Gap 1
Sync Pattern
10 address mark
Track number
Side number
Sector number
Data length
2-byte CRC write
Gap 2
Sync pattern
Data mark
Data
2-byte CRC write
Gap 3
Gap
3
1
256
1
54
(Note 2) 598
Note ·1
2
This sequence is repeated 26 times while the sector number
is updated. The formatting of one track is then completed.
This is the standard value which keeps sending the FF data
until the interrupt request output INTRQ is set.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
Transfer data
(HEX)
4E
00
F6
FC
4E
00
F5
FE
00~4C
00 or 01
01~lA
01
F7
4E
00
F5
FB
40
F7
4E
4E
Significance of
transfer bytes
Gap 4
Sync pattern
index mark
index mark
Gap 1
Sync Pattern
10 address mark
10 address mark
Track number
Side number
Sector number
Data length
2-by1e CRC write
Gap 2
Sync pattern
Data address mark
Data mark
Data
2-byte CRC write
Gap 3
Gap 4
This sequence is repeated 26 times while the sector number
is updated. The formatting of one track is then completed.
This is the standard value which keeps sending the 4E data
until the interrupt request output INTRQ is set.
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
14.
TRACK FORMAT
Track format is given in Fig. 14.
INDEXP~
10
GAP1
SYNC
PATTERN
DATA
LENGTH
CRC 2
BYTES
GAP2
E
1ST SECTOR 10 FIELD
GAP4
2ND SECTOR
DATA FIELD
~ 10 FIELD
Fig.
14
15.
TYPICAL EXTERNAL READ CLOCK
GENERATOR CIRCUIT
LAST SECTOR
GA P 3 -""'---.;..
Track format
A read clock must be applied from an external oscillator with
the M5W1791-02P. Described below is an example of an
external read clock generator circuit used for an 8-inch floppy disk and employing a PLL circuit.
The circuit itself is an analog PLL circuit containing a voltage-controlled oscilator (VCO) with a center frequency of
8M Hz. It is applicable to both single- and double-density
modes, and is composed of a phase comparator, filter and
VCO. Fig. 15.1 shows the phase coimparator and Fig. 15.2
shows the filter and VCO.
In Fig. 15.1 the phase of the raw data read from the floppy disk is compared with the phase fo the signal produced
by dividing the VCO CLOCK. If, as a result, the phases do
not match, the VCO frequency is tracked by the UP or
DOWN signal. When VFOE is not active, the reference clock
is input.
The filter in Fig. 15.2 acquires the required frequency
gain characteristics by means of the NF loop RC elements.
C, is for tracking the VCO with respect to the relatively low
frequency fluctuations in the form of flutter during floppy disk
rotation, etc. In contrast, C 2 is for reducing the VCO gain in
the event for relatively high frequency fiuctuatiions.
A 74S124 is required for the VCO TTL, since the
74LS124 is not sufficient as the 8MHz voltage-controlled
oscillation. R" R2 and R3 determine the gain. R, and R2 are
resistances from 500 ohms to 3.3 kohms. R3 has a resistance
from 2.2 to 4.7 kohms.
C 3 has a capacitance of 47pF for generating an 8MHz
frequency when VR is set to its center position and the
CO NT input is made 1/2Vee , R4 is for setting the operating
pOint of TR, and it is provided with a resistance of 50 kohms
to 1 Mohm.
Care should be taken with parts layout and writing of the
VCO circuit, especially for the power supply and ground line
of the 74S124. Vee instability causes a marked deterioration
in PLL response.
In the above example there is no filter or gain switching
by read gate output RG.
Note: The circuit in the example given above has low sensitivity to elements value, and works stably. However,
the actual circuit used should be determined with regard to the whole system, including the floppy disk
system.
C, has a capacitance of 0.047/1 F to 0.3/1 F while C2 has a
value of 0.0011' F to 0.00331' F.
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
6-33
II
C"l
I
w
.j>.
I~.....
~
."
~
III
III
(D
()
3 Xl/2 M74LS74AP
0
3
"0
III
a
g
REFERENCE CLOCK (0.5MHz)
FROM CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
M74LS37P
~UP
,.
r'I~
r-_
T-
READ DATA
R
FROM FLOPPY DISK
WG
FROM
M5W1791-02P
II
WFIVFOE
1 !-IS FOR
SINGLE DENSITY
1/2 M74LS123
FROM M5W1791-02P
r'I-I
(')(1)
-Ie
RECORDING DENSITY CONTROL
nCi5
FROM CPU
SYSTEM
TO M5W1791-02P
::111m
=
DDEN
T
DOWN
R
."
r
o
1/2 M7 4LS7 4AP
"a
"a
M74LS191P
D
QD
C
QC
!2
(I)
B
A
RCLK
=-:
TO M5W1791-02P
."
o
200ns
::III
LOAD
i:
E
VCO CLOCK (SMHz)
T
U/D
~
'------~c1A
ole>
1/2 M74LS123P
RAW READ
TO M5W1791-02P
,..
-I
I:
UI
~
:e!
...-1
Z
U)
(')
o
......
(I)
-I
::III
...
(I)
r
r
rrI
ON r
... (I)
::III
"iii
o
i-
I:Z:
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
FROM REGULATED 5V POWER SUPPLY
C, O.0022,uF
74S124
1kO
C, O. 1,uF
4700
R,
100,uH
R, 3. 3kO
D,
C,
UP ---AJVIr----K.t--,
47pF
8200
R,
DOWN
VCO CLOCK
--"'Wv----j~-.......-+_--"vVv--4
8 MHz
TR2
D, -
D
TR,. TR,
Fig.
15.2
Filter and
: lS1588
: 2SC710
veo
16. TYPICAL WRITE PRECOMPENSATION
CIRCUIT
Fig. 16 gives an example of a write precompensation circuit.
The amount of compensation must be set to a value which
regulated for the floppy disk system. Clock generator
74S124, for the VCO of the external read clock generator
cirucit in Section 15, has 2-channel VCO's so the extra one
can be used also. In this case, the write data pulse width of
the M74LS153 in Fig. 16 is determined by the clock and if
required, it should be converted to the write data pulse
width demanded by the floppy disk system using a one-shot
multi-vibrator, etc.
CLOCK FOR WRITE PRECOMPENSATION
M74LS74AP, ETC.
a.
'"
<;>
0;
....
~
'"::;:
::;:
0
cr
LL
EARLY
OUTPUT
EARLY
(WRITE
PRECOMPENSATION
PROHIBIT SIGNAL)
D,
D,
D,
Do
B
A
LATE OUTPUT
WRITE DATA
OUTPUTWD
Y
WRITE DATA OUTPUT
S
M74LS153P
Fig.
16
Write precompensation circuit
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
6-35
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
17.
EXAMPLE OF A WRITE GATE
OUTPUT AND WRITE FAULTNFO
ENABLE CIRCUIT
The WFNFOE serves as the write fault input or VFO enable
output. dependin'g on the WG output.
FROM WG OUTPUT
} : > - - - - - - VFOE OUTPUT
FROM M5W1791-02P
1 - - - - - WRITE FAULT INPUT
FROM FLOPPY DISK SYSTEM
·OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT
Fig.
17
Write faultlVFOE control circuit
18.
AN EXAMPLE OF THE HEAD
LOAD OUTPU AND HEAD LOAD
TIMING CIRCUIT
The head load timing input is made available after the settling time has elapsed from the head load output.
FROM HOLD OUTPUT
TO HLDT INPUT
6-36
HOLD OUTPUT
'. MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
19
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
19.1
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply voltage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation
Topr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
Conditions
------
-
-- - - - - - - - - - -
Limits
Unit
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
~
With respect to Vss
Ta~25'C
-0.5-7
V
350
mW
0-70
'c
'c
-65-150
19.2 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
(T a =O-70'C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Parameter
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage
V'H
High-level input voltage
V'L
LOW-level input voltage
19.3
Nom
Max
5
5.25
4.75
0
V
2
V
Vss -Q,5
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
0.8
V
(T a =O-70'C, Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Test condition
Parameter
Unit
Min
V OH
High-level output voltage
IOH=-200"A
VOL
Low-level output voltage
10L=1. 8mA
lee
Supply current
Typ
Max
2.4
V
0.4
V
70
mA
Input current.(HDLT, TEST, WFIVFOE, WPRT,
I,
V,=Vcc-OV
-100
10
J-IA
Input current other inputs
VI=VCC ....... OV
-10
10
J-IA
Off-state output current
V,~Vcc-OV
-10
10
J-IA
DDEN)
--
loz
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
6-37
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1791-02P
FLOPP DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
19.4 TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(Ta =O-70·C, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=OV, unlese otherwise noted)
Alternativ~
Symbol
Limits
Parameter
Test conditions
symbol
lSU(A-R)
Unit
Min
Typ
Max
Address setup time before read and chip select
TSET
50
ns
Address hold time after read and chip select
THLD
10
ns
280
ns
50
ns
10
ns
200
250
20
100
1600
800
800
1600
40
40
40
450
150
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tSU(CS-R)
th(R_A)
th(R_CS)
tW(R)
Read pulse width
TRE
Address setup time before write and chip select
TSET
th(W-A)
th(w-cs)
Address hold time after write and chip select
THLD
tW(w)
Write pulse width
tSU(OQ-w)
Data setup time before write
thew-DO)
Data hold time after ",rite
tW(RR)
Raw read pulse width
tC(RR)
Raw read cycle time
lSUCA-w)
C,=50pF
tSU(cs-W)
tW(RCLK)
Read clock high-level width
Read clock low-level width
tC{RCLK)
Read clock cycle time
th(RCLK_RR)
Read clock hold time before raw read
TWE
TDS
TDH
T pw
Tbc
Ta
Tb
Tc
TX1
th(RR_RCLK)
Read clock hold time after raw read
TX2
tW(wo)
Write data pulse width
Twp
Tbc
TCD,
TCD2
TMR
TIP
TWF
tW(RCLK)
tC(wo)
Write data cycle time
tW(. )
tW(. )
Clock high-level pulse width
Clock low-level pulse width
tW(RESET)
Reset pulse width
tW(IP)
Index pulse width
tW(WF)
Write fault pulse width
19.5 SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Notel. 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 4)
FM
MFM
FM
MFM
230
200
50
10
10
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
Test conditidns
Parameter
tPlH(WG-WO)
tPlH(E-WD)
Propagation time from early or late to write data
Ts
MFM (Note 5)
125
Propagation time from write data to early or late
Th
MFM (Note 5)
125
tPHUWD-l)
tPHUWD-WG)
Propagation time from write data to write gate
Twt
tPZV{R_DQ)
Output enable time after read
tPVZ(R_DQ)
Output disable time after read
tPHUR-DRO)
Propagation time from read to DRO
tpHu R-INTRO)
Propagation time from read to INTRQ
tPHUW-DRQ)
Propagation time from write to DRO
TDACC
TDOH
TDRR(RD)
TIRR(RD)
TDRR(WR)
TIRR(WR)
TSTP
TDIR
tPHL(W-INTRO)
Propagation time from write to INTRQ
tW(STP)
Step pulse width
tPlH(DIR-STP)
Propagation time from direction to step
tV(WD-ClK)
Write data valid time before clock
TWdl
tV(ClK-WD)
Write data valid time after clock
TWd2
Note 1
2
3
4
5
6-38
---_.Min
FM (Note 5)
MFM (Note 5)
tPlH(l-WO)
tPHUWD-E)
symbol
Twg
Propagation time from write gate to write data
500
200
2,3,4
250
250
550
250
ILS
20000
20000
ns
ns
ILS
ILS
ILS
(T a=O-70·C , Vcc=5V±5% , Vss=ov, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
250
2000
FM (Note 5)
MFM (Note 5)
C,-50pF
C,-50pF
MFM
MFM
MFM
MFM
Typ
Unit
Max
2
1
ILS
ILS
ns
ns
2
1
50
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
CLK=lMHz
CLK=2MHz
CLK=1 MHz
CLK=2MHz
Limrts
2or4
12
200
30
50
50
250
150
250
500
250
500
ILS
ILS
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ILS
ILS
ns
ns
ns
ns
The pulse of RAW READ may be any Width If pulse IS entirely wlthm RCLK. When the pulse occurs m the RCLK Window, RAW READ pulse
width must be less than 300 ns for MFM mode and 600 ns for FM mode at CLK=2MHz. Times double for 1MHz.
100 ns pulse width is recommended for the RAW READ pulse in 8 MFM mode.
RAW READ cycle time TC(AA) and WD cycle time TC'DfATE
TG 43 TG43 OUTPUT
HDLD
~D~~dTOAD
27 ~
26 ~
RCLK FNift?T CLOCK
25 -
RG READ GATE OUTPUT
RAW READ
l~p~lEAD
oO~~at EARLY~ 17
LATE ~ 18
~~~Ot RESET -19
ouMJIf
(Ov)v ss
0
--...----~
NC: NO CONNECTION
Outline 40P4
systems. The hardware of the M5W1793-02P consists of a
floppy disk interface, a CPU interface and a PLA control
logic. The total chip can be programmed by eleven 8-bit
commands. The floppy disk interface portion performs the
communication with the floppy disk drive under control of
the PLA control logic. The CPU interface portion has five
registers - command, data, status, track and sector register
- and communicates with the CPU through the data bus.
These functions are also controlled by the PLA.
BIDIRECTIONAL
DAT~ BUS
D, D,DsD,D3D,DIDo
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
WRITE CONTROL INPUT WR
CHIP SELECT INPUT C§
READ CONTROL INPUT lii5
REGISTER SELECT{Ao
INPUT A,
2
3
4
5
6
""--"o--{'36 WPRT
WRITE PROTECT INPUT
INDEX PULSE INPUT
TRACK 00 INPUT
r===t=~~~~==~3 READY READY INPUT
II
23 HDLT HEAD LOAD TIMING
INPUT
TG43 OUTPUT
HEAD LOAD OUTPUT
DIRECTION OUTPUT
STEP OUTPUT
'--t-t--'+'t-~
jj5
'i'ROO
EARLY OUTPUT EARLY Q;17H!~rrn
LATE OUTPUT LATE 18
WRITE GATE OUTPUT WG 3
WRITE DATA OUTPUT WD 31
RAW
R~~6' I~~~~
TEST INPUT
27
RCLK
READ CLOCK INPUT
CLK
CLOCK INPUT
DDEN
DOUBLE DENSITY MODE()3:1}-----<>-----------~
SELECT INPUT
33
RG
WFIVFOE
RESET
READ GATE ~~ITM~gLT RESET INPUT
OUTPUT ENABLE OUTPUT
6-40
6MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
INTERRUPT REQUEST
OUTPUT
DATA REQUEST OUTPUT
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
7.
PIN DESCRIPTION
Pin
NC
-
WR
Name
NC(pin 1) is not internally connected
connection
Write control
input
CS
Chip select input
Read control
input
Functions
output
No internal
-
RD
Input or
Input
Write signal from a master CPU (Active lOw).
Inpul
Chip select (Active lowl.
Input
Read signal from a master CPU (Active low).
Register select inputs. These inputs select the register under the control of the RD and
Ao. A,
Do~D7
Register select
input
Bidirectional
data bus
Input
-
RD
WR.
-
WR
A,
Ao
0
0
STATUS REGISTER
COMMAND REGISTER
0
1
TRACK REGISTER
TRACK REG ISTER
1
1
0
SECTOR REGISTER
SECTOR REGISTER
1
DATA REGISTER
DATA REGISTER
InlOut
Three-state, non-inverted bidirectional data bus.
Step pulse output (Active high).
STEP
Step output
Output
DIRC
Direction output
Output
Direction output. High level means the head is stepping in and low level means the head is stepping out.
EARLY
Early output
Output
This signal is used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted earty.
lATE
Late output
Output
This signal is also used for write precompensation. It indicates that the write data pulse should be shifted
late.
Reset input (Active low). The device is reset by this signal and automaticaily loads "03" (hexadecimal) into
--RESET
Reset input
Input
the command register. The not-ready-status bit is also reset by this signal. When reset input is made to be
high, the device executes restore command even unless READY is active and the device loads "01"
(hexadecimal) to the sector register.
"-
-TEST
HDlT
Test input
Head load timing
input
Input
Input
ClK
Clock input
RG
Read gate output
Output
RClK
Read clock input
Input
---
Raw read input
Input
HDlD
Head load output
RAW
READ
Input
Output
This input is only used for test purposes, so user must tie it to Vce or leave it open unless using voice call
actuated motors.
When the device finds high level on this input, the device assumes that the head is engaged on the media.
Active high.
Clock input to generate internal timing. 2MHz for 8-inch drives, 1MHz for mini drives.
This signal shows the external data separator that the syncfield is detected.
This signal is internally used for the data window, Phasing relation to raw read data is specified but polarity
(RCLK high or low) Is not important.
This input signal from the drive shall be low for each recorded flux transition.
This output signal controls the loading of the head of the drive. The head must be loaded on the media by
this high-level output.
• MITSUBISHI
..... ELECTRIC
6-41
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Name
Pin
Input or
Functions
output
TG43
TG 43 output
Output
WG
Write gate output
Output
WD
Write data output
Output
This output is valid only during disk read/write operation and it shows the position of the head. High level
on this output indicates that head is posmoned between track 44 to 76.
This signal becomes active before disk write operations are to occur.
This signal consists of data bits and clock bits. It becomes active for every flux transition. Active high.
This signal shows the device the drive is ready. In the disk read/write operation except for TYPE 1 com-
READY
Ready input
Input
mand operation, low level input terminates current operation and the device generates the INTRQ. In the
TYPE 1 command operation, this signal is neglected. Not ready bit in the status register is the inverted form
of this input.
This is a bidirectional signal. It becomes write fault input when WG is active. In the disk write operation,
---
WFIVFOE
Write fault input!
VFO enable
InlOut
low level signal on this input terminates the write operation and makes INTRQ active. This signal also
appears in the status register as the write fault bit. When WG is inactive, this signal works as VFO enable
--
output. VFOE output is also an open drain type, so pull it up to Vee and never input active write fault signal
output
write WG is inactive.
TROO
Track 00 input
Input
This signal indicates that the head is located on the track 00 to the device. Active low.
IP
Index pulse input
Input
This input indicates to the device that an index hole of the diskette has been encountered.
--WPRT
Write protect
Input
write operations, this signal is sampled and an active low signal will terminate the current command and
--DDEN
Double density
DTRQ
INTRQ
NG
6-42
input
mode select input
Data request
output
Interrupt request
output
No internal
connection
Low level signal on this input informs the device that the drive is in the write protected state. Before disk
set INTRQ. The write protect status bit in the status register is also set.
Input
This input determines the device operation mode. When DDEN=O, double density mode is selected. When
DDEN=l, single density mode is selected.
DTRQ is an open drain output, so pull up to Vee by the 10k resistor. In the disk read mode, DTRQ indicates
Output
that data is assembled in the data register. In the disk write mode, it indicates that the data register is
empty. DTRQ is reset by the read data or write data operation.
Output
INTRQ is also a open drain output, so pull up to Vec by the 10k resistor. INTRQ becomes active at the
completion of any command and is reset when the CPU reads the status or writes the command.
NC (pin 40) is not internally connected.
• MITSUBISHI
;"ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
M5W1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
8.
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
There are 11 different commands. By setting CS to "0" ,Ao to
"0" and A, to "0", the commands are written into the
M5W1793-02P from the data bus at the rising edge of the
Table 8.1
WR signal.
The commands are classified into four Types
Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4.
type 1,
List of Commands
Command type
Type 1 commands
Command
MSB
Restore command
a
Seek cc;>mmand
0
Step command
a
a
h
V
f,
fO
0
1
h
V
f,
fo
0
1
u
h
V
f,
fa
Slep-in command
0
1
0
u
h
V
f,
fa
Step-out command
0
1
1
u
h
V
f,
fo
Read sector command
1
a
a
m
S
E
C
0
Write sector command
1
0
1
m
S
E
C
ao
a
a
0
E
a
0
E
0
Type 2 commands
Type 3 commands
Type 4 commands
LSB
Code
a
a
a
Read address command
1
1
0
Read track command
1
1
1
Write track command
1
1
1
1
a
E
0
a
a
a
Force interrupt command
1
1
0
1
13
12
I,
10
Nole 1: The M5W1793-02P fealufes posilive logic dala bus and so the codes afe wfitten inlo Ihe M5W1793-02P without modificalion.
Each command has a flag option. Refer to these options in
Table. 8.2.
II
•
MITSUBISHI
.
~ELECTRIC
6-43
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
Table 8.2
Flag Options
Flag
Description
When h =1: The head is loaded at the beginning of the command execution.
h : Head load flag
When h =0: The head is loaded when the verify operation starts if the V flag is "1". It is not loaded
if the V flag is "0".
When V =1: The contents of the track register are compared with the 10 track address after head
V : Verify flag
Type 1
positioning. The seek error status bit is set if the desired track address is not found by the time
the diskette has gone through 6 rotations.
When V =0: The track verification is not performed.
commands
n. fO : Stepping rate flag
The stepping rate is determined by the value of these 2 bits as well as by the elK frequency and
TEST input pin.
When u = 1: The track register is updated with each step pulse: It is incremented (or
u : Update flag
decremented) by 1 for each step-in (or step-out) pulse.
When u =0: Track register is not updated.
When E =1: Sampling of the head load timing input starts with the 15ms delay after the head load
output has been set to "1". An advance is made to the next step when HOLO'HLDT = "1" is
Type 2/Type3
Commands
E : ISms delay flag(at 2M Hz clock)
established.
When E =0: Sampling of the head load timing input starts immediately after the head load output
has been set to "1 ". An advance is made to the next step when HOLD' HLOT = "1" is estaplished.
The "next step" is the TG43 output update.
When m =,: Multi-sector read/write is performed. Upon completion of one sector read/write, the
sector register value is incremented by 1, the next sector is sought and read/write is performed
m : Multi-sector read/write flag
again. Upon completion of the final sector read/write operation, the next sector is not found even
when sought and so at the sixth rotation of the diskette the RNF error bit is set and the operation
is concluded. This command can also be concluded with the Type 4 cOFDmand.
When m =0: Read/write for single sector is performed.
When S =1: "1" is compared with the 10 side number when the C flag is ",".
Type 2
commands
S : Side select flag
When S =0: "0" is compared with the ID side number when the C flag is ",".
No comparison is performed when C =0.
C : Side compare flag
When C =1: The S flag and ID side number are compared.
When C =0: The 10 side number is not compared.
When ao= 1: The deleted data mark "FB" (hexadecimal) is written into the data field address
ao : Data address mark flag
mark.
When ao =0: The data mark "FB" (hexadecimal)·is written into the data field address mark.
When 10 =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input rising edge.
When 1, =1: The interrupt request output is set to "H" at the ready input falling edge.
When 1, =1: The interrupt request output is set to "B" with the index pulse input.
Type 4
command
I : Interrupt condition flag
When 13 =1: The command being executed is terminated and the interrupt request output is set to
"H" immediately.
When 10 = h = 12 = 13 =0: No interrupt request is generated but the command being executed is
terminated. This command is executed so that the interrupt request output, which has been set by
the Type 4 command, is reset by the following command write or status read.
6-44
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
9.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
9.1
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Symbol
Parameter
Vee
Supply vollage
V,
Input voltage
Va
Output voltage
Pd
Power dissipation
T opr
Operating free-air temperature range
Tstg
Storage temperature range
9.2
limits
Unit
-0.5-7
V
-0.5-7
V
Conditions
With respect to Vss
-0.5-7
V
350
mW
0-70
·C
-65-150
·C
Ta=25·C
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS
--
(T a=0-70·C. unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Unit
Min
Vee
Supply voltage
Vss
Supply voltage
V ,H
High-level input voltage
V ,L
Low-level input voltage
9.3
Nom
Max
5
5.25
4.75
0
V
2
V
Vss -O.5
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V
0.8
V
(T a =O-70·C, Vcc =5V±5%, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Unit
Test condition
Parameter
Min
V OH
High-level output voltage
IOH=-200I'A
VOL
Low-level output voltage
IOL=1.8mA
lee
Supply current
Typ
Max
2.4
V
0.4
V
70
mA
Input current,(HDLT. TEST. WFIVFOE, WPRT,
I,
loz
V,=VCC- OV
-100
10
IJ-A
Input current other inputs
VI=VCC--'- OV
-10
10
IJ-A
Off-state output current
VI=VCC--" OV
-10
10
IJ-A
DDEN)
--
• MITSUBISHI
...... ELECTRIC
6-45
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
9.4 TIMING REQUIREMENTS
(T a =0-70·C, Vcc=5V±5%, Vss=OV, unlese otherwise noted)
limits
Alternative
Symbol
Parameter
tSU(A_R)
Unit
Test conditions
symbol
Min
Typ
Max
Address setup time before read and chip select
TSET
50
ns
Address hold time after read and chip select
THLD
10
ns
280
ns
50
ns
10
ns
200
250
20
100
1600
800
800
1600
40
40
40
450
150
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
/-is
ns
ns
tSU(CS-R)
thCR_A)
thcR-cs)
Read pulse width
TRE
Address setup time before write and chip select
TSET
Address hold time after write and chip select
THLD
tw(w)
Write pulse width
tSU{OQ_w)
Data setup time before write
th(W-DQ)
Data hold time after write
tW(RRl
Raw read pulse width
tC(RR)
Raw read cycle time
tW(RCLK)
Read clock high-level width
tW(RCLK)
Read clock low-level width
tC(RCLK)
Read clock cycle time
th(RClK_RR)
Read clock hold time before raw read
TWE
TDS
TDH
T pw
Tbc
Ta
Tb
Te
TX1
th(RR-RCLK)
Read clock hold time after raw read
Txz
tW(wo)
Write data pulse width
Twp
tecWD)
twc. )
t w (' )
Write data cycle time
Tbe
TCD ,
TCDz
TMR
TIP
TWF
tW(R)
tSU(A-W)
CL =50pF
tSU(cs-w)
thCW_A)
thcw-cs)
Clock high-level pulse width
Clock low-level pulse width
tW(RESETl Reset pulse width
Index pulse width
tW(IP)
Write fault pulse width
tW(WF)
9.5 SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS
(Notel. 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 4)
FM
MFM
FM
MFM
230
200
50
10
10
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
tPLH(E_WD)
tPHL(WD_E)
Twg
FM (Note 5)
MFM (Note 5)
Propagation time from early or late to write data
Ts
MFM (Note 5)
125
Propagation time from write data to early or late
Th
MFM (Note 5)
125
tPHL(WD-WG)
Propagation time from write data to write gate
Twt
tPZV(R-DOJ
Output enable time after read
tPVZ(R-DO)
Output disable time after read
tPHUW-INTRQ)
Propagation time from write to INTRQ
tW(STP)
Step pulse width
tPLH(DIR_STP}
Propagation time from direction to step
TDACC
TDOH
TDRR(RD)
TIRR(RD)
TDRR(WR)
TIRR(WR)
TSTP
TDIR
tV(WD_CLK)
Write data valid time before clock
TWd1
tV(CLK.WDJ
Write data valid time after clock
Twdz
tPHUR-DRQ)
Propagation time from read to ORO
tPHL(R_INTRO)
Propagation time from read to INTRQ
tPHUW_DRO)
Propagation time from write to ORO
Note 1
2
3
4
5
6-46
/-is
/-is
/-is
Unit
Min
Propagation time from write gate to write data
tPHUWD-Ll
20000
20000
Test conditidns
symbol
tPLH(L_WD)
550
250
Umrts
Parameter
tPLH(WG.WD)
500
200
2,3,4
250
250
(Ta =0-70·C, Vcc =5V±5%, Vss=OV, unless otherwise noted)
Alternative
Symbol
250
2000
FM (Note 5)
MFM (Note 5)
CL =50pF
CL =50pF
MFM
MFM
MFM
MFM
Max
2
1
/-is
/-is
ns
ns
2
1
50
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
(Note 5)
CLK=l MHz
CLK=2MHz
CLK-l MHz
CLK-2MHz
Typ
20r4
12
200
30
50
50
250
150
250
500
250
500
/-is
/-is
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
/-is
/-is
ns
ns
ns
ns
The pulse of RAW READ may be any Width If pulse IS entirely within RCLK. When the pulse occurs In the RCLK Window, RAW READ pulse
width must be less than 300 ns for MFM mode and 600 ns for FM mode at CLK=2MHz. Times double for 1MHz.
100 ns pulse width is recommended for the RAW READ pulse in 8 MFM mode.
RAW READ cycle time T CCRR) and WD cycle time TCCWD) is normally 2/-is in MFM and 4/-is in FM. Times double when CLK=l MHz.
The polarity of RCLK during RAW READ is not important.
Times double when CLK=lMHz.
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
MITSUBISHI LSls
MSW1793-02P
FLOPPY DISK FORMATTER/CONTROLLER
9.6 TIMING DIAGRAM
Read
Write
-16 OR 32;lS
-16 OR 32;lS
OTRQ
OTRQ
INTRQ
INTRQ
Ao, A"
Ao, 1. CS
CS
PO-;-;~~UT) ---------
DO-07
(INPUT)
Nole 6:
7:
maximum value, FM: 27. 5;lS, MFM: 13. 5;lS
maximum value; FM: 23. 5;lS, MFM: 11. 5;lS
Write data
Input data
e
J::
te(RRl
~tt:;;;;;;--;~===:;['J
IW(RCLK)
.J1
th(RCLK-AR)
__
l\.....J
RAW READ
RCLK
ISERvleE(RD)
ISERVICE(WR)
~
It
le(RcLK)
I
WIRCLK
)
-(
"--
th(RR-ACLKJ
tPLH(E-WO)
tpHUWD-EJ
II
1 L
-1 1 t'---tpLH(l-WOJ
tpHUWD-Ll
CLK~
wo
tV(WD-CLKl tV(CLK-WOJ
Others
10. OTHERS
Refer to the description of M5W1791-02P for further information,
• MITSUBISHI
"ELECTRIC
6-47
CONTACT ADDRESSES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
FRANCE
Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH
65 Avenue de Colmar Tour Albert 1er
F-92507 Rueil Malmaison Cedex,
France
Telex:
202267 (MELCAM F)
Telephone: (01) 7329234
Facsimile:
(01) 7080405
JAPAN
Electronics Marketing Division
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
2-3, Marunouchi 2-chome
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100, Japan
Telex:
24532 MELCO J
Telephone: (03) 218-3473
(03) 218-3499
Facsimile: (03) 214-5570
U.S.A.
NORTHWEST
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
1050 East Arques Ave.
Sunnyvale, Ca 94086, U.S.A.
Telex:
172296 MELA SUVL
Twx:
910-339-9549
Telephone: (408) 730-5900
Facsimile: (408) 730-4972
Overseas Marketing Manager
Kita-Itami Works
4-1, Mizuhara, Itami-shi,
Hyogo-ken 664, Japan
Telex:
526408 KMELCO J
Telephone: (0727) 82-5131
Facsimile: (0727) 72-2329
SOUTHWEST
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
991 Knox St.
Torrance, CA 90502, U.S.A.
Telex:
664787 MELA TRNC
Telephone: (213) 515-3993
Facsimile: (213) 324-6578
HONG KONG
Ryoden Electric Engineering Co., Ltd.
22nd fl., Leighton Centre
77, Leighton Road
Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
Telex:
73411 RYODEN HX
Telephone: (5) 7907021
Facsimile: (852) 123-4344
SOUTH CENTRAL
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
2105 Luna Road, Suite 320
Canollton, TX 75006, U.S.A.
Telephone: (214) 484-1919
Facsimile: (214) 243-0207
SWEDEN
Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH
Lastbilsvagen 6B
5-19149 Sollentuna, Sweden
Telex:
10877 (meab S)
Telephone: (08) 960468
Facsimile: (08) 966877
NORTHERN
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
15612 HWY 7 #243
Minnetonka, MN 55345, U.S.A.
Telex:
291115 MELA MTKA
Telephone: (612) 938-7779
Facsimile: (612) 938-5125
WEST GERMANY
Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH
Head Quater Gothear Str. 6
4030 Ratingen 1, West Germany
Telex:
8585070 MED'D
Telephone: (02102) 4860
Facsimile: (02102) 486-115
NORTH CENTRAL
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
799 North Bierman Circle,
Mt. Prospect, IL 60056, U.S.A.
Telex:
270636 MESA CHIMPCT
Telephone: (312) 298-9223
Facsimile: (312) 298-0567
U.K.
Mitsubishi Electric (U.K.) Ltd.
Centre Point, (18th Floor)
103 New Oxford st.,
London WC1, England, U.K.
Telex:
296195 MELCO G
Telephone: (01) 379-7160
Facsimile: (01) 836-0699
TAIWAN
MELCO TAIWAN Co., Ltd.
6th fl., Chung-Ling Bldg.,
363, Sec. 2, Fu-Hsing S. Road
Taipei, R.O.C.
Telephone: (704) 0247
Facsimile: (704) 4244
NORTHEAST
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
200 Unicorn Park Drive
Woburn, MA 01801, U.S.A.
Telex:
951796 MELA WOBN
Twx:
710-348-1229
Telephone: (617) 938-1220
Facsimile: (617) 938-1075
MID-ATLANTIC
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
Two University Plaza
Hackensack, NJ 07601, U.S.A.
Telex:
132205 MELA HAKI
Twx:
710-991-0080
Telephone: (201) 488-1001
Facsimile: (201) 488-0059
SOUTH-ATLANTIC
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
6575 The Carners Parkway.
Suite 100
Norcross, GA 30092, U.S.A.
Twx:
910-380-9555
Telephone: (404) 662-0813
Facsimile: (404) 662-5208
SOUTHEAST
Mitsubishi Electronics America, Inc.
Town Ex. CTR. 6100 Glades Rd. # 210
Boca Raton, FL 33433, U.S.A.
Twx:
510-953-7608
Telephone: (305) 487-7747
Facsimile: (305) 487-2046
• MITSUBISHI
.... ELECTRIC
ITALY
Mitsubishi Electric Europe GmbH
Centro Direzionale Colleoni
Palazzo Cassiopea 1
20041 Agrate Brianza I-Milano
Telephone: (039) 636011
Facsimile: (039) 6360120
AUSTRALIA
Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd.
73-75, Epping Road, North Ryde,
N.S.W. 2113 Australia
P.O. Box 1567 Macquarie Centre
N.S. W. 2113 Australia
Telex:
MESYD AA 26614
Telephone: (02) 888-5777
Facsimile: (02) 887-3635
MITSUBISHI DATA BOOK MICROPROCESSORS
AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS
July, First Edition 1985
Editioned by
Committee of editing of Mitsubishi Semiconductor Data Book
Published by
Mitsubishi Electric Corp., Semiconductor Division
This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission of
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
MITSUBISHI SEMICONDUCTORS
MICROPROCESSORS AND PERIPHERAL CIRCUITS 1985
~MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFF IC E M ITSU BI5HI DENKI BLDG
H-C5267 -C KI-8509 Printed in Japan (ROD)
MA RUNOUC HI. TOKYO 100 TE LEX J2453 2 CA BLE M ELCO TOKYO
Revised publication , effective Sept. 1985 .
superseding public ation H-C5267-B of Ju l. 1985 .
Spec ific ation s subj ect to change without noti ce.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2017:08:15 13:41:42-08:00 Modify Date : 2017:08:15 14:28:13-07:00 Metadata Date : 2017:08:15 14:28:13-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:8b2ed498-c4cc-0344-a71a-f5ae65536a1a Instance ID : uuid:edf53f07-e068-bc45-aaaa-471e89189d3e Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 344EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools